Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC 5 Basic Structure of the Function 2
Distance Protection, Line
Differential Protection,
System Functions 3
and Breaker Management Applications 4
for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Trip-
Function-Group Types 5
ping
7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87,
Protection and Automation Functions 6
7VK87 Control Functions 7
Supervision Functions 8
9
V9.50 and higher Measured Values, Energy Values, and
Supervision of the Primary System
Glossary
Index
C53000-G5040-C011-L
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Target Audience
Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and
maintenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical
installations and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dw_product-overview_SIP5_device-manual, 5, en_US]
• Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The printed
manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 3
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Preface
• Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5
device family.
• Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
• Security manual
The Security manual describes the security features of the SIPROTEC 5 devices and DIGSI 5.
• Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
• Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the
Engineering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update
the functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
• SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Commun-
ities on harmonization of the laws of the Member States concerning electromag-
netic compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU), restriction on usage of hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU), and
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Directive
in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive), the standard
EN IEC 63000 (for RoHS directive), and with the product standard EN 60255-27 (for
Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German
standard VDE 0435.
Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
4 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Preface
Additional Support
For questions about the system, contact your Siemens sales partner.
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD Phone: +49 911 9582 7100
Humboldtstraße 59 E-mail: poweracademy@siemens.com
90459 Nuremberg Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Germany
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well
as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 5
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Preface
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given attention.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
6 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Preface
OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in OpenSSL Toolkit (http://
www.openssl.org/).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 7
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
8 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................47
1.1 General.............................................................................................................................48
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 49
3 System Functions....................................................................................................................................... 69
3.1 Indications........................................................................................................................ 70
3.1.1 General....................................................................................................................... 70
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel..................................................... 70
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 72
3.1.4 Displaying Indications.................................................................................................. 73
3.1.5 Logs............................................................................................................................ 76
3.1.5.1 General..................................................................................................................76
3.1.5.2 Operational Log..................................................................................................... 77
3.1.5.3 Fault Log................................................................................................................79
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log................................................................................................... 80
3.1.5.5 Setting-History Log.................................................................................................82
3.1.5.6 User Log................................................................................................................ 84
3.1.5.7 Security Log........................................................................................................... 85
3.1.5.8 Device-Diagnosis Log............................................................................................. 86
3.1.5.9 Communication Log............................................................................................... 87
3.1.5.10 Communication-Supervision Log............................................................................ 89
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs....................................................................................... 90
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5....................................................................92
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel...........................................93
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device.................................................................94
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group ..................................................... 95
3.1.11 Application Mode/Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Auto-
mation Technology......................................................................................................96
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ............................................................................................. 97
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups...........................................99
3.3.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................99
3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking...................................................................................... 99
3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups........................................................................................102
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 9
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
10 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 11
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
4 Applications.............................................................................................................................................. 277
4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ 278
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87........................................ 279
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87........................................ 284
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87.........................................288
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87........................................ 292
12 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 13
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
14 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 15
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
16 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 17
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
18 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 19
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
20 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 21
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
22 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 23
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
24 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 25
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
26 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 27
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
28 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 29
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
30 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 31
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
32 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 33
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
34 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 35
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
36 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 37
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
38 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System........................................... 1895
9.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................. 1896
9.2 Structure of the Function.............................................................................................. 1897
9.3 Operational Measured Values........................................................................................ 1899
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components..................................................................1901
9.5 Average Values............................................................................................................. 1902
9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values................................................................... 1902
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values.................................................... 1902
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values...........................................................................................1905
9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values.................................................1905
9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values.................................. 1906
9.7 Energy Values............................................................................................................... 1907
9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values..................................................................... 1907
9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values...................................................... 1908
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values........................................................................................ 1910
9.8.1 Function Description of Pulse-Metered Values.......................................................... 1910
9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values........................................... 1911
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System......................................................................... 1914
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)...................................................................................1915
9.10.1 Overview of Functions............................................................................................. 1915
9.10.2 Structure of the Function Group.............................................................................. 1915
9.10.3 Function Description................................................................................................1915
9.10.4 Transmitted Data..................................................................................................... 1920
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 39
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
40 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 41
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
11 Functional Tests......................................................................................................................................2041
11.1 General Notes............................................................................................................... 2042
11.2 Enabling/Disabling the Application/Test Mode for the Entire Device................................2043
11.3 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection)....................... 2045
11.4 Functional Test Protection Communication....................................................................2046
11.4.1 Checking the Protection-Data Communication......................................................... 2046
11.4.2 Directional Test .......................................................................................................2047
11.5 Functional Test Line Differential Protection....................................................................2048
11.5.1 Test Options and Test Modes .................................................................................. 2048
11.5.2 Functional Test in All Devices................................................................................... 2049
11.5.2.1 General Information .......................................................................................... 2049
11.5.2.2 Procedure.......................................................................................................... 2049
11.5.3 Functional Test in the Local Device...........................................................................2050
11.5.3.1 General Information .......................................................................................... 2050
11.5.3.2 Functional Test in Case of Non-Effective Line Differential Protection in the
Remote Devices – Procedure 1............................................................................2052
11.5.3.3 Functional Test in Case of Non-Effective Line Differential Protection in the
Remote Devices – Procedure 2............................................................................2052
42 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
11.5.3.4 Functional Test in Case of Effective Line Differential Protection in the Remote
Devices – Procedure 1........................................................................................ 2053
11.5.3.5 Functional Test in Case of Effective Line Differential Protection in the Remote
Devices – Procedure 2........................................................................................ 2054
11.5.4 Checking the Operating Point.................................................................................. 2055
11.5.5 Use of Test Switches................................................................................................ 2059
11.6 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displace-
ment Voltage ............................................................................................................... 2060
11.7 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection............................ 2061
11.8 Circuit-Breaker Test....................................................................................................... 2064
11.9 Out-of-Step Protection Function Test ............................................................................ 2068
11.10 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection ............................................................ 2069
11.11 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision .............................................................. 2070
11.12 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test .......................................................................... 2071
11.13 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal............................................................. 2072
11.14 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage ........................................................................................................................ 2073
11.15 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems..................................... 2075
11.16 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function.................................... 2077
11.17 Commissioning Hints for Voltage Control...................................................................... 2081
11.17.1 Secondary Tests.......................................................................................................2081
11.17.1.1 General..............................................................................................................2081
11.17.1.2 Checking the Transformer Tap Position...............................................................2081
11.17.1.3 Check of the Voltage-Control Function............................................................... 2084
11.17.1.4 Further Tests......................................................................................................2085
11.17.1.5 Voltage-Control Function for Parallel Transformers............................................. 2088
11.17.2 Primary Tests........................................................................................................... 2093
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 43
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
44 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 45
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Table of Contents
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 2297
A.1 Order Configurator and Order Options...........................................................................2298
A.2 Ordering Accessories.....................................................................................................2299
A.3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions........................................................................... 2301
A.4 Standard Variants for 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87...................................................... 2304
A.5 Requirements for Phase Current Transformers .............................................................. 2315
A.6 Connection Examples for Current Transformers............................................................. 2325
A.7 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices............................... 2332
A.8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non-Modular Devices........................2338
A.9 Connection Examples for Special Applications ...............................................................2342
A.10 Preroutings for 7SL87 (Basis).........................................................................................2343
A.11 Preroutings for 7SL87 (1 1/2 Circuit Breakers)................................................................ 2345
Literature................................................................................................................................................ 2349
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................. 2351
Index.......................................................................................................................................................2373
46 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
1 Introduction
1.1 General 48
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 49
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 47
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are fitted with
a powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the
circuit breaker, are processed digitally.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages sent by the instrument transformers and adapt
them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5device consists of inputs for measuring
current and voltage. The current inputs are intended for the detection of phase currents and ground current.
The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core balance current transformer. In addition, phase
currents can be detected very sensitively for a particularly precise measurement. The voltage inputs detect the
measuring voltage of device functions requiring voltage measured values.
The analog values are digitized in the microprocessor for data processing.
Microprocessor System
All device functions are processed in the microprocessor system.
This includes, for example:
• Recording of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
• Administration of the operating system and its functions, for example data storage, real-time clock,
communication, interfaces
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or offset operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide infor-
mation on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC
display, the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting
parameters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters
changed. In addition, system equipment can be controlled via the user interface of the device.
Serial Interfaces
The serial interface in the front panel enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
rear are used to implement various communication protocols.
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in
the supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply, are bridged by
capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).
48 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5
General Properties
• Powerful microprocessor
• Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
• Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing circuits from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
• Easy operation using an integrated operator and display panel, or using a connected personal computer
with user interface
• Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term average values
• Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
• Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
• Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire
device series. Significant features here include:
• Functional integration of various applications, such as protection, control, and fault recorder
• The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the family
• Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
• The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
• Automatic logging of access attempts and security-critical operations on the devices and systems
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5devices maintain full communication redundancy:
• Redundant and independent protocols to control centers possible (such as IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850, either single or redundant)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 49
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
50 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
2 Basic Structure of the Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 51
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions
available on the device!
EXAMPLE
A 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout of the 7SA86 distance protection device serves as an example. The following
protection functions are required for implementation (simplified and reduced):
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
EXAMPLE
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must select the appropriate application template. In the example,
select the application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout. This
application template covers the required functional scope. Selecting this application template determines the
preconfigured functional scope. This can be changed as necessary (see 2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation
of Functional Scope).
EXAMPLE
The selected application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
comprises 3 function groups:
52 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device
The following figure shows the embedding of functions via function groups.
[dw_eifkfg, 1, en_US]
Depending on the type of device, there are different types of function groups:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 53
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device
EXAMPLE
The measuring points are assigned to the function groups in the application template in Figure 2-1 as follows:
• The protection function group Line is assigned to the measuring points I-3ph 1, I-3ph 2, and V-3ph 1.
The function group therefore receives the measured values from the current transformers 1 and 2,
as well as from the voltage transformer 1. The currents of measuring points I-3ph 1 and I-3ph 2 are
geometrically added, for a feeder-related processing.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA1 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 1 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 1.
• The circuit-breaker function group QA2 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 2 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 2.
You can change the assignment on demand, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
To check or change the assignment of measuring points to the function groups, double-click Function-group
connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
[sc_fgverb, 1, en_US]
The window for routing of the measuring points opens in the working area (see the following figure, does not
correspond to the example).
[scmscofg-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
54 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are started by the protection functions of the protection FG.
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function
group) through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Further information on this is included
later. Figure 2-6 shows how to reach the detail configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the possible assignments in
detail.
These definitions are also set appropriately for the specific application by the selected application template.
EXAMPLE
The connection of the function group in the example shown in Figure 2-1 is as follows:
The protection function group Line is linked to both Circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2.
This means that an operate indication in the Distance protection function generates a trip command in both
Circuit-breaker function groups and thus controls both circuit breakers. The function Circuit-breaker failure
protection is started in both the QA1 and QA2 Circuit-breaker function groups if they are configured.
You can change this connection, if needed. That is, the protection function groups can be assigned to the
circuit-breaker function groups as desired.
To check or change the assignment of the protection function groups to the Circuit-breaker function groups,
double-click Function group connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree → Name of device.
[sc_fgverb, 1, en_US]
The window for general routing of the function groups opens in the working area.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 55
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device
[scfgcols-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Connection of Protection Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Proceed as follows:
• Open the appropriate protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree, for example Line 1.
56 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device
[sclsinta-190214-01, 1, en_US]
• The window for the detailed configuration of the interface between the protection function group and
the Circuit-breaker function group(s) opens in the working area.
• In this view, configure the interface via the context menu (right mouse button), see Figure 2-7.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 57
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device
[sc_detail, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Detail Configuration of the Interface Between the Protection Function Group and the Circuit-
Breaker Function Groups
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
EXAMPLE
In Figure 2-1 you can see that the function Overcurrent protection, phases (51) has 3 stages. The number of
zones of the function Distance protection is not shown.
Each stage, each function block, and each function (without stages/function blocks) can be individually
switched into specific operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is
explained in 2.3 Function Control.
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions, stages, and function blocks can be added,
copied, and deleted (see 2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation of Functional Scope).
58 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation of Functional Scope
• Single-line configuration
• Information routing
• Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added
functionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are
also copied when you copy functionalities.
NOTE
i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or stage from the device, all settings and routings
will be lost. The function group, function, or tripping stage can be added again, but then the default
settings are active.
In most cases, the adaptation of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, stages, and
function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks automatically
connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In few cases, it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit-breaker function group. These newly added
function groups do not contain (protection) functions. You must individually load the (protection) functions
for your specific application. You must also connect the protection or circuit-breaker function group to one
or more measuring points (see 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device). You must connect newly added
protection function groups to a circuit-breaker function group (see 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. You can find more detailed
information in the description of application templates, in 4 Applications.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.
In addition to function-point classes (10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 to 1400) beginning with firmware version
V09.20, any function-point values in the range from 0 to 5000 are supported as a credit in the device. Thus,
the precise function-point credit required can be loaded into the device by the Function-Point Manager. Alter-
natively, you can order classless devices with 0 points (new option beginning with V09.20) or class-bound
with the required function-point class.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 59
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.2 Application Templates/Adaptation of Functional Scope
• Determine the function-point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.
• Create a signed license file for your device with the SIPROTEC Function-Point Manager at www.siprotec-
function-point-manager.siemens.com or order the license file from your sales partner.
• Once you have ordered the license file using the Function-Point Manager, you can download it from
there directly.
• Once you have ordered the license file from your sales partner, you will receive it by e-mail or to
download.
• Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file onto your device. The procedure is described in the Online Help
of DIGSI 5.
60 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
NOTE
i Simplifying functions and function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether
you want a function to run (on) or not (off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it
into test mode for the purpose of commissioning (parameter Mode = test). Furthermore, the state of the
tripping stage can be influenced with the help of the controllable Mod in the IEC 61850 representation. The
controllable Mod (in the DIGSI 5 information routing _:51 Mode (controllable)) supports the states On,
Off, Test, Relay blocked, and Test/Relay blk..
The function shows the current status – such as an Alarm – via the Health signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in Figure 2-8. It is standardized for all functions. Therefore, this
control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
[lo_steurg, 2, en_US]
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode, the controllable Mod and the input Superor-
dinate state.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 61
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. You can set the function mode
to on, off and test. The operating principle is described in Table 2-2. You can set the parameter Mode via:
• DIGSI 5
• IEC 61850-8-1
• CFC
The superordinate state can accept the values On, Relay blocked Test and Test/Relay blk..
The state of the function resulting from the parameter Mode, the controllable Mod and the Superordinate
state is shown in the following table. The resulting state of the function results from the combination
of all sources (parameters Mode, Controllable Mod and Superordinate state). For simplicity, the table
represents only the combination of 2 sources.
1 With the parameter (_:151) Oper.bin.outp. under test, you can fix the settings whether the relay outputs are to be picked up by
functions in the state Test. If this parameter is inactive (default setting), the state Test of a function is modified to Test/Relay blk..
62 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
NOTE
i The browser-based user interface shows an easy-to-read list of the states of all functions if they deviate
from the state On.
Note:
Logics outside this function block, for example, superordinate group indications, are not
affected by the blocking. Their output to a relay still leads to an activation.
Off The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The health of a disabled
function always has the value OK.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 63
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
64 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.3 Function Control
Health
Health signals if a selected function can perform its designated functionality. If so, the health is OK. In case
the functionality is only possible in a limited way or not at all, due to state or problems within the device, the
health will signal Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-monitoring can cause functions to assume the health Alarm (see 8 Supervision Functions). If a
function assumes the health state Alarm, it is no longer active (indication not active is generated).
Only a few functions can signal the health state Warning. The health state Warning results from function-
specific supervision and - where it occurs - it is explained in the function description. If a function assumes the
Warning status, it will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and
trip in the case of a protection function.
Not Active
The indication Not active signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Not active is
active in the following cases:
• Function is disabled
• All protection-function steps are disabled via the Enable protection controllable (state = false). The
indication Protection inactive is active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 65
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of
the device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this
document, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and
information lists.
In order to form unique texts and reference numbers, each function group, function, function block/stage, and
indication or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and numbers are
created.
The structure of the texts and reference numbers follows the already shown in Figure 2-1, hierarchy:
EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown in the protection-function group Line as an example
of the parameter Threshold value and the indication Pickup of the 2nd definite-time overcurrent protec-
tion stage of the function Overcurrent protection, phases (see Figure 2-9). Only one function and one
function group exist in the device. The representation of the stage is simplified.
[lo_stuumz, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Stage of the Overcurrent Protection Function, Phases (without Representation of Stage
Control)
The following table shows the texts and numbers of the hierarchy elements concerned:
Name Number of the Type Instance Number
Protection function group Line 2 1
Function Overcurrent 3ph 20 1
Stage Definite-time overcurrent 66 2
protection
Settings Threshold value 3 –
Indication Pickup 55 –
66 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameters and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 67
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Basic Structure of the Function
2.5 Information Lists
EXAMPLE:
The following table shows the types for some data types as examples:
Data Type Type
ENS O
ACD O
ACT O
SPS I or O
SPC C
MV O
68 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 70
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 97
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups 99
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes 108
3.5 Fault Recording 125
3.6 Protection Communication 134
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices 219
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization 227
3.9 User-Defined Objects 235
3.10 Other Functions 242
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 254
3.12 Device Settings 263
3.13 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit 274
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 69
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
• Measured data
• Power-system data
• Device supervisions
• Device functions
NOTE
i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You can find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or a PC
on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the slash signifies the number of indications that are available. The number before the slash indicates
70 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
how many indications have just been selected or shown. The end of the indication list is closed with the entry
***END***.
[sc_oprlog, 1, en_US]
To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
² Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. Every indication contains date, time, and its state as additional information.
You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
In some logs, you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display. To learn more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
NOTE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 71
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Procedure
To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-site
operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. You can establish a direct connection to your PC
via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices via a data network
from your DIGSI 5 PC.
² You reach the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device using the project-tree window. If you have not
created the device within a project, you can also do this via the Online access menu item.
After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To update, it is
necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
² Synchronize the log. For this purpose, click the appropriate button in the headline of the log (see the
ground-fault indications example in Figure 3-2 a)).
[sc_grflmd, 1, en_US]
72 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
You will find additional information about deleting and saving logs in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the
Logs.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information
routing matrix or is predefined. You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
Displayed indications are supplemented in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel with the following
information:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 73
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
74 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Indication Columns
The following table shows the meaning of the individual columns in the log:
Indication Column Meaning
Time stamp Time stamp of the indication in device time using the local time
zone of the device or the query time for the motor log
Relative time Relative time to a reference entry
Error number Number of the error that occurred in the device. This number incre-
ments continuously.
Entry number Entry identification of buffer entries. This identification displays the
sequence of buffer entries.
Indication number Number of the indication that occurred in the device. This number
increments continuously and is necessary for an analysis by
Siemens.
Indication Indication text
Function structure Path of the signal with the signal name
Name Signal name
Value Current state of the command. Also pay attention to the value
quality to check whether the value is up to date.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 75
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.5 Logs
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow
categorization of indication logging based on operating states (for example, operational and fault logs) and
based on fields of application.
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Fault log Fault indications
Switching-device log Switching operation and circuit-breaker statistics
Ground-fault log Ground-fault indications
Setting-history log Setting changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication log Status of communication interfaces
Motor-starting log Information on the motor starting
Communication-supervision log Communication supervision (GOOSE)
Log Management
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted, the
oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault or ground-fault log
is reached, the number of the last fault is output via the signal Fault recording buffer is full. You can route
this signal in the information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log,
then they are also saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery
buffering or storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The
device display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys.
Configurability of Logs
The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down in
columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. Access is only
through the project:
76 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_infpuf, 2, en_US]
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).
• Measured data
• Power-system data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values is output as an operational indication. Short circuits in the
network are indicated as an operational indication Fault with sequential fault number. For detailed informa-
tion about the recording of system incidents, refer to the description of the fault log (chapter 3.1.5.3 Fault
Log). Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the operational log.
• To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → Operational log
• The status of the operational log last loaded from the device is shown to you. To update (synchronization
with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list (Figure 3-4 a)).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 77
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_betrmd, 1, en_US]
• To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Operational log
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.
78 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_operlog1, 2, en_US]
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Operational log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
Fault Definition
In general, a fault is started by the raising pickup of a protection function and ends with the cleared pickup
after the trip command.
When using an automatic reclosing function, the complete reclosing cycle (successful or unsuccessful) is
preferably integrated into the fault. If evolving faults appear within reclosing cycles, the entire clearing
process is logged under one fault number even in multiple pickup cycles. Without automatic reclosing function
every pickup is also recorded as its own fault.
User-defined configuration of a fault is also possible.
NOTE
i The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are
logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off.
Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the
last fault on the device display is also done. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault
Display on the On-Site Operation Panel.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 79
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Deletability
The fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. For more details about this, refer to chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
• To reach the fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → Fault logs
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
[sc_faullg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Reading the Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Configurability
The indication scope of the fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Fault log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Device Manual) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms). However, this
can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels. The recording
of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.
• Directional sensitive ground-fault protection for deleted and isolated systems (67Ns)
• To reach the ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Ground-fault log
80 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the ground-fault log is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-7 a)).
[sc_grflmd, 1, en_US]
• To reach the ground-fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Ground-fault indication
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
[scgfllg1-191012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-8 Reading the Ground-Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter 3.1.6 Saving
and Deleting the Logs.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 81
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configurability
The indication scope of the ground-fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target → Log → Column Ground-fault log
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
• To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Log → Setting changes
The status of the setting-history log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-9).
[sc_paramd, 1, en_US]
• To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main menu → Indications → Setting changes
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
82 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_hislog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 Reading the Setting-History Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
• The log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information of the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 83
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process Data → Log → User log 1/2
The status of the user-defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the
indication list (Figure 3-11 a)).
[sc_application_md, 2, en_US]
• To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Indications → User-defined log 1/2
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• Using the Info softkey, you can retrieve auxiliary information on the entry depending on the context.
[sc_userrlog1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
84 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. You will find details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
[sc_diu1u2, 1, en_US]
• To reach the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. The device must be in
Online access.
Project → Online access → Device → Device Information → Logs tab → Security logs
The state of the security log last loaded from the device is displayed.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 85
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_secmld, 2, en_US]
• To reach the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Security log
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[sc_seclog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
• This log, which is organized as a ring buffer, cannot be deleted by the user!
• If you want to archive security-relevant information of the device without loss of information, you
must regularly read this log.
• Compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is
sufficient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is
86 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
assumed by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect
or compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
• To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Online access → Device → Device information → Logs tab → Device-diagnosis log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.
[sc_devdia, 1, en_US]
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
• To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Device diagnosis
• You can navigate on the on-site operation panel using the navigation keys (top/bottom) inside the
displayed indication list.
[sc_devdia_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
NOTE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 87
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
tions can be stored in the communication log. Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the
configured communication modules.
• Use the project-tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access → Device → Test suite → Communication module
• Then select:
J:Onboard Ethernet → Communication log
The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device.
• Before this, refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline.
[sc_compuf, 2, en_US]
• To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu → Test & Diagnosis → Logs → Communication logs
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
88 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_commlg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 Reading the Communication Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
• To reach the communication-supervision log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Com supervision log
The status of the communication-supervision log last loaded from the device is shown.
• To update (synchronization with the device), click the button Read log entries in the headline of the
indication list.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 89
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_comsuperv, 1, en_US]
• To reach the communication-supervision log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site
operation panel.
Main menu → Logs → Com supervision log
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
[sc_comsupervlg, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 Reading the Communication-Supervision Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Deletability
The communication-supervision log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in
chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The communication-supervision log cannot be freely configured. The entries are preconfigured.
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order
for the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after a revision of the
system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
90 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
NOTE
i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.
NOTE
i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with
relevance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).
NOTE
i If you delete any files directly from the fault log or fault record, the error number for new fault records
continues incrementing up to the maximum number 2^32. It does not reset to 0.
If you initialize flash partitioning of the fault log and fault record, the error number for new fault records
resets to 0.
NOTE
i If the device executes an initial start, for example after an update of the device software, the following logs
are automatically deleted:
• Operational log
• Fault log
• Switching-device log
• Ground-fault log
• Setting-history log
• User-defined log
• Motor-starting log
• Communication-supervision log
Back up the deletable logs using DIGSI 5.
NOTE
• To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main menu → Logs → Operational log
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 91
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_oprlog, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel
• You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
• The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
• After being requested, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
• After being requested, confirm the Deletion of all entries with Ok.
• To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example opera-
tional log).
Project → Device → Process data → Logs → Operational log
With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device
in a special indication window.
Procedure
• Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected device in the navigation window under Online
access.
• The raising indications appear immediately without you having to wait for a cyclical update or initiate the
manual update.
92 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_spnmld, 2, en_US]
After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display
without further operational measures. In SIPROTEC 5 devices, protected objects (for example, lines) and even
circuit breakers can be freely created and configured depending on the application (even several instances).
In DIGSI 5, several spontaneous fault displays can be configured, depending on the application, with each
individual one being assigned a particular circuit breaker. These displays remain stored in the device until they
are manually confirmed or released by LED reset.
• To reach the Fault-display configuration of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project → Device → Display pages → Fault-display configuration
• In the main window, all configured circuit breakers are displayed. A list of a maximum of 6 configurable
display lines is offered for each circuit breaker. The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for
each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display.
• With the parameter (_:139) Fault-display (under Device → Parameter → Device settings) you
determine whether spontaneous fault displays should be shown for each pickup or only pickups with the
trip command.
[sc_konstf, 2, en_US]
For every display line the following display options can be selected:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 93
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[sc_stfanz, 1, en_US]
• Press the softkey button Quit in the base bar of the display. The display is irretrievably closed. Repeat this
step until no further spontaneous fault displays appear.
• After completion of all confirmations the last display view is showed before the faults.
Method 2: Acknowledgment via LED reset
• An LED reset (device) causes the reset of all stored LEDs and binary output contacts of the device and also
to the confirmation of all fault displays stored in the display.
You can find more details on the topic of LED reset in chapter 3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5
Device
In your SIPROTEC 5 device, you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Acknowledgment occurs via:
• DIGSI 5
• Binary input
94 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:
You can configure indications of individual functions as "stored" in a function group. This type of configuration
can be used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it
is acknowledged.
The protection and the circuit-breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG. The block
Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 95
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.1 Indications
5. You use the binary input signal >Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group. The
configured outputs (contacts) are not reset.
With the controllable Application mode = Test or Test/Relay blk., you switch on or off the test
mode for the entire device.
For further information, refer to 11.2 Enabling/Disabling the Application/Test Mode for the Entire Device.
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks
indications sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This
test bit makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test.
96 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition
• Sampling-frequency tracking:
The analog input channels are scanned for valid signals in cycles. The current power frequency is deter-
mined and the required sampling frequency is defined by using a resampling algorithm. The tracking is
effective in the frequency range between 10 Hz and 90 Hz.
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisition
chain. Figure 3-26 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit
the bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem)
is installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. Meaning that magnitude,
phase, and transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that the current
transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dw_meserf, 2, en_US]
fa Sampling frequency
SMV Sampled measured value
CMV Conventional measured value
LPIT Low-power instrument transformer
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 97
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50 Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. If magnitude, phase, and transformer time
constant are corrected, the sampling frequency is reduced to 8 kHz (160 samplings per 50-Hz cycle). This is
the basic sampling frequency to which various processes, such as fault recording, RMS measured values, refer.
For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is adjusted on the basis of the power frequency.
For numerous measurement and protection applications , 20 samplings per cycle are sufficient (if frated =
50 Hz): sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This sampling rate is an adequate
compromise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions (multi-functionality).
The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups in
2 variants:
NOTE
i The Power-system data (starting in 6.1 Power-System Data) contain the measuring points for current and
voltage. Each measuring point has its own parameters.
98 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
3.3.1 Overview
Starting from platform version V07.80, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups in
SIPROTEC 5 devices. The device operates with a maximum of 6 Frequency tracking groups.
The chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking provides the necessary hints on the operating principle of
sampling-frequency tracking and its application.
The chapter 3.3.3 Frequency Tracking Groups describes the principle and application of frequency tracking
groups.
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with powerful sampling-frequency tracking as explained in 3.2 Measured-
Value Acquisition . This ensures high measuring accuracy over a wide frequency operating range (10 Hz to
90 Hz).
To determine the actual sampling frequency, the voltage and current measuring points are checked for valid
input signals, the actual power frequency is determined and the tracking frequency (sampling frequency =
20 ⋅ tracking frequency) is adapted. The method is implemented in such a way that the number of samplings
per actual power frequency or the frequency of the system is always constant. The number of samplings is 20
per cycle, as described in 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition .
During engineering, you set the parameters specifying which measuring points are used for frequency
tracking. All 3-phase voltage and current measuring points and 1-phase voltage and current measuring points
are allowed.
NOTE
i Using a measuring point for sampling-frequency tracking requires this measuring point to be suitable
for reliably determining the power frequency. This is the case, as long as the measuring point has been
connected to the power system and the rated voltages and currents are measured. If the measured values
for the rated voltages and currents are unavailable, sampling-frequency tracking must be switched off for
this measuring point.
Examples of these kind of conditions are as follows:
• 1-phase measuring points: Measuring points that measure zero-sequence voltages or zero-sequence
currents must not be used for frequency tracking.
• 3-phase measuring points: Measuring points that measure unbalanced currents and voltages for a
capacitor bank must not be used for frequency tracking.
The following figure shows where you set the parameters for the corresponding measuring point and activate
sampling-frequency tracking in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Settings → Power-system data.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 99
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
Figure 3-27 Using the Measuring Point to Determine the Sampling Frequency
If the parameter Tracking = active, the measuring point is used to determine the actual tracking
frequency. If the parameter Tracking is set to active for several measuring points, the ID of the measuring
point determines the sequence in which these are checked for valid input signals. The algorithm starts with
the lowest ID number, as follows:
• First, the 3-phase measuring points are scanned. If no valid voltage is found, the selected current
measuring points are next. In this case, the following sequence applies:
3-phase voltage measuring point → 3-phase current measuring point → 1-phase voltage measuring point
→ 1-phase current measuring point
If a trigger signal comes from a current measuring point, the voltage measuring points are still continu-
ously scanned for valid voltages and switched immediately if a voltage is found.
• If the true RMS value is greater than 2.5 % of the set secondary device rated value, a measuring point is
valid. For example, this is 2.5 V at 100 V, 25 mA at 1 A or 125 mA at 5 A.
• The tracking frequency is tracked using different interval steps. If the tracking frequency deviates only
slightly from the measured frequency, the frequency is tracked using small steps of 0.010 Hz. In the case
of greater deviations, the interval is 1 Hz. To react faster in the event of larger deviations, for example
in switchover conditions, tracking occurs in 5-Hz steps. When switching on measurands immediately the
measured tracking frequency is used.
• If no tracking frequency can be determined, the appropriate rated frequency of the electrical power
system is used as the tracking frequency. This case occurs before the measurands are switched on, after
they are switched off or when the device is powered on. If the measurands are switched on, the starting
frequency is the set power frequency, for example 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Since rated-frequency input variables
can be assumed for most applications, the measuring algorithms start with the fixed sampling frequency,
for example, 1 kHz for 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz for 60 Hz.
Figure 3-28 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking across the frequency band and at the
frequency limits.
The x-axis shows the actual power frequency (fsys) and the y-axis shows the set tracking frequency (ftrack).
Between 10 Hz and 90 Hz, the relationship is linear. If the actual power frequency is less than 10 Hz, the
tracking frequency is kept at 10 Hz. In this case, sampling occurs at 20 ⋅ 10 Hz = 200 Hz. If the power
frequency is greater than 90 Hz, the tracking frequency is kept constant at 90 Hz.
If the frequency is outside the frequency operating range (10 Hz to 90 Hz), frequency tracking generates
the indication Freq. out of range. The individual protection functions evaluate this indication. If an
overfunction can occur, the protection functions are blocked internally to avoid a failure.
You can find more detailed information on the behavior of the protection functions in 12 Technical Data.
100 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
[dw_working-area_sampling-frequency-tracking, 2, en_US]
Siemens recommends routing the calculated power frequency (fsys) and the determined tracking frequency
(ftrack) as a measured value trace in the fault record. In this way, you can document the behavior of the device
in transient conditions. The following figure shows that you find the both measured values in the information
routing under Power-system data → General:
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-30 shows the behavior of sampling-frequency tracking using an example.
The voltage was reduced linearly from 57.7 V (100 V phase-to-phase) to 35 V (60.6 V phase-to-phase) and, at
the same time, the frequency was reduced from 50 Hz to 35 Hz, for example motor coasting down. Then, an
abrupt switch to the rated values of 57.7 V at 50 Hz was made.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 101
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
The upper trace shows the power-system voltage on 1 phase (A) as an example. The center trace is the
calculated power frequency and the lower trace is the determined tracking frequency. If you multiply the
determined tracking frequency of the lower trace by 20, you can determine the sampling frequency.
Figure 3-30 Example of Frequency Tracking and Reaction to a Step Change in the Input Variable
In the SIPROTEC 5 devices before platform version V07.80, sampling-frequency tracking applies to the entire
device. This means that the 1st valid measuring point, for example, a 3-phase voltage measuring point,
determines the selected tracking frequency based on the detected frequency.
If all measuring points in a system are galvanically coupled to each other, the power frequency is identical for
all measuring points.
There are problems with electrical power system states or system states where galvanic separation is possible
and measuring points of the separated system parts are connected to the SIPROTEC 5 device. For these
problematic electrical power system states or system states, different frequencies are possible for a limited
time. Depending on the measuring point set for tracking, the device selects which frequency to use. As a
result, measuring errors and a failure of protection functions are possible.
Starting with platform version V7.80, you can assign the measuring points to different frequency tracking
groups. This ensures high flexibility and high measuring accuracy for a variety of applications. In this case,
every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. In the case of galvanic separation
and different system frequencies, different sampling frequencies arise as a result. This occurs temporarily in
systems with rotating machines, for example. A way to achieve galvanic separation is to use an open circuit
breaker.
NOTE
i In the measured-value acquisition chain in Figure 3-26 in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ,
only the data stream designated as tracked is adapted. The data stream represented as fixed derives its
sampling frequency exclusively from the set rated frequency. In this case, the constant sampling frequency
of 1 kHz at frated = 50 Hz and 1.2 kHz at frated = 60 Hz is used. This applies to every measuring point,
regardless of the frequency tracking group to which it is assigned.
EXAMPLE:
Figure 3-31 shows an example for the necessity of frequency tracking groups. The generator circuit breaker
(GCB) and the high-voltage circuit breaker (HVCB) are the galvanic disconnection points. In this way, different
switching states are possible. The device uses current measuring points (CTs 1 to 6) and voltage measuring
points (VTs 1 to 4) located on different sides of the circuit breakers. In addition, it is assumed that the
generator is started using a starting-frequency converter. In a gas-turbine application, the starting-frequency
converter accelerates the generator from 0 Hz to about 70 % of the rated speed (roughly 35 Hz at
frated = 50 Hz). After this, the gas turbine is fired up and brings the generator to the rated speed. Then,
the voltage is built up to the rated voltage and synchronized. During this start-up operation, the GCB is open
and the HVCB is closed. As a result, the measuring points VT 1, CTs 1, 2, 4 have a frequency that deviates from
102 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
the other measuring points during start-up operation. The other measuring points are usually at the rated
frequency due of the connection to the power system.
Furthermore, protection tripping can result in a switching state where the HVCB is open and the GCB remains
closed. In this case, the generator and a generator transformer can assume a frequency that deviates from
the power frequency. In the event of load shedding, the generator accelerates before the speed controller
intervenes. This is particularly pronounced in hydro generators.
An evaluation of the individual scenarios shows that different frequencies can occur at the different meas-
uring points for a limited time. For this reason, 3 frequency tracking groups are necessary in this example.
These groups are marked with different colors in the following figure.
NOTE
i The measuring point (CT 4) marked with 1) in the following figure will be discussed later.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 103
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
[dw_example_frequency-tracking-groups, 1, en_US]
To strike a balance between application flexibility and the required computing power, the number of addi-
tional frequency tracking groups was limited to 5. Together with the basic functionality, a total of 6 frequency
tracking groups are possible.
If you wish to use frequency tracking groups, use the following engineering recommendations. Before starting
work, make sure you know how many frequency tracking groups are needed. Select only the required
number.
If you start with an application template that you have expanded by the necessary measuring points, you must
load the necessary number of additional frequency tracking groups from the Global DIGSI 5 Library into the
Power system folder.
104 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
If you instantiate an additional frequency tracking group, the system automatically assigns the ID of the
frequency tracking group in DIGSI using consecutive numbers. As the device already has 1 frequency tracking
group, the ID numbering for additional frequency tracking groups starts with 2.
NOTE
i If you have activated several frequency tracking groups during engineering and you then delete a
frequency tracking group again later, the assigned ID is also deleted. All other frequency tracking groups
retain their assigned IDs.
Try to avoid discontinuities by deleting the frequency tracking group with the highest ID if possible.
You will find the frequency measured values and the indications of the corresponding frequency tracking
group in the routing matrix (see Figure 3-29).
Assign the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups in the Function-group connections Editor.
As soon as you have instantiated another frequency tracking group from the Global DIGSI 5 Library, the
additional column Frequency tracking group ID appears in the routing matrix. In this column, you select the
number of the corresponding frequency tracking group for each measuring point using the list box.
Figure 3-34 Assignment of the Measuring Point to the Frequency Tracking Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 105
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
NOTE
i Keep the following in mind when assigning the measuring points to the frequency tracking groups:
• The function groups (FGs) can operate only with 1 frequency tracking group.
• This applies also to interconnections between the function groups as for the Transformer differential
protection.
In the case of the Transformer differential protection, the Transformer side FG is interconnected
with the Transformer FG and all Transformer side FGs of one transformer must operate in the same
frequency tracking group.
The same applies when the neutral-point current is measured using a 1-phase function group.
There are also exceptions such as the FG Circuit breaker (see chapter 5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit
Breaker). The voltage measured values are processed by the Synchronization function which operates
only with a fixed sampling frequency. In this way, voltage measuring points from different frequency
tracking groups can be connected.
The cited rules are checked using scripts and infractions reported during engineering.
Now, you can select the measuring points to be used to determine the tracking frequency for the appropriate
frequency tracking group as explained in chapter 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking. If possible, use at least
1 voltage measuring point and 1 current measuring point. Give preference to 3-phase measuring points.
When the tracking frequency has been determined, all measuring points of the frequency tracking group are
set to this frequency and the tracked sampling frequency is adapted.
NOTE
i As described in the chapter 3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition , the measured-value current with fixed
sampling frequency is unaffected by this.
To avoid errors, the ID of the measuring point and the ID of the assigned frequency tracking group are
displayed in the setting sheet of the measuring points in DIGSI 5 (see Figure 3-35).
Figure 3-35 Example: Settings of the 3-Phase Current Measuring Point; Additional Display of the ID for the
Frequency Tracking Group
In addition, the ID of the frequency tracking group is displayed in the function group in the General block (see
Figure 3-36). Here, you can also check the consistency.
106 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups
Figure 3-36 Display of the ID for the Frequency Tracking Group in the Block General of the Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 107
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
3.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to handle different
applications, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects depending on
these quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following figure
also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure are
described in more detail in the following.
[lo_quali1, 2, en_US]
108 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 109
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
• In the Information routing editor for external signals from GOOSE connections
• In the Information routing editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options regarding this influence as well as the automatic
quality processing.
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can
influence processing of the quality at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the input signal of
the function. This is based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device
to several functions. The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different
functions require customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.
The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding. You can
find information about the former quality processing in Previous Quality Processing/Affected by the User for
Received GOOSE Values, Page 114.
In the Information Routing Editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The
following figure shows the possible influence using the example of a DPC data type. All setting options are
effective for the device receiving the data.
• Select either the desired signal in the External Signals group or the signal of a function activated via the
GOOSE column.
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.
110 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[sc_LB_GOOSE_2, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-38 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
Depending on the selected data type of the object, various selection options are offered to you for the Safe
state item in the Common settings section. At this point, you select the manually updated values that allow
a safe operating state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed.
• Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 111
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[sc_LB_GOOSE_1, 2, en_US]
With the following advanced quality attributes, you can filter the transmitted GOOSE indications and check
and set their quality. The values that have been adapted, if necessary, are forwarded to the receiver.
For the tests, you can select from the following setting options depending on the data type.
These settings of the Advanced quality attributes apply to the advanced quality attributes listed below. The
selection can vary depending on the data type.
112 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[sc_LB_GOOSE_3, 2, en_US]
You can also forward the quality attributes unchanged. To do this, you must mark the Keep flag check box.
NOTE
i By default, the Keep flag checkbox is disabled when the signal is routed to the LED or the binary output.
Communication Outage
There is communication disturbance (time allowed to live) between the transmitter and the receiver indicated
by the transmitter. The indication is set in accordance with the settings (Table 3-8).
Invalidity
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = invalid. The receiver
recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Questionable
The transmitting device sends this indication with the quality information Validity = questionable. The
receiver recognizes this for this indication and reacts according to the settings (Table 3-8).
Test Mismatch
The transmitting device or the function in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode. As
a result, the indication is transmitted with the quality information test. The receiving function block recog-
nizes this for this indication and reacts, depending on its own test-mode state (specified in IEC 61850-7-4
Annex A), according to the settings (Table 3-8).
NOTE
i Follow the sequence of tests. First, the Functional logoff by operator blocked is tested. Then comes
Communication outage and so on. If a case is recognized as active, the test chain is canceled with the
configured setting for the active case.
In the case of Invalidity, the tests are first performed for Functional logoff by operator blocked (not
applicable) and then for Communication outage (not applicable) and canceled with the configured action for
Invalidity.
If an indication is routed into the log, manual updating of a value is also logged based on the conditions listed
above and on the reason for the manual update. Manually updating a value based on the conditions listed
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 113
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
above causes a change in the Health Warning function block, inherited up to Device health (specified
in IEC 61850-7-4).
Keep Flag
The quality attributes and values indicated by the transmitter are accepted without change. Quality processing
must be performed by the user via a logic diagram. The outputs of the logic diagram following the user-
specific quality processing can be connected to the function-block inputs as before.
For controllable types, the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas-
ured values:
ctlNum = 0
stSeld = False
origin.orIdent = Substituted by quality processing
origin.orCat = AUTOMATIC_BAY
• Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.
114 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
Figure 3-41 Influence Option When Linking a DPC Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid value.
• Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
without change.
• Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid • The validity attribute is set to good and
is set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). • The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 115
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
In DIGSI 5, you can control the quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC
building block (see the following figure) under Device name →, Settings → Device settings in the editor:
[sc_quali_cfc, 1, en_US]
With the CFC chart quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the
quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of
individual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC building block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain CFC
building blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.
116 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
General Processing
Most of the CFC building blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these building blocks, the
following general mechanisms shall apply.
Quality Attribute: Validity
If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be
set to invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words,
the quality is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set
globally.
This does not apply to CFC output data that originate from building blocks with explicit quality processing
(see next section).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 117
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
118 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
BUILD_BSC
BUILD_DPS
BUILD_ENS
BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
• The interlocking condition for switchgear interlocking protection is stored in the device as a CFC chart.
• The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) incoming via the
GOOSE telegram gets the quality invalid. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the
following possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or
a substitute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear
interlocking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS
building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. You can then
continue to process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input signal
for a BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal as a result,
with the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process the release
messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release signal for
a switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The following
figure shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 119
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[sc_cfc_ran, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-43 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. Link
the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate). This way,
you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of the CFC
chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
Figure 3-44 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
NOTE
i Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking (see chapter 3.10.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking
for Input Signals) sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid.
120 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[lo_quali3, 2, en_US]
• CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
• GOOSE connection: See description in chapter 3.4.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received
GOOSE Values
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 121
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
[lo_quali2, 2, en_US]
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-44.
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage.
• In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality
attributes.
[sc_influence, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-46 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)
122 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays
the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to To the IEC 61850
the SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for example,
in the direction of a
CFC chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 123
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.4 Processing Quality Attributes
124 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording
documents operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them.
You can read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as
SIGRA.
A fault record contains the following information:
• Any binary signals (for example, pickup signals and trip signals of protection functions)
You can individually configure the signals to be recorded. Furthermore, you can define the starting condition,
the record duration, and the saving criterion of a recording. Fault records saved in the device are also available
after a loss of auxiliary voltage.
The Fault recorder function is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5. The fault recording and the fault log are subject to the
same control. This ensures that real time, relative time, and numbering of the fault data are synchronized.
In devices with line differential protection (7SD, 7SL), the time management feature synchronizes the fault
records of all line ends via the protection interfaces. This means that all fault recordings function on the same
real-time and relative-time basis.
The data read out via the DIGSI-PC are saved in COMTRADE format. Fault recording data can be transferred
to the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing commu-
nication connections (such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103). The central device analyzes the data using
appropriate programs.
The Fault recorder function records the sampled values, specific to each device, of all analog inputs, the
internally calculated measured values, and the binary signals. The configuration, which is predefined for each
device via an application template, can be adapted individually.
NOTE
i For detailed information about selecting and deleting fault records, refer to the Operating Manual
(C53000-G5040-C003).
The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault memory is filled
completely, the oldest recordings are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most recent recordings are always
stored safely. The maximum number of recordings is 128.
Sampling Frequency
The analog measuring channels are sampled at a different sampling rate for fault recording. The Sampling
frequency parameter is used to set the desired sampling frequency. Possible setting values are 1 kHz, 2 kHz,
4 kHz, and 8 kHz . This setting value applies only to fault recording and does not affect protection functions or
calculated measured values.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 125
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Record Duration
The overall duration of a single fault recording comprises the total duration of the configurable recording
criterion, the Pre-trigger time and the Post-trigger time . You can set the parameters for these
components individually.
[dw_sigrar, 2, en_US]
With the Fault recording parameter, you specify the start criterion of the recording.
You can set the following values:
• with pickup:
The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup signals of all function
groups are taken into account.
• user-defined:
With this setting value, you can individually specify the recording criterion for the fault recording in
DIGSI 5. Function-specific recording criteria can be realized in this way.
If a recording criterion reoccurs during the pickup time and post-trigger time, the recording which is currently
active is extended to include a new post-trigger time.
For a sampling frequency of 8 kHz and 24 analog channels to be recorded, the duration of one individual fault
recording can be up to 20 s.
The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter.
In addition to starting the fault recording via the pickup, the following alternatives are possible:
• Externally via binary input signal >External start (for example, from an external protection device
without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message)
• By way of a configurable input signal >Manual start, you can start fault records with a configurable
length (parameter Manual record time).
• From DIGSI 5, you can start test fault records with a fixed length of 1 s.
• With a command from a central device via an existing communication connection (IEC 61850,
IEC 60870-5-103)
NOTE
i If a pickup signal is present continuously, the fault record is closed after the Maximum record time
expires and the fault recording is not restarted!
126 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
NOTE
i When the Fault recorder function detects a negative time stamp of the measurand or the binary signal, an
entry is added in the Device-diagnosis log in DIGSI. Meanwhile, the fault recording continues. The entry
for an incorrect measurand or binary signal shows the prefix Bad quality.
Fault Memory
The device manages its available fault memory dynamically, so that the maximum recording capacity is always
available. When exceeding the limits of the fault memory, the oldest recordings are automatically overwritten.
This means that the most recent recordings are always available. The sampling rate, type, and number of
measured value trends to be recorded are the crucial variables when it comes to restricting the length and
number of recordings possible. Parallel to the sampled tracks, up to 50 tracks with function-specific measured
values and up to 200 binary tracks can be recorded. The following table provides an overview of the maximum
storage capacities, in seconds, for different connection variations of the protection devices.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 127
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
In the following table, you can find output signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
Control: Error number INS The indication of the current error number
allows a unique allocation of entries in the
message buffers for the recorded fault records.
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
Control: Recording done SPS Fault recording done
Control: Tmax reduced SPS Fault recording ends before the set Maximum
record time expires, because the fault log is
full.
Control: Fault log is full INS The fault log is full.
• In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals to LEDs and
output contacts. To do this, open the project tree.
Project -> Device -> Information routing
• Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
128 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 129
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
Parameter: Storage
• Recommended setting value (_:2761:141) Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec. = 8 kHz
130 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
With the parameter Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec., you define the sampling frequency of the fault
record that you want to download using the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Possible setting values are
8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz, and 1 kHz.
You cannot set the parameter Sampl. freq. IEC 61850 rec. to be greater than the set value of
the parameter Sampling frequency. The setting options of the parameter Sampl. freq. IEC 61850
rec. which are greater than the set value of the parameter Sampling frequency are invisible.
If the size of the COMTRADE file exceeds the maximum permissible storage capacity of the device, the original
recording is truncated. The truncated data are discarded.
NOTE
i If you have created a fault record with a certain sampling frequency and then set the sampling frequency to
a lower value, you can no longer download this fault record using the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
You must reset the sampling frequency to the original value. Then you can download the fault record again
using the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
Parameter: Cal.zero.seq.cur.channel
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 131
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
3.5.5 Settings
132 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.5 Fault Recording
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 133
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
3.6.1 Overview
The Protection communication includes all functionalities necessary for data exchange via the protection
interface (PI).
Devices that communicate with each other via protection interfaces form a device combination. A device
combination consists of 2 to 6 devices. The devices communicate via point-to-point connections (protection
connections). In this case, a device has only one connection to another device via a protection interface (PI).
With a 2nd protection interface, you can establish a connection to another device or a redundant connection
to the same device. With their protection connections, the devices form a protection topology in the form of a
redundant ring (ring topology) or as a chain structure (chain topology).
[dw_PDC_chain_3devices, 1, en_US]
[dw_PDC_ring_3devices, 1, en_US]
[dw_PDC_ring_2devices, 1, en_US]
Within a device combination, the point-to-point connections can have different bandwidths. Depending on
the bandwidth, a certain amount of binary information and measured values can be transmitted bidirection-
ally between the devices. The connection with the lowest bandwidth defines the amount of binary informa-
tion and measured values.
The following information is important for protection communication and is transmitted additionally. You
cannot change this information:
• Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and testing the connection and displayed on the
device or with DIGSI 5.
• Protection data and measured values, such as line differential protection data or binary data of the
teleprotection schemes for distance protection and ground-fault protection are transmitted.
• The time synchronization of the devices is possible directly via the connection, whereby a device of the
protection topology assumes the role of the timing master.
The point-to-point connection between the devices is continuously monitored for data faults and failure and
the signal-transit time of the data is measured.
134 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
The protection communication is typically used for line differential protection and with the teleprotection
schemes for distance protection and ground-fault protection. In SIPROTEC 5, you can configure the protection
communication in all devices and use it for further protection applications. At the same time, any binary
information and measured values can be transferred between the devices.
NOTE
i The protection communication is compatible with the successor versions from firmware version V04.00
and higher.
The following figure illustrates the interaction of protection communication, protection function groups, and
communication modules. The Protection communication is integrated as follows in the overall system:
[dw_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
If protection functions want to use the protection interfaces, their superordinate protection function group,
for example, the FG Line 1, must be connected to a Protection communication function group. With this
connection, each protection function in the FG Line 1 can use protection communication.
In addition, a connection must be configured between the logical protection interface in the FG Protection
communication and a channel on the physical communication module. The physical communication module
must support the protection-interface protocol.
The following chapters describe the configuration of the connections.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 135
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Types Description
Type 1 With type 1, the Line differential protection function is the primary appli-
cation. This application requires the greatest portion of the bandwidth, so
Application during use of Line
that with type 1 the quantity of customer-specific remote data available
differential protection
is lower. This becomes noticeable with a 64 kBit/s protection connection
via a G703.1 or X21 interface. If a multiple-end line differential protection
application is realized, all protection communications in the devices must be
of type 1.
A maximum of 6 line ends (devices) is possible.
If the Line differential protection and Teleprotection scheme functions
are to operate in parallel in the device, the bit rate must not be less than
512 kBit/s!
Type 2 Type 2 provides considerably more bandwidth for customer-specific remote
data, as the line differential protection application is not used in this
Application without use of Line
example. The transmission of protection data and other data, such as meas-
differential protection
ured values as well as the teleprotection scheme, is predominant here.
Using type 2 protection communication, a maximum of 6 devices can be
connected to one another and different device types (for example, 6MD,
7VK, 7SA, and 7SJ) can exchange data.
NOTE
i In the case of devices with the Line differential protection function, for instance 7SD and 7SL, protection
communication type 1 is preset in the application templates of the devices. Type 2 is preset in the
application templates for other devices, and is used for other data transmission.
Type 1 and type 2 protection communication do not work together in pairs via a protection function.
The protection interfaces (PI) establish a direct point-to-point connection between devices via different
communication media. Devices connected to one another via protection interfaces form a protection
topology. See following figure.
[dw_intert, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-53 Data Exchange between 4 Devices with Protection Communication of Type 1 or Type 2 in a
Protection Topology
136 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
The most frequent application is the two-line-end differential protection (the protection communication is of
type 1) or the point-to-point exchange of data between 2 devices (the protection communication is of type 2),
as performed by protection transmission devices.
[dw_interface, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-54 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each with Protection Connection
NOTE
i The index describes the consecutive numbering of the devices in a device combination (see parameter
(_:5131:101) Local device is device).
A maximum of 2 protection interfaces per FG Protection communication are possible in one device, see
following figure. If the Protection communication function groups are connected to each other in the devices
via 2 protection connections of the same type, this results in 100 % redundancy regarding the transmission
route. The devices then search for the communication connection with the highest bandwidth (for example,
optical fiber). If this protection connection fails, the system switches over automatically to the 2nd protection
connection until the 1st protection connection is available again. As the protection connection with lower
bandwidth defines the maximum amount of transferable information, the same information is exchanged
via both protection connections. One application of this is line differential protection routed via a redundant
communication connection. Both protection communications in the device are then of type 1.
[dw_intera, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-55 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having 2 Protection Connections, Redundant Transmission
Route
• Chain topology
• Ring topology
The chain topology is shown in the following figure.
This configuration shows that the indexing of the devices does not have to correspond to the order in the
communication chain.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 137
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_chaint, 1, en_US]
[dw_ringto, 1, en_US]
138 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i If a connection fails in the ring topology, this configuration continues to function as a chain topology. In a
ring topology, any device can be logged off from the device combination, for example, during inspection
works at a line end without current flow (open disconnector).
Remote Data
With the Remote data function, customer-specific indications and measured values can be communicated via
the protection interface with settable update cycles (priorities).
There are 3 different priorities for the transmission of remote data:
• Priority 1: Use Priority 1 for the transmission of fast protection signals that are transferred and updated
at a maximum of every 20 ms in a telegram.
• Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications that are
transferred and updated at a maximum of every 40 ms.
• Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured, and metered values that are transferred and
updated a maximum of every 100 ms.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values available conform with the
remaining bandwidth. The remaining bandwidth is lower when using Line differential protection (type 1) than
with all other protection functions (type 2). Customer-specific measured values consume more bandwidth
than single-point indications.
Communication Media
The communication takes place via direct fiber-optic connections, via communication networks or via 2-wire
copper conductors. Siemens recommends a direct fiber-optic connection, as this offers a high transmission
rate and is immune to failures in the transmission route while offering the shortest transmission time. This
also enables the transmission of a large amount of remote data in line differential protection applications and
the remote control of remote devices with DIGSI 5.
The distance to be bridged and the transmission paths (communication media) available determine the
settings of the protection interface. External communication converters are used for the connection to
communication networks via G703.1-, X21-, or G703.6 interfaces. The connection to 2-wire copper cores
also takes place via a communication converter. The C37.94 interface, for example, with 2 MBit/s, offers a
direct fiber-optic connection to a multiplexer with the corresponding interface.
Table 3-10 to Table 3-11 show examples of communication connections.
In the case of a direct connection, the transmission distance depends on the fiber type of the optical fiber. This
distance can also be extended via external repeaters.
The modules in the device can be replaced from outside, so that adaptation to a transmission route is possible.
In the case of the 820-nm double module USART-AE-2FO, 2 protection-interface channels can be operated on
one module.
The modules can be located at slots E and F in the base device, and at slots N and P in the plug-in module
assembly with integrated power supply.
When using communication converters, the connection from the device to the communication converter by a
module is established via optical fibers.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 139
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Plug-In Modules
140 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Plug-In Module
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 2 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber ●
2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 2 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber ●
Application
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) ● ●
NOTE
i The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N and P
in the CB202 expansion module. They are not suitable for use in port M in the CB202 expansion module.
[dw_multim, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-58 Connection over Short Distances, up to 2 km via Multimode Optical Fiber
[dw_multim-02, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 141
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_single2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-60 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber
[dw_attenuator, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i Connect two 7XV5107-0AA00 attenuators if you use the communication modules USART-AV-2LDFO or
USART-AK-1LDFO for transmission routes of less than 30 km. To continue using the duplex LC plug, attach
both attenuators to one end of the protection connection (see Figure 3-61).
[dw_single, 1, en_US]
142 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_multim-05, 1, en_US]
The connection to the multiplexer is established via a communication converter with a G703.1 interface
(64 kBit/s) or X21 interface (64 kBit/s to 512 kBit/s). You can set the bit rate for the KU-XG-512 (for X21), KU-
XG-256 (for X21), KU-XG-128 (for X21), and KU-XG-64 (for X21 or G703.1) with the parameter Connection
via.
You can find more detailed information in Table 3-12.
[dw_multim-06, 1, en_US]
The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit/s via a communication converter with a G703.6
interface (E1 with 2 MBit/s or T1 with 1.44 MBit/s). The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for
connecting an additional protection interface.
Adjust the setting for the bit rate with KU-2M-512 at 512 kBbit/s in accordance with Table 3-12 with the
parameter (_:105) Connection via.
[dw_multi_7, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 143
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
The connection to a communication converter with an integrated isolation voltage of 5 kV is established with
128 kBit/s (KU-KU-128 setting in accordance with Table 3-12). An isolation of 20 kV of the 2-wire connection is
possible via an external 7XR9516 isolating transformer.
[dw_repeat, 1, en_US]
The repeater offers an interface for connecting an additional protection interface. The connection to a
repeater is established with 512 kBit/s (repeater 512 kBit/s setting in accordance with Table 3-12).
[dw_mutip8, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-67 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37.94 N * 64 kBit/s Interface (Time Slot N =
1; 2 or 8)
NOTE
i The redundancy of different communication connections (for the ring topology) requires rigorous separa-
tion of all devices involved in the communication. Therefore, avoid different transmission routes via the
same multiplexer board, as no more substitute paths are possible if the board fails.
144 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
• IRIG B
• DCF77
• IEEE 1588
• SNTP
For this, these time sources must be set as the 1st time source and optionally as the 2nd time source in the
timing master. If available, the system switches over to the 2nd time source upon failure of the 1st time
source in the timing master.
The following chapters describe how a device is set as a timing master:
• For classic protection communication, see Parameter: Address of Device x, Page 155.
• For advanced protection communication, see Parameter: Device index, Page 193.
Set the protection interface as the 1st time source in the other devices of the device combination. You can find
the setting value in DIGSI 5 via the Project tree → Parameters → Time settings → Timer → Time source 1
→ PI.
In this way, all events in the devices of the device combination are recorded with the same time and are
time-synchronized even across different switchgears. This simplifies fault analysis and the fault records are
recorded with the same time in all devices.
[dw_time_sy, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-68 shows how device 1 with index 1 is synchronized with devices 2, 3, and 4 via the protection
interface. Device 1 is the timing master, whose time is synchronized with a selectable, external time source.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 145
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Time Synchronization of the Line Differential Protection Measured Values with Millisecond Accuracy
The measured values of the devices connected via the protection interfaces are synchronized via telegram
measurement with microsecond accuracy (1*10E-06 s). The protection interface displays this state with the
indication PI synchronized RAISING.
If communications problems occur, it is possible that the measured values may not be properly synchronized.
In this case, the protection interface generates the indication PI synchronized CLEARED. The line differen-
tial protection is blocked. This state can be corrected only manually.
NOTE
i You can reset the synchronization of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset synchron.
For special line differential protection applications or synchrophasor measuring devices, you can also time-
synchronize the measured values with microsecond accuracy as follows:
• Via a high-precision electrical synchronization pulse (PPS electrical, 1-second pulse) from a satellite
receiver at time-synchronization port G
• Via a high-precision optical synchronization pulse (PPS optical, 1-second pulse) from a satellite receiver
at a USART communication module
• The device combination is not in a transient state and is stable in operation without switchovers of
the protection connections. This displays the message of the device combination Status of topo.
recog. with the value Valid.
• In a given chain topology, the device to be logged off is one of the 2 devices at the end of the
communication chain.
• The circuit breaker must be open on the side of the device to be logged off and current must not be
flowing.
NOTE
i If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the device cannot be logged off.
146 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
You can find these measured values in the device under the following DIGSI mask:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 147
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Multiplex Operation
With extended protection communication, you have the option of having a physical USART channel used by
2 logical protection interfaces. In this way, a transmission route can be double used, for example to implement
Parallel line protection with Line differential protection without additional hardware. To do this, configure
the channel according to chapter 3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI
5.
[dw_channel-mux, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i Note that in case of multiple use of a physical channel, the available bandwidth is divided equally between
the logical protection interfaces. Therefore, this operating mode is not suitable for baud rates under
128 kBit/s.
NOTE
i In case of multiple use of a physical USART connection – for example, for protection of a double line – you
must provide further redundancy concepts.
148 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i Do not confuse the 2 variants of the protection communication with type 1 and type 2 of the protection
communication!
NOTE
i If you are unsure about the suitable variant for your use case during selection, use the advanced protection
communication.
NOTE
i If you want to change an existing classic protection communication to an advanced protection communica-
tion or vice versa, a window appears in DIGSI where you are asked whether you want to keep the mapping
or not - that is, the communication settings or communication-information routing that has previously
been set. In this case, click No
3.6.5.1 Overview
The classic protection communication enables the data exchange between the devices via synchronous serial
point-to-point connections from 64 kBit/s to 2 mBit/s. These connections can be directly via optical fiber or
via other communication media, for example, via dedicated lines or via communication networks. IP-based
communication is not supported.
The function groups of the classic protection communication always support a fixed number of devices in the
device combination:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 149
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_simple_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
(1) The device automatically routes the connection between the protection FG and the Protection
communication FG in DIGSI 5.
• Device combination
• Protection interface
• FB External synchronization for the synchronization of the transferred data through an external
synchronous pulse (1-second-pulse, PPS9)
150 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_structure_FG_protcom_simple, 1, en_US]
The function Device combination manages the devices that exchange data via protection communication.
In the device-combination settings, you set the general settings for the device combination and the device
addresses.
The function Device combination issues the following indications:
NOTE
i In contrast to the protection interface in extended protection communication, the protection interface in
classic protection communication is automatically connected to a physical channel of the communication
module (refer to Figure 3-71).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 151
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• In the Properties of the communication module > Protocols > Channel x Protocols, select the
Protection interface protocol.
[sc_PDC_classic_protocol, 1, en_US]
152 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
• Then select the number of devices under Mapping (see next figure).
Depending on the device, the selection of device combinations can be restricted to 2 or 3 devices.
The number of devices is an order option with regard to the line differential protection.
[sc_PDC_classic_mapping, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The function groups shown in Figure 3-74 are not available in the DIGSI library.
You can change the number of devices (for example 2 protection communication devices) depending on
the product code any way you like via the Mapping text box.
If you change the number of devices via the Mapping text box, all activated remote data, settings of the
device combination and of the protection interface are lost.
If the module slot is not yet provided with modules, proceed as follows:
• Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
• Select the module from the catalog and drag it to a channel. Thus is the channel configured with a
module. DIGSI 5 indicates whether the module can be used for protection communication under Device
Information.
• Use the Protocols text box to select the Protection interface, see Figure 3-73.
• Then use the Mapping text box to select the number of devices, for example 2 devices protection com.,
see Figure 3-74.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 153
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_config1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-75 Selection of the Protocol: Communication via the Protection Interface
[sc_config, 4, en_US]
154 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Changes in the device-combination settings are always visible on the other channel as well. All further
parameters can be set separately for individual channels.
NOTE
i The number of device addresses displayed corresponds to that of the number selected during the device-
combination configuration.
NOTE
• Under Address of device 1 set the address for the timing master device.
• Parameterize the other devices such that they get their time from the timing master device via the
protection connections.
For more information, refer to 3.8.3 Function Description. Select as the adjustable synchronization
option Protection interface.
In the timing master device you must not set the protection interface as the synchronization source!
APPLICATION EXAMPLE
You have a device combination with 2 devices.
For example, in DIGSI 5, select the parameter setting Address of device 1 with the parameter value 101
for device 1 and the parameter setting Address of device 2 with the parameter value 102 for device 2.
Then, use the Local device is device parameter to set the index of the local device. The local device is
the device that you parametrize.
The addresses must be set identically for all devices in the device combination. Functional protection commu-
nication requires that you also assign the same index in all devices of the device combination for a device with
a unique address.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 155
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
With the parameter Lowest appearing bit rate, you set the lowest bit rate occurring in the device
group. Set the lowest value in each device with a three-end constellation with 2 fiber-optic connections (2
MBit/s) and one 64 kBit/s connection with the lowest value (64 kBit/s). This value determines the maximum
number of selected and self-created signals and measured values which are to be transmitted within the
device combination (refer to 3.6.5.9 Configuring Remote Data).
Apart from the default value, you can also set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If you use optical fibers for a connection between the devices, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
NOTE
i The Number of devices parameter is only visible for device combinations with more than 2 devices.
Set the same number of devices used in all devices that are part of the device combination.
Connection mode
156 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i To use the Teleprotection scheme and the Line differential protection function at the same time, a bit
rate of at least 512 kBit/s is required.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 157
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
If the number of faulty telegrams per hour exceeds the value set in the parameter Max. error rate per
hour, you receive the error message Error rate / hour exc..
NOTE
i The parameter Difference Tx and Rx time only shows when the function Line differential protec-
tion is instantiated and the parameter Synchronization is not set to External synch. only.
158 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i If you use a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a means of communication, Siemens recommends a
setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.
Parameter: Synchronization
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 159
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
The parameter External synchronization is visible only if the parameter Synchronization is not set
to External synchron. off.
External synchronization is possible separately for each protection interface.
Parameter Value Description
PPS electrical (Port G) The electrical synchronous pulse of a satellite receiver (1-second-pulse,
PPS10) is the synchronization source on the port G, the time synchronization
interface.
IEEE 1588 The time synchronization protocol IEEE 1588 for an Ethernet-BD communi-
cation module is used for synchronization.
NOTE
i The configuration option IEEE 1588 is only visible if the device has an Ethernet-BD communication
module and you have selected the communication protocol IEEE 1588, see following figure.
[sc_BD_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-77 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Selection of the IEEE 1588 Protocol
NOTE
i External synchronization takes into account the signal-transit time in the transmission and reception direc-
tions. If external synchronization fails for a short time, for example, due to a receiving interference or an
unfavorable satellite position for a brief period, internal synchronization via telegram measurement is still
active.
160 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i In contrast to the protection interface in extended protection communication, the protection interface in
classic protection communication is automatically connected to a channel of a communication module (see
Figure 3-71).
NOTE
i The inaccuracy of the synchronization source enters the stabilization of the Line differential protection as
an error signal.
This means that a greater inaccuracy increases the calculated restraining quantity and makes the Line
differential protection less sensitive.
If IEEE 1588 is used as the synchronization source in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global,
accuracy values are supplied with the synchronization signals and the parameter Max. inaccuracy is not
used. If the supplied accuracy values become invalid, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is
used.
If the synchronization source IEEE 1588 works in the synchronization status SmpSynch = local, then the
value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If the synchronization source PPS electrical (Port G) or PPS optical (USART) is used, then the value set in the
parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanent inaccuracy.
If a USART communication module with the PPS protocol and the PPS generatoroperating mode is also used
as a synchronization source at the same time, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as
permanent inaccuracy.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 161
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i If you use PPS electrical (port G) as the synchronization source, the synchronization status (SmpSynch) is
permanently set to global.
If you use PPS optical (USART) as the synchronization source, you can use the setting (_:107)
Received. SmpSynch to set the synchronization status to (SmpSynch) local or global.
For synchronization with microsecond accuracy, for example with Line differential protection, adjust the
parameter (_:107) to Accepted. SmpSynch = global.
Indication Description
initialized: The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
PI connected: The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of the
partner device.
PI data fault: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after .
PI data failure: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after .
not existing: The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.
162 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 163
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
164 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Release measured values.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 165
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Indication Description
(_:9181:301) PPS pulse This indication shows that the synchronization has failed. This can be due to
loss the following reasons:
[lo_pps_syn, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-78 Logic for the Generation of the Indication PPS pulse loss
166 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_data, 1, en_US]
The data bar is divided into 3 priorities, which also have different transmission rates and data volumes.
For all signals to be sent, the basic principle is that only pure data contents are transmitted. The quality (for
example, Valid) is not automatically transmitted as well. If you want to transmit the quality as well (for
example, for further processing of GOOSE messages), the quality must be transmitted separately (for example,
by using CFC). If a signal that has a test flag is transmitted (because its function is in test mode, for example),
all signals are provided with a test flag on the receiving side. If the connection is broken, all received signals
are flagged with the quality Invalid. If desired, the value can also be set to a predefined state after a
selectable dropout time or the last value received can be retained (Hold setting). This can be configured
separately for each received signal (see Table 3-17).
NOTE
Signals that are transferred data fields of priority 1 are sent with every telegram. They are preferably used for
the transmission of rapid signals, for example, release for circuit-breaker intertripping. A strictly deterministic,
rapid transmission is required there.
Signals of priority 2 are transmitted with at least every 2nd telegram. For bit rates >256 kBit, there are no
differences between priority 1 and priority 2.
Priority 3 signals are transmitted at least every 100 ms. This priority is used for transmission of measured and
metered values. Complex values must be routed separately as the real and the imaginary part for transmission.
Measured-value thresholds that lead to an updating of a measured value are set centrally as a property of the
measured value. These measured-value thresholds apply with the corresponding reporting, for example, also
for the transfer via IEC 61850 to a substation automation technology.
Signals which are written to a data area x under a priority on the data bar must be routed to an indication
of the same type in the device reading this information. Otherwise, they are processed incorrectly on the
receiving side. The data bar is organized in terms of bits. For information on the bit requirement of each signal
type, refer to Table 3-16.
Table 3-14 and Table 3-15 show the number of data areas in the data bar in relation to the available baud
rate.
NOTE
i Adjust the parameter (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate in each device for the protection
interfaces in a device combination. This determines the number of data areas.
If, for example, in a device combination with 3 devices with a type 2 chain topology 2 devices are connected
via direct optical fibers and 2 devices with a bit rate of 64 kBit/s, the 64 kBit/s section is the limiting factor for
the entire device combination.
Table 3-14 Available Bits – Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 64/128 kBit/s
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 167
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Table 3-15 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 512/2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If the protection link fails, these values can be set on the receiver side.
EXAMPLE
2 devices are connected with line differential protection via a 64-kBit channel. This is a type 1 protection
communication. There are 8 bits available for priority 1. Now, for example, 4 SPS and 2 DPS can be routed:
4 x 1 Bit + 2 x 2 Bits = 8 Bits
NOTE
EXAMPLE
168 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_comm_select, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-81 to Figure 3-85 show the routing for a type 1 protection communication.
To transmit signals to other devices, these signals must be routed in the communication matrix under
Transmit. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are single-point indications (SPS) and are routed to bit position 1 and bit
position 2 of the transmission with the highest priority (priority 1). For 64 kBit/s, for example, only 8 of
these data areas are available for type 1 protection communication; they are exchanged between the devices
with each telegram. Signals 3 and 4 are double-point indications (DPS), for example, a switch position that
is transmitted by device 1. A double-point indication occupies 2 bit positions on the data bar. In addition, a
measured and metered value are communicated with priority 3.
As a measured or metered value uses 32 bits, value 2 starts at bit position 33. DIGSI 5 shows the next free bit
position.
[sc_ran_sps, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 169
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_rang_mw, 1, en_US]
[sc_rang_zw, 1, en_US]
Device 1 also receives signals (in the communication mapping under Receive, see next figure). These signals
must be routed with the other devices under Transmit. The binary outputs 1 and 2 in device 1 receive
their information via the protection communication. This is priority 1 information, which has been routed in
another device to position 3 and 4 of the data bar for transmission. The secure state is predefined in the
Fallback value column. If the protection connection fails, the single-point indication is reset to raising or
cleared as the fallback value or its value is retained (Hold). For signals of the various priorities, you can also
set a dropout time after which the reset (see following figure) to the fallback value occurs, in order to retain
the original state for a short time in the event of brief interruptions. These 3 dropout times apply for all signals
of one transmission priority and are set as parameters.
170 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_remotedata, 2, en_US]
[sc_spsemp, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are routed with priority 1 to
bit positions 3 and 4 there. In device 1, bit positions 1 and 2 are already occupied (see Figure 3-81). If you also
route the signals to bit positions 1 and 2, the signals of both devices are then connected to the corresponding
bit position with a logical OR operation. If measured and metered values are routed in the same data areas,
this results in implausible values for the receivers. As a user, you are therefore responsible for the correct
routing.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 171
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_baspsr, 1, en_US]
The binary outputs 1 and 2 (Receive) in the 2nd device are connected to priority 1 signals 1 and 2 from
the 1st device. This takes place via the data areas at positions 1 and 2 of the data bar, which transfer the
state of the signals. Other devices can also read this information and logically link it to their internal signals.
Here, too, the secure state, which is assumed when the protection connection is interrupted, is entered. This
state depends on the information. With single-point indications, states 0 or 1 make sense. In the case of
double-point indications, bit combinations 00, 01, 10, or 11 are possible to directly signal a disturbed position
upon failure of the protection connection, for example.
Hold is used to retain the state before the failure of the protection connection.
[sc_bausps, 1, en_US]
[sc_bausmw, 1, en_US]
172 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_bauszw, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The constellation measured values are only available for the FG Line.
Each device in the device combination determines measured values predefined by Siemens, known as constel-
lation measured values. You can find the constellation measured values in the DIGSI 5 information routing
under the FG n Device protection comm. > Constell. measured values. The following measured values and
indications are issued for each device:
Measured Value Meaning
(_:1351:6811:302) Vph This measured value shows the voltage of the 3 phases that is synchronized
with all devices of the device combination. The absolute value and angle are
issued for each phase.
(_:1351:6811:303) Iph This measured value shows the current of the 3 phases that is synchronized
with all devices of the device combination. The absolute value and angle are
issued for each phase.
(_:1351:6811:300) Dev.adr. This indication shows the device address. This allows you to assign the
measured values and the circuit-breaker position in a better way.
(_:1351:6811:301) CB This indication shows the position of the local circuit breaker and can have
the following values:
• 0:
The switch position of the local circuit breaker is unknown.
• 1
The local circuit breaker is open.
• 2
The local circuit breaker is closed.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 173
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
The angle reference depends on the type of the FG Protection communication used:
3.6.5.11 Settings
174 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 175
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
176 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 177
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
3.6.6.1 Overview
The advanced protection communication contains all functionalities of classic protection communication. The
view of parameters and indications is structured differently in DIGSI 5. In addition, the advanced protection
communication supports the IP-based communication protocol.
You can easily change the number of devices in the device combination. Further differences include support
for external synchronization sources and an exchange of phase-selective information while sending and
receiving.
In the DIGSI 5 library, you can find the available function groups for the advanced protection communication
in the Advanced protection communication folder. The following function-group types can be instantiated:
[dw_advanced_protcom_compl_system, 2, en_US]
(1) The following applies for the FG Line and the FG Voltage/Current 3-phase: You must route the
connection between the protection FG and the FG Protection communication in DIGSI 5.
(2) You must assign a channel to the protection interface, see Parameter: PI assignment, Page 184.
178 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
• FB Device combination
• 1 or 2 FBs for the External synchronization of the transmitted measured values by an external synchro-
nization pulse (1-second pulse, PPS) or via the IEEE 1588 synchronization protocol
You can find the FB External synchronization in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Extended protection
communication > Synchronization.
• The FB Remote data is instantiated automatically, as soon as you configure remote data.
[dw_structure_FG_protcom_advanced, 2, en_US]
Device Combination
The function Device combination manages the devices that exchange data via the protection communica-
tion.
The following FBs are preconfigured in the device combination:
• FB General
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 179
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Protection Interface
The FB Protection interface transmits and receives signals and measured values to/from the partner device.
For this, the protection interface uses the channel of a communication module.
External Synchronization
Measured values that are acquired and exchanged in the devices at the same time, with microsecond accuracy
are transmitted via the protection communication. The measured values can be synchronized as follows:
• Externally via
– An external, synchronous pulse 1-second-pulse (PPS)
– Via the IEEE 1588 protocol
If you want to use an external synchronization, you must instantiate the FB External synchronization.
You can use a different synchronization procedure for the 2nd protection interface than for the 1st
protection interface.
Remote Data
If you want to exchange selected and user-specific data or measured values via the protection communication,
you must use the Remote data function. If you route a specific signal or a measured value to the protection
communication, the device automatically creates the Remote data functionality. The routed signals are then
transmitted and received via the protection interface. The available bandwidth limits the amount of remote
data that can be transmitted.
Phase Swap
If you want to exchange information via the protection communication with a device showing phases with
a different sequence but with the same rotating field as your device, the SIPROTEC 5 device can swap the
phase information when sending and receiving. It is no longer necessary to swap phases when connecting the
current transformers.
This use case exists on some tie lines of different power-system operators.
For more information, refer to 3.6.6.12 Description Phase Swapping and 3.6.6.13 Setting Notes for Phase
Swapping.
180 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
• The further parameterization depends on the selected communication module and is described in the
following under:
– Advanced Protection Interface for a USART Communication Module, Page 181
– Advanced Protection Interface for an Ethernet-BD Communication Module, Page 183
[sc_USART_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-93 USART Communication Module: Selection of the Protocol Advanced Protection Interface
After selecting the protocol, click Settings in the right column to get to the connection settings of the USART
protection-interface module for channel 1.
[sc_USART_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-94 USART Communication Module: Settings for the Advanced Protection Interface
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 181
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i To use the Teleprotection scheme and the Line differential protection function at the same time, a bit
rate of at least 512 kBit/s is required.
NOTE
i For safety reasons, you cannot route 2 protection interfaces from the same device combination to one
channel, as this results in apparent redundancy.
182 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_ETH-BD_01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-95 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Selection of the Protocol Advanced Protection Interface
After selecting the protocol, click Settings in the right column to get to the connection settings of the
Ethernet-BD communication module for channel 1.
[sc_ETH-BD_02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-96 Ethernet-BD Communication Module: Settings for the Advanced Protection Interface
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 183
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
With the UDP port parameter, you set the value of the destination port in the UDP header of the protection-
interface IP messages. You must set the same value for the parameter UDP port for all protection devices
of a device combination that use the IP-based protection interface. Different device combinations can use
the same value for the UDP port parameter. Normally, the default setting can always be applied. It can be
necessary, for example, due to firewall policies, to configure a UDP port that differs from the default setting.
Parameterize the IP address of the Ethernet-BD communication module in the properties of the module.
[sc_IPadr, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-97 Parameterization of the IP Address for the Ethernet-BD Communication Module
The configuration and parameterization of the protection-interface communication module is now complete.
Parameter: PI assignment
184 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_WSselect, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 185
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i TheDifference Tx and Rx time parameter only visible if the Line differential protection function is
instantiated and the parameter Synchronization is not set to External synch. only.
NOTE
i If you use a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a communication medium, Siemens recommends a
setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.
Parameter: Synchronization
186 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i If the protection interface is connected to a channel on a USART communication module (see Parameter: PI
assignment, Page 184), the external synchronization is used to take into account the signal-transit times in
the transmission and receive direction.
If the external synchronization fails for a short time, for example, due to a receiving interference or an
unfavorable satellite position for a brief period, the internal synchronization via the telegram measurement
is still active.
NOTE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 187
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
With the external synchronization, the time synchronization of the measured values with microsecond accu-
racy is possible through an external synchronization source.
The parameter FB External synchron. is only visible if you have instantiated at least 1 FB External
synchronization from the Global DIGSI 5 library into the FG Protection communication. You can instantiate a
maximum of 2 FBs for external synchronization.
With the parameter FB External synchron., you specify whether the protection interface uses the FB
Ext. synchronization 1 or the FB Ext. synchronization 2 for the synchronization. You parameterize the
synchronization source in the corresponding FB External synchronization, see 3.6.6.9 Setting Notes for
External Synchronization.
NOTE
NOTE
i If you use PPS electrical (port G) as the synchronization source, the synchronization status (SmpSynch) is
permanently set to global.
If you use PPS optical (USART) as the synchronization source, you can use the parameter (_:107)
Received. SmpSynch to set the synchronization status to (SmpSynch) local or global.
For a synchronization with microsecond accuracy, for example, for the Line differential protection, set the
parameter (_:107) Received. SmpSynch = global.
188 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Indication Description
initialized: The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
PI connected: The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of the
partner device.
PI data fault: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after.
PI data failure: The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after.
not existing: The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 189
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
190 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > Protection comm. (Type x) > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 191
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
EXAMPLE:
For a device combination consisting of 3 devices in a ring topology with 2 fiber-optic connections (2 MBit/s)
and a 64-kBit/s connection, set the smallest value (64 kBit/s) in each device.
Apart from the default value, you can set the following bit rates:
• 128 kBit/s
• 512 kBit/s
• 2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If you use optical fibers for all protection connections, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
Connection mode
NOTE
i As soon as a SIPROTEC 4 device is present in the device combination, the SIPROTEC 5 devices must operate
in a compatibility mode. For this reason, the parameter Connection mode must be set to the same
value in all SIPROTEC 5 devices in the device combination. Select the type of SIPROTEC 4 device from the
following table:
192 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i In the Global DIGSI 5 library, the function groups Protection communication type 1 (line diff. protection)
and Protection com. Type 2 are available for the advanced protection communication. When instanti-
ating the respective function group, the corresponding type of the device combination is automatically
pre-instantiated.
NOTE
i If you have instantiated the FG Protection com. Type 2, the Device combination Type 2 is automatically
pre-instantiated in this FG and the Line differential protection function is not supported.
If you subsequently want to use the Line differential protection function in the device combination of the
FG Protection com. Type 2, proceed as follows:
• In the DIGSI 5 project tree, delete the function block Device combination from the FG protection
comm. (type 2).
• Instantiate the function block Device combination type 1 (line diff. protection) from the Global
DIGSI 5 library into the FG Protection com. Type 2.
• Reroute the indications of the device combination in the DIGSI 5 information routing.
All other parameterizations and routings are retained!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 193
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i The device with the Device index = 1 is the timing-master device in a device combination.
If all other devices in the device combination are to obtain their time from the timing-master device,
consider the following
• Parameterize the other devices in such a way that they get their time from the timing-master device
via the protection connections.
For more information, refer to 3.8.3 Function Description. Select Protection interface as the
adjustable synchronization option.
In the timing-master device, you must not set the protection interface as the synchronization source!
NOTE
i If the preset values do not fit, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
Define a number for the device combination that is unambiguous in your area of responsibility and that
must be at least 2 digits, for example, 100. The setting value of the parameter Address in Device
combi. is then calculated as follows: Number in the device combination + Device index.
For device 2, this leads to Address in Device combi. = 102.
Parameter: IP Address
NOTE
i If all devices of a device combination are equipped with an Ethernet-BD communication module and use
the IP communication, you must enter the IP addresses for all other devices in the device combination here.
The topology detection automatically sets a ring or chain topology.
194 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i If you have a hybrid configuration, that is not all protection connections of a device combination use the IP
communication, you must observe the following when setting the IP addresses:
• First define the order for the communication between the devices. Define chain or ring topologies for
this purpose.
The defined topology results in the partner devices for each device, with which the device communi-
cates directly.
Only set the IP addresses for the partner devices that are equipped with an Ethernet-BD communica-
tion module here.
• You can find examples of the parameterization of the IP addresses in hybrid configurations in
the chapters 3.6.8.4 Device Combination of 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media and
3.6.8.5 Device Combination of 6 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media.
Indication Meaning
(_:3321:2311:301) The devices form a topology via the protection connections. This indication
Status of topo. recog. shows the status of the topology detection and can have the following
values:
• Unknown:
The topology is unknown.
• Invalid:
The detected topology is not supported.
• Transient:
The topology has just been modified.
• Valid:
The topology has been detected. The indication Devices form
shows the type of the detected topology.
(_:3321:2311:302) The indication shows whether all configured devices in the device combi-
Topology is nation communicate with each other via the protection connections. The
indication can have the following values:
• Unknown:
The topology is unknown.
• Incomplete:
At least one device in the device combination does not communicate
via the protection connections.
• Complete:
All configured devices in the device combination communicate via the
protection connections.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 195
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
Indication Meaning
(_:3321:2311:303) This indication shows the type of the detected topology that the devices in
Devices form the device combination form via the protection connections. The indication
can have the following values:
• Unknown topol:
The topology is unknown.
• Chain topology:
The devices and their protection connections form a chain topology.
• Ring topology
The devices and their protection connections form a ring topology.
(_:3321:2311:304) The indication shows the number of devices that communicate via the
Number of detect. dev. protection connections in the device combination.
• 0:
The switch position of the circuit breaker is unknown.
• 1
The circuit breaker is open.
• 2
The circuit breaker is closed.
(_:22711:328) Line This message indicates whether the function Line differential protection is
diff. test 12 in the state Test or Test/Relay blk..
(_:22711:329) Local This message indicates whether the function Line differential protection is
Line diff. test 12 in the special test mode Test local device.
NOTE
i The constellation measured values are only available for the FG Line.
Each device in the device combination determines measured values predefined by Siemens, known as constel-
lation measured values. You can find the constellation measured values in the DIGSI 5 information routing
under the FG Protection comm. (Type x) > Device combination > Device x. The following measured values
and indications are issued for each device:
12 This message is only available in the FG Protection communication type 1 (line diff. protection).
196 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 197
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
• Via a high-precision electrical synchronous pulse (PPS electrical (Port G), 1-second pulse) from a
satellite receiver at the time-synchronization interface (Port G)
• Via a high-precision optical synchronous pulse (PPS optical (USART), 1-second pulse) from a satel-
lite receiver at a USART communication module
198 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
With external synchronization, you can measure and display the signal-transit time of the transmission and
receive path separately. This allows you to achieve maximum sensitivity even with unequal (unbalanced)
signal-transit times in communication networks with the line differential protection. For the transmission of
protection data in the type 2 protection communication, different signal-transit times do not play a role.
If an FB External synchronization is instantiated, the parameter Synchronization is visible in the FB
Protection interf.. With this parameter, you establish the connection between the protection interface and
the type of external synchronization. See 3.6.6.5 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface.
If you use 2 protection interfaces in the FG Protection comm., you can set a different synchronization source
for each protection interface if required. For this use case, you must instantiate 2 FBs External synchroniza-
tion into the FG Protection comm. and set the desired synchronization source separately.
NOTE
i The possible setting options of the parameter Synchronization source depend on the configuration
of the protocol for the respective channel of the communication module.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 199
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
To display the selection text for the selection of an optical synchronous pulse, you must configure the protocol
PPS on a USART communication module as follows:
[sc_PPS, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-100 Configuration of the Optical Synchronous Pulse (PPS) on a Channel of a USART Communication
Module
200 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
To display the selection text for the selection of the protocol IEEE 1588, you must configure the protocol IEEE
1588 on an Ethernet-BD communication module as follows:
[sc_1588, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-101 Configuration of the Protocol IEEE 1588 on an Ethernet-BD Communication Module
The setting options for the parameter Synchronization source then look as follows, for example:
[sc_syncopt, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 201
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
i You can select different synchronization sources for the same protection connection in the devices
involved, for example, the synchronization via the IEEE 1588 protocol in device 1 and via the protocol
PPS electrical in device 2.
Siemens recommends using the same synchronization source for the same protection connection. If it is
not possible to use the same synchronization source, check the differential current in the line differential
protection in the mode Test on all devices. If the differential current is not in the expected range, the set
synchronization sources are not synchronous to each other and therefore not usable.
NOTE
i For detailed information on the communication protocols, refer to the SIPROTEC 5 manual Communication
Protocols.
NOTE
i The inaccuracy of the synchronization source enters the stabilization of the Line differential protection as
an error signal.
This means that greater inaccuracy increases the calculated stabilization quantity and makes the Line
differential protection less sensitive.
If IEEE 1588 is used as the synchronization source in the synchronization status SmpSynch = global,
accuracy values are supplied with the synchronization signals and the parameter Max. inaccuracy is not
202 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
used. If the supplied accuracy values become invalid, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is
used.
If the synchronization source IEEE 1588 works in the synchronization status SmpSynch = local, then the
value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If PPS electrical (Port G) or PPS optical (USART) are used as synchronization source, then the value set in the
parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as permanently available inaccuracy.
If a USART communication module with the PPS protocol and the PPS generator operating mode is also used
as a synchronization source at the same time, the value set in the parameter Max. inaccuracy is used as
permanently available inaccuracy.
Indication Description
(_:501) >PPS pulse loss The indication (_:501) >PPS pulse loss is only visible with the
following setting options of the parameter (_:117) Synchronization
source:
• G:Timesynchron.PPS
• [Port]:USART-AD-1FO.Channel x.PPS
• [Port]:USART-AE-2FO.Channel x.PPS
The binary input (_:501) >PPS pulse loss can be used to signal
an externally detected failure in the PPS synchronous pulse, for example,
an error message from the satellite receiver. If the binary input (_:501)
>PPS pulse loss is set, this leads to the indication (_:304)
Synchronization loss. The external synchronization detects immedi-
ately that there is a problem with the connected synchronization pulse.
Otherwise, the problem will only be noticed after approx. 2.1 s – after the
test for synchronous-pulse failure.
(_:304) Synchronization The synchronization has failed. This can be due to a problem with the
loss synchronization source.
The indication (_:304) Synchronization loss shows that the
synchronization has failed. This can be due to the following reasons:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 203
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[lo_pps_syn, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-103 Logic for the Generation of the Indication >PPS pulse loss
Phase Swap
If you want to exchange information via the protection communication with a device showing phases with
a different sequence but with the same rotating field as your device, the SIPROTEC 5 device can swap the
phase information when sending and receiving. It is no longer necessary to swap phases when connecting the
current transformers.
This use case exists on some tie lines of different power-system operators.
Figure 3-104 shows an example of the different designation of the same phases at the line ends. For example,
phase A on the left side of the line becomes phase C on the right side. If a SIPROTEC 5 device is used on the
right side, you can instantiate the FB Phase swap in the FG Advanced protection communication. Use the
FB Phase swap to set how the phases are swapped when sending and receiving phase-selective information
via the protection interface.
This results in the following SIPROTEC 5 device behavior:
• Connect the current and voltage transformers to the terminals A, B, and C of the protection device as
usual.
• The protection functions in both devices, such as Line differential protection or Teleprotection with
distance protection cooperate without any problems.
• The phase-selective messages and measured values are displayed correctly from the point of view of the
respective device.
204 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_different_phs-designation_are_compens_send-receive, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-104 Differing Phase Designations Are Compensated for while Sending and Receiving
(1) Other phase designations than at the opposite end for the same physical phase
NOTE
i Phase swapping does not support the I2-DIFF stage of the function Line differential protection.
Swapping of user-specific phase-selective information sent and received using the function Remote data is
not supported.
NOTE
i When using the FB Phase swap, the phase rotation must be set identically in all devices of the device
combination, see Parameter: Phase sequence, Page 441.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 205
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
With the parameter Swap in send direction, you select phase swapping. The phases are swapped from
the send direction view. The following options are possible:
206 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
3.6.6.14 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 207
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
208 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
If protection functions want to use the protection interfaces in a protection function group, you must route
the connection of the protection function group, for example, the FG Line 1, with a function group Protection
communication in DIGSI 5. Then, each protection function in the FG Line 1 can use the protection communi-
cation.
Route the connection between the FG Line and the FG Protection communication in DIGSI 5 as follows:
Project tree > Function-group connections > Tab Protection FG ↔ Protection FG. Right-click to route the
connection in the desired line/column.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 209
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[sc_PDC_rout1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-106 Routing of the Connection between the Protection FG and the FG Protection Communication
in DIGSI 5
NOTE
i If only one protection function group and one FG Protection communication are instantiated in the
device, DIGSI 5 connects both function groups automatically.
3.6.8.1 Overview
The advanced protection communication supports the IP communication via MPLS13 communication
networks.
• If existing systems are to be upgraded for protection-interface communication via IP, you must retrofit an
Ethernet-BD communication module in the respective SIPROTEC 5 devices.
• In a device, only one Ethernet-BD communication module can be used per device combination.
• However, another device combination can use the same Ethernet-BD communication module of the
device.
The following application examples show what you must consider when using the IP communication via MPLS
communication networks.
• You can use the redundancy mechanisms of the LAN and the Ethernet-BD communication module
(PRP, HSR, RSTP). In this case, the redundant communication route runs through the same Ethernet-BD
communication module.
• You can set up a 2nd communication connection via a physically separate path. It is best to use a
different medium for this, for example, a fiber-optic direct connection, a direct cable connection (pilot
wire), or a connection based on C37.94. That is, for the 2nd communication connection, you must use
another communication module in each device. The following figure shows this case from a physical and
logical view:
210 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_network_with_2-device_redundant-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-107 Device Combination with 2 Devices and Redundant Communication Connection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 211
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_network_with_3-device_redundant-comm, 1, en_US]
The Protection interface 1B takes over the settings of Protection interface 1, that is Protection interface
1B does not have its own settings view. The Protection interface 1B has its own indications and measured
values, which you can see in the information routing.
NOTE
i If you use 3 devices in the device combination with IP communication, the aim of the topology detection
is to form a ring topology, as in addition to a redundant connection, shorter transmission times are also
possible.
If you have instantiated a 2nd protection interface, for example to establish a communication connection via
another medium, the device hides the Protection interface 1B.
NOTE
i In the following cases, the Protection interface 1B becomes inactive and does not have any messages or
measured values:
212 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
device are the 2 devices previously present in the system. This device combination is to be extended by adding
the right SIPROTEC 5 device. The communication between the middle and the right device is to take place via
an IP communication network.
[dw_network_with_3-device_mixed-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-109 Device Combination with 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media
For this configuration of a 3-device chain topology, you must configure a device combination with 3 devices
in all devices.
In the middle device, an Ethernet-BD communication module is additionally required. Configure the protocol
Advanced protection interface in the properties of the Ethernet-BD communication module. Instan-
tiate the function block Protection interface 2 in the FG Protection communication. Assign the Ethernet-BD
communication module to the Protection interface 2.
The device on the right must also have an Ethernet-BD communication module. Also configure here the
protocol Advanced protection interface in the properties of the Ethernet-BD communication module
and assign the Ethernet-BD communication module to the Protection interface 1. Protection interface 1B is
created here as a special feature, but it is not used.
If a redundant communication connection is required for this configuration, Siemens recommends estab-
lishing a 3-device ring topology. For this purpose, you must connect the left and right devices via another
communication channel. This creates the 3-device ring topology. The following figure shows this configura-
tion:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 213
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_3-device_and_mixed-comm, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-110 Device Combination with 3 Devices and Hybrid Communication Media and Redundant
Communication Connection
The SIPROTEC 4 device (left device) does not support any IP communication. In this case, you must switch
to another communication medium and retrofit a corresponding SIPROTEC 4 communication module. In any
case, the communication medium used is also supported by the SIPROTEC 5 device on the right side, by
retrofitting a corresponding equivalent communication module there. Configure this communication module
with the protocol Advanced protection interface, add an additional Protection interface 2 to the FG
Protection communication. Assign the Protection interface 2 to the communication module.
214 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_network_with_6-device_redundant-comm, 1, en_US]
Another example shows 2 device groups whose devices are connected to each other via IP networks. The 2
device groups are connected to each other by a different communication medium. The topology detection in
turn forms a 6-device chain topology.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 215
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
To establish this communication route, you may only parameterize the IP addresses of their direct communica-
tion partners in the devices. The following example applies:
216 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
[dw_network_with_6-device, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 217
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.6 Protection Communication
NOTE
[dw_non-supported-confic_network_with_3-device, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i If you use the IP communication, the aim of the topology detection is to form a chain topology if there
are 4 or more devices. For certain configurations, the topology detection cannot form a working chain
topology.
The following figure shows an example of a device combination with 6 devices and hybrid communication
media. In this case, the topology detection cannot form a functioning 6-device chain topology.
[dw_non-supported-confic_network_with_6-device, 1, en_US]
218 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices
In the cooperation of SIPROTEC 5 and SIPROTEC 4 devices, in principle only those functionalities are supported
that are available in both device families. This means that if both SIPROTEC families cooperate, at least the
functionalities of the SPIROTEC 4 devices are supported.
You can connect SIPROTEC 5 devices to the following SIPROTEC 4 devices using the protection interface:
• Distance protection 7SA522 and 7SA6x From firmware version V4.70 and higher
devices
• Differential protection 7SD5x From firmware version V4.72
devices
• Differential protection 7SD610 From firmware version V4.72
devices
NOTE
• Transmission of remote indications and remote commands within the possible scope of SIPROTEC 4
devices
NOTE
i You cannot use all communication modules for the protection communication between SIPROTEC 4 and
SIPROTEC 5 devices using a direct fiber-optic connection. The following table shows the communication
modules you can use.
The following table shows which communication modules are compatible with a direct fiber-optic connection
between SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5 devices:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 219
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices
SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 4
USART-AD-1FO: 1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST • FO5: Optical 820 nm, ST connector, length: 1.5
connector, 1.5 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical km, multimode optical fiber
fiber
• FO6: Optical 820 nm, ST connector, length: 3 km
USART-AE-2FO: 2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST • FO5: Optical 820 nm, ST connector, length: 1.5
connector, 1.5 km via 62.5/125 μm multimode optical km, multimode optical fiber
fiber
• FO6: Optical 820 nm, ST connector, length: 3 km
NOTE
NOTE
i For a communication connection over a distance of 24 km and more, use the SIPROTEC 4 modules FO17,
FO18, or FO19 and, on the SIPROTEC 5 device side, the repeater 7XV5461.
NOTE
i If communication converters are used, cooperation between SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5 devices is always
supported.
NOTE
i You do not have to make any special settings on the SIPROTEC 4 device for cooperation with a SIPROTEC 5
device.
Check the addresses of the SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5 devices in the device combination!
To allow a SIPROTEC 5 device to operate with a SIPROTEC 4 device, you must select the desired SIPROTEC
4 device for the device combination in the SIPROTEC 5 device using the parameter (_:5131:126) Connec-
tion mode.
You can find the parameter in the properties of the protection interface under Settings → Settings for the
protection interface → Device combination settings.
Setting Value Meaning
SIPROTEC 5 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 5 device in the device combi-
nation.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD610 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 differential protection
device 7SD610 in the device combination.
SIPROTEC 4 7SD5 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 differential protection
device 7SD5x in the device combination.
SIPROTEC 4 7SA5/6 The SIPROTEC 5 device works with a SIPROTEC 4 distance protection device
7SA522 or 7SA6x in the device combination.
You can find more detailed information on the parameter in chapter 3.6.5.5 Setting Notes for the Device
Combination.
Check in the SIPROTEC devices whether the following parameters are set correctly for the cooperation of the
device combination:
220 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices
The SIPROTEC 5 parameter (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate does not exist in the SIPROTEC
4 device. The setting value of the parameter is not relevant for the cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 devices.
NOTE
i The Line differential protection functions of SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5 devices can only cooperate if the
I-DIFF fast stage is instantiated in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
If the I-DIFF fast 2 stage is instantiated in the SIPROTEC 5 device, delete this stage and instantiate the
I-DIFF fast stage instead.
The procedure of the SIPROTEC 5 Line differential protection I-DIFF fast stage corresponds to fast charge
comparison in the Line differential protection of SIPROTEC 4.
Route the information of the I-DIFF fast stage to the fault recorder. Siemens recommends routing at least the
(_:3481:57) Operate to the fault recorder.
NOTE
i When using the Line differential protection, you must adapt the parameter (254) E% K_ALF_N in the
SIPROTEC 4 device! Consider the following notes!
SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5 devices differ in the hardware and software used for measured-value acquisition.
When using the Line differential protection within a device family, for example, SIPROTEC 4, certain inaccura-
cies of the measured-value acquisition are automatically compensated.
If the Line differential protection is operating in a device combination with SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5
devices, greater inaccuracies occur in the measured-value acquisition. This means that a differential current
is calculated which, however, is not present in the primary system of the plant. You must compensate this
increased error in the differential current using increased stabilization.
In the SIPROTEC 4/SIPROTEC 5 operating mode, Siemens recommends other setting values for the parameters
of the current-transformer errors. The following table shows the new recommended settings.
For more detailed information on SIPROTEC 5 parameters, refer to Table 6-1 underSetting Recommendations
for General Protection Current Transformers, Page 454 in table 6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for Line
Differential Protection Settings.
For more detailed information on SIPROTEC 4 parameters, refer to 2.1 General under Current transformer
characteristic, Table 2-1.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 221
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices
Trans- Parameter
former
Class
SIPROTEC 4 SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 4 SIPROTEC 5
(253) E% ALF/ (_:8881:108) CT (254) E% K_ALF_N (_:8881:109) CT
ALF_N error A error B
5P 3.0 % 12 %
10P 5.0 % 21 %
TPX 1.0 % 21 %
TPY 3.0 % 21 %
TPZ 6.0 % 28 %
PX 3.0 % 12 %
C100 to 5.0 % 21 %
C800
• In the SIPROTEC 4 device, set the parameter (1163) TRANS STP IS = Grounded.
• In the SIPROTEC 5 device, set the parameter (_:105) Residual curr. elimination = yes.
Inrush-Current Detection
If you are using the crossblock function, switch on the functionality in all devices of the device combination
using the parameter (_:112) Cross-blocking. Set the duration in all devices of the device combination
to be equal using the parameter (_:109) Cross-blocking time.
In case of a cooperation of SIPROTEC 4 and 5 devices, the message (_:306) Cross-blocking is generated
only in those devices where the inrush current was measured.
NOTE
i The setting option yes: block diff. prot. is not available for the SIPROTEC 5 parameter
(_:2311:104) Supervision Idiff in case of cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 devices.
Remote Tripping
The Remote trip stage in the Line differential protection of SIPROTEC 5 devices contains parameters that must
be set in accordance with the parameters of the Circuit-breaker intertrip and remote trip function in the
222 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices
SIPROTEC 4 device. The default settings of the parameters, however, are selected so that you usually do not
need to change anything.
The Remote trip stage in the Line differential protection of SIPROTEC 5 devices contains parameters corre-
sponding to the following parameters of the Circuit-breaker intertrip and remote trip function in the
SIPROTEC 4 device. Check the setting values and adjust them. The default settings of the parameters are
selected so that you usually do not need to change anything.
SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 4
Parameters of the Remote trip stage in the Line Parameters of the Circuit-breaker intertrip and
differential protection function remote trip function
(_:5551:100) Transmitting (1301) I-TRIP SEND
(_:5551:101) Receiving (1302) I-TRIP RECEIVE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 223
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices
In the signaling procedure, the functional scope is limited by the SIPROTEC 4 devices. The following configura-
tion and following procedures are supported:
• The permissive overreach and underreach transfer trip in the Teleprotection with distance protection
• The permissive overreach transfer trip in the Teleprotection with ground-fault protection
A SIPROTEC 4 7SAx can cooperate with a SIPROTEC 5 7SAx and/or a SIPROTEC 5 7SLx.
In the cooperation of SIPROTEC 4 and 5 devices, the detection of a simultaneous wire break on all 3 phases is
not supported! The detection of a wire break in one phase is supported as before.
• You are operating a device combination made of SIPROTEC 4 devices that are connected via the protec-
tion interface.
• You want to replace at least one SIPROTEC 4 device with a SIPROTEC 5 device.
In principle, it is possible to replace a SIPROTEC 4 device that communicates with other SIPROTEC 4 devices
using the protection interface with a SIPROTEC 5 device of equal quality without changing the parameteriza-
tion in the remaining SIPROTEC 4 devices.
There is one exception: When using the Line differential protection, you must increase the parameter (254)
E% K_ALF_N in the SIPROTEC 4 device. For more information on this, refer to chapter 3.7.4 Line Differential
Protection.
When you replace a SIPROTEC 4 device in the device combination with a SIPROTEC 5 device, proceed as
follows:
NOTE
i Incorrect parameterization or wrong wiring can result in unwanted tripping of the entire differential-protec-
tion topology.
224 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices
When you replace a SIPROTEC 4 device with a SIPROTEC 5 device, check the following parameters in the
SIPROTEC 5 device:
• If you use the Charging-current compensation in the SIPROTEC 4 device, you must also instantiate and
switch on this feature in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
You can find the Ic-compensat. function block in the Global DIGSI 5 library in the FG Line → Line
differential protection → Functional extensions.
• The values of the SIPROTEC 5 parameter (_:9001:101) Rated current in the Line function group
under General and of the SIPROTEC 4 parameter (1104) FullScaleCurr. (rated operating current
of the primary plant) must be the same.
• If a transformer is located in the protection range, the Transformer function block must be instantiated
in the SIPROTEC 5 device in the Line differential protection.
You can find the Transformer function block in the Global DIGSI 5 library in the FG Line → Line
differential protection → Functional extensions.
The values of the SIPROTEC 5 parameter (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power and of the
SIPROTEC 4 parameter (1106) OPERATION POWER (primary reference power) must be the same.
• Switch off the differential-current supervision using the parameter (_:2311:104) Supervision
Idiff.
• Check the parameters of the Remote trip. with the settings of the Circuit-breaker intertrip and remote
trip function in SIPROTEC 4. You can find the corresponding parameters in Table 3-20.
3.7.10 Checklist for Replacing All SIPROTEC 4 Devices with SIPROTEC 5 Devices
To replace all SIPROTEC 4 devices smoothly, check the following parameters of the protection interface in the
SIPROTEC 5 devices:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 225
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.7 Cooperation with SIPROTEC 4 Devices
• When you use the charging-current compensation in a SIPROTEC 5 device, you must also instantiate and
switch on this feature in all the SIPROTEC 5 devices of the device combination.
If the settings are different in the SIPROTEC 5 devices, the status message of the protection interface
(_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 displays the value diff.sett error.
• The setting value of the parameter (_:9001:101) Rated current in the FG Line under General
must be the same in all SIPROTEC 5 devices.
If the settings are different in the SIPROTEC 5 devices, the status message of the protection interface
(_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 displays the value diff.sett error.
• If a transformer is in the protection range, the Transformer function block must be instantiated in all
SIPROTEC 5 devices in the Line differential protection.
The values of the parameter (_:9001.103) Rated apparent power must be the same in all
SIPROTEC 5 devices of the device combination.
• For the differential current monitor, set the parameter (_:2311:104) Supervision Idiff = yes:
block diff. prot..
• Check the parameters of the Remote trip. with the settings in the other SIPROTEC 5 devices.
226 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology or transferred via the protection interface. A clock module internal to the device and having battery
backup is synchronized cyclically with the current device time so that the right device time is available and
used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure. At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring
of the device time.
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
• DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
• DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on the
device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually necessary to
record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices. For SIPROTEC
5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
• Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
• Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations or via IEEE 1588. If you enable both services during configuration of
Ethernet interfaces, these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 227
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization
• Protection interface
The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured for your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Here, the timing master takes over the time management.
• 2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
• Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective for
the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is available
and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is
indicated.
• For every time source, it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or
Time zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings
correspond to the local time zone of the device.
NOTE
i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick up.
• Day.Month.Year: 24.12.2009
• Month/Day/Year: 12/24/2009
• Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
NOTE
i • For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
• For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5. An exception
is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG B.
228 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization
Indication Description
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The pickup of the
indication can point to a defect in the clock module
or to an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications pick up, it
can also be an indication that an incorrect configura-
tion of the port or channel numbers was done at the
on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that a Leap second
Leap second has occurred during time synchronization using
an external GPS receiver (protocol variant IRIG
B 005(004) with extension according to IEEE
C37.118-2005).
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 μs The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.
NOTE
i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in the
project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 229
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization
[sc_time_dg, 1, en_US]
• Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
NOTE
i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
• Default setting Time zone time source 1 = local, Time zone time source 2 = local
With the parameters Time zone time source 1 and Time zone time source 2, you define the
handling of time zones of the external timer.
230 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization
• IRIG-B 002(003)
The control function bits of the signal are not occupied. The missing
year is formed from the current device time. In this case, it is possible
to set the year via the online access in DIGSI 5.
• IRIG-B 006(007)
The bits for the calendar year are not equal to 00. The calendar year is
set automatically by the time protocol.
• IRIG-B 005(004) with extension according to IEEE C37.118-2005
If, in the time signal, other control function bits are occupied in addi-
tion to the calendar year, then the device takes the additional informa-
tion into consideration for leap seconds, daylight saving time, time
offset (zone, daylight saving time), and time accuracy.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2:
The value of this setting is not evaluated by the device, since this
protocol either transmits in UTC or in the case of local time, specifies
the appropriate offset to UTC in each set time telegram.
DCF77 Time synchronization by an external DCF77 receiver
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
Note: There are also clocks that generate a DCF77 signal representing UTC.
In this case, UTC must be set.
PI The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces config-
ured for your SIPROTEC 5 device. Here, the timing master takes over the
time management. Signal-transit times of the protection interface commu-
nication are calculated automatically.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
A slave that receives a time or a SIPROTEC 5 master, receives its system time
kept in UTC.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 231
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization
[sc_time_zo, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-116 Settings for Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time in DIGSI
232 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization
3.8.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 233
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.8 Date and Time Synchronization
234 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.9 User-Defined Objects
3.9.1 Overview
With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).
[sc_udef_lib, 1, en_US]
The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup
indications, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable
whole number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example
process indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can
be deactivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
These are described in chapter 7.6.1 Overview of Functions.
[sc_user, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-118 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 235
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.9 User-Defined Objects
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.9.5 External Signals).
User-Defined Signals
[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
236 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.9 User-Defined Objects
[sc_spsfas, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-120 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 237
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.9 User-Defined Objects
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Transformer taps
• Metered values
238 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.9 User-Defined Objects
The status indications for the ACT data type are built as follows:
[lo_ACT-information, 1, en_US]
[lo_ACD-information, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 239
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.9 User-Defined Objects
Table 3-21 Building of the Direction Information for the Data Type ACD
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line as
well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
You can find the functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values in 9.8.1 Function Description of
Pulse-Metered Values.
Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in 9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values.
The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
• SEQ (Sequence)
NOTE
i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching
element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC
(binary controlled step position information).
User-defined signals of different types (see Figure 3-123) are available for GOOSE Later Binding. After instan-
tiation in a logical node, an external reference is generated during IID export and provided to a IEC 61850
system tool (for example, System Configurator) for GOOSE Later Binding (according to the Later-Binding
procedure specified in IEC 61850-6).
240 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.9 User-Defined Objects
[sc_LB_extsign, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i Consider the chapter on GOOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help. User-defined signals exist as
external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 241
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used
to prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).
NOTE
i The software filtering time is available only for the circuit breaker and disconnector in the controllable
Cmd. with feedback (control function block), as this is used for logging purposes. The controllable
position (circuit breaker or disconnector function block) is used for interlocking conditions and must
always show the unfiltered position of the switching object.
[sc_lposi, 1, en_US]
The setting range for the Software filter time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 100 000 ms in ms
increments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether to restart the filtering time
whenever a status change is performed within the software filtering time. When activated, the Indication
timestamp before filtering check box backdates the time stamp by the set software filtering time. In
this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal. If you activate the Suppress
intermediate position check box, the intermediate position is suppressed for the duration of this
software filtering time.
If you leave the software filtering time at 0 ms, the time for the suppression of the intermediate position is
also 0 ms. The activated Suppress intermediate position check box then remains ineffective.
242 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
If you do not activate the Suppress intermediate position check box, the software filtering time
affects the on, off, intermediate, and disturbed positions of the circuit breaker or disconnector switch.
With the parameter Spontaneous position changes filtered by:, you set how such position
changes are to be filtered. Spontaneous position changes are caused by external switching commands, for
example. If you select the General software filter setting, the general settings for software filtering of
spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings
for spontaneous position changes then cannot be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position
changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for
this.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as an input parameter, for example as a parameter of the
position in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block.
[sc_flatte, 1, en_US]
The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are
accessible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 243
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
[sc_parafl, 2, en_US]
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see also Figure 3-127 and Figure 3-128 in the
examples shown in the following):
244 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
[dw_chatter-block-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-127 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with too Important Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
(1) The input signal is permanently blocked starting from this point in time.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 245
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
[dw_chatter-block-02, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-128 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes
During 2nd Subsequent Test Time
During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
To set the acquisition blocking, proceed as follows:
• Using the navigation keys, move in the main menu of the device display to
Commands→Equipment→Aq.blkman. update.
• Select the appropriate device (for example, a circuit breaker) from among the several switching devices
using the navigation keys.
246 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
• Enter the confirmation ID (not relevant for active role-based access control (RBAC) in the device).
[sc_detection, 1, en_US]
Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu.
• Select the switching device setting to be manually updated using the navigation keys (for example, off,
Figure 3-131).
[sc_status, 1, en_US]
[sc_statu2, 1, en_US]
[sc_statu3, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i For security reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 247
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
NOTE
i Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.
You can set acquisition blocking also via a binary input. If you want to put in the feeder or the switching
device in revision, you can set the acquisition blocking with an external toggle switch for one or more
switching devices. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch function block (circuit breaker or
disconnector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the
CFC.
[sc_beerfa, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-133 Input Signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual
Updating on the Switching Device
NOTE
i Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings are
ineffective.
If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long as
the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
NOTE
i When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in application mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking
and the manual updating are not retained after a restart.
248 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
The acquisition blocking and the manual update for the circuit breaker, the disconnector, and the tap changer
are reset by way of the >Reset AcqBlk&Subst binary input. Setting acquisition blocking and manual
update is blocked with the input activated.
In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case, a
distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.
[sc_command, 1, en_US]
Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.
3.10.4.1 Overview
In the case of multibay functions, a device uses information from one or more other devices. For some
applications, it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the
plant and even to switch it off. These applications are, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System upgrades
• Testing the local protection functions, for example, the local line differential protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 249
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
The Device logout functionality informs the receiver devices about the imminent disconnection of the
transmitter devices. To do this, the last valid received information is stored in the receiver devices and used for
the multibay functions.
NOTE
i If you need to remove a device temporarily from the plant, you must log off the device.
Protection functions distributed to several devices operate in a healthy manner with the remaining devices
only if you have logged off the device.
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)
You can find the controllable and the binary inputs in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device →
Information routing in the working area in the General block.
During the log-off process, the device checks whether all conditions for a logout have been met. If the
conditions for the log off have not been met, the logout is rejected.
The logout is rejected under the following conditions:
• The devices are communicating via the protection interface and switching off the device leads to an
interruption in protection-interface communication.
• The Line differential protection function is operating in the device and the local circuit breaker is still
switched on.
In this case, you must switch off the local circuit breaker and repeat the log-off process for the device.
After the logout, the local Line differential protection function is removed from the summation of
the currents for the Line differential protection of the other devices. The Line differential protection
function remains active in the other devices.
NOTE
i The path used to log the device off is stored in the operational log.
Even if you switch off the device after logout, the Device logged off (_:315) state is stored.
If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device, you must log on the device again.
To log on the device, you must use the same option used for logout. For example, if you have logged off the
device via binary inputs, you must log it on again via the binary inputs. This applies in similar manner if you
have logged off the device via DIGSI or via on-site operation.
• Via the binary inputs, general: >Dev. funct.logout on (_:507) or >Dev. funct.logout off
(_:508)
250 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
The conditions for a successful logout of the device result from the conditions for every activated protection
function.
Logoff of a Device from a Device Combination with Communication via the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) Protocol
If devices are exchanging data using the IEC 61850-8-1 (GOOSE) protocol – for example in the case of
substation interlocking – for each received data point the value of this data point can be set in the receiver
device when the transmitter device logs off. This value remains effective in the receiver device until the
logout is canceled by the transmitter device, even if the transmitter and/or the receiver are switched off in the
meantime.
• Logging off and switching off a device in a device combination must not result in an interruption in the
protection communication.
• For series-connected topologies, the device must be located at one end of the communication chain as
otherwise the protection communication is interrupted when the device is logged off and switched off.
For this reason, devices not at one of the ends in series-connected topologies cannot be logged off.
Logging Off a Device from a Protection Application with Line Differential Protection
If you are using the Line differential protection function, you must ensure that the functionality is still
effective even after a device in a device combination is logged off and switched off. The following example
describes the procedure:
EXAMPLE:
The following line formation is protected by the Line differential protection with 3 devices.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 251
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
Figure 3-136 Differential Protection with 3 Devices for a Line with a Feeder
In the example, the feeder is to be decommissioned for maintenance or modification work. Device 3 should
therefore also be switched off. Without additional measures, the Line differential protection will no longer
function and sends an ineffective indication.
For this use case, the Line differential protection function must be logged off in Device 3.
NOTE
i Before logging off, you must de-energize the feeder protected by the local Line differential protection.
Line differential protection in device 3 can only be logged off if no current is flowing through the feeder.
Device 3 checks during the log-off process whether the circuit breaker 3 is really switched off.
The Circuit-breaker position recognition in the function group Circuit breaker (CB) provides the circuit-
breaker position using the internal signal CB state protected obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker
layout, then the circuit-breaker position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both
circuit breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position function block performs linking of the individual CB
positions for the protected object.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB status protected object internal signal assumes the
position Open:
252 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.10 Other Functions
Figure 3-137 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Device
If a switch is being used for control, route the binary input >Dev. funct.logout on as H (active with
voltage) and the binary input >Dev. funct.logout off as L (active without voltage). If the
switch S is closed, the device is logged off.
Figure 3-138 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Device
Indications
The logged-off device reports the status ((_:315) Device logged off) and cause of the logout.
If you have logged off the device using binary inputs, the indication (_:313) Logged off via BI results.
If you have logged off the device using on-site operation, via DIGSI 5 or via the protection interface,the
indication (_:314) Logged off via control is issued.
The indications are stored in the operational log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 253
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
3.11.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of protection functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the protection settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
• Primary
• Secondary
• Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the
background. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
• First set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
• In addition, set the reference parameters for the percent setting. You will find these parameters in
function group , for example, function groupLine under line data.
254 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is observed in the
example of the Overcurrent protection function.
The following output data are assumed:
Current transformer: 1000 A/1 A
Protection pickup value: 1.5 A
The following figure shows the protection setting of the Overcurrent protection function in the secondary
view. The threshold value of the stage is set to 1.5 A.
[scmodsek_1, 1, en_US]
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching
over to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.
[scmodums_2, 1, en_US]
The following figures show the setting sequence in the Primary edit mode. Set the transformer data. In the
example, the current transformer has a transformation ratio of 1000 A/1 A.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 255
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scpwandl_3, 1, en_US]
In the function group Line, you set the line data (see following figure). Rated current, rated voltage are the
reference variables for the percent setting.
[scproref_4, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the threshold value of the Overcurrent protection function in the primary view at
1500 A.
256 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scumzpri_5, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-143 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage (Edit Mode:
Primary)
When switching over to the percent view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/1000 A · 100 % = 150 %
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 257
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scumzpro_6, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-144 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage (Edit Mode:
Percent)
When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/(1000 A/1 A) = 1.5 A
258 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scumzsek_7, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-145 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage (Edit Mode:
Secondary)
If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. Change the secondary
rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A (Edit
mode: Secondary). If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that
will ask you for the action desired.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 259
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scfragew_8, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-146 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the pickup values (threshold values) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 7.5 A (1.5 A · 5 = 7.5 A). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.
260 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
[scsekneu_9, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-147 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Transformer Data
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then answer the question with No. In this case, the protection settings in the
secondary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary view. In
the example, the primary threshold value is then 300 A (1.5 A · 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on the reply to your question (see Figure 3-146).
Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value secondary (active setting view) 7.5 A 1.5 A
Threshold value primary (covered setting view) 1500 A 300 A
In the delivery setting, the device is preset to secondary values. Only secondary values can be set directly on
the device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 261
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.11 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI 5 (see
Figure 3-146). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.
NOTE
i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, then change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and
not directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850
configuration of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.
262 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
Activation
If you want to use the Settings group switching function, you must first set at least 2 settings groups in DIGSI
5 (parameter Number of settings groups > 1). You can set up a maximum of 8 settings groups. The settings
groups set in DIGSI 5 are subsequently loaded into the device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 263
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
Table 3-22 Binary Codes of the Input Signals and Applicable Settings Groups
264 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
3.12.1.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 265
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
3.12.2.1 Overview
In Device settings in DIGSI 5, you find the following general settings.
[sc_deSeDe2, 1, en_US]
[sc_deSeAl, 4, en_US]
[sc_measurement, 1, en_US]
[sc_control, 1, en_US]
266 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
[sc_deSeall, 1, en_US]
The following list shows you the chapters containing the desired information.
You can find more about:
• Chatter blocking in 3.10.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals.
• Continuous Function Chart Quality Treatment in 3.4.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC
Charts.
Under Device, you set the parameters for the device that are valid across functions.
With Test support, indications issued via communication interfaces are labeled with an additional test bit,
if this is supported by the protocol. With this test bit you can determine whether an indication is generated
in a test and all or individual functions of the device are in the test mode. In this manner the reactions that
are necessary in normal operation due to an indication can be suppressed in other devices that receive these
indications. You can also permit, for example, a trip command to close an energized binary output for test
purposes. Siemens recommends deactivating the Test support again after the test phase.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 267
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
With the parameter Set. format residu. comp., you specify the setting format for the residual compen-
sation factors that apply across functions. You can set the residual compensation using the scalar factors Kr,
Kx or as a complex factor using K0.
The setting format controls the visibility of the residual compensation factors in the Distance protection.
Parameter: Fault-display
NOTE
i The device remains in test mode during every restart until you intentionally set the device back into the
process mode or you have carried out an initial start.
You can set the process mode by switching the parameter Activate device test mode to inactive
again (removing the check mark) or by deactivating the test mode again via the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol.
NOTE
i Besides the cross device test mode, you also have the option to place an individual function or stage
into test mode depending on the supported operating modes of a function or stage. To do this, see the
description of the relevant function or stage.
When you place an individual function or stage into the test mode, all indications issued by this function or
stage are given a test bit.
When you activate the test mode for an individual function or stage, but not the parameter
Oper.bin.outp. under test, the routed relay outputs of the function or stage are not activated
by the generated indications.
An individual function or stage remains in the test mode during every restart until you have intentionally
deactivated the test mode for this function or stage again or carried out an initial start.
268 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
NOTE
i If the parameter Oper.bin.outp. under test is inactive (default setting), the Test state of a function
or stage is changed to Test/Relays blocked.
3.12.2.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 269
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
270 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
3.12.3.1 Overview
Specific SIPROTEC 5 devices can be ordered with the operation-panel option Large display, display-page size
config., dual c.LEDs. In this case, the size of the configurable display pages is settable by the user, and is
function-points dependent:
• Large display pages for large control displays require extra function points.
For devices with the operation panel Large display, display-page size config., dual c.LEDs, you can find the
block Display pages in Device settings in DIGSI 5.
Figure 3-149 Operation Panel Large display, display-page size config., dual c.LEDs in DIGSI 5
[sc_Functionality_block1, 2, en_US]
Parameter: Functionality
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 271
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
With the parameter Functionality, you set the size of the display pages that are shown in DIGSI 5 and in
the HMI.
Parameter Value Description
small size The size of the display page is 240 x 128 pixels.
With this size, usually up to 8 operational values or very small control displays with, for
example, up to 3 switches can be configured.
272 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.12 Device Settings
3.12.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 273
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.13 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit
• Process bus: for cross-device transmission of the measured values for current and voltage
• GOOSE: For cross-device transmission of the position information of disconnectors and circuit breakers,
their trip commands and additional signals
• Further information
Process Bus:
The process bus is available for the modular SIPROTEC 5 devices. The current and voltage measured values can
be transmitted across devices using the process bus. Prerequisite: a ETH-BD-2FO communication module with
the appropriate communication protocols. In the following figure, you can see the 7SS85 as an example of the
client, and the 6MU85 and other modular SIPROTEC 5 devices as merging units.
[dw_bb8_proj-71-star, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-155 Star Structure for Distributed Busbar Protection with Merging Units Connected via Optical
Fibers
Prerequisites for the Merging Units for the Distributed Busbar Protection (IEC 61850 Compliant)
You can use all modular SIPROTEC 5 devices (except the railway protection devices 7ST8x and 6MD89) and
other IEC 61850 compliant devices as merging units. The following prerequisites apply:
• All clients and merging units must have the firmware version V8.0x or higher.
• All clients and merging units must be connected to the ETH-BD-2FO communication module and must
use the process-bus protocols. These include:
– Consistent use of IEC 61850 Edition 2.x. Siemens recommends IEC 61850 Edition 2.1.
– Process-bus protocol 9-2 Merging Unit for Merging Units and 9-2 Client for clients
– Joint time synchronization. Siemens recommends the IEEE 1588 protocol.
• The current and voltage transformers suitable for the target application in the client must be present in
the merging units.
GOOSE:
As an alternative to using the local binary inputs and binary outputs of a SIPROTEC 5 device, you can use the
inputs and outputs of other SIPROTEC 5 devices and transmit them via IEC 61850 including GOOSE.
Examples of binary routings for transmission using GOOSE.
• Circuit-breaker and disconnector position information from the transmitters to the receivers
274 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.13 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit
• Transmission of current measured values (SMV) as per IEC 61850-9-2 (process bus) from the merging
units
• External tripping
NOTE
i You can find these functional enhancements in the Global DIGSI 5 Library in the respective device, under
FG Circuit breaker > dBBP Function extensions. You can find the function Measuring point out of
service under Measuring inputs > Current 3-phase > dBBP Function extensions in the respective device.
• Additional Include in distributed busbar system check box for current transformers, circuit breakers,
and disconnectors in the Properties tab.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 275
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
System Functions
3.13 Using a SIPROTEC 5 Device as a Client or Merging Unit
[sc_bbp8_SLE_incl, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-156 Extension in the Properties Tab if the Distributed Busbar Protection is Available
Further Information
NOTE
i Analog measured values, binary inputs, and binary outputs are routed across devices in the IEC 61850
System Configurator.
For a detailed description of how to use it as a Merging Unit/bay unit for the distributed busbar protection or
distributed busbar protection (IEC 61850 compliant), refer to the Project Engineering chapter in the Busbar
Protection 7SS85 device manual.
For further information on the process bus, GOOSE, IEC 61850 System Configurator, descriptions of stream
types, GOOSE Later Binding, VLAN priority, network redundancies, for example, PRP protocol or the sample
and time synchronization using IEEE 1588, refer to the Process Bus, Communication Protocols, IEC 61850
System Configurator and the DIGSI 5 Help manuals.
276 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
4 Applications
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 277
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The Global DIGSI 5 library provides application templates for the applications of the devices. The application
template
• Adapt the application template to your specific use (check/adapt default settings, delete/add functions).
For more detailed information on this, refer to 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device.
• Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
• Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.
The following describes the application templates and maximum functional scope for the devices shown in
this manual.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions
available on the device!
278 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
• Basis
• Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems
• Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout
So that the application templates function in the device, the following minimum hardware configuration
requirements must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration
Minimum Requirement
Template 1 Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 2 DIS RMD for overhead line, grounded systems
Template 3 DIS RMD for overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
circuit-breaker layout
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates:
Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SA87
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x x x
21/21N Distance protection Z< x x x
Impedance protection x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync x x 2
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x
Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence V1< x
system
Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx Vx< x
27R, 59R Rate-of-voltage-change protection dV/dt x
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protec- I2>, I2/I1>
tion
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protec- I2>, ∠ (V2/ I2) x
tion with direction
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> x x x
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 279
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SA87
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current detection for systems INs> x
with resonant or isolated neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence V1> x
system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> x
system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system V0> x
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx Vx> x
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠ (V,I) x
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for systems INs>, ∠(V,I), x
with resonant or isolated neutral including W0p,tr>, G0>,
B0>, IN pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Transient ground fault
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN pulse
68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt x x x
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency-change protection df/dt x
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection x x x
85/27 Weak or no infeed: echo and tripping x x x
Tripping with missing or weak infeed according x
to French specification
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground-fault x x x
protection
86 Lockout x
87STUB Stub-fault differential protection (for breaker- x x
and-a-half layout)
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN x
90V Voltage controller for two-winding transformer x
Voltage controller for three-winding trans- x
former
Voltage controller for grid coupling transformer x
FL Fault locator, single-side FL-one x x x x
Fault locator plus FO+
280 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SA87
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF x
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg x
(function points per type)
Power Quality – Basic: x
• Voltage Variation
• Voltage Unbalance
• THD and Harmonics
• Total Demand Distortion
Switching statistic counters x x x x
CFC (standard, control) x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary signals x x x x
Monitoring and supervision x x x x
Protection interface, serial x
Circuit breaker x x x 2
Point-on-wave switching14 x
Circuit-breaker control x x x x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding switch x x
Disconnector/grounding switch status x
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage protec- Q>/V< x
tion (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage dependent t = f(I,V) x
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike protection CBRS x
Circuit-breaker monitoring ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
Closed-circuit supervision, 1 BI, 2 BI x
Frequency-tracking groups x x x x
Access control x x x x
Security logging x x x x
Sum of function points: 0 225 400
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 281
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and with 3-pole tripping for cables
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection, Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems with 3-pole AREC (7SA87)
The Distance protection, isolated/resonant-grounded systems with 3-pole AREC application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
(7SA87)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems application
template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• The main protection is distance protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection MHO for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems (7SA87)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line, grounded systems application template is preconfigured
for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
• The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic curves)
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
282 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87
Application Template: Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA87)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout application template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
Application Template: MHO Distance Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA87)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
• The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic curves)
• Teleprotection scheme
• Fault Locator
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 283
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87
• Basis
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates described below:
Table 4-2 Functional Scope of the Application Template for Device 7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SD87
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x x x
87L Differential protection for lines with 2 ends ΔI x x x
Differential protection for lines with 3 to 6 ΔI x x x
ends (dependent on significant properties)
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync x x 2
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x
Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence V1< x
system
Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx< x
Vx
27R, 59R Rate-of-voltage-change protection dV/dt x
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, I2/I1>
protection
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
protection with direction
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> x x x
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
284 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SD87
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for INs> x
systems with resonant or isolated neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence V1> x
system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> x
system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system V0> x
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx Vx> x
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠ (V,I) x
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for systems INs>, ∠(V,I), x
with resonant or isolated neutral including W0p,tr>, G0>,
B0>, IN pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Transient ground fault
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN pulse
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency-change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
87L/87T Option for line differential protection ΔI x
including power transformer
Option for line differential protection: ΔI x
charging-current compensation
87STUB Stub-fault differential protection (for breaker- x x
and-a-half layout)
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN x
90V Voltage controller for two-winding trans- x
former
Voltage controller for three-winding trans- x
former
Voltage controller for grid coupling trans- x
former
Broken-wire detection for differential protec- x
tion
FL Fault locator, single-side FL-one x x x x
Fault locator plus FO+
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 285
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SD87
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF x
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg x
(function points per type)
Power Quality – Basic: x
• Voltage Variation
• Voltage Unbalance
• THD and Harmonics
• Total Demand Distortion
Switching statistic counters x x x x
CFC (standard, control) x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary signals x x x x
Monitoring and supervision x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x x
Circuit breaker x x x 2
Point-on-wave switching15 x
Circuit-breaker control x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding switch x x
Disconnector/grounding switch status x
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage Q>/V< x
protection (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage dependent t = f(I,V) x
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike protection CBRM x
Circuit-breaker monitoring ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
Closed-circuit supervision, 1 BI, 2 BI x
Frequency-tracking groups x x x x
Access control x x x x
Security logging x x x x
Sum of function points: 0 175 350
286 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87
• Line protection (for example, cable) with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
• Synchronization function
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with Transformer in the Protection Range (7SD87)
The Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the protection range application
template is preconfigured for the following applications:
• Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping with transformer in the protection range
• Synchronization function
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-breaker Layout (7SD87)
The Differential protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
• Stub-fault protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 287
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87
• Basis
• Differential protection/distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded
systems
• Differential protection/distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded
systems with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
So that the application templates function in the device, the following minimum hardware configuration
requirements must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration
Minimum Requirement
Template 1 Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 2 DIFF/DIS RMD for overhead line, grounded systems
Template 3 DIFF/DIS RMD for overhead line, grounded systems 1 1/2 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
circuit-breaker layout
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates described below:
Table 4-3 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SL87
288 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SL87
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
protection with direction
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x
50 HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> x x x
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current detection for INs> x
systems with resonant or isolated neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x
Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x
system
Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx> x
universal, Vx
60 Voltage-comparison supervision ΔV> x
67 Directional overcurrent protection, I>, ∠ (V,I) x
phases
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for INs>, ∠(V,I), x
systems with resonant or isolated neutral W0p,tr>, G0>,
including B0>, IN pulse
• V0>
• cos/sinϕ
• Transient ground fault
• ϕ(V,I)
• Admittance
• IN pulse
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x
Underfrequency load shedding f<(ULS) x
81R Rate-of-frequency-change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
87L/87T Option for line differential protection: ΔI x
including power
Option for line differential protection: ΔI x
charging-current compensation
87STUB Stub-fault differential protection (for x x
breaker-and-a-half layouts)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 289
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SL87
87N T Restricted ground-fault protection ΔIN x
90V Voltage controller for two-winding trans- x
former
Voltage controller for three-winding x
transformer
Voltage controller for grid coupling trans- x
former
Broken-wire detection for differential x
protection
FL Fault locator, single-side FL-one x x x x
Fault locator plus FO+
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x
fault
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Vector-jump protection Δφ> x
Measured values, standard x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Power Quality – Basic: x
• Voltage Variation
• Voltage Unbalance
• THD and Harmonics
• Total Demand Distortion
Switching statistic counters x x x x
CFC (standard, control) x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x x
Circuit breaker x x x 2
Point-on-wave switching16 x
Circuit-breaker control x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding switch x x
Disconnector/grounding switch status x
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage Q>/V< x
protection (QU protection)
37 Undercurrent I< x
290 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
7SL87
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage t = f(I,V) x
dependent
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike protection CBRM x
Circuit-breaker monitoring ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
Closed-circuit supervision, 1 BI, 2 BI x
Frequency-tracking groups x x x x
Access control x x x x
Security logging x x x x
Sum of function points: 0 225 400
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 291
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the Basis application
template:
Table 4-4 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7VK87
Template 1
7VK87
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronization function Sync x x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x
27 Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence V1< x
system
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx< x
Vx
27R, 59R Rate-of-voltage-change protection dV/dt x
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision θ> x
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, I2/I1>
protection
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent I2>, ∠ (V2/I2) x
protection with direction
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping I>>> x
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x
59 Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence V1> x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
59 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system V0> x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx Vx> x
67 Directional overcurrent protection, phases I>, ∠ (V,I) x
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x
292 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87
Template 1
7VK87
81O Overfrequency protection f> x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x
81R Rate-of-frequency-change protection df/dt x
86 Lockout x
FL Fault locator, single-side FL-one x
Fault locator plus FO+
90V Voltage controller for two-winding trans- x
former
90V Voltage controller for three-winding trans- x
former
90V Voltage controller for grid coupling trans- x
former
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF x
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Measured values, standard x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg x
(function points per type)
Power Quality – Basic: x
• Voltage Variation
• Voltage Unbalance
• THD and Harmonics
• Total Demand Distortion
Switching statistic counters x x
CFC (standard, control) x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x
Fault recording of analog and binary signals x x
Monitoring and supervision x x
Protection interface, serial x
Circuit breaker x x
Point-on-wave switching17 x
Circuit-breaker control x x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding switch x
Disconnector/grounding switch status x
37 Undercurrent I< x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike protection CBRM x
Circuit-breaker monitoring ∑Ix, I2t, 2P x
Closed-circuit supervision, 1 BI, 2 BI x
Frequency-tracking groups x x
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 293
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Applications
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87
Template 1
7VK87
Access control x x
Security logging x x
Sum of function points: 0
294 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
5 Function-Group Types
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 295
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.1 Overview
In the Line function group, all of the functions that are necessary for protecting and monitoring a line can be
used. The Line function group also contains the measuring functions (for more information, see 9 Measured
Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
You will find the Line function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The Line
function group contains all of the protection and supervision functions that you can use for this device type.
These functions are described in 6 Protection and Automation Functions. The following figure shows the
functional scope of the Line function group using the example of a device.
296 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[scbibofg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Function Group Line – Functional Scope for Device Type 7SL86
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 297
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[scbili2p-210213-01.tif, 1, --_--]
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to 2 Basic Structure of the
Function. For information about the overall functional scope of the application templates for the various
device types, refer to 4 Applications.
• Line data
• Operational measurement
• Process monitor
298 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[dwfgline-160812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Measuring points
• Protection communication
• 3-Phase Voltage:
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Various transformer
connection types are possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided
via this interface. The function group Line must always be connected to the V-3ph measuring point.
If you want to use the Distance protection in the function group Line, you must connect the 3 phase-to-
ground voltages to the V-3ph measuring point. If you want to test or change the connection between
the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point, double-click Measuring-point routing in the DIGSI 5
project tree → 7SL86 (name of device) (connection type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage).
For further information, refer to the description of the Power-system data starting from 6.1.1 Overview.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 299
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
NOTE
i You can connect the interface 3-phase phase current to at most two 3-phase current measuring
points (for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts).
The other interfaces can only be connected to one measuring point each!
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the protection function group Line
• Start of the function Circuit-breaker failure protection (if available in the function group Circuit-
breaker) through the protection functions of the connected protection function group Line
• Start of the function Automatic reclosing (AREC if available in the function group Circuit-breaker)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group Line
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group Line to the circuit-breaker function groups,
you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using
the Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the function group Line.
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
300 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Line Data
The line data characterizes the line that is to be protected. The line data applies for all of the functions in the
function group Line.
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the function group Line and cannot be removed. The process
monitor provides the following information in the function group Line:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/closed line based on the flow of minimum current
• Closure detection:
Detection of closure of the line
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 301
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
• Power
• Power factor
• Energy
• Mean values
With the P, Q sign parameter, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
For further information, refer to 9.1 Overview of Functions.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pick up and operate indications of the protection and supervision functions in the
function group separately, in either a pickup logic or an output logic. The pickup and output logic generate the
overreaching indications (group signals) of the function group. These group indications are transferred via the
Protection information interface to the function group Circuit breaker and are processed further there.
The pickup indications of the protection and supervision functions in the function group Lineare combined
phase-segregated and output as a group indication.
[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]
The operate indications of the protection functions are combined on a phase-selective basis (see the following
figure).
302 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[loauspha-100511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device is capable of 1-phase operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set in a
function (for example, distance protection), 1-phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication.
If at least the following conditions have been met, the connected function group Circuit breaker generates a
1-pole operate command:
Line Data
The following application and setting instructions apply for the line data. The line data are configured in the
Line function group and apply for all functions in the function group.
NOTE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 303
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
NOTE
i If the optional function block Transformer has been instantiated in theLine Differential Protection
function, the parameter Rated apparent power can be set. The parameter Rated current is then
calculated internally and is displayed as a write-protected parameter.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
NOTE
i The parameter Rated apparent power is only configurable if the optional function block Trans-
former has been instantiated in the Line Differential Protection function.
If the function block Transformer has not been instantiated, the Rated apparent power is calculated
internally from parameters Rated current and Rated voltage and is displayed as a write-protected
parameter.
With the Rated apparent power parameter, you can set the primary rated apparent power of the
protected transformer. The Rated apparent power parameter is relevant for the main protection function
of the device. The Rated apparent power set here is the reference value for the percentage-measured
values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
304 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
EXAMPLE
[fo_lwinkl, 1, en_US]
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 305
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
You calculate the setting value for the line angle as follows:
[fo_tan_phi, 1, en_US]
[fo_arctan_phi, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Kr and Kx
NOTE
i The visibility of the Kr and Kx parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual compen-
sation factors. The parameters Kr and Kx only become visible after you have set the parameter Set.
format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for the device.
The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation factors as scalar values. The Kr and Kx
parameters are relevant for the Distance protection and Fault locator functions.
NOTE
i You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
specific parameters for each zone.
Calculate the setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data as follows:
Resistance ratio Reactance ratio
where:
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line
X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
EXAMPLE
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
306 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[fo_kr, 1, en_US]
[fo_kx, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual
compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) only become visible after you have set the
parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex grounding-resistance factor. The K0 and
Angle (K0) parameters are relevant for the Distance protection, Fault locator and Fault locator plus
functions.
NOTE
i You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
local parameters for each zone.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex grounding-resistance factor is defined by the
value and the angle. You can calculate the complex grounding-resistance factor from the line data as follows:
[fo_K01, 1, en_US]
where:
Z0 (complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (complex) positive-sequence impedance
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. The data can be calculated both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence system
and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differences can
occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE
110-kV single-phase liquid filled cable 3 · 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 307
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[fo_1_k0, 1, en_US]
[fo_2_k0, 1, en_US]
[fo_3_k0, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary Part tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
[fo_phi_K0, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)
308 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
For the ground-current balance of the distance protection, the setting value returns the current ratio IGnd/IgndP
for the protection device at installation site II (see Figure 5-6).
[dwparkomrw-161013, 1, en_US]
Parallel-line compensation is only carried out if the ground current of the line to be protected
(IGnd) is greater than the ground current of the parallel line (IgndP) evaluated with the parameter
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
Siemens recommends retaining the default setting Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)= 85 % . In highly unbal-
anced system conditions and if the coupling factor is very small (XM/XL less than 0.4), a smaller value may be
advisable.
[fo1isaet-041210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
where:
NOTE
i The parameter CT saturation threshold only becomes visible when you have set the parameter CT
saturation detection = yes.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 309
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[foforcse-060509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Series capacit. reactance parameter is only relevant for the Directional ground-fault protection
function.
Parameter: P, Q sign
• Closure detection
• 1-pole-open detector
• Circuit-breaker condition
• Current-flow criterion
310 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
[dwpro1p1-050612-01.tif, 3, en_US]
You can switch the voltage criterion and the cold-load pickup detection as necessary. The circuit-breaker
position recognition and the current-flow criterion run permanently in the background and are not displayed
in DIGSI.
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.
[lopro1p1-171012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 311
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[lo_proire, 2, en_US]
The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
protection function group.
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several Circuit breaker FGs,
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG Circuit breaker. The smallest setting
value of the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.
312 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.4.5 Settings
Logic
[lo_prolsz, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-10 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both
circuit breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function
block connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot.
obj. signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in
the event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state internally.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 313
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines whether
the protected object is switched on.
[loproein-121012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
For an applied binary input signal Detected (from function block Manual close), the indication Closure is
always active. The indication Closure can also be activated via the measurand. In addition, the protected
object must be switched off for at least the time Min. time feeder open.
This time is started as follows depending on the Operating mode parameter:
• The protected object is switched off for at least the time Min. time feeder open.
314 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
The time Action time after closure is started depending on the Operating mode parameter:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 315
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
The Closure indication signals detected closure. With the Action time after closure parameter, you
set the Closure indication to a defined length.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.05 s.
5.1.4.9 Settings
316 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[loproopd-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-12 Logic Diagram of the 1-Pole Open Detector Function Block
The 1-pole open indication is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 317
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
• V and I
The 1-pole open detector function block unambiguously detects a 1-pole open circuit breaker. Current
and voltage of the other phases must be present.
The corresponding 1-pole open indication disappears if one of the following conditions is met:
• The value in both activated phases falls below the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open
parameter 300 ms.
• The current in the deactivated phase exceeds the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open
parameter again after 150 ms.
Additionally, the 1-pole open indication is also generated in the following application cases:
• The following applies to applications on an unloaded line: The 1-pole open indication is generated if
current and voltage are missing in one phase and a voltage is applied in the other phases. The 1-pole
open indication disappears immediately if these criteria are no longer fulfilled. As a result, a 1-phase
automatic reclosing function on an unloaded line can be detected.
• The following applies to applications with voltage transformers at the busbar end: If a phase-selective
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact signals a 1-pole open circuit-breaker and the current of this phase falls
below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter, the 1-pole open indication is
generated.
Detection of a 1-pole open circuit-breaker is stabilized by 10 ms. This avoids incorrect response in the
transition states of 3-phase switching operations.
318 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
Logic
[loproure-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you want to test closure detection or an open-pole detector via a voltage, you need a voltage transformer
installed on the line side and electrical power systems with a grounded neutral point. In this case, add the
Voltage criterion function block to the process monitor.
If the voltage transformers are installed on the busbar side or if there is no voltage connected, you must not
use the voltage criterion to detect a deactivated phase.
With the (_:101) Threshold U open parameter, you define the residual voltage as the criterion for a
deactivated line. If the phase-to-ground voltage falls below the value of the Threshold U open parameter,
the V open signal is generated. The function stabilizes the signal with a hysteresis and a delay of the rising
edge of the signal. The falling edge of the signal is forwarded without delay.
NOTE
i The Threshold U open parameter is available only when the optional Voltage criterion function block
is used. Use this parameter only with a voltage transformer installed on the line side and in electrical power
systems with a grounded neutral point.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 319
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.4.14 Settings
Logic
[lo_pro_cls, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-14 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
320 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min.
CB-open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 321
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.4.17 Settings
5.1.4.19 Settings
322 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 323
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
324 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
5.2.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 3-phase function group, you can use all the functions for protection and supervision
of a protected object or equipment that allows 3-phase current and voltage measurement. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System).
You will find the Voltage-current 3-phase function group under each device type in the Global DIGSI 5
library. You will find all protection and supervision functions that you can use for this function-group type
in the function group Voltage-current 3-phase. These functions are described in chapter 6 Protection and
Automation Functions.
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to chapter 2 Basic Structure
of the Function. For information regarding the functional scope of the application templates for the various
device types, refer to chapter 4 Applications.
• Process monitor
[dw_fg_ui3p, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 325
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
• Measuring points
• 3-phase current
The measurands from the 3-phase current system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are, for example, IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface to a maximum of four 3-phase current measuring points,
(for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts). If 2 current measuring points have been connected with
the 3-phase current interface, the total current is also determined from measured values from both
measuring points in the function group. All functions in the function group have access to these values.
• Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the protection function group
• Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
• Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the Circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Protection function group
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group to the Circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction Editor in the protection function group.
326 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
• Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and cannot be
removed.
The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
• Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated protected object/equipment based on the flow of leakage current
• Closure detection:
Detection of the switching on of the protected object/equipment
Table 5-2 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 327
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
For a more detailed explanation of the operational measured values, refer to 9.3 Operational Measured
Values.
• Power
• Active factor
• Energy
• Average values
With the parameter P, Q sign, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
For more information on this, refer to 9.1 Overview of Functions.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail-
able in the function group separately, in a pickup logic and a trip logic, respectively. The pickup and trip logic
generate the overreaching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup signals of the protection and supervision functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
are combined in a phase-selective manner and output as a group indication.
328 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
[lo_anrlin, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-16 Creation of the Pickup Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
The trip signals from the protection and supervision functions of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
always result in 3-pole tripping of the device.
[lo_auslin, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-17 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 329
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
Parameter: P, Q sign
NOTE
i If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameters C Range of Values Default Setting
Network data
_:103 General:rated apparent power 0.20 MVA to 5 000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
NOTE
i For more detailed information on the process monitor, refer to 5.2.7 Process Monitor.
5.2.5 Settings
330 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
• Current-flow criterion
• Circuit-breaker condition
• Closure detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 331
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
[dw_pro3pt, 2, en_US]
You can activate the cold-load pickup detection as needed. All other stages of the process monitor run
permanently in the background and are not displayed in DIGSI.
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.
[lo_pro_3pt, 2, en_US]
332 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
Logic
[lo_proire, 2, en_US]
The phase currents are provided via the interface to the protection function group.
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
• A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
• The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
protection function group.
If a protection function group with integrated process monitor is connected to several Circuit breaker FGs,
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is present in each FG Circuit breaker. The smallest setting
value of the parameter Current thresh. CB open is used.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 333
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
Logic
[lo_prolsz, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-21 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker (CB) function group provides the circuit-breaker
condition by way of the internal signal CB pos. recogn. prot. obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example with the 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,
then the circuit-breaker switch position of the protected object must be determined with the aid of both
circuit breakers. In this case, the Circuit-breaker position recognition for the protected object function
block connects the individual CB states. The connection provides the internal CB pos. recogn. prot.
obj. signal to the other function blocks of the process monitor and to other functions, for example, Trip in
the event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method, within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB pos. recogn. prot. obj. signal is in the Open state:
• At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state internally.
Logic
[lo_ein_6md, 1, en_US]
334 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
For an applied binary input signal (_:6541:300) Detected (from function block Manual close), the
indication (_:4681:300) Closure(_:4681:300) Closure is active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 335
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
Logic
[lo_pro_cls, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-23 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min.
CB-open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-load
indication directly.
336 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 337
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 3-Phase
With the Min. CB-open time parameter, you set the time after which the dynamic parameter set is
activated in the event of cold-load pickup when the line is opened.
5.2.7.10 Settings
338 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
5.3.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 1-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring
a protection object or equipment that allow a 1-phase current and voltage measurement or a zero-sequence
voltage measurement via the 3-phase voltage measuring point. The function group also contains the opera-
tional measurement for the protected object or equipment (see chapter 9 Measured Values, Energy Values,
and Supervision of the Primary System).
The function group Voltage-current 1-phase has interfaces to the measuring points and the function group
Circuit breaker.
[dw_1spstr, 1, en_US]
• 1-phase current
The 1-phase current measured values are provided via this interface.
You can only connect a 1-phase current measuring point to the interface 1-phase current.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 339
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
[scVI1ph_V1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-25 Connecting Measuring Points to the Function Group Voltage-Current 1-Phase
If you select the voltage type VN broken-delta for the 1-phase voltage measuring point in the measuring
point routing (see the following figure), the device measures the residual voltage VN at the broken-delta
winding. The residual voltage is converted into the voltage equivalent of the zero-sequence voltage. This
converted voltage is used as the voltage input for all functions in the function group Voltage-current
1-phase.
[scvnopen, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-26 Selection of the VN broken-delta Voltage Type for the 1-Phase Voltage Measuring Point
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the 3-phase voltage system or the measured residual voltage is
available via the voltage interface (see figure below).
[scVI1ph_V3ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-27 Connecting Measuring Points 3-Phase Voltage and 1-Phase Current to the Function Group
1-Phase Voltage-Current
You can connect the voltage interface of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase with precisely one
3-phase voltage measuring point. 3 types of 3-phase voltage measuring-point connection are supported.
With the different connection types, the type of voltage input for the functions in the function group Voltage-
current 1-phase also changes.
340 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
The following table shows the properties of the voltage input for the function group Voltage-current 1-phase
depending on the connection types.
Connection Type of the 3- Voltage Input
Phase Voltage Measuring
Point
3 ph-to-gnd voltages The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages
and used as a voltage input for all functions.
3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN The residual voltage VN is converted into the voltage equivalent of the
3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN zero-sequence voltage. This converted voltage is used as a voltage input for
functions.
[sc_1stspc, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-28 Connecting Function Group Voltage-Current 1-Phase with Function Group Circuit Breaker
Fundamental Components
The fundamental components are always present in the function group Voltage-current 1-phase and cannot
be deleted.
The following table shows the fundamental components of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase:
You can find the parameters Rated operating current and Rated operating voltage in the
function block General of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase.
18 The 1-phase voltage V is only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point.
19 The zero-sequence voltage V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the 3-phase phase-to-
ground voltage connection type.
20 The residual voltage VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the connection type 3-phase
phase-to-ground voltage + VN or 3-phase phase-to-phase voltage + VN.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 341
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
[scui1pom, 1, en_US]
Table 5-4 Operational Measured Values of the Function Group Voltage-Current 1-Phase
You can find the parameters Rated operating current, Rated operating voltage, and Rated
apparent power in the function block General of the function group Voltage-current 1-phase. You can
find the parameter Rated frequency in the function block General of the Device settings.
NOTE
i The frequency can be calculated from the voltage or current measured value.
The active and reactive power are only displayed if the voltage and the 1-phase current are connected to
the function group. If the connected voltage is a phase-to-ground voltage (VA, VB , VC) or any voltage Vx,
the specific power values are displayed. Otherwise the power is displayed as not available.
NOTE
i Before creating the protection functions in the function group, you should connect them to the suitable
function group Circuit breaker.
342 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
• With connection type VAB, VBC, VCB or VN , you set the parameter Rated voltage as the phase-to-phase
voltage.
• With the connection type VA, VB, VC, or VN (broken-delta winding) , you set the parameter Rated voltage as
phase-to-ground voltage.
• With the connection type VX, you set the parameter Rated voltage as either the phase-to-phase
voltage or the phase-to-ground voltage
Parameter: P, Q sign
NOTE
i If an interface to a 3-phase function group exists and voltage transformers or current transformers are
assigned, the write-protected parameters: (_9421:104) Rated current and (_:9421:105) Rated
voltage are present. The parameters (_:9451:101) Rated current and (_:9421:102) Rated
voltage are hidden.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 343
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
The Rated apparent power parameter is relevant for the main protection function of the device. The
parameter Rated apparent power set here is the reference value for the percentage measured values and
setting values made in percentages.
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting
Rated values
_:9421:103 General:Rated apparent -1.00 MVA to -1.00 MVA 0.00 MVA
power
Power-system data
_:9421:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
_:9421:223 General:CT mismatch M 0.00 to 100.00 0.00
I-1ph
5.3.5 Settings
344 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage/current 1-Phase
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 345
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
5.4.1 Overview
In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protected object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also
contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System). Applicable functions are, for
example, Voltage protection or Frequency protection.
The Voltage 3-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker function
group.
[dw_3phase_voltage, 1, en_US]
[sc_3_voltage1, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-31 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point
automatically.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. For more information, refer to chapter
6.66 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated from the
measurands are also provided via this interface.
346 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions are exchanged in the direction
of the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must connect the Voltage 3-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This assign-
ment can be made in DIGSI only via Project tree → Connect function group. To connect the interfaces, set a
cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc_3_voltage2, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-32 Connecting Voltage 3-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Table 5-5 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
NOTE
i Before creating the protection functions in the function group, you should connect them to the appropriate
Circuit-breaker function group.
5.4.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 347
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
348 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker.
You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5.
The Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you
can use for this device type. The following figure shows the functional scope of the Circuit-breaker function
group.
[scbicb1p-241013, 1, en_US]
These functions are described in the chapters Protection and automation functions and Control functionali-
ties.
Besides the user functions, the Circuit-breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen-
tial for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
• Trip logic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 349
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
• General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-breaker function group. The individual function blocks
in the image are described in the following chapters.
[dwfgalle-080812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• Measuring points
350 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
• Voltage
The measurands of the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the connec-
tion type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are, for example, VA, VB, VC of the line
or the feeder. Connection of the function group to this measuring point is optional.
• Sync voltage
A 1-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 1-phase connection) or
a 3-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 3-phase connection) is
supplied via this interface.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if synchronization is used.
• Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated?
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 351
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
With the Rated normal current parameter, you set the primary current which serves as a reference for all
current-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational measured
values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated current of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
352 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open
(see 5.5.5.1 Overview). The command output time is also effective here. In the trip logic, the decision is made
whether to trigger 1-pole tripping or not (3-pole coupling) (see Figure 5-35).
The trip logic also decides when the protection trip command is reset (see Figure 5-36).
[loausl1p-070211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
• The tripping protection function can generate 1-pole operate indications and is set accordingly (1-pole
operate allowed parameter set to yes).
• The Automatic reclosing function is active and generates the 79 permits 1-pole trip signal. The
function thus indicates that it is healthy for 1-pole reclosing after 1-pole operate.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 353
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
3-Pole Coupling
3-pole coupling describes the situation when the trip logic decides to execute 3-pole tripping despite the
presence of a 1-pole operate indication.
This may be the case under the following circumstances:
• The Automatic reclosing function cannot execute a 1-pole cycle. This is expressed by the cleared signal
79 permits 1-pole trip.
• If an upstream device has caused 1-pole tripping and the device in question detects this pole as open (via
the process monitor in the Line protection function group) and the device in question detects a fault in
another phase.
• If 1-pole tripping reoccurs in another phase within 50 ms after an instance of 1-pole tripping has been
cleared
• If the permission for 1-pole tripping is canceled by the AR (internal or external) after a cleared 1-pole trip
(during the 1-pole pause)
By default, 3-pole coupling is carried out based on the cumulative operate indication. Optionally, the group
pickup indication can also be taken into account (parameter 3-pole coupling). In this case, every multi-
phase pickup results in a 3-pole coupling, including pickups of different phases from different stages/func-
tions.
2-Phase Short-Circuits
For 2-pole faults, you set the behavior with the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit.
• 3-pole
Tripping is executed in the event of 2-pole faults.
Coupling Table
The following table shows the coupling table for Figure 5-35. This table also explains its impact on 2-phase
faults.
Input Output
Impact of the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit
3-pole 1-pole, leading phase 1-pole, lagging phase
A B C Groun A B C A B C A B C
d
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
354 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
Input Output
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
[loauslbe-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• with dropout
If the function that initiated tripping resets its operate indication, the trip command is reset. This occurs
typically with dropout. Resetting of the trip command takes place regardless of verification of the circuit-
breaker position.
• with I<
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 355
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
EXAMPLE
If two 1-phase ground faults occur on different lines, for example, including parallel lines (see Figure 5-37),
the protection devices will detect fault types A-B-E at all 4 line ends, that is, with a pickup characteristic
corresponding to a 2-phase ground fault. However, since there is only one 1-phase short circuit on each of the
2 lines, it is desirable to have a short 1-pole interruption on each of these 2 lines. This is possible with a setting
with trip command. Each of the 4 devices detects an internal 1-phase short circuit and can therefore cause
1-pole tripping.
[dwfehler-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
356 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
In some cases, 3-pole disconnection works better for this fault type: If the double line is situated close to
a large generator block (see Figure 5-38). For the generator, both 1-phase ground faults are manifested as
double ground faults with a correspondingly high dynamic load of the turbine shaft. For a setting with pickup,
both lines are deactivated since each device detects A-B-E – that is, a multiphase short circuit – upon pickup.
[dwgenfeh-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-38 Multiphase Short Circuit on a Double Line Close to the Generator
• Default setting (_:5341:101) Trip at 2ph short circuit = 1-pole, leading phase
With the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit, you determine whether the short-circuit protection
functions only result in 1-pole tripping in the event of an isolated 2-phase fault (without ground contact),
provided 1-pole tripping is possible and allowed. This enables a 1-phase interrupt cycle for this fault type. In
this case, you determine which of the 2 phases – the leading (1-pole, leading phase) or the lagging
phase (1-pole, lagging phase) – is tripped.
NOTE
i If you want to use this option, bear in mind that phase selection is the same throughout the power system
and at the ends of a line.
If 3-pole tripping is to be executed in the event of this fault type, select the 3-pole setting.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 357
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.4.3 Settings
5.5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function block represents the physical circuit breaker in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are:
358 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loaussch-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 359
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
360 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loerfass-091210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The signal or signals must be routed to the binary inputs that are connected to the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The open and closed signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of
parallel routing is that it can be used to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. If you route only one
signal (open or closed), you cannot determine an intermediate position or a disturbed position.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and
closed positions are detected (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-
breaker position recognition and Control function blocks.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 361
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
Definitive Tripping
Definitive tripping is always pending whenever the Automatic reclosing (AREC) function does not carry out
any reclosing after tripping. It follows that this is the case whenever automatic reclosing is not present or the
AREC has been switched off.
362 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[lo_unterd, 2, en_US]
[lo_ausloe, 2, en_US]
• Number of closings by the automatic reclosing function, broken down according to 1-pole and 3-pole as
well as 1st cycle and other cycles
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 363
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[loansteu-071210-01.tif, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i Note that you must route the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signal for 3-pole tripping/opening to all 3 binary
inputs.
By routing the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signals to 1 or 2 binary outputs, you can carry out 1, 1.5, and
2‑pole activations of the circuit breaker. You can find a detailed description of this in chapter 7.2.2.3 Connec-
tion Variants of the Circuit Breaker.
364 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
NOTE
i Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.
• The device performs protection and automatic reclosing functions without any control functionality.
For optimal performance of the protection and automatic reclosing functions, Siemens recommends
detecting the Pole closed information selectively via the auxiliary contacts.
[lo_evaluation, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-45 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection
Device
Perform the routing to the binary input as C_ (closed). The following figure shows the recommended routing,
in which H stands for active with voltage.
[sc_polges, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-46 Pole Closed: Routing for the Acquisition of Pole Closed Information
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 365
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[lo_ausw_3p, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-47 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection and
Control Device
Execute the routing of the Position 3-pole signal as O_ (open). The following figure shows the recom-
mended routing, in which H stands for active with voltage.
[sc_poloff, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-48 Routing for Detection of the Information: Circuit Breaker 3-Pole Open
Depending on the design of the circuit breaker, other auxiliary contacts can be available in the system. In
this case, the device allows all routing options and acquires the necessary information automatically. Since all
routing options are possible on the device, there is no need for auxiliary contacts to be connected in series.
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary. However, this is a requirement for the control functions.
366 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control
circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
² Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
Measured Values
When a protection function opens the circuit breaker, the following measured values can be stored in the fault
log:
• Break.-current phs A
• Break.-current phs B
• Break.-current phs C
• Break. current 3I0/IN
• Break. voltage phs A
• Break. voltage phs B
• Break. voltage phs C
The measured value Break. current 3I0/IN is the neutral-point current. Dependent on the connection
type of the measuring point I-3ph that is connected with the Circuit-breaker function group, the neutral-
point current differs as follows:
Connection Type of the Meas- Neutral-Point Current
uring Point I-3ph
3-phase Calculated zero-sequence current 3I0
3-phase + IN Measured neutral-point current IN
3-phase + IN-separate If the secondary ground current exceeds the linear section of the sensi-
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep tive measuring input (1.6 Irated) with sensitive current transformers, the
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep neutral-point current of the measured IN is switched to the calculated 3I0.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 367
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
For this, the alarm activation circuit should be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device
(output signal Alarm suppression). In the idle state and when the device is switched off, this contact is
always closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens whenever
the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active, so that tripping or a switching operation does not
cause an alarm.
You can find more detailed information in the logic in chapter 5.5.5.3 Detection of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary
Contacts and Further Information.
[lo_schalt, 2, en_US]
5.5.6.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow. The determination is performed phase-segregated.
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
[lozust1p-170611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
368 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
Based on the connection between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow shown in
Figure 5-50, the circuit-breaker position can assume the following positions separately for each phase: The
following table shows the possible circuit-breaker positions:
Circuit-Breaker Position, Description
Phase-Segregated
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as open according to
both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously as closed according to
both criteria.
Possibly open, possibly These positions can occur if the information is incomplete due to the
closed routing of the auxiliary contacts and the position can no longer be deter-
mined reliably. These uncertain positions are evaluated differently by
certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring position that results when, while a trip
command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed, the current falling
below the threshold value is detected because the current-flow criterion
takes effect faster than the auxiliary contact can open.
[loghande-091210-01.tif, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 369
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
[lo_steuer, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-52 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil
Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process. Therefore, detection is suppressed automatically
in the event of a close command by the internal AREC function of the device.
If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to prompt detection of a manual closure (for example, with an external reclosing device), this can be
assured in 2 ways:
• The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.
• The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.
370 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.7.3 Settings
5.5.8 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 371
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
372 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.1 Overview
The function group Analog units is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, or analog plug-in modules or measuring-transducer modules.
You can find the function group Analog units for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
[sc_20_maee, 3, en_US]
If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the function group Analog units. If
one or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit
serial functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library in order to map the RTD units.
If the device is connected to a power-plant control system or another protection device, you must load one or
more Temperature acquisition via protocols functions from the Global DIGSI 5 library to form the protocols.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 373
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_str_the, 3, en_US]
The function group Analog units has interfaces to protection function groups. The function group Analog
units provides, for example, measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit , a measuring
transducer or via protocols. These measured temperature values are available for all protection function
groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The function RTD unit Ether. is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 20 function instances
can operate simultaneously.
The structure of the function RTD unit serial is identical to the structure of the function RTD unit Ether..
The function 20-mA unit Ether. is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4 function instances
can operate simultaneously. The structure of the function 20 mA serial unit is identical to the structure of the
function 20-mA unit Ether..
374 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols has 2 stage types: The Temperature acquisition via
PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 and the Temperature acquisition via GOOSE. One instance of the Temperature
acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 is preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 12 instances
can operate simultaneously for both stage types.
5.6.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
• Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
[dw_str_fn2, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 375
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lo_20mtcp, 1, en_US]
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the status Health transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
376 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The signal Failure is issued as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
Parameter: IP address
Logic
[lo_20mcha, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 377
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.
Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the
corresponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities
such as temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the
20-mA channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated
values are available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.
Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or
a pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the
20-mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from
a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
[sckanumw-190214-01, 1, en_US]
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 °C and the measured value 20 mA means
a temperature of 100 °C. So enter as Unit = °C and Conversion factor = 100. The resolution (decimal
place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.
[dw_knges3, 1, en_US]
378 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the useable
range between Lower limit and Upper limit (see following figure).
[sckanumf-190214-01, 1, en_US]
[dw_knges2, 1, en_US]
In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit -
Sensor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA, the quality of the scaled
measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display page and processed with CFC charts.
Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 379
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Parameter: Unit
Parameter: Resolution
Parameter: Upper limitLower limitUpper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
380 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.3.7 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 381
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
382 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
• Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
• Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure
• Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 383
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Parameter: Port
Parameter: Unit
Parameter: Resolution
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor
384 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameter Upper limit -
Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit
setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current
corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of
the 12 channels do not differ.
5.6.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 385
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
386 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 387
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[sc20ser3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
388 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the
parameter Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
[scauser5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group
Analog units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see the
following figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 389
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc20ser6-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the
20‑mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
• Device address: 1
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-67 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address
Device Configuration
In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device configu-
ration. Figure 5-68 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB202.
Alternatively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.
390 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_autcp1, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
[sc_autcp2, 1, en_US]
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[sc_autcp3, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the 20-mA unit Ether. 1 function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 391
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_20tcp4, 1, en_US]
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.
[sc_autcp5, 1, en_US]
5.6.6.1 Overview
The fast analog measuring-transducer inputs process voltage values (DC -10 V to +10 V) as well as current
values (DC -20 mA to 20 mA).
The function MT fast input:
• Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record (the maximum sampling frequency is 8 kHz
for all other SIPROTEC 5 devices). The recorded sampling frequency results from the setting of the
fault-recorder function.
• Calculated measured values from the sampled values. These measured values have been deduced from
the arithmetic mean values. The measuring range for the mean-value calculation is adjustable in the
interval from 10 ms to 100 ms.
392 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas
pressure, etc.
• Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in
GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization
The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or
voltage inputs), and the IO210 module with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).
[dw_mu-structure, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 393
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[scmuio212, 2, en_US]
The fast measuring-transducer channels can be configured either as current or as voltage inputs. Apart from
this, their function corresponds to the basic function of the 20-mA channels (see chapter 5.6.3.5 20-mA
Channel).
Parameter: Unit
394 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
If you do not activate the Range active parameter, the function assumes a range of -20 mA to +20 mA
or -10 V to +10 V. The setting of the range for the scaled value then assumes a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA or -10 V to +10 V.
If you activate the parameter Range active, the 4 additional parameters Upper limit,Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Note that this setting is activated by either placing, or not placing the relevant check mark in DIGSI (see
Figure 5-74).
Parameter: Upper limit, Upper limit - Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor
With the following parameters, you set the scaling of the measuring variables. By that, you can scale in an
application-specific way:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 395
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US]
If you keep the preset limiting values, the following conditions are possible:
Setting Example 1:
A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents
well below -25.6 mA or above +25.6 mA indicate a transmitter failure. A sensor detecting a temperature
is attached to the transmitter. The upper value corresponds to 200 °C and the lower value to -100 °C. This
results in the following characteristic. In accordance with the set characteristic curve, the function calculates
the sensor value from the measured current. The coefficients of the linear equation (gradient and foot point)
are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined. A supplied current of 9.333 mA
corresponds to a temperature of 0 °C.
396 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are
transmitted and analyzed using the setting range (Upper limit orLower limit). Therefore, special
applications are possible, if necessary. The limits are at approx. +20 mA and -20 mA or +10 V and -10 V.
Setting Example 2:
For special applications, the transmitter sends a maximum of ±12 V. This voltage shall be issued accordingly as
sensor voltage.
Set the parameters as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 397
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-77 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater than 10 V
5.6.6.5 Settings
398 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 399
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit
400 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_str_fnc, 2, en_US]
Logic
[lo_rtdtcp, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 401
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
The Failure signal is issued as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
Parameter: IP address
402 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The code lock has to be switched off for parameterization. This is only possible using the front keys of the RTD
unit. The code lock is off (switched off) in as-delivered condition and has pin 504.
For detailed information on the settings, refer to the TR1200 IP manual that comes with the RTD unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de) under Accessories ->
7XV5662-xAD.
For an Ethernet connection to a SIPROTEC 5 device communicating with the RTD unit TR1200 IP via the SUP
protocol (Slave Unit Protocol), the Modbus TCP setting must be activated in the RTD unit. You can activate
the Modbus TCP protocol using the function keys under the tcP. → Mod / on menu item or with the Web
browser in the TCP/UDP Config tab. The RTD (RTD protocol) and UDP Port settings have no effect here. The
Modbus TCP port is permanently set to 502 and cannot be changed.
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured
temperature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with
the following table:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 403
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• In the Settings view select the menu item DIGSI 5 User preferences.
• Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
404 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.7.7 Settings
5.6.8.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
• Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit
Parameter: Port
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 405
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the parameter Channel number, you set
the channel number (1 or 2) through which the RTD unit is connected to the device. The communication
module inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
5.6.8.3 Settings
406 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US]
[scauser4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 407
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings
of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The setting of the parameter
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
[scauser5-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD unit serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).
[sc_auser6, 1, en_US]
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the RTD
unit. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the first
time:
408 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• Device address: 1
• Parity: no
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-87 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
Device Configuration
In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus adding the module to the device config-
uration. Figure 5-88 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB202.
Alternatively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface port J.
[sc_autcp1, 1, en_US]
Communication Settings
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 409
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_autcp2, 1, en_US]
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[sc_autcp3, 1, en_US]
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
[sc_auser6, 1, en_US]
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD unit (refer to the
following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD unit.
410 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_autcp5, 1, en_US]
5.6.10.1 Overview
The function Temperature acquisition via protocols:
• Obtains the temperature from a power-plant control system or from another protection device
• Processes the temperature, for example, supervises the temperature in the CFC
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 411
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[dw_structure_TmpviaProt, 1, en_US]
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
The stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 supports 2 protocols:
• PROFINET IO protocol
If you set the PROFINET IO protocol for the temperature acquisition, you can only get the analog value.
412 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Stage Application
You can use the stage Temperature acquisition via PROFINET IO or IEC 61850 for the following purposes:
• Send the processed cold‑gas temperature value to other functions for further processing
[dw_app-example_IEC, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 413
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
Logic
[lo_tmpval, 1, en_US]
Stage Application
The following terms are used for the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE:
• Source device
SIPROTEC 5 protection device that provides data
• Target device
SIPROTEC 5 protection device that requests data from the source device
In the target device, you can use the stage Temperature acquisition via GOOSE for the following purposes:
• Send the processed cold‑gas temperature value to other functions for further processing
414 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
In the following figure, the source device is SIPROTEC 5 device 2 and the target device is SIPROTEC 5 device 1.
[dw_app-example_GOOSE, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 415
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• To change the temperature unit from °C to °F for all devices in the current DIGSI project, proceed as
follows:
– In DIGSI, select the menu item Options > Settings.
– In the Settings view, select the menu item DIGSI 5 user preferences.
– Set the parameter Standard unit system to US units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-98 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for all Devices
[sc_SITmp, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-99 Change of the Temperature Unit between °C and °F for 1 Device
416 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
NOTE
i If the parameter Unit system is set to ANSI, only the unit of the measuring values and parameters
changes to °F.
The unit of the following data is still °C:
Parameter: Unit
5.6.10.6 Settings
5.6.11.1 Overview
The input module IO240 for the low-power instrument transformer in the gas insulated switchgear (GIS-LPIT)
and for the resistive-capacitive voltage transformer (RCVT) from Siemens Energy (LPIT module IO240):
• Provides an interface for SIPROTEC 5 modular devices to connect to Siemens Energy GIS-LPIT (GIS-LPVT
and GIS-LPCT) and RCVT
• Converts voltage values into primary values according to the sensor type (GIS-LPVT or RCVT)
• Provides primary values for protection functions, the voltage measurement, and the current measure-
ment
The input module IO240 is available in a hardware variant of the 6MU85 device as part of the 1/3 base module
or as an expansion module for installation in modular SIPROTEC 5 devices.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 417
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
NOTE
i Due to the higher power demand of the IO240 boards, a maximum of 2 IO240 modules are allowed per
device row and totally a maximum of 4 IO240 modules are allowed in a SIPROTEC 5 device. This limitation
also applies to the case that 1 of the IO240 modules is used in the 1/3 basic housing.
For more information on the use and configuration of the IO240 module combined with the connected LPIT,
refer to the Application Note APN-090 IO240 and LPITs.
• 3 for RCVT
[dw_strIO240, 4, en_US]
(1) It is available when the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor under LPIT General is
checked.
(2) It is available when the parameter Use cal. data IO240 board under IO240 general data is
checked.
418 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
(1) It is available when the parameter GIS-LPIT type under LPIT General is set to LPIT 1-
phase.
(2) It is available when the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor under LPIT General is
checked.
[lo_IO240_logic_diagram, 3, en_US]
NOTE
i The parameter IO240 production ID is only used for calculation when the parameter Use cal.
data IO240 board in the function block IO240 general data is checked.
The parameters Magnitude corr. factor and Phase offset correction are only used for calcu-
lation when the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor in the function block LPIT General is checked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 419
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
internally provided to the device for the measurement functions or protection functions, and can be optionally
published as sampled measured values.
Calibration Data
The calibration data of the GIS-LPIT sensor, the GIS-LPIT connection box, and the IO240 board are stored in a
cloud storage. Therefore, the calibration data for DIGSI are available independently from the DIGSI 5 version
and can be updated for newly produced GIS-LPIT and IO240 board. To update the local copy of the calibration
data file, you can click the refresh button . The feedback of a successful or unsuccessful update of the
calibration data file is given in the Info tab.
420 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_LPIT_General, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 421
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
NOTE
• Default setting (_:144) Primary Phase C = LPIT Sensor of GIS Pole III
With these parameters, you define the mapping relationship between the primary phase and the LPIT sensor
of GIS pole, according to the physical connection. The LPIT module IO240 takes the settings of the corre-
sponding LPIT sensor of GIS pole for each phase.
• Default setting: the parameter (_:20281:159) Use RCVT as volt. sensor is unchecked.
With the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor, you decide whether to use the GIS-LPVT or RCVT as the
voltage sensor type for the primary-voltage measurement. When this parameter is checked, the 3 function
blocks for RCVTs are available and all the settings related to GIS-LPVT are invisible.
422 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
With these parameters, you configure the mutual influence of crosstalk from the RCVT in one phase to the one
in another phase.
• Default setting: the parameter (_:20821:177) Use cal. data IO240 board is unchecked.
With the parameter Use cal. data IO240 board, you decide whether to use the calibration data of the
IO240 board for the primary-value calculation to achieve measuring accuracy class 0.1. When this parameter is
checked, the function block IO240 cal.data is available.
[sc_LPIT-GIS_pole, 1, en_US]
[sc_settings_RCVT, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 423
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
For the parameter IO240 production ID, you must enter the value manually. You can find the production
ID of the IO240 board in DIGSI 5 via Online access > Device information > Hardware inform. > HW module
with the board type: IO240. You can also get the production ID of the specific IO240 board from the LPIT
supplier.
424 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
[sc_IO240_production_ID, 1, en_US]
After the production ID is entered, the corresponding version of database is visible in DIGSI. The version is not
configurable.
Measuring-Points Routing
The LPIT module IO240 only supports the 3 ph-to-gnd voltages connection type of voltage and the
3-phase connection type of current in the Measuring-points routing.
2 groups of 3-phase voltage measuring channels with different voltage-transformer types derived from the
connected voltage sensor are available in the Measuring-points routing. For each LPIT module IO240, you
can only route 1 group of the 3-phase voltage measuring channels according to the connected voltage sensor,
either GIS-LPVT or RCVT. The measuring-points routing must be consistent with the configuration of the
parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor. Otherwise, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 425
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
NOTE
i The voltages in the following channels are for the GIS-LPVT sensor:
• LP-VT3.1
• LP-VT3.2
• LP-VT3.3
The voltages in the following channels are for the RCVT sensor:
• RC-VT3.1
• RC-VT3.2
• RC-VT3.3
2 groups of 3-phase current measuring channels with different measuring ranges derived from the connected
Rogowski coil are available in the Measuring-points routing. The protection channel supplies a dynamic
range of 100 times the rated primary current of the assigned current measuring point. The measuring channel
supplies a dynamic range of 1.6 times the rated primary current of the assigned measuring point, with higher
accuracy than the protection channel. The rated primary current must be set accordingly in the settings for the
current measuring points. The settings for the current measuring points can be found in the device settings
under Settings and Power System.
NOTE
i The currents in the following channels are for the protection function:
• LP-PT3.1
• LP-PT3.2
• LP-PT3.3
The currents in the following channels are for the measurement function:
• LP-MS3.1
• LP-MS3.2
• LP-MS3.3
426 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
• Extend the shield cover with an optional microswitch (product code P1X596).
5.6.11.5 Settings
24 This parameter is visible under GIS-LPIT of each sensor when you set GIS-LPIT type to LPIT 1-phase.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 427
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
428 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The following setting table shows only 1 of the 3 LPIT-GIS poles, as the setting possibilities of the 3 poles are
the same.
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting
GIS-LPIT25
_:102 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPIT Production Production ID of the GIS sensor –
ID
_:120 LPIT-GIS Pol #:Enter values • no no
manually
• yes
GIS LPCT
_:103 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPCT mutual 0.001 nH to 8 000 000.000 nH 228.000 nH
inductance
_:104 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPCT self-induc 0.1 to 4000.0 2000.0
factor
_:105 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPCT resistance 0.01 Ω to 200.00 Ω 7.00 Ω
_:106 LPIT-GIS Pol #:Current polarity • no no
inverse
• yes
_:118 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPCT transfor- 0.000 kA/V to 3 200 000.000 kA/V 17.000 kA/V
mation ratio
GIS LPVT
_:107 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPVT capaci- 0.001 pF to 800 000.000 pF 42.000 pF
tance
_:119 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPVT transform. 0.000 kV/mA to 3 200 000.000 75.000 kV/mA
ratio kV/mA
LPIT connection box
_:109 LPIT-GIS Pol #:LPIT connec- Type of the LPIT connection box –
tion-box type
_:110 LPIT-GIS Pol #:Connec. box 0.01 Ω to 10.00 Ω 1.50 Ω
LPIT resis.
_:111 LPIT-GIS Pol #:Connec. box 1.0 pF to 10000.0 pF 6900.0 pF
LPIT capacit.
25 The following parameters are visible under LPIT General when you set GIS-LPIT type to LPIT 3-phase.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 429
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
The following setting table shows only 1 of the 3 RCVTs, as the setting possibilities of the 3 RCVTs are the
same.
Only when the parameter Use RCVT as volt. sensor is checked, the following function block is
available.
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting
RCVT #
_:101 RCVT #:Magnitude corr. factor 0.9000 to 1.1000 1.0000
_:102 RCVT #:Phase offset correction -300.0 ' to 15.0 ' 0.0 '
Only when the parameter Use cal. data IO240 board is checked, the following function block is
available.
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting
IO240 cal.data
_:100 IO240 cal.data:IO240 produc- Production ID of the IO240 board –
tion ID
_:101 IO240 cal.data:Database The database version from which –
version the IO240 board calibration data are
derived
It is not configurable, but obtained
from the used calibration data after
the IO240 production ID is entered.
The following table shows only 1 of the 3 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the 3 sensors do not differ.
No. Information Data Class Type
(Type)
LPIT-GIS Pol #
_:80 LPIT-GIS Pol #:TmpOut MV O
_:79 LPIT-GIS Pol #:R MV O
430 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
5.7.1 Overview
With help from user-defined function groups and user-defined functions you can group user-defined objects,
for example user-defined function blocks. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see following figure).
[sc_udef_lib, 1, en_US]
The user-defined function block allows you to add (see following figure) single-point indications, pickup
indications, operate indications (ADC, ACT), single and double commands, commands with a controllable
whole number as well as measured values. You can assign the group a superordinate name (for example
process indications for a group of single-point indications which are read via binary inputs). This function can
be deactivated using the mode. The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed.
The user-defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level (alongside other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
In addition, there is a user-defined function block [control]. Alongside the aforementioned possibilities
presented by user-defined function blocks, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals,
for example SPC or DPC.
These are described in chapter 7.6.1 Overview of Functions.
[sc_user, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-112 Information Routing with Incorporated User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications and
some Single-Point Indications
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 431
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals. Additionally, a folder for external signals is available (see chapter 3.9.5 External Signals).
User-Defined Signals
[sc_LB_userdefsig, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
432 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
[sc_spsfas, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-114 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 433
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can be
shown on the display of the device.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
• Transformer taps
• Metered values
434 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
The status indications for the ACT data type are built as follows:
[lo_ACT-information, 1, en_US]
[lo_ACD-information, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 435
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
Table 5-12 Building of the Direction Information for the Data Type ACD
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line as
well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
You can find the functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values in 9.8.1 Function Description of
Pulse-Metered Values.
Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in 9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values.
The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
• SEQ (Sequence)
NOTE
i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching
element is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC
(binary controlled step position information).
436 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.8 Function-Group Recording
5.8.1 Overview
The device has a flash memory in which records can be saved. The recording documents operations within the
power system and how devices respond to them. You can read out records from the device and analyze them.
Depending on the recorder, the records are available in different file formats (see the following table).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 437
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Function-Group Types
5.8 Function-Group Recording
[dw_fg_recorder, 4, en_US]
NOTE
i If you want to use one of the following functions, the device must be equipped with the CP300, CP150, or
CP050 CPU printed circuit board assembly:
• Slow-scan recorder
• Continuous recorder
• Trend recorder
The Recording function group is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-
value and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates.
You can individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5.
For more information on the Fault recorder function, refer to Fault Recording, starting at 3.5.1 Overview of
Functions .
For more information on the Recording function group, refer to the Manual for the Recording function group
(C53000-H5040-C089).
438 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
6 Protection and Automation Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 439
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
440 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You can find them
in DIGSI under Settings → Power-system data.
The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
NOTE
i You can find information on the supervision-function parameters in 8.3 Supervision of the Secondary
System.
Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 441
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase (I-3ph)
The supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. You can find the description
of these parameters in 8 Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
• 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 3-phase, 2 primary CT
• 3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
Parameter: Tracking
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
442 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
With platform version V07.80 and higher, you can merge measuring points into Frequency tracking groups
in SIPROTEC 5 devices. In this case, every frequency tracking group specifies its own sampling frequency. You
can find more information on this in 3.3 Sampling-Frequency Tracking and Frequency Tracking Groups.
[dw_polstromwdl, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 443
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
The parameter Inverted phases is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-storage hydro-
power plants (see 6.51 Phase-Sequence Switchover). This default setting may be retained for power-system
protection applications.
Parameter: CT error A
Parameter: CT error B
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
• f sys:
The measured value f sys shows the current frequency of the plant. It is calculated with the angle
difference algorithm. If no voltage or current is present, the default value is 0 Hz.
444 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
• f track:
The measured value f track shows the set sampling frequency. It is calculated from f sys and
the angle. If the voltage frequency or current frequency change, f track adjusts automatically. If no
voltage or current is present, the default value is 50 Hz.
Siemens recommends routing both measured values as fault-recording channel.
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 1‑Phase (I-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point I 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a current to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring-point routing → Current measuring points.
You can only route the current Ix.
Parameter: Tracking
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 445
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
6.1.6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph)
Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. You can find the
description of these settings in supervision functions.
446 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
The zero-sequence voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the
broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer. For 1-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is
measured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.
NOTE
i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:
EXAMPLE 1:
[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]
When the type of connection for the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT
connection) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the broken-delta winding of the voltage transformer
(da/dn), the Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 6-3, this results in the following values:
• The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/√3.
• The measured residual voltage on the broken-delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the
3 sides. Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated sec /3.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 447
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
[fo_example_1, 2, en_US]
In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the broken-delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.
EXAMPLE 2:
[fo_example_2, 1, en_US]
[fo_conversion2, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational
measured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and
the measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:
The parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN is significant for the following functions:
• Measured-value supervision
448 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Parameter: VT connection
• 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
• 3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-ph voltages
• 2 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
• 2 ph-to-ph voltages
NOTE
i If you use the function group Line, select connection type 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN or 3 ph-to-gnd
voltages when routing the voltage measuring point!
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in A.7 Connec-
tion Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices. The connection examples provide assistance
when selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Tracking
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 449
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
NOTE
i The parameter Magnitude correction has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
6.1.7 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 1‑Phase (V-1ph)
If you insert a Measuring point V 1-ph in DIGSI 5, you must route a voltage to the measuring point under
Name of the device → Measuring point routing → Voltage measuring points.
You can route the following voltages:
• V A
• V B
• V C
• V AB
• V BC
• V CA
450 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
• VN30
• Vx
• VN broken-delta31
NOTE
i The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is only visible in the Measuring point V-1ph if the voltage
VN broken-delta has been routed.
Parameter: Tracking
30 If you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the neutral-point displacement voltage.
31 If you route this voltage, the protection functions operate with the voltage measured directly at the broken-delta winding of the
voltage transformer.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 451
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Parameter: Measuring-point ID
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
6.1.8 Application and Setting Notes for Line Differential Protection Settings
NOTE
i The following parameters are only important for the Line differential protection function. You can find
these parameters in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Device name (for example, 7SL86) → Settings →
Power-system data under Measuring point I-3ph.
452 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
regard to the value of the current transformed by the current transformer. To do this, set the characteristic
data of the current transformer and the secondary circuits. In many cases, the default setting can be main-
tained. It considers the data of the most unfavorable protection current transformer. By using the following
settings, the Line differential protection function approximates the characteristic curve of the transformer
error and calculates the stabilization value.
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
[fofueber-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
n' Operational overcurrent factor (effective overcurrent factor)
n Rated overcurrent factor of the current transformer (index following the letter "P")
PN Rated burden of the current transformer at rated current in [VA]
Pi Inherent burden of the current transformers at rated current in [VA]
P' Actually connected burden (devices and secondary lines) at rated current in [VA]
The rated overcurrent factor n and the rated power PN of the current transformer can be found on the name
plate of the current transformer. These values refer to the specified conditions (rated current, rated burden).
EXAMPLE:
The operational overcurrent factor n' is the result of the rated data and the actual secondary burden P'.
Under normal circumstances, the inherent burden of the current transformer is documented in the test report.
If this value is unknown, the inherent burden Pi can be approximated and determined from the DC resistance
Ri of the secondary winding:
[foeigbue-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 453
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Parameter: CT error A
Example:
Parameter: CT error B
Fault Transition32
at Rated Current
at Rated Current
Transformer
CT error A32
CT error B32
STANDARD
Class
Angle Error
Ratio Error
Fault at
454 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
Fault Transition32
at Rated Current
at Rated Current
Transformer
CT error A32
CT error B32
STANDARD
Class
Angle Error
Ratio Error
Fault at
Low-power IEC 61869-6 <1% < ± 30 min <1% 1.50 3.0 % 3.0 %
current trans-
former
Optical current IEC 61869-6 <1% < ± 30 min <1% 1.50 3.0 % 3.0 %
transformer
EXAMPLE:
[fo_rl, 1, en_US]
The worst-case scenario has been assumed for the calculation, whereby during a 1-pole error the current
flows back and forth across the secondary lines (factor 2). This follows that the power at a rated current of
Irated = 5 A can be calculated as:
[fo_pi, 1, en_US]
The entire connected burden comprises the burden of the supply lines and the burden of the device, and is
calculated as follows:
[fo_pges, 1, en_US]
[fo_fehlerueb, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 455
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
EXAMPLE:
For the controlled side of the transformer, the following mean current is determined:
[foimittl-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fodelmax-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Add this max. deviation to the transformer errors CT error A and CT error B determined as described
above. Ensure that this deviation due to voltage control relates to the mean current at rated apparent power
and not to the rated current at the rated voltage.
6.1.9.1 Overview
Maintenance work or specific operating and switching states of the power system can require disconnec-
tion of measuring point. Therefore, it is sometimes necessary to take individual measuring points out of
processing, for example, to prevent an unwanted tripping of the Differential protection. With the Disconnec-
tion of measuring points functionality, you can disconnect the connection of the Measuring point I-3ph to a
protection function group.
If the measuring point has been disconnected, you can carry out any work without influencing the work
of the protection functions that are assigned to the measuring point. Once the measuring point has been
disconnected, the Differential protection, for example, does not take the measured values of this measuring
point into account anymore for calculating the differential current.
456 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
• Power-Swing Blocking
NOTE
i If one of the current measuring points is disconnected, the mentioned protection functions of the FG Line
switch to the Alarm state and are not active.
There is another exception for the disconnection of measuring points for the FG Circuit breaker: If the FG
Circuit breaker is connected to a disconnected measuring point, the functional measured values are indicated
as usual and used by the functions in the FG Circuit breaker. That is, the disconnection does not set the
functional measured values to 0. If a circuit-breaker failure detection is instantiated in the FG Circuit breaker,
Siemens recommends blocking the function for current tests.
6.1.9.2 Description
Logic
You can find the signals for the Disconnection of measuring points in the Information routing matrix in
DIGSI under Settings → Power system→ Meas.point I-3ph.
The following signals are available for activating the Measuring point I-3ph:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 457
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
value. If you want to disconnect the measuring point without threshold-value check, consider that no currents
are flowing anymore in the primary plant.
Disconnection messages are also available after a restart of the device. The device stores the disconnection
efficacy in NVRAM33 The last information on disconnection remains available, even if the auxiliary voltage
fails. When the auxiliary voltage returns, the device compares the stored state with that of the binary inputs.
33 NVRAM = Non-Volatile Random Access Memory; RAM, which does not lose the stored data, even when there is no power.
458 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
EXAMPLE
[dw_similar-application_7SD_with_2-MU, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-6 Possible Disconnection of Measuring Point for the Line Differential Protection
(1) Temporary disconnection of the connection to the Measuring point I-3ph 1 for the FG Line and
to the Protection Function Group 1
NOTE
i If you disconnect the Measuring point I-3ph 1, you must make sure that no currents flows into the feeder
via M1. Otherwise, this leads to an unwanted tripping of the Line differential protection function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 459
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
EXAMPLE
[dw_similar-application_7SJ8_with_2-MU, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-7 Possible Disconnection of Measuring Point for the Feeder Protection
(1) Temporary disconnection of the connection of the Measuring point I-3ph 1 to the FG 3-ph
voltage/current
6.1.9.4 Settings
460 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.10 Settings
General Information
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 461
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
462 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 463
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
464 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 465
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
466 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 467
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
General
468 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 469
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data
470 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
• Is a selective short-circuit protection for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and multi-
side infeed in radial, looped, or meshed systems
The function Line differential protection is used in the function group Line.
The function Line differential protection is preconfigured at the factory with the function block (FB)
General , the stage I-DIFF, and the stage I-DIFF fast 2.
Additional stage types are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library:
• The stage I-DIFF fast as an alternative for the stage I-DIFF fast 2.
• The stage IN-DIFF unrest for separate protection of the ground path.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that the same stage types must be instantiated in all devices of the device combination.
That is, when using the stage I-DIFF fast, this stage must be instantiated in all devices of the device
combination.
Also note that the devices can be operated either with the stage I-DIFF fast 2 or with the stage I-DIFF fast.
Parallel operation of the 2 stages is not possible.
When commissioning communication via the protection interface, it is checked whether the same stage
types are instantiated in all devices of the device combination. If different stage types are instantiated
in the devices, communication via the protection interface is not possible. In this case, the protection inter-
face issues the diagnostic indication (_:5161:302) Status of lay. 3 and 4 = Diff. Param.
Error in that case.
For further information, refer to 3.6.5.8 Indications and Measured Values in the Classic Protection Interface
and 3.6.6.6 Indications and Measured Values of the Advanced Protection Interface.
The function blocks Ic-compensat. and Transformer are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library for special
applications and can be instantiated into the function.
The protection function is structured in that way that the settings in the FB General are valid for all stages.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 471
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[dw_diff-structur_LP, 1, en_US]
472 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Overall Logic
[lo_Group-indication_remote-trip_1-3p, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-9 Logic Diagram of the Function Line Differential Protection, Overall Logic
Mode of Operation
The function Line differential protection is composed of several subfunctions.
The core of differential protection consists of the 2 stages I-DIFF and I-DIFF fast 2. Both work in parallel and
ensure high sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault.
For special applications where a ground differential protection is required, the stages IN-DIFF and/or IN-DIFF
unrest can be used.
With the stage I2-DIFF, a negative-sequence differential protection can also be used.
The output signals of these stages are pickup and trip signals, which are routed to the pickup logic and the trip
logic, resulting in the corresponding protection indications.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 473
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The functionality Remote tripping transmits the internally generated trip group indication to the remote
devices in the device combination. In addition, the functionality Remote tripping receives the trip group indi-
cations of the remote devices and transmits these indications to the trip logic. For more detailed information,
refer to 6.2.13 Remote Tripping.
The optional FB Ic-compensat. contains the charging-current compensation. The FB Ic-compensat. is
assigned exclusively to the sensitive stage I-DIFF and ensures maximum sensitivity even with high capacitive
charging currents.
The optional FB Transformer is required to protect a transformer in the protection range. The additional FB
Transformer guarantees that amplitudes and phase angle of the measured currents at the line ends will be
evaluated correctly.
Line differential protection is designed for protected objects with up to 6 ends. The line differential protection
operates on the basis of current comparison (Kirchhoff’s current law). For this a device has to be installed
at each end of the area to be protected. The devices exchange their measurands via communication connec-
tions. Each device performs the current comparison with these measurands and trips the assigned circuit
breaker, if there is a short circuit in the protection range. The current transformers selectively delimit the
protection range.
Apart from normal lines, the Line differential protection can also protect lines with a transformer in block
connection. By using the function Inrush-current detection and the adaptive method of measurement for the
line differential protection, the stages can be stabilized to prevent tripping that may be caused by transformer
inrush currents.
Measured-Value Transmission
If the protected object is spatially connected – as is the case with generators, transformers, busbars – the
measurands can be processed directly. The processing is different for lines where the protection range extends
from one station to another. To enable the measurands from all line ends to be processed at each line end,
these measurands must be transferred in a suitable form. In this way, the tripping condition can be checked at
each line end, and the respective local circuit breaker can be tripped in case of a fault.
The measurands are encrypted and transmitted in digital telegrams via communication channels. For this
purpose, each device features at least one interface for protection-data communication, called the protection
interface in the following.
Figure 6-10 shows this principle for a line with 2 ends. Each device detects the local current and sends
information on its magnitude and phase relation to the opposite end. Thus, each device can add the currents
from all ends and further process them.
[dwdiff2e-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If there are more than 2 ends, a communication chain is established so that each device is informed of
the sum of the currents flowing into the protected object. Figure 6-11 shows an example with 3 ends. The
underlying principle in this regard is partial current summation. In this process, each device measures the
respective local currents. Device 1 detects the current i1 and transmits its data in the form of a complex
phasor I1 to device 2. This device adds the component I2 from measuring current i2 and transmits this
subtotal to device 3. The subtotal I1 + I2 reaches device 3, which adds its component I3. In the reverse
direction, a corresponding chain runs from device 3 via device 2 to device 1. In this way, all 3 devices have the
sum of all 3 currents measured at the measuring points.
474 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
If ends 1 and 2 are close together (within about 500 m), currents I1 and I2 can also be detected by 1 protec-
tion device. The number of analog current inputs (8I) at the protection device must be sufficient for this. Thus,
the topology shown in Figure 6-11 can also be protected with just 2 physical devices (see Figure 6-12).
The order of the devices in the communication chain does not have to correspond to their indexing. The
assignment is made in the course of parameterization for the topology.
For more detailed information, refer to 3.6.5.5 Setting Notes for the Device Combination.
[dwdiff3e-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-12 Differential Protection for a Line with 3 Ends with 2 Devices
The communication chain can also be connected to a ring, as shown with dashed lines in Figure 6-11.
This enables a redundant transmission. Even if there is an outage of the communication connection, the
differential-protection system remains operational without any constraints. The devices recognize a failure in
the communication and automatically switch over to a different communication route. It is also possible to
disconnect one line end (for example for tests or modification) and shut down the local protection.
For more information on this, refer to 6.2.15 Logging Off the Local Line Differential Protection.
In a communication ring, the remaining operation can continue without interruption.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 475
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Measured-Value Synchronization
The devices detect the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device detects, digitizes, and
preprocesses the associated currents from the current transformers at its own random processor clock. If
the currents of 2 or more line ends are to be compared, all currents must be processed with the same
time base. All devices in the device combination exchange their time status with each telegram. The device
whose address is entered first in the device-combination configuration in the protection interface functions as
timing master, meaning it specifies the time frame. Each device can thus calculate the time offset due to the
transmission and processing times relative to the timing master.
To achieve a sufficiently exact synchronization of the measured values, the current values are additionally
provided with a time stamp before they are transmitted from one device to the others in digital telegrams.
The time stamp allows a statement on the time at which the transmitted current values were valid. The
receiving devices can thus carry out a fine synchronization based on the time stamp and their own time
management. This means that currents detected at the same time (< 5 μs tolerance) are compared with each
other.
The devices use the time stamp in the measured-data telegram to monitor the transfer times in real time
and take each of these into account at the respective receiving end. The frequency of the measurands is
decisive for precise calculation of the complex phasors. So that the phasor comparison is synchronous, the
devices also measure the frequency of the measurands constantly and feed these into the calculation when
needed. If the device is connected to voltage transformers and if at least one voltage is available in sufficient
magnitude, the frequency is determined from this voltage. Otherwise, the measured currents are used as the
basis for frequency determination. The devices exchange the determined frequencies with one another via the
communication routes. Under these conditions, all devices operate with the updated frequency.
Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of the differential protection is based on the precondition that, during uninterrupted
operation, the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equals 0. This applies to the primary
system and only there if the shunt components of current, which occur from the capacitance of the lines or
the magnetization currents of the transformers and shunt reactors, are negligible. In contrast, the secondary
currents offered to the devices via the current transformers contain measuring fault originating from the
measuring fault of the current transformers and the input circuits of the devices themselves. Even transmis-
sion faults such as signal jitter can cause measurand deviations.
All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the currents processed in the devices is
not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influences. A special method of Adaptive
self-stabilization is applied in this context to ensure the highest possible sensitivity of the differential protec-
tion. The function calculates a restraint current Irest for this purpose.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
476 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Current-Transformer Faults
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer faults, each device calculates the current-
transformer fault on an adaptive basis. This value results from an estimated calculation of the possible local
transformer faults based on the data of the local current transformers and the magnitude of the locally
measured currents.
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The basis for this are the transformer data of the connected current transformers that must be entered
individually for each device. Since each device transmits its estimated faults to the other devices in the device
combination, each device is able to determine the sum of possible faults and use them for stabilization.
• The stage I-DIFF works with accurate measurement. Maximum sensitivity can be achieved with this
stage. You cannot delete this stage.
The stage I-DIFF can cooperate with the Current comparison stage of the Line differential protec-
tion of the SIPROTEC 4 devices 7SD5x and 7SD61x.
• The stage I-DIFF fast 2 works in parallel with the stage I-DIFF. A very fast algorithm enables
tripping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
If the stage I-DIFF fast 2 is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is visible with the param-
eter CT saturation threshold in the Measuring point Current 3-phase.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 477
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
• The stage I-DIFF fast is available in the DIGSI 5 library as an alternative to the stage I-DIFF fast
2. If you want to instantiate this stage, you must first delete the stage I-DIFF fast 2.
If the stage I-DIFF fast is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is not visible with the param-
eter CT saturation threshold in the current measuring point.
The stage I-DIFF fast also works in parallel with the stage I-DIFF. A very fast algorithm enables
tripping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
The stage I-DIFF fast can cooperate with the stage Fast charge comparison of the Line differ-
ential protection of the SIPROTEC 4 devices 7SD5x and 7SD61x.
• The stage IN-DIFF operates with high-accuracy measurement either with the separately measured
ground current IN or with the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0. With this stage, you can achieve the
maximum sensitivity.
• The stage IN-DIFF unrest operates with high-accuracy measurement either with the separately
measured ground current IN or with the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0. With this stage, you cannot
achieve the maximum sensitivity because the adaptive self-stabilization is not used here.
• The stage I2-DIFF operates with high-accuracy measurement with the measured negative-sequence
current I2. With this stage, you can achieve the maximum sensitivity.
• Primary voltages
Inrush-Current Detection
If the protection range extends beyond a transformer, a high inrush current, which flows into the protection
range but does not leave it again, has to be expected when connecting the transformer. The inrush current
can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a relatively high content of 2nd harmonic
(twice the rated frequency), which is missing almost completely in the case of a short circuit.
The algorithm of the Line differential protection recognizes the inrush currents. Temporarily, the adaptive
stabilization function provides an elevated restraint current, preventing any unwanted tripping.
If the function Inrush-current detection is present in the device, inrush currents will be detected correctly.
For this, the function block Inrush detect. from the DIGSI 5 function library must be instantiated and enabled.
High inrush currents can lead to an overfunction. Inrush-current detection prevents overfunction by blocking
the affected phases or all phases using the crossblock function.
Charging-Current Compensation
Distributed line or phase capacities cause a permanently capacitive charging current. This charging current has
to be taken into account by the pickup values of the differential-protection stages. In cables, this charging
current can reach considerable values. The charging-current compensation serves to improve the sensitivity
so that maximum sensitivity can be protected even at high charging currents. For this, the function block
Ic-compensat. from the DIGSI 5 function library must be instantiated and enabled.
478 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Remote Tripping
Additionally to the measured values, the function Line differential protection transfers the locally generated
operate indication to the Line differential protection functions of the remote devices in the device combina-
tion. The remote devices then generate an operate indication if the local Line differential protection has
not yet generated an operate indication. This can occur under pickup conditions at the pickup threshold (see
6.2.2 Structure of the Function ).
Emergency Mode
NOTE
i When the protection device is in emergency mode, the function Line differential protection does not
work.
If the Line differential protection is the main protection function in the protection device, the Line differen-
tial protection can activate the emergency mode of the device. The emergency mode is activated if one of the
following conditions is met:
• Line differential protection is blocked via the binary input (_:2311:82) >Block function.
When emergency mode is active, the function Overcurrent protection can work as an emergency function,
for example.
If the functions Line differential protection and Distance protection are instantiated simultaneously, you
can set the distance protection zones in such a way that in case of a line differential protection outage, the
blocking of the distance protection zones is disabled. The blocking of the distance protection zones is disabled
if one of the following conditions is met:
• Line differential protection is blocked via the binary input (_:2311:82) >Block function.
• Line differential protection is in test operation mode (_:2311:308) Test all devices.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 479
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
NOTE
i Observe the following notes so that the line differential protection operates correctly on all line ends:
• The rated values of the line (parameters (_:9001:101) Rated current and (_:9001:102)
Rated voltage) must have identical settings at all ends of the line.
• If a transformer is installed in the line, all parameters must be set such that the value of the rated
apparent power is the same at all ends of the line (parameter (_:9001:103) Rated apparent
power).
• The rated apparent power is calculated automatically and is displayed in the general line data of the
Line function group (parameter _:9001:103) and in the Line differential protection function in the
Transformer block (parameter Rated apparent power).
NOTE
i To stabilize the line differential protection against current-transformer faults, the parameters for the phase
currents (_:8881:107) CT error changeover, (_:8881:108) CT error A and (_:8881:109)
CT error B as well as the parameters for the ground current IN (_:8881:110) CT error change-
over, (_:8881:111) CT error A and (_:8881:147) CT error B are relevant at the current
measuring points in the power-system data. These parameters are used exclusively by the line differential
protection.
• Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Supervision Idiff = yes: block diff. prot.
With the parameter Supervision Idiff, you set whether the Line differential protection function operates
with or without differential current supervision.
Parameter Value Description
no The differential current is not monitored.
yes: reporting only The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
monitoring threshold, and a current jump is not present, the indication
Alarm: Idiff too high is output.
yes: block diff. prot. The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
monitoring threshold and a current jump is not present, the line differential
protection is blocked and the indication Alarm: Idiff too high is
output.
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Action on Behavior = test = Test loc. device autom.
480 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
With the parameter Action on Behavior = test, you specify whether the special test mode Test
local device for the function Line differential protection is switched on automatically or not after the
test mode has been switched on for the entire device via the controllable Application mode.
Parameter Value Description
Test loc. device autom. If the test mode is switched on for the entire device via the controllable
Application mode, the special test mode Test local device is
switched on automatically for the function Line differential protection.
If you use a test switch for testing the local function Line differential
protection that activates the test mode for the entire device as well as the
test mode Test local device in one switching procedure, this setting
option is useful.
Test loc. device man. With this setting option, the function Line differential protection is not
automatically switched to the test mode Test local device.
If you switch the entire device to test mode, all protection functions automatically adopt the state Test or
Test/Relay blk.. Protection functions that work only with local measurands can now be tested.
For further information, refer to Parameter: Activate device test mode , Page 268 and 11.2 Enabling/Disabling
the Application/Test Mode for the Entire Device.
The function Line differential protection additionally requires the measurands of the remote devices. There-
fore, you must also switch on the test mode for the entire device in the remote devices so that the line
differential protection in the remote devices changes to the state Test or Test/Relay blk.. Only then is it
possible to test the entire function Line differential protection.
If you want to test the function Line differential protection only in the local device, first switch the entire
device to test mode using the controllable (_:56) Application mode.
[sc_Applicationmode, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-15 Switching on the Test Mode for the Entire Device with the Controllable Application mode
Then switch on the special test mode Test local device with the controllable (_:2311:309) Test
local device in the function Line differential protection.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 481
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[sc_Ldiff_testmode_controllable, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-16 Switching on the Special Test Mode for the Function Line Differential Protection with the
ControllableCtrl:Test local device
In this operating mode, the function Line differential protection interprets the local currents as differential
currents. These currents are not transmitted to the line differential protection functions of the remote devices.
Hence, the line differential protection functions of the remote devices are not effective.
For further information, refer to 11.5 Functional Test Line Differential Protection.
6.2.5 Settings
482 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 483
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.7.1 Description
[loijump, 2, en_US]
484 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_13_idif, 3, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The stage I-DIFF is the sensitive stage of differential protection. The principle of the stage I-DIFF is comparison
of the current phasor. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the occurrence
of a fault event. The stage I-DIFF fast 2, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping in the
event of high-current faults.
The measurands are analyzed separately for each phase. Each device calculates an Idiff differential current from
the sum of the current phasors which are calculated at each end of the protected object and transmitted to
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 485
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
the other ends. Its value corresponds to the fault current which the differential-protection system sees, ideally
that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging
current in lines in a first approximation. If charging-current compensation is active, the maximum sensitivity is
achieved and the pickup value can be set considerably smaller.
The Irest restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To this end, the maximum fault of the current transformers
in the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each
end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal faults.
This means that the restraint current Irest always reflects the maximum possible measuring faults in the
differential-protection system.
Optional functions such as charging-current compensation (increased sensitivity) and transformer in the
protection range are automatically considered when the differential and stabilization currents are calculated.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
486 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
In addition, for the switching of transformers and shunt reactors, the device features an Inrush-current
detection function via which blocking of the affected phase of the differential protection is possible. For more
detailed information, refer to 6.59.1 Inrush-Current Detection.
Inrush-Current Detection
You can find the Inrush-current detection function in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Line FG → Inrush
detect.. Add this functionality to the Line function group (under DIGSI 5 project tree →Name of the device
→ Settings →Line).
The parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. now also appears in the stage I-DIFF of the Line
differential protection.
Fault Behavior
The indication Health is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions (broken-wire detec-
tion, fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault or when invalid data are received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection
interface are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive
is set to Yes.
The measured values are available in the fault record. You can read out fault recordings from the device and
analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA. The device display shows only I diff. and I
restr. . In order to find the measured values on the device, go to Main menu → Measurements → Line x
→ Functional measured values → Line differential protection → I-DIFF.
For detailed information about selecting and deleting fault recordings, refer to the Operating Manual.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 487
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
With the Threshold parameter, you set the pickup threshold for the stage I-DIFF. The total current flowing
into the protection range during a short circuit is decisive, that is, the total fault current, regardless of how it
divides among the ends of the protected object.
NOTE
6.2.7.3 Settings
488 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 489
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.8.1 Description
[loijump, 2, en_US]
490 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_stage_idiff_fast_sat_13p, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i If you want to use the stage I-DIFF fast 2, the device must be equipped with the CP300 CPU printed
circuit board assembly.
The differential-protection procedure of the stage I-DIFF fast 2 has been improved compared to the
procedure of the stage I-DIFF fast.
The new differential-protection procedure has the following properties:
• The lower limit of the setting range was reduced. As a result, the pickup threshold can be set with more
sensitivity.
• Improved behavior during faults with a change from external to internal errors
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 491
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Mode of Operation
The I-DIFF fast 2 stage is the differential-protection stage that is optimized for fast tripping times
when high-current faults occur. It is superimposed on the I-DIFF stage. The measurands are analyzed
separately for each phase. Fast tripping for high-current faults is achieved with a procedure based on filtered
instantaneous values. During this procedure, stabilization to prevent signal distortion (for example, current-
transformer saturation), which can occur during external high-current faults, is not possible. For this reason,
a decision for internal or external faults must be made before the potential saturation appears. It is assumed
that the current transformers do not yet go into saturation at least for 5 ms after fault inception.
If you use the I-DIFF fast 2 stage, the Saturat. det. block is visible in the measuring point Current
3-phase with the CT saturation threshold parameter. For this, the CT saturation threshold
must be set so that transformer saturation does not occur until the currents exceed the setting value.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 8.3.12 Saturation Detection.
If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers that limit the protection range, the I-DIFF fast
2 stage is blocked and an erroneous pickup due to transformer saturation is avoided. Normally, the I-DIFF
fast 2 stage is set higher than the rated current. In this way, the influence of charging currents and
cross-flow currents of transformers (fixed and transient) is suppressed.
Otherwise, the I-DIFF fast 2 stage works in the same way as the sensitive I-DIFF stage. Each device
calculates an Idiff differential current for each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which
are calculated at each end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends. Its amount corresponds
to the fault current calculated by the differential-protection system, ideally that is the short-circuit current.
In correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approxima-
tion.
The Irest restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation parameters. To this end, the maximum fault of the current transformers
in the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each
end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal faults.
This means that the restraint current Irest always reflects the maximum possible measuring faults in the
differential-protection system.
The option of a transformer in the protection range is automatically considered when the differential and
stabilization currents are calculated. An activated charging-current compensation has no effect on the I-DIFF
fast 2 stage.
492 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Fault Behavior
The Health indication is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions ( broken-wire detec-
tion, fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault or when invalid data are received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection inter-
face are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is
set to Yes.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 493
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
tion the arc-suppression coil. Since the arc-suppression coil has to compensate for approximately the total
capacitive ground-fault current, its approximate rated current can be taken as a basis. For transformers, set
Irated transf./Vk transf.
A final dynamic check of the pickup thresholds is performed during commissioning.
NOTE
6.2.8.3 Settings
494 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.9.1 Description
[loijump, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 495
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_13_idfs, 4, en_US]
NOTE
i Siemens recommends:
Use the stage I-DIFF fast only if you want to expand an existing line differential protection device combina-
tion and you want to retain the existing protection procedure.
496 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
NOTE
i If you load an application template starting from the V07.50 platform into a device with the CP200 CPU
printed circuit board assembly, keep the following in mind:
• Starting with the V07.50 platform, the I-DIFF fast 2 stage is preinstantiated in the Line differen-
tial protection function.
• The consistency check in DIGSI 5 reports an error for devices with the CP200 CPU printed circuit board
assembly.
• Replace the stage I-DIFF fast 2 with the stage I-DIFF fast.
The stage I-DIFF fast is essentially identical to the stage I-DIFF fast 2.
In contrast to the differential-protection procedure of the stage I-DIFF fast 2, the procedure of the stage I-DIFF
fast requires a time of at least 5 ms free of saturation from the current transformer. Starting at a certain
current flow (> 2.5 · I rated, local measurement), the system immediately determines an external fault and the
stage I-DIFF fast is blocked. If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers limiting the protection
range, the stage I-DIFF fast is blocked and unwanted tripping due to transformer saturation is avoided.
6.2.9.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 497
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.10.1 Description
The ground-current differential protection (ANSI 87LN):
• Is a selective ground-fault protection for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and multi-
side infeed in radial, ring, or meshed systems
• Becomes more sensitive when using the charging-current compensation (Ic compensat.)
• Either the measured ground current IN or the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0 can be set as the
leading measured quantity.
NOTE
i For the use of the stage IN-DIFF, a baud rate of at least 512 Kbit/s is required.
The ground current is independent of balanced power flows that occur. For the stage I-DIFF, an increased load
current causes an increased restraint, see the following figure. This causes the protection with the stage I-DIFF
to become more insensitive. If the power flow is high, in rare cases, the stage I-DIFF may not reliably detect
ground faults with high contact resistance.
Figure 6-25 Shift of the Operating Point of the Stage I-DIFF in Case of a Fault with High Load Current
498 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The stage IN-DIFF can use the measured ground current IN as the leading measured quantity and thus operate
independently of different balanced power flows. The restraining quantity INrest, derived from the ground
current IN, is thus also independent of balanced power-flow changes. In the cases described in the preceding
sections, the stage IN-DIFF can be more sensitive than the stage I-DIFF and reliably detect the fault.
[lo_meas-value_310, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 499
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Mode of Operation
The stage IN-DIFF is the sensitive stage of the differential protection for the ground path. The principle of the
stage IN-DIFF is a comparison of the ground-current phasors. Each device calculates a differential current INdiff
from the sum of the ground-current phasors at each end of the protected object and transmits the calculated
value to the remaining ends. The amount corresponds to the fault current which the differential-protection
system sees – ideally, this is the short-circuit current. In healthy unbalanced operation, it is small and corre-
sponds to the capacitive charging current to ground in lines in a first approximation. If the charging-current
compensation is active, the maximum sensitivity is achieved and the pickup value can be set considerably
smaller. The ground differential current is counteracted by the ground restraint current INrest. The restraint
500 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
current results from the sum of the maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is
calculated adaptively from the current measurands and the set substation parameters.
If IN measured is set as the measured value, the fault of the ground-current transformer in the rated range
or in the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the ground current presently flowing at each end of
the protected object and transferred to the other ends together with the determined internal faults. If 3I0
calculated is set as the measured value, the fault of the phase current transformers in the rated range and
in the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the maximum current presently flowing in one phase at each
end of the protected object and transferred to the other ends together with the determined internal faults.
This means that the ground restraint current INrest is an image of the maximum possible measuring fault
of the differential-protection system. Optional functions such as Charging-current compensation (increased
sensitivity) and the Transformer in the protection range are automatically considered when the ground
differential currents and the ground restraint currents are calculated.
If the stage IN-DIFF detects a fault in the ground path, the stage generates the pickup signal with the ground
information. If the ground-current differential protection picks up, the pickup signal of the stage IN-DIFF takes
over the phase information from the stages I-DIFF, I-DIFF fast 2, and I-DIFF fast.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 501
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The parameter Threshold switch on always becomes effective as soon as a device in the device combina-
tion has detected that its end is switched after a dead time. All devices in the device combination are then
changed over to this pickup value for the duration of the closure detection (parameter: Action time after
closure).
For more detailed information, refer to 5.1.4.7 Closure Detection.
In addition, for the switching of transformers and shunt reactors, the device features a function Inrush-
current detection via which blocking of the affected phase of the differential protection is possible.
For more detailed information, refer to 6.59.1.1 Overview of Functions.
Inrush-Current Detection
You can find the function Inrush-current detection in the DIGSI 5 function library under Line FG > Inrush
detect.. Add this functionality to the function group Line (under DIGSI 5 project tree > Name of the device
> Settings > Line). The parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. now also appears in the stage
IN-DIFF of the Line differential protection.
Fault Behavior
The indication Health is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions (Broken-wire detec-
tion, Fast sum I, Analog-digital converter) signal a fault or when invalid data are received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection
interface are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and the
messages Inactive is set to Yes.
502 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The measured values are available in the fault record. You can read out fault recordings from the device and
analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA. The device display shows only IN diff. and
IN restr. In order to find the measured values on the device, go to Main menu > Measurements > Line x >
Functional measured values > Line differential protection > IN-DIFF.
For detailed information about selecting and deleting fault recordings, refer to the Operating Manual.
NOTE
i For power systems with isolated neutral point, the setting value of the parameter Measured value = IN
measured is not possible.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 503
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
A setting of 3 times to 4 times the stationary charging current ensures the stability of the protection when
switching.
Approximately at the same time, all devices in the device combination use the pickup threshold increased
with the parameter Thresh. switch onto fault during the set (_:4681:102) Action time after
closure. For more information, refer to 5.1.4.7 Closure Detection.
If you set the parameter Threshold switch on in exactly the same way as the parameter Threshold, the
parameter Threshold switch on is ineffective.
6.2.10.3 Settings
504 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.11.1 Description
The ground current differential protection (ANSI 87LN):
• Is a selective ground-fault protection for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and multi-
side infeed in radial, ring, or meshed power systems
• Is an unrestraint differential protection that only operates with a parameterizable threshold value
• The charging-current compensation (Ic compensat.) can be used to reduce the differential currents.
• Either the measured ground current IN or the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0 can be set as the
leading measured quantity.
NOTE
i For the use of the stage IN-DIFF unrest, a baud rate of at least 512 Kbit/s is required.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 505
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_IN-DIFF-unstab, 2, en_US]
506 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Working Method
The stage IN-DIFF unrest is the stage of the differential protection for the neutral path. The principle of
the stage IN-DIFF unrest is a comparison of the ground current phasors. Each device calculates an INdiff
differential current from the sum of the ground current phasors which are calculated at each end of the
protected object and transmitted to the other ends. The amount of the differential current equals the fault
current that the differential protection system sees. In the ideal case, it equals the short-circuit current.
In healthy unbalanced operation, the amount of the differential current is small and corresponds to the
capacitive charging current to ground in lines in a first approximation. If charging-current compensation is
active, the maximum sensitivity is achieved and the pickup value can be set considerably smaller.
In contrast to the stage IN-DIFF, the stage IN-DIFF unrest operates without the restraint current Irest. This
means, the only criterion for pickup is that the differential current must exceed the parameter Threshold.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 507
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Optional functions such as Charging-current compensation (increased sensitivity) and Transformer in the
protection range are automatically considered when the differential currents are calculated.
If the stage IN-DIFF unrest detects a fault in the neutral path, the stage generates the pickup signal with the
ground information. When the ground-current differential protection picks up, the pickup signal of the stage
IN-DIFF unrest takes over the phase information from the stages I-DIFF, I-DIFF fast 2, and I-DIFF fast.
508 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Error Behavior
The message Health is set to Alarm when fast measured value supervision functions (Broken-wire detec-
tion, Fast sum I, Analog-digital converter) signal an error or when invalid data is received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection
interface are monitored continuously. If persistent errors are detected, the messages Health are set to
Alarm and the messages Inactive are set to Yes.
The measured values are available in the fault record. You can read out the fault recordings from the device
and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA. Only IN diff. and IN threshold
are visible on the device display. In order to find the measured values on the device, go to Main menu >
Measured values > Line x > Functional measured values > Line differential protection → IN-DIFF unrest.
Detailed information about selecting and deleting of fault records can be found in the Operating Manual.
NOTE
i For systems with isolated neutral point, the setting value of the parameter Measured value = IN
measured is not possible.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 509
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
With the parameter Threshold, you set the pickup threshold for the stage IN-DIFF unrest. The total current
flowing into the protection range during a short circuit, that is the total fault current, is decisive. This applies
regardless of how it divides among the ends of the protected object.
6.2.11.3 Settings
510 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.12.1 Description
The negative-sequence differential protection (ANSI 87LQ):
• Is a selective short-circuit protection for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and multi-
side infeed in radial, ring, or meshed systems
• Gets more sensitive when using the charging-current compensation (Ic compensat.)
NOTE
i For the use of the I2-DIFF stage, a baud rate of at least 512 Kbit/s is required.
The stage I2-DIFF monitors the calculated negative-sequence current I2. As a result, the influence of load
currents on the method of measurement is low for all unbalanced errors. Pure phase-to-phase errors have no
effect on the ground path and are not detected by the stage IN-DIFF. These faults are recorded by the stage
I2-DIFF.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 511
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_meas-value_310_02, 1, en_US]
512 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Mode of Operation
The stage I2-DIFF is the sensitive stage of the differential protection using the negative-sequence system. The
principle of the stage I2-DIFF is a comparison of the negative-sequence current phasors. Each device calcu-
lates a differential current 3I2diff from the sum of the negative-sequence current phasors which are calculated
at each end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends. The amount of the differential current
corresponds to the fault current that the differential-protection system sees. In the ideal case, it corresponds
to the short-circuit current. In healthy balanced operation, the differential current is 0. If the charging-current
compensation is active, the maximum sensitivity is achieved and the pickup value can be set considerably
smaller.
The 3I2rest restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum
of the maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 513
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
current measurands and the set substation settings. To this end, the fault of the phase current transformers
in the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the maximum presently flowing current
in one phase at each end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the deter-
mined internal faults. This means that the restraint current 3I2rest reflects the maximum possible measuring
fault in the differential-protection system.
Optional functions such as Charging-current compensation (increased sensitivity) and Transformer in the
protection range are automatically considered when the differential currents are calculated.
514 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Inrush-Current Detection
You can find the Inrush-current detection function in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Line FG > Inrush
detect.. Add this functionality to the Line function group (under DIGSI 5 project tree >Name of the device
> Settings >Line). In the stage I2-DIFF of the line differential protection, the Blk. w. inrush curr.
detect. parameter appears additionally.
Fault Behavior
The indication Health is set to Alarm when fast measured-value supervision functions (Broken-wire detec-
tion, Fast sum I, Analog-digital converter) signal a fault or when invalid data is received via the protection
interface. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection
interface are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, the indication Health is set to Alarm
and the indication Inactive is set to Yes.
The measured values are available in the fault record. You can read out fault recordings from the device and
analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA. The device display shows only 3I2 diff.
and 3I2 restr. In order to find the measured values on the device, go to Main menu > Measurements >
Line x > Functional measured values > Line differential protection > I2-DIFF.
For detailed information about selecting and deleting fault recordings, refer to the Operating Manual.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 515
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Example
The ring feeder in the Figure 6-35 is protected with the sensitive stage I2-DIFF. In healthy operation, the
negative-sequence differential current 3I2diff occurs at 1st place because of the unbalanced load current in the
transformers of the secondary substations. As a rule, the proportion I2 in the load current is less than 5 %.
In the example, the transformers of the secondary substations each have a rated apparent power of 1500 kVA.
Thus, the maximum outgoing load current and the negative-sequence differential current 3I2diff are calculated
as follows:
[fo_sum_current_i_load, 1, en_US]
[fo_3I2_Load, 1, en_US]
[fo_3I2_Load_Thresh, 1, en_US]
516 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[dw_ring-example, 1, en_US]
Tripping delay
If a fuse at the secondary substations allows selective fault clearing, the stage I2-DIFF must be delayed. A
grading time of 300 ms is sufficient:
Operate delay = 0.30 s
When switching on, the inrush current can be higher than the maximum load current. To avoid overfunction,
the threshold is adjusted when switching on. Assumed, the maximum inrush current is 400 % of the rated
current. The pickup threshold of the stage I2-DIFF is increased by 400 %:
Threshold 3I2 switch on = 400 % ⋅ Threshold 3I2 = 4 ⋅ 71 A = 284 A prim
6.2.12.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 517
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.13.1 Description
The function Line differential protection contains the functionality remote tripping.
Remote tripping forms the phase-segregated operate indication (_:5551:300) Operate transmitted
by the OR operation of the operate indications in the stages I-DIFF, I-DIFF fast 2, IN-DIFF, IN-DIFF
unrest, and I2-DIFF and transmits it to the Line differential protection functions of the remote devices in the
device combination
If a device receives a remote operate indication from a remote device, the remote tripping functionality
generates the indication (_:5551:57) Operate.
You can find the remote tripping indications in the DIGSI 5 information routing under Line →Line differen-
tial protection→ Remote tripping.
518 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_Group-indication_operate-send, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 519
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_receive_direction_1-3pol, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Transmitting
• I-DIFF
• I-DIFF fast 2
• I-DIFF fast
• IN-DIFF
• IN-DIFF unrest
• I2-DIFF
The functionality Remote tripping sends the indication Operate trans-
mitted to the Line differential protection functions of the remote devices
in the device combination via the protection interface.
off The functionality Remote tripping does not transmit the remote operate
indication via the protection interface.
Parameter: Receiving
520 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.13.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 521
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_Group-indication_pickup, 1, en_US]
522 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[lo_Group-indication_operate, 1, en_US]
6.2.14.3 Application and Setting Notes for Pickup and Trip Logic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 523
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
For some applications, it may be necessary to remove and log off the local Line differential protection from the
device combination of the line differential protection. These applications include, for example:
• Maintenance work
• System expansion
EXAMPLE:
The following line formation is protected by the line differential protection with 3 devices.
Figure 6-40 Differential Protection with 3 Devices for a Line with a Feeder
In the example, the feeder is to be decommissioned for maintenance or modification work. Device 3 should
therefore also be switched off. Without additional measures, the line differential protection will no longer
function and will send an indication that it is ineffective.
For this use case, the Line differential protection function must be logged off in device 3. The Line differen-
tial protection in device 3 can only be logged off if no current is flowing through the feeder. During the
log-off process, device 3 checks whether the circuit breaker 3 is really open. If the Line differential protection
is logged off in device 3, this is saved in the remaining devices 1 and 2 and Kirchhoff's current law will then be
calculated only with the currents of the devices 1 and 2.
If device 3 is successfully logged off, you can switch it off. The logoff of device 3 is saved in the remaining
devices after it is switched off. If you switch device 3 back on, log on to the device combination again.
NOTE
i Before logging off, you must switch off the feeder protected by the local line differential protection.
• In DIGSI online mode via the operating dialog Online accesses > Interface > Device > Device informa-
tion, Test and operation, Functional logout
• Via the on-site operation panel under Device functions > Line n > Line diff. protection > Log off
function
524 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The following conditions must be fulfilled before the function is logged off:
• The current flow at the circuit breaker must be stopped. You must switch off the feeder protected by the
local line differential protection.
The locally measured current of the logged-off line end no longer flows into the sum of the currents. The
function then only sums up the currents from the line ends that have not been logged off.
• The circuit-breaker position recognition in the Circuit-breaker function group (CB) provides the circuit-
breaker condition via the internal signal CB state protected obj..
If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs), for example, in case of a breaker-and-a-half
layout, then the CB state of the protected object must be determined with both circuit breakers. In this
case, the Circuit-breaker condition for the protected object function block performs the connection of
the individual CB conditions.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB state protected obj. internal signal is in the
Open state:
– All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state.
– The input >Disconnector open is active.
For more detailed information, refer to 5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object.
• Monitoring the communication topology in the device combination is only important if more than 2
devices are communicating via the protection interface. A function can only be logged off if this does not
disturb the communication between the remaining devices in the device combination.
The logged-off local line differential protection can also be activated for test purposes (see 11.5 Functional
Test Line Differential Protection). This has no influence or impact on the running protection interface commu-
nication.
The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If you would like to use
push-buttons, switch on these push-buttons as shown in the following figure. With the push-button Key2, you
log off the function using; with the push-button Key1, you log the function on again.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 525
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
[loexttx3-140311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-42 External Push-Button Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection
If a control switch is used, route the binary input >Function logout on as H (active with voltage)
and the binary input >Function logout off as L (active without voltage). If the switch S is
closed, the function is logged off.
[loextsx4-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-43 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection
Indications
The logged-off function reports the status (Function logged off) and the cause of the logoff.
If you have logged off the function via binary inputs, the indication Logged off via BIis issued.
If you have logged off the function via on-site operation, DIGSI 5, or the protection interface, the indication
Logged off via control is issued.
6.2.16.1 Description
If you would like any transformer (two-winding transformer or multi-winding transformer) to be taken into
account in the line formation, you must instantiate the optional function block Transformer from the Global
DIGSI 5 library in the Line differential protection function. You can find the Transformer function block in
the Global DIGSI 5 library under FG Line→ Line differential protection→ Function extensions.
Enter the rated data of the transformer under FG Line→ General→ Rated values. The rated values affect the
magnitude and phase of the differential current to be calculated. All measurands can be based on the rated
data for the power transformer.
Additionally, the respective vector groups for current and voltage and the type of grounding of the trans-
former neutral point have to be entered.
526 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
NOTE
i Make sure that you enter the same value for the rated apparent power in each device on a transformer
side. If the values are different, the Line differential protection function does not work.
In general, select the rated voltage of the winding facing the respective device. However, if a winding
has a voltage regulating range, do not use the rated voltage of the winding, but rather the voltage which
corresponds to the average current of the control area. This minimizes fault currents resulting from control.
EXAMPLE:
Transformer with the data
Vector group YNd5
Rated apparent power Srated 35 MVA
Ratio TV 110 kV/25 kV
Control Y-side regulated ±10 %
Protection Settings
For verification purposes, the internally calculated rated current will be displayed as a write-protected param-
eter.
For more information, refer to 5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 527
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Current vector group nb. is the vector group of the transformer winding facing the device. The device
used at the reference side of the transformer is on the upper-voltage side and has to keep the digit 0 (default).
For the other windings, you must indicate the corresponding vector-group digit.
EXAMPLE:
For a transformer with the vector group Yy6d5, set the Current vector group nb. parameter as follows:
On the Y-side: Current vector group nb. = 0
On the y-side: Current vector group nb. = 6
On the d-side: Current vector group nb. = 5
[logfpaus-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i If the elimination of the residual current is active, and in case of ground faults, the differential protection
becomes less sensitive by a factor of 1/3:
You achieve a higher degree of sensitivity only by measuring the current that flows through the neutral-
point grounding of the transformer. This requires the installation of a current transformer in the neutral-
point supply of the transformer, whereby its measured current can be captured by a 1-phase current input
configured on the device.
6.2.16.3 Settings
528 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 529
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
6.2.17.1 Description
[lo_lade_ko, 3, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The optional FB Ic-compensat. is available for charging-current compensation. The FB lc-compensat. is
assigned to the stages I-DIFF, IN-DIFF, IN-DIFF unrestr, and I2-DIFF and increases the sensitivity of the stages
even with high capacitive charging currents.
530 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
The charging current is caused by the capacitances of the overhead line or the cable and flows through
the ground capacitance of the line. Due to the phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase capacitances, charging
currents are flowing even in correct operation, which cause a difference of the currents at the ends of the
protection range. In cables or long lines, the capacitive charging currents can reach considerable values. If
the feeder-side transformer voltages are connected to the devices, the influence of the capacitive charging
currents can be compensated for by calculation. The charging-current compensation specifies the actual
charging current. If there are lines with 2 ends, each device performs half the charging-current compensation.
When using M devices, each device assumes the M-th part.
[dwladko2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-46 Charging-Current Compensation for a Line with 2 Ends (1-Phase System)
For correct operation, stationary charging currents can be regarded as almost constant since they only depend
on the voltage and line capacitances. If you are working without charging-current compensation, take into
account the charging currents in the pickup value of the I-DIFF stage. With charging-current compensation,
this does not have to be taken into account here. With charging-current compensation, the stationary magnet-
izing currents are considered before quadrature-axis reactances. For transient inrush currents, the devices are
provided with separate inrush-current detection.
NOTE
i If you wish to work with the charging-current compensation, consider the following:
• Monitor the voltage with the Measuring-voltage failure detection function. If the Measuring-
voltage failure detection is not present in the Line function group, add the function to the Line
function group from the Global DIGSI 5 library.
You can find the Measuring-voltage failure detection function in the Global DIGSI 5 library under FG
Line → Supervision of secondary system → Mes.v.fail.det.
If a transformer or common-mode reactors are located in the line section to be protected, charging-current
compensation must not be activated!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 531
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Parameters Description
(_:101) Rated frequency Rated frequency of the device
You can find the parameter in DIGSI 5 under Settings → Device
settings.
(_:9001:102) Rated voltage Rated voltage of the line
(_:9001:112) C1 per length Capacitance per unit length of the line
unit
(_:9001:148) C0 per length Reactance per unit length of the line
unit Residual compensation factors
(_:9001:113) X per length
unit
(_:9001:104) Kr
(_:9001:105) Kx
You can find the parameters in DIGSI 5 under Settings → FG Line →
(_:9001:118) K0 General.
(_:9001:150) Angle (K0)
(_:102) Total line length Overall length of the line as a parameter of the charging-current
compensation
You can find the parameter in DIGSI 5 under Settings → FG Line →
Line diff. prot. in the FB Ic-compensat..
For verification purposes, the rated charging current is displayed as a write-protected parameter in the
function block Ic-compensat. ((_:110) Rated charging current).
In the following cases, no charging current can be calculated:
• The voltages are connected, but the internal supervision functions Voltage-transformer circuit breaker
or Measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) detect a loss of voltage.
If one of the 2 cases occurs, the charging-current compensation remains responsible for the line; however, it
must return to the conventional stabilization method (see parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated).
NOTE
i Before switching off the charging-current compensation with the parameter Mode, you must increase the
Threshold of the I-DIFF stage to 2 to 3 times Ic-rated of the line distance portion. Otherwise, undesired
tripping might occur.
NOTE
i You must enter additional line parameters for charging-current compensation. These include the following
parameters:
• Capacitance per unit length of the line (C1 per length unit, C0 per length unit)
Parameter: Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated
532 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.2 Line Differential Protection
It is only possible to set the I-DIFF stage more sensitively by using the charging-current compensation (FB
Ic-compensat.). If you use the charging-current compensation, set the Threshold of the I-DIFF stage to 1⋅
Ic-rated.
In case of an outage or lack of voltages, it must be ensured that the Threshold of the I-DIFF stage is
increased again to 2 to 3 times Ic-rated. Do this with the parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated.
With the Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated parameter, you set the stabilization charging current/rated current
ratio. The setting value of the parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated increases the stabilization of the
I-DIFF stage by an additional component (stabilization charging current).
EXAMPLE:
In case of an outage or lack of voltages, the Threshold of the I-DIFF stage is to be increased to 2.5 times
Ic-rated. The threshold of the I-DIFF stage is set to 1 ⋅ Ic-rated.
If you want to increase the threshold of the I-DIFF stage to 2.5 times, set the parameter Ic-stabiliza-
tion/Ic-rated = 1.5.
In case of an outage of lack of voltages, both setting values are added to 2.5.
Since the charging current of the device must only be considered for the respective portion of the line, each
device will in fact increase its normal stabilization by a value of Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated divided by
the number of devices.
6.2.17.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 533
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
• Is a selective, 2-step short-circuit protection for a line stub that can be tripped by a disconnector switch. It
is important in 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts.
• Detects short circuits that lie between the current transformers and the feeder disconnector switch QB.
[dwstubap-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
534 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
[dwstubeb-150211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The Stub-differential protection function is composed of the S-DIFF stage and the S-DIFF fast 2
stage. Both will also be referred to in the following sections as function blocks. Both stages work in parallel
and ensure high sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. A release binary input
(>Release function) switches the stub-differential protection to active. This binary input reports the
position open to the feeder disconnector switch. The output signals of these stages are pickup and operate
signals, which are routed to the output logic, resulting in the corresponding protection indications.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 535
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Overall Logic
Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of differential protection rests on the precondition that, during an uninterrupted operation,
the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equal 0. Secondary currents detected by the device
are tainted with measuring errors that are caused by the transmission behavior of the current transformer
and the input circuits of the device. All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of
the currents processed in the devices is not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these
influences. A special method of adaptive self-stabilization is used in this context to ensure the highest possible
sensitivity of the differential protection.
The stabilization variable Irest is calculated from the sum of the potential faults:
Irest = Threshold + Σ(current-transformer errors and other measuring errors).
If the measured differential current exceeds the pickup threshold and the maximum possible measuring error,
there is an internal fault (shaded area in Figure 6-50). With the adaptive approach it is no longer necessary to
assign parameters for a characteristic curve.
536 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
[dwanstub-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current-Transformer Errors
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer errors, an adaptive self-stabilization value
Ifault is calculated for each measuring point. This is the result of the sum of all current-transformer errors,
which in turn are the result of the current-transformer data and the degree of currents measured on the
transformer.
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The set parameters of the transformer data apply to the configured current inputs on the device.
• Based on the Quality of the measurands such as harmonic components and frequency deviations.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 537
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
• The S-DIFF stage works with very accurate measurement. Maximum sensitivity can be achieved with
this stage. You cannot delete this stage.
• The S-DIFF fast 2 stage works in parallel with the S-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables
tripping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
If the S-DIFF fast 2 stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the Measuring point Current 3-phase.
• The S-DIFF fast stage is available in the Global DIGSI 5 library as an alternative to the S-DIFF fast
2 stage. If you want to instantiate this stage, you must first delete the S-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If the S-DIFF fast stage is instantiated, the Saturation detection block is not visible with the CT
saturation threshold parameter in the current measuring point.
The S-DIFF fast stage also works in parallel with the S-DIFF stage. A very fast algorithm enables
tripping decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
538 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
6.3.4.1 Description
[lo_sdiff, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The S-DIFF stage is the sensitive stage of the stub-differential protection. It is based on the principle of
current phasor calculation. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 539
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
occurrence of a fault event. The S-DIFF fast 2 stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast
tripping in the event of high-current errors.
All measurands are evaluated separately for each phase. The device calculates a differential current from the
sum of the current phasors on the measuring inputs. The sum of the differential current is equal to the fault
current, which is detected by the differential-protection system. Ideally, this is the short-circuit current. In
correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in a first approximation.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To do this, the maximum error of the current transformers in the
rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the straight flowing currents of the current
transformer of the protected object.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Fault Behavior
If fast measured-value supervision functions (broken-wire detection , fast sum I, analog-digital converter)
report a fault, the object (_:8401:53) Health will be set to Alarm. The validity of the used currents
is constantly monitored. If persistent faults are detected, (_:8401:53) Health is set to Alarm and
(_:8401:54) Inactive is set to Yes.
540 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Parameter: Threshold
6.3.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 541
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
542 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
6.3.5.1 Description
[lo_stage_sdiff_schn2, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i If you want to use the S-DIFF fast 2 stage, the device must be equipped with the CP300 CPU printed
circuit board assembly.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 543
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Method of Operation
The S-DIFF fast 2 stage is optimized for fast operate times during high-current faults. It is superimposed
on the S-DIFF stage. The measurands are analyzed separately for each phase. Fast tripping for high-current
faults is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instantaneous values. During this procedure, stabili-
zation to prevent signal distortion (for example, current-transformer saturation), which may occur during
high-current external faults, is not possible. For this reason, a decision for internal or external faults must be
made before the potential saturation occurs. It is assumed that the current transformers do not yet go into
saturation at least for the duration of one integration interval (5 ms) after fault inception.
If you use the S-DIFF fast 2 stage, the Saturat. det. block is visible with the CT satura-
tion threshold parameter in the measuring point Current 3-phase. With this, the CT saturation
threshold must be set so that transformer saturation does not occur until the currents exceed the setting
value.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 8.3.12 Saturation Detection.
If saturation occurs for one or more current transformers limiting the protection range, the S-DIFF fast 2
stage is blocked and an erroneous pickup is avoided due to transformer saturation.
Normally, the S-DIFF fast 2 stage is set higher than the rated current. Otherwise, the S-DIFF fast
2 stage works in the same way as the sensitive S-DIFF stage. Each device calculates a differential current
for each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which are calculated at each end of the
protected object. The value of the differential current corresponds to the fault current, which is detected by
the differential-protection system. Ideally, this is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and
corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approximation.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring faults at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation parameters. To this end, the maximum error of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the presently flowing currents on each end
of the protected object.
544 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Fault Behavior
The Health object is set to Alarm when fast measured-value monitoring functions (broken-wire detection ,
fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal a fault. The validity of the used currents is monitored continuously.
If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to Yes.
Parameter: Threshold
6.3.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 545
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
546 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
6.3.6.1 Description
[lo_stubi2, 2, en_US]
The S-DIFF fast stage is essentially identical to the S-DIFF fast 2 stage.
If you want to use the S-DIFF fast stage, you must delete the preinstantiated S-DIFF fast 2 stage first.
After this, you can instantiate S-DIFF fast.
If you use the S-DIFF fast stage, the Saturat. det. block is not available in the measuring point
Current.
You can find the description of the S-DIFF fast 2 in chapter 6.3.5.1 Description.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 547
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Parameter: Threshold
6.3.6.3 Settings
548 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
Output Logic
[lo_stubag, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 549
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
• Detects ground faults in transformers, shunt reactors, neutral reactors or rotating machinery in which the
neutral point is grounded.
• Protects grounding transformers in the protection range. It is required that a current transformer be used
in the case of neutral point feed, that is, between neutral point and grounding conductor. The neutral
point transformer and the phase current transformer define the protection range.
• Adapts itself to the highest-amperage side with auto transformers and thereby prevents overfunction in
the event of external ground faults.
[dw_stru_pt, 2, en_US]
550 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[lo_reffkt, 4, en_US]
The protection function processes the neutral-point current IY* and the zero-sequence current 3 I0 calculated
from the phase currents (see following figure). The amount-adapted (compensated) currents are described by
the * symbol. They are normalized to the rated object current of the respective side. The protection range
extends exclusively over the transformer winding, including current transformer.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 551
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
In case of an internal ground fault, the zero-sequence currents flow to the fault location. With an external
ground fault, the fault current inverts itself in the phase current transformers. In this way, the direction of
current flow serves as the decisive criterion for an internal fault.
[dw_grdpri, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i Consider the polarity of the current transformers. It must be set in accordance with the connection type.
Connect the neutral point to the 3-pole measuring points on the device side using the even-numbered
terminals.
The protection function operates in 3 steps according to the logic diagram Figure 6-59:
• Pickup:
If the calculated current IDiff,REF exceeds the adapted pickup threshold, pickup starts.
NOTE
i The following calculation applies to the configurations with one current measuring point for the side. In
a special case of 2 current measuring points per side, the calculation of the restraint current must be
performed in greater detail.
552 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
ksx = IN,transformerS/IN,side with the secondary current measured on the transformer side (S)
IDiff,REF = |IY* + 3I0*|
IRest,REF = |IY*| + |IA*| + |IB*| + |IC*| with all currents normalized to the rated object current
where:
IY Measured zero-sequence current at neutral point
kyx Factor for magnitude adaptation (neutral point)
ksx Factor for magnitude adaptation (side)
IN,transformer Primary transformer rated current
IN,side Primary rated current of the transformer side (rated object current)
IDiff,REF Differential current
IRest,REF Restraint current
Using the calculated restraint current, a current IChar which represents the pickup value for the tripping is
determined from the characteristic curve (Figure 6-61). In this way, the protection function is stabilized in
the event of external, multiphase ground faults, for example, a 2-pole ground fault. This means that the
protection function becomes less sensitive.
If the Slope = 0 is set here (as an exception), the set Threshold of the operate curve is passed regardless of
the restraint current.
[dw_stab_ke, 2, en_US]
The ratio between the neutral-point current and the value for the current IChar determined from Figure 6-61 is
observed in the operate curve.
Pickup
If the IDiff,REF calculated differential current exceeds the calculated current IChar (see Figure 6-59), pickup occurs
and the internal processing is enabled. The pickup is indicated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 553
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
If the measured current on the transformer side yields only a very small 3I0* amount, there is no sense in
determining the angle difference. If, in the event of an internal fault, a small 3I0* current simulates an angle
error due to a measuring error, the extended operate range allows reliable tripping with an angle difference
of >90°.
[dw_ausken, 3, en_US]
NOTE
i The characteristic curve shown in Figure 6-62 shows the limit of the tripping range with the angle criterion.
The extended operate range is shown symbolically for 2 conditions:
The characteristic curve |IY*| = |3I0*| is the angle limit of the extended operate range for this condition.
In the event of an external fault with |IY*| = |3I0*|, the phase angle is between IY* and 3I0* ≈ 180° .
If a measuring error now changes the angle and this angle error is <80°, unwanted tripping does not occur.
In Figure 6-62, that is the section to the left of 100°.
If, for example, the ratio is |IY*| >> |3I0*|, tripping is theoretically not possible for an angle difference of
180°. This is the case if no fault current is flowing on the transformer side and the current 3I0* results from
a measuring error. With the extended operate range, internal faults are cleared in a secured way.
In case of an external ground fault, the zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents reverses by
180°. The phase angle between the zero-sequence currents thus (∠(IY*, 3I0*)) equals ± 180°. They are located
in the left part of the operate curve and detect a clearly increased tripping limit.
As specified in Figure 6-62, the characteristic-curve limit with regard to the angle specification on the x-axis
depends on the ratio |IY*| to |3I0*|. If the amounts differ, the characteristic curve shifts.
The current IAngle,REF for the Angle decision is determined from the following subtraction and summation:
IAngle,REF = |IY* - 3I0*| - |IY* + 3I0*|
554 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
The resulting current IAngle,REF results from the respective fault conditions, which are illustrated in the following
figure. With an internal fault (angle difference ≈ 0°) a value results for IAngle,REF that has a negative sign. The
sign remains negative, even when angle errors occur. The amount of IAngle,REF decreases.
With an external short circuit (≈180°), the value of IAngle,REF becomes positive. The current IAngle,REF remains
positive, even if an angle error occurs. The amount also decreases.
The following figure shows this for IAngle,REF = (-Term) - (+Term).
[dw_angle-decision_for_external-faults, 1, en_US]
For tripping to occur, the neutral-point current IY* must reach the value IREF,Trip. The characteristic curve in the
left part of the figure can be determined from the following relationship:
IREF,Trip = IChar + k · IAngle,REF
where:
IChar Pickup value resulting from the pickup value increase
k Factor (permanently set to 4.05657)
With this value, the limit angle at |IY*| = |3I0*| is precisely 100°. No tripping is possible from
this angle on.
The following figure shows an example of the effect on the extended operate by the different ratio IY* to
3I0* (Irest,REF is not considered in the representation).
[dw_angle_trip_relationship, 1, en_US]
Tripping is possible for each angle from a ratio of IY* to 3I0* > 8.2.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 555
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
NOTE
The following figure shows the behavior under different fault conditions.
Also observe that the restraint current (IRest.,REF) always results from the sum of all currents (phase currents
of the measuring points and the neutral-point current). For pickup, the differential current IDiff,REF is neces-
sary. This differential current results from the geometric sum of all adapted zero-sequence currents. The
zero-sequence currents of the measuring points on the outgoing side and of the neutral-point current are
meant here.
[dw_fehler, 2, en_US]
556 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dw_autraf, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The largest rated object current from both sides of the auto transformer is used as a reference current
(IN,side) for an auto transformer. It is the rated object current on the 230-kV side in Figure 6-66.
In this case, the neutral-point current is calculated as the sum of the phase currents of the ground side as
follows:
IY* = kmy · (IGnd,A + IGnd,B + IGnd,C)
with
kmy = INY,transformer/IN, M2 side
The following applies for the restraint current:
IRest,REF = |IGnd,A*| + |IGnd,B*| + |IGnd,C*| + |IM1A*| + |IM1B*| + |IM1C*| + |IM2A*| + |IM2B*| + |IM2C*|
NOTE
i If both the 1-phase neutral point and the 3-phase ground side are connected, the restricted ground-fault
protection uses only the 1-phase neutral point. The 3-phase ground side is not considered.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 557
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
You can find the measured values for the Restricted ground-fault protection under the following device
menu items:
NOTE
i You can determine the setting limits for the threshold values as follows (the adaption is done automatically
and a setting is only possible within the permissible range):
Lower limit:
Threshold value ≥ max {0.05 I/Irated,S ; 0.05 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
Upper limit:
Threshold value ≤ min {2.00 I/Irated,S ; 100.00 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
The value 0.05 I/Irated,S is the minimum possible setting value and 2.00 I/Irated,S the
maximum possible. Iprim,transf. max is the largest transformer current and Irated,protected object the protected object
rated current (reference current) 100.00 I/Irated,S is the upper measurement limit.
The adaptation of the setting limits is done automatically. In addition, a setting is prevented outside of
these limits.
In the following, typical applications are described for the restricted ground-fault protection.
558 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dw_anster, 3, en_US]
This application is a standard application. Here the phase currents of one side and the neutral-point current
are processed. The function is located in the Transformer Side function group.
The following figure shows the structural division of the function. The restricted ground-fault protection gets
its measurands from the current transformers, which are connected to the Transformer side function group.
The neutral-point current is guided via the Transformer neutral point function group to the Transformer
side function group. The current Iy measured at the neutral point is inverted by 180° in the fault record
(COMTRADE). This is due to the fact that, for a Holmgreen connection, the summation current flows via
the terminal with an even connection number, and for a 1-phase connection, it flows via the terminal with
an uneven connection number. To be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 (including reference arrow definition of
the restricted ground-fault protection), in addition to the magnitude scaling of the neutral-point current, a
rotation of the polarity (phase rotation by 180°) is also carried out in the function group Transformer neutral
point.
NOTE
i The fault record indicates the analog traces according to the connection. For this reason, the neutral-point
current is shown rotated by 180° in comparison to SIPROTEC 4. This is due to the fact that, for a Holmgreen
connection, the summation current flows via the terminal with an even connection number, and for a
1-phase connection, it flows via the terminal with an uneven connection number.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 559
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dw_2wtyde, 3, en_US]
[ti_phase_2, 4, en_US]
or
560 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[tileite4-260313-01.tif, 4, en_US]
The following connection is defined for the transformer according to Figure 6-71. The current flow for an
external ground fault is entered at the same time. It is recognized that the secondary currents each flow from
the device. From this, a differential current (IDiff,REF = |IY + IA + IB + IC| = | -I4 - I3|) results, according to the
reference arrow definition for the restricted ground-fault protection (positive to the protected object) with an
external ground fault. To prevent that, the neutral-point current is rotated in the Transformer neutral-point
function group. It follows that: IDiff, REF = |I4 – I3| = 0.
[dw_stwnas, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 561
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
The setting of the 1-phase measuring point based on the definition is carried out as follows:
[scedsall-200214-01, 1, en_US]
The point in Figure 6-71 describes the polarity of the current transformer. At the same time, the current
terminal is designed so that this side is fed out on an odd number terminal point. Since in the SIPROTEC 5
system each current transformer can be assigned a 1-phase measuring point, the odd number terminal points
are named in the setting parameters. According to Figure 6-71, the setting must be yes.
Threshold Value
The following view can be used to derive the threshold value. The transformer is supplied, for example, via the
delta winding and a 1-pole ground fault occurs on the star side.
NOTE
i For estimation of the short-circuit current, note that the inductance changes quadratically with the winding
and linearly with the voltage.
The right part in the following figure represents the fault current as a function of the fault location. The fault
current curve IF1 shows that the longitudinal differential protection with faults near the neutral point has
sensitivity problems due to the sinking current. On the other hand, the neutral-point current IF2 is sufficiently
large. There is therefore no need to set the Threshold (current through the neutral point transformer) to
sensitive.
562 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dw_f1pole, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-73 Principal Fault Current Curves with a 1-Pole Ground Fault
[fo_schwe1, 1, en_US]
The following lower limiting value results from the data from Figure 6-67:
[fo_schwe2, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 563
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
the gradient must be active. To derive the gradient, it is assumed that continuation of the straight line must go
through the coordinate origin (see Figure 6-74). Determine the intersection from the threshold value and the
restraint current at rated current. Calculate the gradient as follows:
[fo_stbref, 2, en_US]
[dw_steiga, 3, en_US]
If you have several measuring points on an outgoing side (see Figure 6-65), Siemens recommends using
the value 3 I/Irated,S in the intersection calculation for the restraint current. In the load case, the maximum
transformer rated current flows on one side.
If, however, several measuring points are on the supply side (for example, breaker-and-a-half layout), Siemens
recommends including all phase currents in the intersection calculation, in order to avoid too strong a
stabilization. With 2 measuring points, a value of 6 I/Irated,S results as intersection with the threshold value.
The slope becomes flatter (0.2 I/Irated,S/6 I/Irated,S = 0.03).
564 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dw_sp_tran, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-75 Activation and Application Example of an Auto Transformer (500 MVA: 400 kV, 230 kV;
125 MVA: 34.5 kV)
For an auto transformer, the highest side rated current is used for normalization. In the example (Figure 6-75),
the measuring point is M2 (230-kV side). For this side, a rated current of 500 MVA/(√(3) · 230 kV) = 1255 A
results. The primary transformer rated current is 1500 A. With this, you can calculate the minimum permissible
pickup value.
[fo_scwe01, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 565
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[fo_stbrst, 2, en_US]
[dw_ref_spa, 1, en_US]
The pickup values can be derived from the example data in Figure 6-76. As side rated value, the following
results:
140 MVA/(√3 · 20 kV) = 4042 A
566 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[fo_schwe3, 1, en_US]
[fo_steig1, 2, en_US]
[fo_schwe4, 1, en_US]
The attainable protection range amounts to approx. 66.4 %. In order to capture ground faults near the
neutral point, it is also recommended to connect a sensitive ground current protection to the neutral point
transformer. You must coordinate its operate time with the line protection.
NOTE
i Ensure that the protection range further limits itself with larger neutral-point resistances, or the restricted
ground-fault protection can no longer be used.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 567
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[dw_strpkt, 1, en_US]
[fo_schwe5, 1, en_US]
If the fault is in the middle of the winding, as shown in Figure 6-77, the minimum ground current will arise.
The driving voltage is:
Vgnd min = Vrated,S2/(2 √3) = 34.5 kV/(2 √3) = 9.96 kV
The following minimum ground current results:
Ignd min = Vgnd min/Rgnd = 9.96 kV/19.05 Ω = 523 A
With reference to the side rated current, the relationship is:
Ignd min/Irated,S = 523 A/2343 A = 0.223
With a safety margin of 2, 0.223/2 = 0.1115 is the result. Select this value as threshold value (rounded:
0.12 I/Irated,S).
568 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
[fo_steig2, 2, en_US]
[dw_anquer, 2, en_US]
[fo_schwe6, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 569
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
6.4.5 Settings
570 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 571
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) function (ANSI 21/21 N):
• Is a selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more ends in radial,
looped, or meshed systems,
The RMD function can be placed in function groups that provide voltage and current measured values as well
as line parameters.
The RMD function consists of the following blocks:
• General
• Ground-fault detection
• Direction determination
• Output logic
The RMD function is preconfigured with 4 zones. The zones are structured identically. In the function RMD, a
maximum of 16 zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve and 16 zones with MHO characteristic curve can
be operated simultaneously.
572 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwstrdisrmd, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The RMD function monitors the phase current. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current
thresh, the impedances of the 3 phase-to-phase loops and the positive-sequence loop (phase-to-phase-to-
phase) are calculated.
Ground-fault detection checks whether any ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault is detected, the
impedances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
The calculated impedance is assigned to the operate curve (quadrilateral characteristic curve) of the zones.
For long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the positive-sequence impedance is reflected in the operate
curve of the distance protection. For this case, a load cutout can be configured that eliminates unwanted
pickups due to overload. You can find the description of the settings in chapter 6.5.3 Application and Setting
Notes – General Settings.
For all picked up loops, the direction is then determined. The adaptive loop selection determines which loops
are actually selected and which loops lie within the operate curves of the zones (loop pickup). All other
loops are not considered by the adaptive loop selection. You can find more detailed information in chapter
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection.
For the picked up loops, the time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip
signals of the loops and phases for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the
zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the distance protection.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the
phase-to-ground measurement loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-80). If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero voltage increases. If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion for ground-fault detection
must be met. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary zero-sequence current
without a primary zero-sequence current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of
current-transformer saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detection.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 573
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.
Distance Zones
For each zone, an operate curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic
You can set the zones as basic or as advanced zone. With the parameter Advanced, you are provided
with additional settings in the zone. This allows you to adapt the zone better to the specific conditions.
You can find the description in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is analyzed additionally.
You can find the description of the direction determination in chapter 6.5.7 Direction Determination.
Output Logic
The output logic of the RMD function links the output information of the zones. The output logic forms the
accumulative pickup indications and operate indications of the function. You can find the description of the
output logic in chapter6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
In the General function block of the RMD function, you set the following parameters. The setting values are
valid for all zones in the distance protection.
574 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The Zone timer start parameter is used to determine the time at which the time delays of the zones
start.
Parameter Value Description
on dist. pickup If the time delays of all zones start simultaneously, select this setting. If the
fault type or measurement loop selection changes, all time delays continue
to run.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
on zone pickup The time delay for the zone starts with zone pickup.
If you need to coordinate the function with other distance or overcurrent-
time protection functions, select this setting.
NOTE
i You see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line is
available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 575
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
NOTE
i If you have set the parameter Zone settings = Basic in a zone, the zone works with the following
parameters of the function (from the function block General):
• (_:2311:130) RF (ph-g)
• (_:2311:131) RF (ph-ph)
Load Cutout
The load-cutout parameters are only visible if you set the parameter (_:2311:106) Use load cutout =
forward only, reverse only or both directions.
You set the load cutout using the following parameters:
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-81 The Load Cutout Acts only on the Positive-Sequence Loop
The R value should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.
576 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
EXAMPLE
[fo_ltber1-210514, 1, en_US]
[fo_ltber2-210514, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout = 0.9 ⋅108.9 Ω = 98 Ω or
Secondary: R load cutout = 0.9 ⋅11.9 Ω = 10.7 Ω
Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameter Angle load cutout) greater (approx. 5°) than the
maximum occurring rotor angle (corresponding to the minimum power factor cos φ).
EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load cos φ = 0.8
φmax = 36.9°
Setting value Angle load cutout = φmax + 5° = 41.9°
You can find additional setting instructions in the example application beginning in chapter 6.5.11.1 Over-
view.
NOTE
i Only if you are working with MHO characteristic curves the following parameters will be visible:
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 577
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve without
extension, set the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.
6.5.4 Settings
578 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
In systems with effective or impedance grounded neutral point, each contact of a phase with ground is a
short-circuit. The closest protection equipment must switch off the fault immediately.
With the distance protection with reactance method (RMD), 7 line loops are calculated (3 ph-gnd loops, 3
ph-ph loops, 1 positive-sequence loop). Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-circuited lines
also influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the short-circuit current
in line A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B, C-A, and A-B-C. The ground current is
also measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called apparent impedances
occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop.
For double phase-to-ground faults, 2 phase-to-ground loops generally pick up. If both ground faults are in the
same direction, this can also lead to pickup in the associated phase-to-phase loop.
With a symmetrical load and 3-phase short circuits, the positive-sequence loop (phase-phase-phase-loop) is
evaluated. In this case, the pickup is reported via the 3 phase-to-phase-loops. If a ground fault is detected, the
phase-to-ground loops are also analyzed.
The RMD function works with adaptive loop selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed and
weighted at the same time. The following table shows the different criteria and their properties:
Criterion Property
Current level The criterion is based on the assumption that the current in the short-
circuited loops increases in case of a short circuit. The ratio of the current
RMS value to the rated current provides information on the type of the short
circuit.
Voltage level The criterion is based on the assumption that the voltage in the short-
circuited loops collapses in case of a short circuit. The ratio of the voltage
RMS value to the rated voltage provides information on the type of the short
circuit.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 579
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Criterion Property
Delta current level With this criterion, the so-called delta variables of the current are used. The
following delta variables are formed:
Checking the loops with the adaptive loop selection ensures selectivity in a reliable way. The loop selected by
the criteria leads to a pickup only when the loop impedance is within the pickup range.
This eliminates healthy apparent impedances on the one hand, but on the other hand simultaneously detects
unbalanced multiphase short circuits and multiple faults correctly. The loops found valid are converted into
phase information. This allows the pickup to be signaled in a phase-selective manner.
To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop. The direction of the
short circuit is determined using different methods. The methods are processed and weighted at the same
time. The following table shows the different input variables of the methods and their properties:
Input Variables for Direction Feature
Determination
Current, actual short-circuit This method determines the ratio between the instantaneous voltage phasor
voltage and the instantaneous current phasor.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. The method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selec-
tive.
Saved, actual short-circuit The method determines the ratio between the saved voltage phasor and
voltage the instantaneous current phasor. The voltage phasor adapted to the instan-
taneous phase position is used.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. It is the preferred application for series-compensated systems. The
method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selective.
580 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 581
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Direction-Characteristic Curve
The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-83.
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
• Source impedance
Since each zone can be set to forward, backward, or non-directional, different direction-characteristic curves
are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no direction-characteristic curve. The entire
tripping range applies to it.
582 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 583
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-85 Voltage Drop for a Short Circuit behind a Series Capacitor
The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. In this case as well, however, direction measure-
ment is correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-86a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus, depending on the
source impedance and the load conditions before the occurrence of the fault, the peaks of the direction-char-
acteristic curves appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of
direction (see Figure 6-86b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the source reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor – thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) – the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction (see
Figure 6-86c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.
[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.
584 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
6.5.8.1 Description
[lopolydisrmd, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-87 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Zone Setting = Basic)
(1) If the Zone settings = Advanced, set the parameters represented in the General FB directly in the
zone!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 585
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[lo_block_i, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-88 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Continuation)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
• Calculation of the reactance (X) and the fault resistance (RF) from the current and voltage measured
values
Operating Polygon
The quadrilateral characteristic (operating polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The operating polygon is defined by the parametersX reach, RF (ph-ph), RF (ph-g), and the inclination
angles Delta Dist. charact. angle and Line angle.
To stabilize the polygon limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies within a
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
characteristic.
586 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwklpolygon-DisRM, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 587
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dw_ueb_impedanzber, 2, en_US]
A fault with fault resistance is assumed. In addition to the actual mZL line impedance, the loop impedance
measured also contains the RF fault resistance.
The fault current IF is supplied from both sides. With the classical impedance measurement, the proportional
fault current IB from the opposite end generates a measuring error in the protection device on side A. This
measuring error depends on the preload on the line. The preload causes a phase displacement of the voltages
VA and VB. The following figure shows the effect of this phase displacement on the measured impedance:
[dw_merr_underreach_rmd, 1, en_US]
In Figure 6-91, as a result of an additional voltage drop, the measuring error resulting from supplying the
opposite end B is represented as IB/IA ⋅ RF. This voltage drop is represented as measuring error Δ X in the
reactance.
To avoid the measuring error, the distance protection with reactance method (RMD) works with an equivalent
current (I Subst.) that compensates the influence of RF in the measuring loop.
588 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dw_leschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]
The loop equation is extended with the equivalent current I Subst. on both sides and converted according to the
impedance.
[fo_x_impber, 1, en_US]
You can select the equivalent current I Subst. in such a manner that the influence of the fault current IB is
compensated at the fault resistance RF. This prevents the measuring error in the reactance.
The resulting measuring error in RF can be compensated only partially.
The R reach is calculated as follows:
[fo_rf_impber, 4, en_US]
IF cannot be measured by the protection device. For this reason, either 3I0 or 3I2 is used as a substitute for IF.
In order to achieve the best result, the procedure uses the larger of the 2 equivalent currents.
The 2 possible equivalent currents 3I2 and 3I0 achieve a perfect result only with equal impedance angles. If the
impedance angles are not equal, you can compensate the inhomogeneity using the compensation angles.
The compensation angles δ comp depend on the network condition and can be calculated for the zero and
negative-sequence system using the following formulas.
[fo_kompwi_nullsys_impber, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 589
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[fo_kompwi_gegensys_impber, 1, en_US]
The relatively smaller compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero and negative-sequence
system) is more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance
at the fault location.
For more detailed information, refer to 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.
[dw_llschleife_rmd, 3, en_US]
The loop equation for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop is:
Whereby the following applies for the B-C loop: Isubst = (a - a2)⋅I2 and a = e j120°
The R reach is calculated as follows:
As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in B for example, the loops A-B and B-C are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.
590 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
compensating for the coupling influence. This ground current must be applied to the device for this purpose.
The loop equation in this case is as follows:
IgndP is the ground current of the parallel line. The factor k 0M is a line constant that results from the geometry
of the double line and the suitability of the grounding.
[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Without parallel-line compensation, in most cases, the ground current of the parallel line leads to a move-back
of the breakdown point (the distance measurement falls short, that is, the impedance is too large). If both
lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in Figure 6-94), overreach
can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-94, there must be no compensation for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is used only if the ground current of the parallel line is less than
that of the end's own line. In the example Figure 6-94, IGnd is greater than IgndP: Compensation occurs at
installation position I by coupling ZM · gndP; for installation point II, there is no compensation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 591
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Parameter: X reach
592 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
• RF (ph-g)
• RF (ph-ph)
• Substitute for IF
• Comp. angle zero seq.
• Comp. angle neg. seq.
• Delta Dist. charact. angle
To find these parameters, go to the Distance protection with reactance
method function and click General information.
Note:
If Zone settings = Basic, the following parameters from the function
group Line apply to the zone:
• Line angle
• Residual compensation factor (Kr, Kx or K0 and Angle (K0))
Advanced If this setting is selected, the following parameters apply per zone:
• RF (ph-g)
• RF (ph-ph)
• Substitute for IF
• Comp. angle zero seq.
• Comp. angle neg. seq.
• Delta Dist. charact. angle
• Line angle
• Residual compensation factor (Kr, Kx or K0 and Angle (K0))
If you want one of the previously mentioned parameters to be zone-
specific, set parameter Zone settings = Advanced.
Mixed systems with overhead line and cable sections represent one possible
application. Here, you can set the parameter K0 precisely to the tipping limit
of the zone.
Parameter: RF (ph-g)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 593
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwrfmale-260513-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If using a two-sided infeed, the infeed ratios must be considered. Calculate the setting value for the RF
(ph-g) parameter as follows:
where:
IB/IA Ratio of ground circuit current from opposite end to its own end
RF arc, ph-gnd Maximum arc portion in fault resistance for phase-to-ground error
RF tower grounding Maximum tower grounding portion in fault resistance for phase-to-ground error
Factor = 1.2 When using this factor, you obtain a safety reserve of 20 %.
Parameter: RF (ph-ph)
[dwrfmall-260513-01.tif, 2, en_US]
594 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero-sequence and negative-sequence system) is
more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance at the fault
location.
EXAMPLE:
Calculation of the Compensation Angle
[dwkomprm-300413-01.tif, 2, en_US]
where:
ZS, A Infeed impedance, side A
ZS, B Infeed impedance, side B
ZL Line impedance
m Zone reach
If the set compensation value matches network conditions during a fault, the fault reactance is not affected
by the load current, the fault resistance, or any other factors. The measurement compensates for the load
current.
If necessary, a change in the infeed impedance maybe considered by adapting the compensation angle. To
do this, set the compensation angle for supporting zones (Zone 1) smaller than that calculated, or negative if
necessary. The effective range X then tends to tilt downward (see Figure 6-95) and thus increases protection
against overreaching.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 595
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Set the compensation angle for all overreaching zones larger than that calculated. This will tilt the effective
range X upward and improve the tendency for underreaching.
[dwreikom-050613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
596 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwneipol-050613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-96 Example of an Additional Slope for the Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve
Siemens recommends to incline the quadrilateral characteristic curve (angle φPole) parallel to the straight line
(angle φLine). For this particular case, maintain the default setting φΔ = 0°.
If you would like to set the slope of the quadrilateral characteristic curve to be different than that of the slope
of the straight line, proceed as shown in the following example:
EXAMPLE:
Line angle φLine= 60°
Requirement: Quadrilateral characteristic curve in 90° - angle to R-axis
Calculation:
φPol = φLine+ φΔ
90° = 60° + φΔ
φΔ = 30°
Result: Set the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle to + 30°.
Parameter: Kr and Kx
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 597
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
You can find an example on how to calculate the parameters K0 and Angle (K0) from the line data in
chapter 5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.
6.5.8.4 Settings
598 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 599
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
6.5.9.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[lo_MHO_RMD, 3, en_US]
600 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the boundary case, ZF is on the periphery of the circle. Then, the angle between the 2 difference vectors is
90° (Thales' theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90°; outside the characteristic, it is
less than 90°.
[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-98 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic Curve
With the Zr impedance reach parameter, you adjust the range of the zone. With the parameter Direc-
tional mode, you can specify whether the zone works in forward or reverse direction. In the reverse
direction, the MHO characteristic curve is reflected across the coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 601
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
of a loop lies well within the MHO characteristic curve of a distance zone, the zone picks up. The loop
information is converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the
zones are processed further in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions
(for example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
602 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
of the short-circuit voltage by a rotation of 90°. The displacement of the lower peak is then identical to the
displacement for the memory polarization.
[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 603
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-101 Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve with Cross-Polarized or Buffered Voltages
You can set the level of polarization for the memory- and cross-polarization separately. For phase-to-phase
loops, the RMS value of the buffered voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For a subsequent fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage can be missing. In this case, the
buffered voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-phase short circuits and
2-phase short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization.
This voltage is rotated by 90° in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross-polarization). The polarization
voltage VP is a mixture of the current voltage and the corresponding healthy voltage and is calculated as
follows:
If the buffered voltage is not available, you can access cross-polarization. For the phase-to-phase loops, you
can set the evaluation of the voltage with the factor kcross.
NOTE
604 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set the
time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating time.
For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading-time increment.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 605
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.5.9.3 Settings
606 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Mode of Operation
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic and
one trip logic each. The pickup and trip logic generate the overlapping indications of the distance protection.
General Pickup
With the impedance pickup, the group indication Pickup is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the
working area of a zone.
The signal Pickup is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions, for
example, teleprotection scheme or automatic reclosing.
Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and issued as group indications.
Trip Logic
The trip signals of the distance zones are combined phase-selectively.
With the 1-pole operate allowed parameter, you specify whether the zone can execute 1-pole operate
or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole operate is allowed on overhead
lines.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 607
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
If the device is capable of 1-pole operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set, 1-pole
pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate indication.
6.5.11.1 Overview
The distance protection clarifies 100 % of faults in a meshed system selectively.
Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resistances can influence the selectivity. The RMD
function reduces the unfavorable influence of high fault resistances at high loads. If the electrical power
system shows inhomogeneities, for example, different impedance angles of the infeeds, the reach of the
distance protection can be affected. The reactance method compensates this influence via adjustable compen-
sation angles.
This example describes the use of the RMD function for the protection of a 380-kV overhead-transmission line.
For this example, the following is assumed:
NOTE
i If you wish to add new functions, take note that the visibility of individual parameters depends on the
configuration. Thus, first define the functions for your specific application and then enter the parameters
afterwards.
608 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with the line to be protected.
The following system data apply to the application example (primary values):
R1 [Ω] X1 [Ω] Angle Z1 [°] R0 [Ω] X0 [Ω] Angle Z0 [°]
Infeed A 2.363 22.487 84 1.534 14.596 84.00
Infeed B 15.635 33.530 65 14.001 25.761 61.48
Overhead line 2.384 25.6 84.68 13.112 82.432 80.96
(80 km)
In the application example, the infeed impedances with a large angle difference were selected in order to
emphasize the benefits of the reactance method (compensation angle). In most real applications, the angle
difference is too small so that you can use the default setting of 0° for the compensation angle.
The following table shows the time grading of the distance zones for the protection device at the installation
location A:
Zone Directional mode Reach X reach [Ω]
[% of the line length]
Zone 1 forward 80 % 20.48
Zone 2 forward 120 % 30.72
Zone 3 forward 150 % 38.4
Zone 4 reverse -50 % 12.8
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 609
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
NOTE
i For other applications, for example, mixed sections with cable and overhead line, you can overwrite the
residual compensation factors set here in the distance zones with local parameters.
The following tables show the parameters relevant for the application example in the Line function group:
Parameters Setting Value Description
(_:9001:108) Line 84.68° Positive-sequence system impedance angle
angle
(_:9001:104) Kr 1.58 Rgnd/Rph of the line
(_:9001:105) Kx 0.74 Xgnd/Xph of the line
Load Cutout
The parameters R load cutout and Angle load cutout define the load cutout. With the reactance
method, the load cutout is important only for 3-phase short circuits. The maximum operating current must be
known for calculation of the load-cutout parameters.
The following output data are assumed in the application example for calculating the load-cutout parameters:
Maximum operating current Iload, max = 2000 A
with an unfavorable power factor cosϕ = 0.9
Calculate the primary setting values for the parameter R load cutout and the Angle load cutout with
a safety margin of 10 % as follows:
610 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Remote infeed (I remote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance.
The additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-106). To
compensate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio I remote/I local.
You can obtain the effective tower-grounding resistance values in Figure 6-162 . In the example, the primary
effective tower-grounding resistances is 1.9 Ω. When calculating the setting value for RF (ph-g), consider
the infeed from the opposite end when calculating RTF as follows:
The ratio Iremote/Ilocal can only be calculated approximately using the reactance. For the calculation, a 1-phase
short circuit is assumed at the opposite end of the line. This is used to calculate the Iremote/Ilocal ratio as follows:
The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the fault loop is thus:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 611
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground. The
arc length should be 7 m in the example. If you assume a double arc length, you consider the curvature of a
burning arc:
Varc = 2500 V· larc
Varc = 2500 V· 2· 7 m = 35 kV
When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc using
the smallest fault current. With Ik min = 1,500 A, calculate Rarc as follows:
For ground faults, the total resistance – that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF – must be covered. By adding a safety
margin of 20 %, the primary setting value for the parameter RF (ph-g) can be calculated as follows:
For the phase-to-phase fault, only the arc voltage must be considered. If you assume double the value for
the arc length and you use the same value for the minimum fault current, the value of 2 ⋅ 23.3 Ω calculated
previously applies for the arc resistance. By adding a safety margin of 20 %, the primary setting value for the
parameter RF (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows. For the parameter RF (ph-ph), half of the calculated
arc resistance is set.
Parameter: Comp. angle zero seq. and Comp. angle neg. seq.
For optimum results, the RMD function must know the phase angle of the current through the fault resis-
tance. As this current cannot be measured, the zero or negative-sequence current is used as equivalent
current for the estimation of the phase angle.
612 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[dw_ueb_impedanzber, 2, en_US]
The protection device cannot measure the fault current IF directly. For an accurate impedance measurement,
the phase angle of the fault current must at least be estimated. In the measurement, the phase angle
of the fault current IF is derived from the zero or negative-sequence current. In electrical power systems
with inhomogeneous power infeeds, that is the power infeeds have great differences in the impedance
angles, a compensation angle can be used. In the example, the compensation angles for the zero and
negative-sequence systems are calculated with m = 80 % for the limits of zone Z1.
Calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 613
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
In the application example, the line angle with a value of 84.68° is so large that the inclination of the R limit
should run in parallel to the line angle. Set the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle = 0.00°.
NOTE
i The parameter (_:14191:11) 1-pole operate allowed is only visible in the device variants that can
trip in a 1-pole way!
Zone Z1
614 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
NOTE
i If the zone should not work with the general parameters of the RMD function, set the parameter Zone
settings = Advanced.
Then, the respective zone works with the following zone-specific parameters (example for zone Z1):
• (_:14191:130) RF (ph-g)
• (_:14191:131) RF (ph-ph)
• (_:14191:104) Kr
• (_:14191:105) Kx
Zone Z2
Zone Z3
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 615
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
Zone Z4
Check the setting values on the basis of the following graphical representation of the operate curve:
616 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
[sc_KL_RMD_examble, 1, en_US]
6.5.12 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 617
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
618 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 619
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
620 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 621
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
622 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 623
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
624 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
• Is a form of selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more end(s) in
radial, looped or meshed systems,
• Trips 1- or 3-pole
• General
• Pickup method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 625
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwstg13p-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
Ground-fault detection determines whether a ground fault has occurred. The pickup method releases the
measurement loops. For the released loops, the impedance is calculated. The calculated impedance is
assigned to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic) of the zones.
In the Impedance pickup method, the load cutout is analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated
after assigning the calculated impedance to the operate curves. The direction to the short-circuit location is
then determined for all picked up loops. The loop selection determines the picked up loops for which the
classification into the defined zones is processed. The loop elimination removes all the loops that are no
longer picked up after direction determination and querying of the load cutout. For the picked up loops, the
time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases
for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip
signals of the distance protection.
In the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup, the load cutout is set directly in
the zone and is evaluated for all zones.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the
measuring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Supervision of the ratio of the zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)
Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-109). If the ratio of zero-sequence
impedance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero-sequence voltage increases. If the ratio of zero-
sequence impedance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases. The Ground-
fault detection parameter specifies which criterion is used to perform ground-fault detection.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion for ground-fault detection
must be met. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary zero-sequence current
626 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
without a primary zero-sequence current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of
current-transformer saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detections.
Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.
[loerdfeh-240511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of the phase currents
for exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).
The zero-sequence current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
• Zero-sequence currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of
phase-current transformers
[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 627
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
For long, highly loaded lines, high load currents can lead to overstabilization of the zero-sequence current
criterion (see Figure 6-110). For the detection of ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence
current criterion is extended. In addition to the zero-sequence current, the ratio of zero-sequence current
to negative-sequence current is also monitored. In a 1-pole short circuit, the negative-sequence current I2
is about as high as the zero-sequence current I0. If the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence
current exceeds a preset limit, the criterion is released. The zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current
criterion is stabilized for high negative-sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic curve. Figure 6-111
shows the connection. A prerequisite for release of the zero-sequence/negative-sequence current criterion is a
minimum current of 0.2 ⋅ Irated for 3I0.
[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence voltage is monitored for exceeding a set value (parameter V0> threshold value). The
dropout threshold is about 95 % of the pickup value. In grounded systems, monitoring of the zero-sequence
voltage can be used as an additional ground-fault criterion.
628 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[loerdawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-112 Ground-Fault Detection during 1-Pole Disconnection (Example: 1-Pole Pause A)
Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured. The following starting processes are available:
• Impedance pickup
• Overcurrent pickup
• V/I pickup
• V/I φ pickup
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method. You can use different pickup methods in parallel.
Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance vectors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
• Quadrilateral characteristic curve with adaptive pickup (description begins in chapter 6.6.10 Zone with
Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and Adaptive Pickup)
• Circular characteristic curve (description begins in chapter 6.6.12 Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 629
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Output Logic
The output logic of the function Distance protection for grounded systems links the output indications of
the zones and forms the group trip signal of the function. You can find the description of the output logic in
chapter 6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
• Blocking of the pickup for the overcurrent pickup method, V-/I-pickup and V-/I-/ϕ-pickup
• Blocking of the pickup during impedance pickup by blocking the external distance zone(s)
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup
methods and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current
detection or the pickup method will not pick up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking
through a corresponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective
method or the linked distance zone is met, the pickup is indicated and the corresponding time delay starts.
After that time, the operate indication is generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see
section 6.59.1.1 Overview of Functions) is in effect can the blocking be set.
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance on the line to be protected:
630 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 631
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
fault. The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid ground activation. If no extreme
power-system unbalance and unusually large current-transformer errors are expected, Siemens recommends
keeping the default value of 0.10.
• Default setting (_:2311:108) Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase
The Loop select. with ph-ph-g parameter is used to determine which loops will be analyzed by the
distance protection in the event of double ground faults. You can restrict the analysis to certain loops. If you
wish to restrict analysis to certain loops, they must have the same direction.
In two-end feed to a shared fault resistance to ground, the phase-to-ground loop of the leading phase tends
to overreach. If you set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase, these
loops will not be analyzed.
The following table shows which loops are analyzed for different settings of the Loop select. with
ph-ph-g parameter:
Parameter Value Picked Up Loops Evaluated Loop(s)
block leading phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-A
block lagging phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-gnd, C-A
all A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A
ph-ph only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-A
ph-gnd only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd
In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the internal
fault loop, the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g must be set to ph-gnd only or all for this
application. To ensure the selectivity of protection, reduce the range of the underreaching zone.
NOTE
i You can see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line is
available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.
632 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i Only if you are working with MHO characteristics the following parameters will be visible:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
6.6.2.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 633
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
634 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 635
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
636 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 637
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
638 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 639
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
• Is a form of selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more end(s) in
radial, looped or meshed systems,
• Trips 3-phase
• General information
• Pickup method
[dwstriso-090212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
640 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Mode of Operation
Ground-fault detection determines whether a ground fault has occurred. The pickup method releases the
measurement loops. The impedance is calculated for the released loops. The calculated impedance is assigned
to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic 34) of the zones. In the Impedance pickup
method, the load cutout is then analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated. For all picked up loops,
the direction to the short-circuit location is then determined. The loop selection determines for which of the
picked up loops assignment in the defined zones is done. The loop elimination removes all loops that are no
longer picked up after direction determination and querying the load cutout. For the picked up loops, the time
delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for
the zone. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip
signals of the distance protection.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the
measuring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
• Monitoring of the ratio of the zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)
[losymerk-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-115 shows the logic of the ground-fault detection in isolated or resonant-grounded systems.
If the following conditions are met, the ground-fault detection responds for double ground faults with very
low ground currents:
34 in preparation
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 641
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Only for current-transformer saturation, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is taken into account for the
release of the ground-fault detection for double ground faults. If V0 exceeds the firmly set threshold of 0.23 V
· Vrated, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is released.
[loisolie-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of phase currents for
exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).
The zero-sequence current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
• Zero-sequence currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of
phase-current transformers
642 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For long lines, high load currents can lead to destabilization of the residual-current criterion (see
Figure 6-116). For the detection of double ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence current
criterion is extended. In addition to the zero-sequence current, the ratio of zero-sequence current to nega-
tive-sequence current is also monitored. If the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence current
exceeds a preset limit, the criterion is released. The zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current criterion
is stabilized for high negative-sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic. Figure 6-117 shows the
connection. A prerequisite for release of the zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current criterion is a
minimum current of 0.2· Irated for 3I0.
[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 643
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Only for current-transformer saturation, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is taken into account for the
release of the ground-fault detection for double ground faults. If V0 exceeds the firmly set threshold of 0.23 V
Vrated, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is released.
Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured. The following pickup methods are available:
• Impedance pickup
• Overcurrent pickup
• V-/I pickup
• V-/I-φ pickup
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method. You can use different pickup methods in parallel.
Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance phasors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-directional.
For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance phasors in the
R-X plane, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.
[dwerdslu-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a ground fault occurs, a significant starting current can flow in an extended resonant-grounded system. This
can result in a pickup of the ground-current pickup. Special measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
pickups when a ground fault occurs.
644 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Specify a uniform double ground-fault preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which
fault will be switched off.
For a double ground fault in the isolated or resonant-grounded system, it is enough to switch off one base
point. The 2nd fault can remain in the system as a simple ground fault. Specify a uniform double ground-fault
preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which fault will be switched off. The Phase
preferen. (ph-ph-g) parameter is used to define the order of preference. The following double ground-
fault preferences can be selected.
Setting for Parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph- Principle of Preference
g)
C(A) acyclical Acyclical C before A before B
A(C) acyclical Acyclical A before C before B
B(A) acyclical Acyclical B before A before C
A(B) acyclical Acyclical A before B before C
C(B) acyclical Acyclical C before B before A
B(C) acyclical Acyclical B before C before A
C(A) cyclical Cyclical C before A before B before C
A(C) cyclical Cyclical A before C before B before A
In the 8 preference cases, a ground fault will be switched off according to the preference program. The 2nd
fault remains as a simple ground fault in the system and can be detected using the Ground-fault detection
function.
• Blocking of the pickup for the overcurrent pickup method, V-/I-pickup and V-/I-/ϕ-pickup
• Blocking of the pickup during impedance pickup by blocking the external distance zone(s)
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup
methods and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current
detection or the pickup method will not pick up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking
through a corresponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective
method or the linked distance zone is met, the pickup is signaled and the corresponding time delay will start.
After that time, the operate indication will be generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection
(see section 6.59.1 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 645
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
EXAMPLE:
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance (Z1) on the line to be protected in
the following way:
If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.
646 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The Phase preferen. (ph-ph-g) parameter is used to define the order of preference for double ground
faults.
The following table shows which loops are analyzed for different settings of the Phase preferen. (ph-
ph-g) parameter:
Parameter Value Picked Up Loop(s) Analyzed Loop(s)
C (A) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
A (C) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd
B (A) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd
A (B) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd
C (B) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
B (C) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
C (A) cyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
A (C) cyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd
all A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd, B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd, C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd; A-gnd
If you wish to switch off both base points of a ground fault, set the parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph-
g) = all.
NOTE
i The following parameters will be visible only if you are working with MHO characteristic curves:
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 647
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.3.4 Settings
648 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 649
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
650 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 651
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
652 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 653
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop.
Different methods are implemented for direction determination. The function selects the most appropriate
method depending on the available input variables when a short circuit occurs.
The following factors during short-circuit occurrence influence, for example, the method selection:
• Existing measurands
654 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 655
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Direction-Characteristic Curve
The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-120.
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
• Source impedance
[dw_ritgkl, 2, en_US]
656 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Since each zone can be set to forward, backward, or non-directional, different direction-characteristic curves
are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no direction-characteristic curve. The entire
tripping range applies to it.
[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 657
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-122 Voltage Characteristic for a Short Circuit Upstream of a Series Capacitor
The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. But in this case as well, direction measurement is
correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-123a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus the peaks of the
direction-characteristic curves, depending on the source impedance and load conditions before occurrence of
the fault, appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of direction
(Figure 6-123b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the source reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor – thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) – the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction
(Figure 6-123c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.
[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.
658 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.5.1 Description
In impedance pickup, the phase currents are monitored. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-
current thresh, the impedances between the phase-to-phase loops are calculated. If a ground fault is
detected, the impedances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
Impedance pickup includes the elimination of apparent impedance and – if activated – monitoring of the load
cutout.
Healthy Loops
In impedance pickup, all 6 line loops are calculated. Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-
circuited lines also influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the
short-circuit current in line A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B and C-A. The
ground current is also measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called
"apparent impedances" occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop. They are therefore of no significance for the zone selectivity of the protection.
In addition to zone selectivity, phase selectivity is also important. Phase selectivity includes the identification
of the faulty phase, the generation of phase-selective indications, and the possibility of executing a 1-pole
automatic reclosing function (AREC). Depending on the infeed conditions, short circuits near the station
may have the result that the healthy loops see the short circuit at a greater distance, but they still see it
within a tripping area. This case leads to a disconnection without the option of a 1-pole AREC. The 3-pole
disconnection of the line then results.
Inspecting the loops reliably assures zone and phase selectivity. Loops are inspected in 2 steps.
• From the calculated loop impedance and their partial impedances (phase or ground), a replication of the
line is first simulated.
Load Cutout
For long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the load impedance will be reflected in the operate curve
of the distance protection. For operate curves with high R segments, a load cutout can be configured that
eliminates unwanted pickups due to overload. The load cutout (see Figure 6-124 can be configured for
phase-to-phase loops and for phase-to-ground loops.
The parameters are explained in chapter 6.6.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 659
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i Note the following when adding a Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup to
the function Distance protection for grounded systems:
• The parameters for the load cutout are no longer available in impedance pickup.
• You set the parameters for the load cutout directly in the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic
curve and adaptive pickup.
Load Cutout
The load cutout can be set using the following parameters:
660 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The values should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.
EXAMPLE
[fo_ltber1-210514, 1, en_US]
[fo_ltber2-210514, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 108.9 Ω or
Secondary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 11.9 Ω
Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameters Angle load cutout (ph-ph) and Angle load
cutout (ph-g)) greater (approx. 5°) than the maximum occurring load angle (corresponding to the
minimum power factor cos φ).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 661
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load (cos φmax)min = 0.8
φmax = 36.9°
Setting value Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = φmax + 5° = 41.9°
You can find additional setting notes in Example application high voltage overhead line in 6.6.15.5 Setup
Notes for Pickup Method
When, with double lines, 2 line systems are on a single tower, there is a significant coupling between the 2
line systems. In the event of a 1-pole tripping of neighboring circuits, increased load currents and coupled
ground currents can cause a ground pickup. This pickup can be prevented by separate setting of the load
cutout for phase-to-ground loops.
During the 1-pole dead time on the parallel line, a significant ground current flows on the intact line. This
ground current is caused by the coupling in the zero-sequence system. The ground current during the 1-phase
pause on the parallel line must be considered when setting the R load cutout (ph-g) parameter.
EXAMPLE
This calculated value applies to phase-to-phase loops. For double lines, the 1-pole dead time on the parallel
line must also be considered for phase-to-ground loops. During the 1-pole dead time, the load current on the
intact line increases. At the same time, a load current flows in the ground path on the parallel line in the
1-pole dead time. Calculate the minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops with the load current in
the ground path. For the calculation in this example, this ground current is given as a value relative to the load
current Imax.
For the ratio of Ignd on the healthy line to Imax in the 1-phase pause on the parallel line, the following value is
assumed:
662 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The line length as well as the source impedance and line impedance have an influence on this ratio. If you
cannot determine the value using a power-system simulation, you can assume the following approximate
values:
Long lines (about 200 km) Ignd1pol:Pause/Imax: approximately 0.4
Short lines (about 25 km) Ignd1pol:Pause/Imax: approximately 0.6
The minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops results in the following for the calculation example:
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values as the primary or secondary
variables. Conversion into secondary values yields:
The opening angle of the load cutout, as in the 1st example for the single line, is calculated using the
minimum power factor.
6.6.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 663
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.6.1 Description
Overcurrent pickup is a phase-specific pickup method which monitors the phase currents per phase. If a phase
current exceeds the set threshold value O/C threshold Iph>>, a phase-selective pickup signal is output.
The phase-selective pickup signals are converted to loop information for the distance zones. If the network is
grounded, the loop selection for 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection depends on parameter Loops
with 1-ph. pickup. You will find more information on this in chapter 6.6.6.2 Application and Setting
Notes.
For more information about ground-fault detection in grounded systems, please refer to chapter 6.6.2.2 Struc-
ture of the Function.
If the network is not grounded, the selection of the 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection always
depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked up.
For more information about ground-fault detection in isolated/arc-suppression-coil-ground systems, please
refer to chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.
The pickup will be indicated phase-selectively. If a ground fault is detected, it will be indicated.
664 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about
1.5 system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, the Loops with 1-ph.
pickup parameter will be valid and visible.
You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
Parameter Value Description
ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the
loop always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked
up. If a current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the
current in the phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will
be selected, for example:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 665
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.6.3 Settings
6.6.7.1 Description
V/I pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents
have exceeded the set threshold value Min. current thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being
evaluated, both associated phase currents must exceed the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-125 determine the slope of the V/I characteristic.
In systems without a grounded neutral point, a pickup is effectively suppressed with ground faults. You
can find more information on this in chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function, under section Ground-fault
detection.
The following figure shows the V/I pickup characteristic:
666 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[DwUIanreg-160813-01, 1, en_US]
The geometry of the V/I characteristic is determined by the parameters shown in the figure (dots).
The following table shows which voltage settings define the characteristic in Figure 6-125:
For high-current short-circuits, overcurrent pickup O/C threshold Iph>> is superimposed. If the phase
currents exceed the threshold value O/C threshold Iph>>, pickup occurs regardless of the voltage. The
following table shows the measurands used by the pickup modules:
Pickup Module Voltage Current
A VA35 IA
B VB35 IB
C VC35 IC
A-B VAB36 IA
B-C VBC36 IB
C-A VCA36 IC
35 Phase-to-ground voltage
36 Phase-to-phase voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 667
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Pickup Programs
Pickup programs allow you to adapt to different system states. With the parameter Pickup program, you
control the measurand selection. For different fault types, you can determine whether the phase-to-phase
loops or phase-to-ground loops are the most important or whether the measurand selection depends on the
ground-fault detection. Thus, adaptation to system states is very flexible. The best possible control depends
significantly on the neutral-point grounding.
You can find more information on this in chapter 6.6.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.
NOTE
i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about
1.5 system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
668 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 669
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.7.3 Settings
670 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.8.1 Description
V/I/ϕ pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. The following figure shows the V/I pickup character-
istic:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 671
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[DwUIPhia-160813-01, 1, en_US]
The basic structure of the V/I/ϕ characteristic is identical to that for V/I pickup with an additional, sensitive
angle-controlled characteristic (short-circuit region ϕ> in Figure 6-126). The sensitive characteristic (a-d-e) is
used if the fault impedance is close to the straight lines. In this way, it is still possible to differentiate reliably
between load and short-circuit conditions in cases where simple V/I pickup fails.
Possible applications include, for instance, protection of long lines or line segments with intermediate infeed
and low external impedance at the same time. In the event of a short circuit at the end of the line or in
the distance protection backup range, the local measured voltage is interrupted only briefly. In this case, the
phase angle between the current and voltage serves as an additional criterion for fault detection.
The angle-dependent region of the characteristic (hatched area in Figure 6-126) can be set for the forward
direction only (line direction) or both directions.
A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have exceeded the set threshold value Min. current
thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being evaluated, both associated phase currents must exceed
the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage and the phase angle between the current and voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-126 determine
the slope of the U/I-/ϕ characteristic.
With the Pickup program parameter, you control which voltages are evaluated in the case of ground faults
or phase-to-phase faults. In this way, you can adjust the V/I-/ϕ characteristic to provide optimum response
to various fault types and network conditions. The following table shows which voltage settings define the
characteristic in Figure 6-126:
Setting When Evaluating Phase- Setting When Evaluating Phase-
to-Ground Voltages to-Phase Voltages
V(Iph>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Iph> Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>
V(Iph>>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>>
Iph>>
V(Iphi>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Undervolt. phase-phase for Iphi>
Iphi>
672 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The phase angle between the current and voltage is determined as follows:
• If you are evaluating phase-to-ground voltages, the phase angle is determined from the phase-to-ground
voltage and the associated phase current without consideration of the ground current. A requirement is
that the corresponding phase current must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
• If you are evaluating phase-to-phase voltages, the angle is determined from the phase-to-phase voltage
and the associated current difference. A requirement is that both phase currents and the definitive
differential current for the loop must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
With the ϕ< and ϕ> parameters, you define the upper and lower limits of the short-circuit angle range (see
following figure).
[DwUIphiK-160813-01, 1, en_US]
If the phase angle is greater than the limit angle ϕ> and less than the limit angle ϕ<, the sensitive V/I/ϕ
characteristic applies (a-d-e). Otherwise, the lower characteristic applies (a-b-c).
NOTE
i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about
1.5 system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 673
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
674 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Parameter: Iφ>
Parameter: φ>
Parameter: φ<
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 675
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
Parameter Value Description
ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the
loop always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked
up. If a current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the
current in the phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will
be selected, for example:
6.6.8.3 Settings
676 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 677
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.9.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[lopoly13-230511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
678 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[lo_block_i, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-129 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Continued)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
Operating Polygon
The quadrilateral operate curve (operating polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The operating polygon is defined by the parameters X reach, R (ph-ph), R (ph-g) and Zone-inclina-
tion angle.
To stabilize the polygon limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies within a
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
characteristic.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 679
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.
[foflschl-160909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
680 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
(complex) measurands
(complex) line impedance
[folimped-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwllschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in A, for example, the loops A-B and C-A are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.
[dwleschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The voltage VC-gnd, the phase current IC, and the ground current Ignd of the faulty loop are measured.
[fofeschl-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foreform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
and
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 681
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[foxeform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
VC-gnd Short-circuit voltage phasor
IC Short-circuit current phasor (phase C)
Ignd Ground-fault current phasor
φV Phase angle of the short-circuit voltage
φph Phase angle of the short-circuit current (phase C)
φgnd Phase angle of the ground-fault current
The factors Kr = Rgnd/Rph and Kx = Xgnd/Xph depend only on the line constants and not on the distance to the
fault.
NOTE
i In the impedance calculation, the factors Kr and Kx are used for residual compensation. If you enter the
grounding resistance factors in the format k0 with Phi(k0), they are automatically converted into Kr and
Kx. Conversion is performed under consideration of the line angle. For this reason, pay attention to the
correct setting of the line angle in the general data of the Line function group (parameter (_:9001:108)
Line angle).
As long as one of the phases involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the
automatic reclosing, the phase-to-ground loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time in
the automatic reclosing in C, the C-gnd loop is blocked, for example. This prevents an incorrect measurement
with undefined measurands. The process monitor observes the state of the automatic reclosing and provides
the blocking signal.
[fofokpl1-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofokpl2-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
IgndP is the ground current of the parallel line. The ratios R0M/3Rph and X0M/3Xph are line constants that result
from the geometry of the double line and the suitability of the grounding.
682 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Without parallel-line compensation, the ground current of the parallel line typically results in the under-
reaching of the distance protection (the loop impedance seen by the distance protection appears to be larger).
If both lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in Figure 6-133),
overreach can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-133, there must be no compensation for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is only connected for those line ends where the ground current of
the parallel line is less than that of the end's own line. In example Figure 6-133, Ignd is greater than Ignd-P:
There is compensation in I in that ZM · Ignd-P is coupled in; in II there is no compensation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 683
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance-protection zone is about 1.5 system cycles even if no transformer inrush current
is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on
inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
Parameter: X reach
Parameter: R (ph-g)
684 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
You can find additional setting notes in Example application: High-voltage overhead line.
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 685
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i Only if the Zone-spec. residu. comp. = yes parameter in the zone is set, the residual compensation
factors set here will be valid and visible. If the parameter is set Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no, the
residual compensation factors set for the device apply.
Parameter: Kr and Kx
NOTE
i The parameters Kr and Kx are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-spec.
residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
An example of calculation of the Kr and Kx parameters from line data can be found in the High-voltage
overhead-line application example in chapter 6.6.15.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line .
NOTE
i The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-
spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
NOTE
i For short lines with large R/X ratios, note the following during zone setting: The angle errors of the current
and voltage transformers cause a rotation of the impedance measured in the direction of the R axis. The
risk that external faults will be shifted into the first zone increases if, because of the settings for the
polygon, kr and kx, the loop range is large in the R direction in relation to the X direction for Zone 1. Use
the grading factor of 85 % only up to an R/X ratio ≤ 1 (loop range).
686 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
For larger R/X settings, you can calculate a reduced grading factor for Zone 1 using the following formula:
STF Grading factor = range of Zone 1 relative to the line length
R Loop range in the direction R for Zone 1 = R1· (1 + kr)
X Loop range in the direction X for Zone 1 = X1· (1 + kx)
δU Angle error of the voltage transformer (typically 1°)
δI Angle error of the current transformer (typically 1°)
[fofdustf-060709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Alternatively or additionally, you can use the Zone-inclination angle parameter to incline the polygon
of Zone 1 in the first quadrant. This also prevents overreach (see Figure 6-130).
6.6.9.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 687
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.10.1 Description
The Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup is essentially the same as the Zone
with quadrilateral characteristic curve.
The chapter describes only the extensions of the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive
pickup.
You can find the description for the Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve beginning with chapter
6.6.9.1 Description.
The Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup has the following extensions:
• You set the load cutout directly in the zone. The load cutout applies for all the additional zones in the
Distance protection for grounded systems function.
• The load cutout applies to both the phase-to-phase and the phase-to-ground loops.
• You can additionally limit the load cutout by user-specific minimum/maximum values.
In that way, you can adapt the load cutout better to the load curve.
• The load-cutout settings are available as measured values R load cutout and Angle load cutout.
You can define multiple characteristic curves with different load cutouts and store them in different settings
groups. If you switch the settings group, you can adapt the load cutout in the operate curve of the Distance
protection quickly and flexibly to different load conditions. This increases the safety against erroneous
pickups due to overloads.
You can find more detailed information regarding settings group switching in chapter 3.12.1 Settings-Group
Switching.
688 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Measured Values of the Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve and Adaptive Pickup
The measured values are prerouted to the operational and fault log. This supports fault analysis if the function
trips.
Measured Value Description
(_:306) R load cutout Resistance for defining the load cutout in the R-X
plane
(_:307) Angle load cutout Opening angle of the load cutout
NOTE
i If you insert a Zone with quadrilateral characteristic curve and adaptive pickup into the Distance
protection function, the load-cutout settings migrate from the impedance pickup into this zone.
If you delete this zone in the function, you must again set the load-cutout settings in the impedance
pickup.
In the impedance pickup, you can again set the load cutout separately for phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground loops.
NOTE
i If you set the load cutout in the Quadrilateral zone with adaptive pickup, the load cutout applies for all
zones, both for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-ground loops.
Load Cutout
The load cutout can be set using the following parameters:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 689
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
With the Max. Angle load cutout and Min. Angle load cutout parameters, you can define an
upper and a lower limiting value for the Angle load cutout parameter. This allows you to additionally
limit the setting range of the Angle load cutout parameter and adapt it to specific load conditions. If you
set the Max. Angle load cutout and Min. Angle load cutout parameters to the same value, the
parameter Angle load cutout cannot take on a different value.
6.6.10.3 Settings
690 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 691
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.11.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[lomho13p-230511-01.tif, 3, en_US]
692 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[lo_block_i, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-135 Logic Diagram of a Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve (Continued)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In marginal cases, ZF is on the peak of the circle. Then, the angle between the 2 difference vectors is 90°
(Thales' theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90°; outside the characteristic, it is less
than 90°.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 693
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-136 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic Curve
The Zr impedance reach parameter is used to define the zone. Whether the zone works in a forward
or reverse direction is determined. In the reverse direction, the MHO characteristic curve is mirrored across
the coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the MHO characteristic curve of a
distance zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is converted into phase-selective pickup indications.
The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are processed further in the output logic of the distance
protection and by external additional functions (for example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the
distance protection is described in Chapter 6.6.14 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
694 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 695
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
696 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-139 Polarized MHO Characteristic Curve with Cross-Polarized or Buffered Voltages
[fofuspch-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
An evaluation (factor kpre) for the prefault voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-
phase loops. Memory polarization is only carried out when the RMS value of the corresponding buffer voltage
for phase-to-ground loops is greater than 40 % of the rated voltage (Vrated). For phase-to-phase loops, the RMS
value of the buffer voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For an evolving fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage may be missing. In this case, the
buffer voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-pole short circuits and 2-pole
short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization. This
voltage is rotated by 90° in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross polarization). The polarization voltage
VP is a mixture of the present voltage and the corresponding external fault voltage. The following equation
shows the polarization voltage VP for a phase-to-ground loop:
[fofukrzp-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the buffer voltage is not available, then cross polarization can be used. An evaluation (factor kcross) for the
voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 697
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
• Mem. polarization(ph-g)
• Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
• Cross polarization(ph-g)
• Cross polarization(ph-ph)
Set the parameters for all zones in the general parameters for the distance protection function.
NOTE
i With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance-protection zone is about 1.5 system cycles even if no transformer inrush current
is detected. Set the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes parameter only if blocking based on
inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
698 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set the
time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating time.
For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading time increment.
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 699
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.6.11.3 Settings
700 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 701
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.12.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[locircle, 1, en_US]
702 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[lo_block_i, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-142 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Circular Characteristic Curve (Continuation)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
Base Circle
The operate curve of the zone is a centered impedance circle around the origin of the R-X coordinate system.
The base circle of the circular characteristic curve is defined by the parameter Zr impedance reach.
Since the circle cannot distinguish between positive impedance (forward direction) and negative impedance
(reverse direction), direction-characteristic curves delimit the operating zones to the desired quadrant.
You can find more detailed information regarding the direction determination in chapter 6.6.4 Direction
Determination.
Figure 6-143 shows an example of the shape of the impedance circles. The circle for the first zone as a
forward-directed zone is shaded. The third zone is shown as a reverse-directed zone. Zone Z5 is non-direc-
tional.
The impedance circle is defined by its radius and it forms the local curve of constant impedance.
[fo_7sa6_fkt-beschr-Grundkreis, 1, en_US]
The radius thus determines the reach of a distance-protection zone in the R-X diagram and is independent of
the short-circuit angle φSC.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 703
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_kreis-charakteristik, 1, en_US]
704 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_bsp-erhoehte-resistanzreserve, 1, en_US]
The limit angle α can be set separately for each zone. If a zone is set in the reverse direction, the section of the
increased resistance reserve is mirrored at the coordinate origin.
The resistance reserve is increased according to the following equation
[fo_resist_up_circlezone, 1, en_US]
with
ZBreak Balance-point impedance = actual limit of the zone
Zr Set impedance (parameter Zr impedance reach) = radius of the base circle
α Set limit angle (parameter Angle for R-reserve) = angle below which the increased resis-
tance reserve takes effect
φsc Actual short-circuit angle = angle of the calculated short-circuit impedance
At the set limit angle α, the zone reach limit is therefore still on the impedance circle: because φsc = α, sin(α –
α) = 0, and thus ZBreak = Zr. If φsc is greater than the set limit angle α, then the impedance circle takes effect by
definition and the increase of the resistance reserve makes no sense and is ineffective. For smaller angles up
to -45°, the resistance reserve is increased by the expression sin(α – φsc), thus by sin(α) at φsc = 0°.
Load Range
If the impedance circle is used as an implicit pickup method, there is a danger on long, heavily loaded lines
that the load impedance may extend into the operate curves of the distance protection. In order to avoid
faulty pickups of the distance protection in case of high power transmission, you can adjust a load cutout
here. For operate curves with a high R-range, the load cutout excludes faulty pickups due to overload. For
other pickup methods, this load cutout is unnecessary since the distance zones are only enabled after a pickup
has taken place. In other words, the pickup in those cases distinguishes between load operation and short
circuit.
The load cutout cuts the section of the load impedance from the circular characteristic curves (Figure 6-145).
It also acts on the section of increased resistance reserve, as shown in the figure for the 1st zone. The shape of
the load cutout is determined by the load section Rload and the load-range angle φload. These values apply to all
zones.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 705
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_kreis-charakteristik-mit-lastk, 1, en_US]
Direction Determination
Since each zone can be set to forward, reverse, or non-directional, there are different (centrally
mirrored) direction-characteristic curves for forward and reverse. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. For such a zone, the entire trip region applies.
706 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether the distance-protection zone is blocked or not during the detection of a transformer inrush current.
NOTE
i If you have set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes, the minimum pickup and
operate time for this distance-protection zone is 1.5 power-system cycles even if no transformer inrush
current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if you really need
the blocking by Inrush-current detection.
NOTE
i The residual compensation factors set here will be valid and visible only if you have set the parameter
Zone-spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone. If you have set the parameter Zone-spec. residu.
comp. = no, the residual compensation factors set for the device apply.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 707
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Set the reach of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip without
delay. Set the time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its
operating time. For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading time increment.
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
s (length) 8.5 km
R1/s 0.15 Ω/km
X1/s 0.10 Ω/km
R0/s 0.83 Ω/km
X0/s 0.31 Ω/km
708 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[fo_zl_circlezone, 1, en_US]
If you set the first zone to 85 % of the line length, the following setting values result:
Primary:
Secondary:
EXAMPLE:
[dw_resistanzreserve-impedanzkreis-bei-freiltg, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-147 Resistance Reserve of the Impedance Circle for Overhead Lines
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 709
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Zr Set reach
ZL Line impedance
φline Line angle
Rarc Arc resistance
Zsc Short-circuit impedance
φsc Short-circuit angle
The resistance reserve Rarc in this case depends on the line angle and on the underreaching of the distance
zone that is to be tolerated. For a line angle of φline = 80° and 10 % underreaching, for example, the resistance
reserve is 30 % of the balance-point impedance.
The following table shows additional values for the resistance reserve at the impedance circle:
Line Angle φline Resistance Reserve Rarc for Tolerable Underreaching of
10 % 15 % 20 %
85° 36 % 45 % 53 %
80° 30 % 40 % 47 %
75° 26 % 35 % 42 %
70° 22 % 31 % 38 %
65° 19 % 27 % 35 %
60° 17 % 25 % 32 %
All percentage values relate to the balance-point impedance (= circle radius)
EXAMPLE:
710 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_kabelabg-mit-lichtbogenfehler-am-oertl-endverschluss, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-148 Outgoing Cable with Arc Fault at Local Sealing End
[dw_oertl-resistanzreserve-impedanzkreis-bei-kabel, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-149 Local Resistance Reserve of the Impedance Circle for Cables
EXAMPLE:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 711
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dw_bsp-eine-erhoehte-resistanzreserve-mit-erweiterung, 1, en_US]
This extension leads to an increased resistance reserve both in the vicinity of the breakdown limit and in the
vicinity of the installation location. The curvature of the extension curve in the X direction can determine an
overreaching. This overreaching can be tolerated within certain limits, however, because the breakdown limit
in any case normally has a 15 % reserve distance from the next station, that is from the end of the line.
There is no extension-induced overreaching for limit angles α (for example, parameter (_:113) Angle
for R-reserve for the 1st zone) of 45° or less. The greater the set value of α, the greater the possible
overreaching. The following figure qualitatively shows the shape of the operate curve for different angles α.
[dw_quali-verlauf-ausloesekennl-erhoeht-resistanzreserve, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-151 Qualitative Plot of the Operate Curve for Increased Resistance Reserve
Since the overreaching and the resistance reserve both depend on the line angle φline and on the set limit
angle α, a few reference values are listed in the following sections.
The resistance reserve for short-circuits through an arc near of the breakdown point is primarily relevant for
overhead lines. Select the limit angle α (for example, parameter (_:113) Angle for R-reserve for the
1st zone) so that a high resistance reserve goes into effect without impermissibly high overreaching.
Note the following:
• Do not set the parameter Angle for R-reserve to a value greater than the line angle.
712 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Otherwise, increased overreaching may occur in the event of arc faults. The following table shows the
conditions for some examples of the approximate overreaching caused by setting an increased resistance
reserve.
α Possible Overreaching Values Due to Arc Faults for a Line Angle of
90° 85° 80° 75° 70° 65° 60° 55° 50°
75° 10 % 11 % 12 % 14 % -37 -37 -37 -37 -37
70° 3% 4% 5% 7% 10 % -37 -37 -37 -37
65° 0% 0% 0% 0% 3% 7% -37 -37 -37
60° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 4% -37 -37
55° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 2% -37
50° 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 1%
As with the base circle, the level of the resistance reserve Rarc depends on the line angle and on the tolerable
underreaching of the distance zone (also see Figure 6-150). The following table shows the approximate
resistance reserve for tolerable underreaching of 15 %.
α Resistance Reserve Rarc for Tolerable Underreaching of 15 % at a Line Angle of
90° 85° 80° 75° 70° 65° 60° 55° 50°
75° 148 % 141 % 135 % 129 % -37 -37 -37 -37 -37
70° 137 % 131 % 125 % 120 % 116 % -37 -37 -37 -37
65° 125 % 118 % 112 % 108 % 105 % 102 % -37 -37 -37
60° 107 % 100 % 96 % 93 % 91 % 90 % 89 % -37 -37
55° -38 -38 59 % 86 % 71 % 73 % 75 % 77 % -37
50° -38 -38 -38 -38 -38 36 % 55 % 61 % 65 %
The resistance reserve in the near the breakdown point is not relevant for cables but rather the local resis-
tance reserve, that is for φsc = 0°. To avoid overreaching, do not set the parameter Angle for R-reserve
to a value greater than the line angle here either. The resistance reserve is derived from the R axis segment (X
= 0) of the expanded operate curve. The following table shows some values for various setting values of the
parameter Angle for R-reserve:
α Resistance Reserve Rarc for X = 0
65° 190 %
60° 186 %
55° 181 %
50° 176 %
45° 170 %
40° 164 %
35° 157 %
30° 150 %
25° 142 %
20° 134 %
15° 125 %
10° 117 %
All percentage values relate to the balance-point impedance (= circle radius)
For the higher zones, a resistance reserve lower than that for the 1st zone makes sense (relative to the
impedance reach in each case). To do this, adjust the parameter Angle for R-reserve to a lower value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 713
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Parameter: Kr and Kx
NOTE
i The parameters Kr and Kx are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameterZone-spec.
residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx
for the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp.
in DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
An example of calculation of the Kr and Kx parameters from line data can be found in the High voltage
overhead-line application example in chapter 6.6.15.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line .
NOTE
i The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-
spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
6.6.12.3 Settings
714 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 715
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.13.1 Description
The AREC zone works together with the Automatic reclosing function. In order for automatic reclosing
to be successful, short circuits on the entire transmission route to all line ends must be switched off at
the same time and with as little delay as possible. In addition, with distance protection, the AREC zone
may be functioning as an overreaching distance zone, or example, Zone Z1B, prior to automatic reclosing.
After automatic reclosing, the AREC zone is typically no longer in effect. For the relevant AREC cycle, short
circuits up to the breakdown point of the AREC zone can be switched off quickly (see following figure).
Before automatic reclosing, limited non-selectivity in favor of fast simultaneous disconnection is acceptable.
Automatic reclosing will be performed in any case. The normal stages of the distance protection (Z1, Z2, etc.)
are typically operated independently of the automatic reclosing function.
[dw_reichweite_ar_zone, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-152 Reach Control Before 1st Reclosure for Distance Protection
The automatic reclosing zone is available in the function library in DIGSI (in Line function group → Distance
protection → Zone types). If necessary you can insert the automatic reclosing zone into the Distance
protection function. The automatic reclosing zone can be controlled from the internal automatic reclosing
function and also externally via the automatic reclosing function type Operation with external automatic
reclosing function.
716 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Logic
[loarzo13-310112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
The automatic reclosing zone is an instance of controlled trip logic. You use the parameter Operate with
to select which distance zones will deliver the pickup information. If the selected distance zones have picked
up and a release from the automatic reclosing function is present, the automatic reclosing zone generates an
operate indication.
You use the parameter Effected by AR cycle to select the automatic reclosing cycle for the release of
tripping. If you wish to have a zone release in several automatic reclosing cycles, you must instantiate several
automatic reclosing zones and select a different automatic reclosing cycle for each zone. If the selected
automatic reclosing cycle is only parameterized for 1-pole tripping (indication (_:6601:308) AR only
after 1p. trip ), the automatic reclosing zone only trips if this operate indication leads to a 1-pole trip
command in the trip logic of the Circuit breakers function group.
The, both the 3-pole coupling via pickup or trip command and the handling of 2-pole phase-to-phase short
circuits are considered.
If the selected automatic reclosing cycle is parameterized for 1-pole operation and the parameter 1-pole
operate allowed is set to no , the automatic reclosing zone indicates Inactive .
If the function teleprotection with distance protection is present and in effect, you can block the automatic
reclosing zone with the parameter Blocked if 85-21 active . The AREC zone is active only if the
teleprotection with distance protection is not in effect, for example, with a communication failure. If the
teleprotection with distance protection is in effect, you achieve 100% selectivity through the teleprotection
method as distance protection only if the comprehensive AR zone is blocked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 717
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
718 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.13.3 Settings
Mode of Operation
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic
and one trip logic each. The pickup and trip logic generate the superordinate indications of the distance
protection.
General Pickup
In impedance pickup, the signal General is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the working area of
a zone. In the pickup methods I>, V, and V/Phi, the signal General is generated when a pickup condition is
met.
The signal General is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions,
for example, teleprotection scheme or automatic reclosing.
Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and output as indications.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 719
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[loanrdis-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Operate Logic
The operate signals of the distance zones are combined phase-selectively.
The 1-pole operate allowed parameter is used to specify whether the zone can execute 1-pole operate
or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole operate is allowed on overhead
lines.
If the device is capable of 1-phase operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set,
1-phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate
indication.
[loaus13p-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
6.6.15.1 Overview
This example describes the use of the distance protection for the protection of a 400 kV overhead-transmis-
sion line. For this example, the following is assumed:
720 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
• For this example, the following is assumed: In the function group Line, the function Distance protection
for grounded systems (3-pole trip) is selected.
• The distance protection operates with the Impedance pickup with load cutout pickup method.
• Global parameters of the Distance protection for grounded systems function (3-pole trip) (ANSI 21)
NOTE
Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with line 1 to be protected.
[dwplanab-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Time-Grading Chart
The following figure shows the time-grading chart for the application example:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 721
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwstaffp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection works with four time-graded distance zones. The distance zones have the following
function:
NOTE
i If you use an application template, the numbering of the stages of the distance protection is Z1, Z1B, Z3,
and Z4. If you load the function Distance protection from the DIGSI 5 library, the numbering of the stages
is Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4.
The quadrilateral characteristics of the zones are shown in the R-X plane in Figure 6-158. The setting instruc-
tions for the parameters of the zones can be found in Chapters 6.6.15.6 Setting Notes for Zone Z1 through
6.6.15.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 .
722 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Power-System Data
The following system data and line parameters apply to the application example:
Settings Value
Power-system Phase-to-phase rated system voltage 400 kV
data Power frequency 50 Hz
Maximum positive-sequence system source impedance (10 + j 100) Ω
Maximum zero-sequence system source impedance (25 + j 200) Ω
Minimum positive-sequence system source impedance (1 + j 10) Ω
Minimum zero-sequence system source impedance (2.5 + j 20) Ω
Maximum ratio of remote infeed / local infeed(I remote/I local) 3
Transducer Voltage-transformer ratio (TV, LINE) 380 kV/100 V
Current-transformer ratio (TI) 1000 A/1 A
Current-transformer data 5PR20, 20 VA, Pi = 3 VA
Current-transformer connecting cable 2.5 mm2, 50 m
TI/TV for impedance conversion 0.2632
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 723
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Settings Value
Line data Line 1 length 80 km
Maximum load current 250% of full load
Minimum operating voltage 85% of rated voltage
Character convention for power flow Export = negative
Full-load apparent power (S) 600 MVA
Line 1 positive-sequence impedance per km Z1 (0.025 + j 0,21) Ω/km
Line 1 - Zero-sequence system impedance per km Z0 (0.13 + j 0.81) Ω/km
Line 2 - Total positive-sequence impedance (3.5 + j 39.5) Ω
Line 2 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (6.8 + j 148) Ω
Line 3 - Total positive-sequence impedance (1,5 + j 17,5) Ω
Line 3 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (7.5 + j 86.5) Ω
Maximum fault resistance, 250 Ω
Unfavorable power factor under full load 0.9
Tower data Average tower base resistance 15 Ω
Grounding conductor 60 mm2 steel
Distance: Phase-to-tower/phase-to-ground (mid-span) 3m
Distance: phase-to-phase 5m
Circuit Breaker Trip pickup time 60 ms
Operate time 70 ms
Based on the source and line impedance, the minimum fault-current levels can be calculated as follows:
[fofiklg1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 3-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal Sum of synchronous source impedance and line impedance (since only the magnitude of the current
= should be calculated, only the magnitude of the impedance is relevant)
For a 3-pole short circuit at the end of the line, Ztotal is calculated as follows:
[fofztt3p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thus for 3-phase faults without fault resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:
[fofi3pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 1-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal 1/3 (sum of the positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence source as well as line impe-
= dance)
724 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[fofztt1p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thus for single-phase faults without fault resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:
[fofi1pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 1-phase short circuits is taken into consideration, Ztotal is calculated as follows:
[fofi1prf-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For 1-phase short circuits with high fault resistance, the minimum fault current is:
[fofi1pir-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofinelg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 725
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The Neutral point parameter allows you to set the type of the neutral point grounding. In the example
application, the system neutral point is grounded.
[fofxstek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[foflwink-290411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fof1rerl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value for Kx is calculated as follows from the line data:
[fofdxexl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i For other applications, you can overwrite the residual compensation factors in distance zones set here with
local settings.
726 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
6.6.15.4 Setting Notes for Distance Protection for Grounded Systems – General Settings
Set the following settings under General in the function Distance protection for grounded systems. The
setting values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.
[dwlwpoly-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 727
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
In the example application, the system is grounded. For grounded systems, the combination of the criteria
3I0> and V0> is a very reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one another. For
a weak infeed, the zero-sequence current is low and the zero-sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the
conditions are reversed. Set the parameter Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0.
[fou0bere-011010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
728 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwzverte-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-160 Impedance Distribution for 2-Phase Ground Faults with Fault Resistance
The influence of the load (remote infeed and load angle) can increase or reduce the rotation of the measured
fault resistances (see Figure 6-160). The leading phase-to-ground loop tends to produce an overreach. For this
reason, set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase for the application
example. In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the
internal fault loop, the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g must be set to ph-gnd only or all
for this application. To avoid overreach, you must reduce the radius and/or modify the zone inclination (alpha
angle).
Load Cutout
You can configure the load cutout separately for phase-to-phase loops and phase-to-ground loops with the
following parameters:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 729
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The load cutout is set separately for phase-to-ground loops and phase-to-phase loops. Since there is no
restraint current in the load, load conditions cannot lead to a ground pickup. In the event of a 1-pole tripping
of neighboring circuits, there may simultaneously be a ground pickup and an increased load current. For these
cases, the load cutout must be set for the ground characteristic. The smallest load impedance is calculated as
follows:
[formnalg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The minimum operating voltage is 85 % of the rated voltage and the maximum load current is 250 % of the
full-load apparent power (see Table 6-4).
[foumnmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The primary minimum load impedance (parameter R load cutout (ph-ph)) can thus be calculated as
follows:
[formnpri-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The secondary setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows:
730 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[formnsek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the following step, you will determine the opening angle of the load cutout for phase-to-phase loops.
The largest angle the load impedance can assume results from the largest angle between the operating
voltage and load current. Since the load current ideally has the same phase as the voltage, the difference is
given by the power factor cos φ. The largest angle of the load impedance results from the least favorable,
smallest power factor. For this calculation, the power factor for full-load conditions must be used, since under
light-load conditions the reactive power flow can dominate. The load impedance under these conditions is
not close to the set impedance range. According to Table 6-4, the least favorable power factor under full-load
conditions is 0.9. The maximum load angle can thus be calculated as follows:
[fophlmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-ph) is 26°.
In this example, there is no distinction drawn between the maximum loads for phase-to-phase activation
and phase-to-ground activation. Under this assumption, you can set the load cutout parameters for phase-to-
ground loops to the same values. The setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-g) is 23.8 Ω,
the setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-g) is 26°.
Parameter: X reach
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 731
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
only cover the fault resistance at the fault location. For the setting of Zone 1, arc faults are taken into
consideration. For this reason, the arc resistance must be calculated with the following equation:
[foz1rlbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The arc voltage (Varc) is calculated using the following rule of thumb:
[foz1ulbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The rule of thumb is a very conservative estimate. The estimated value Rarc is larger than the actual value. The
arc is pulled into a curve due to thermal and magnetic forces. Thus the length of the arc (Iarc) is greater than
the distance between the phases (phase-to-phase). As an estimate, we assume that larc is twice the distance
between the phases. When calculating the setting value, first calculate the largest value of Rarc. To do so,
you must first calculate Rarc with the smallest value of the fault current (calculated in section 6.6.15.2 Block
Diagram and Power-System Data ):
[foz1rbwr-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
By adding a safety reserve of 20 %, the secondary minimum setting value can be calculated as follows: The
division by 2 is necessary because Rarc appears in the loop measurement, while the setting value corresponds
to the phase impedance or positive-sequence impedance.
[foz1rsst-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired coverage of arc resis-
tances. To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased – depending on
the X reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 Ω. For protection of an overhead line on the high-voltage or
very high-voltage range, the following rule of thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-ph) for Zone
1.
0.8 · X reach < R (ph-ph) < 2.5 · X reach
In this example, the lower limit applies. The secondary setting value for the parameter R (ph-ph) can be
calculated as follows:
R(ph-ph) = 0.8 ⋅ 3.537 = 2.830 Ω
Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in Zone 1 to 2.830 Ω.
Parameter: R (ph-g)
732 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwmaster-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 733
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Remote infeed (I remote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance.
The additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-163). To
compensate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio Iremote/Ilocal. In Table 6-4, this value is
specified as 3. The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the faulty loop
is thus:
[foz1rtfx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground (see
Table 6-4):
Varc = 2500 V· larc
Varc = 2500 V· 2· 3 m = 15 kV
When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc using
the smallest fault current (calculated in chapter 6.6.15.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data ):
[foz1rbmx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For ground faults, the total resistance – that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF – must be covered. By adding a safety
reserve of 20 %, the secondary setting value R (ph-g) can be calculated as follows: The division by the factor
(1 + kr) is necessary because Rarc and RTF appear in the loop measurement, while the setting value corresponds
to the phase impedance or positive-sequence impedance.
[foz1rsku-250309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired resistance coverage.
To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased – depending on the X
reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 Ω. For protection of an overhead line, the following rule of
thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-g) for the Zone 1:
[foz1rez1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
734 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
NOTE
i The lower limit is the same as for phase-to-phase faults. This ensures fast tripping. The upper limit corre-
sponds to the loop range. This prevents overreach.
In this example, the lower limit applies. The setting value for the parameter R (ph-g) can be calculated for
Zone 1 as follows:
R (ph-g) = 0.8· 3.537 = 2.83 Ω
[dwalphae-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-164 Transmission Angle for the Alpha-Angle Setting (Parameter: Zone Inclination)
To determine the setting value for the zone inclination, the least favorable practical case is assumed.
First, calculate the maximum transmission angle (computer simulation). For the example application, the
maximum transmission angle is 35° (see Table 6-4). The R/X ratio of Zone 1 is 0.8 (2.830/3.537 = 0.8). From
Figure 6-165, use these values to read off the alpha angle. For the example application, the point is valid in
the middle between 30° and 40°. This gives an alpha angle of 15°. Set the parameter to Zone-inclination
angle = 15°.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 735
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
[dwklalph-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Zone Z1B
In the application example, Zone Z1B operates as an overreaching zone for phase A. Use Zone Z1B for
cooperation with the Automatic reclosing (AREC) and/or Teleprotection scheme functions. These functions
process the output signals (pickup indications) of Zone Z1B. In the example application, Zone Z1B does not
trip independently, but rather only via the AREC and Teleprotection scheme functions. The independent
tripping of Zone Z1B is suppressed. To do this, set the time delays of Zone Z1B to ∞.
Parameter: X reach
736 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Zone Z1B must be set to overreach on Line 1. The minimum setting is 120 % of the line reactance. If the line
is not extremely long, a setting of 150 % of more is used in practice. For this application, a line of medium
length, a range of 150 % is selected:
X reach = 1.5 · XLine1
X reach = 1.5 · 80· 0.21 = 25.2 Ω (primary)
The secondary setting value of the X reach of Zone Z1B can be calculated as follows:
X reach = 25.2 Ω · 0.2632 = 6.633 Ω
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
Parameter: R (ph-g)
[foz1brgl-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the example application, the lower limit applies. The setting value of the R (ph-g) of Zone Z1B can be
calculated as follows:
[foz1brsk-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 737
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Parameter: X reach
[foz2xrch-310309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
[fo1_rll_z3, 1, en_US]
[fo2_rll_z3, 1, en_US]
738 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Parameter: R (ph-g)
[fo1_rle_z3, 1, en_US]
[fo2_rle_z3, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 739
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward, reverse or
non-directional. In the application example, Z4 is used as a non-directional backup stage. For zone 4, set
the parameter Directional mode = non-directional.
Parameter: X reach
[foz3xrch-130509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
[foz3rlmn-020409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With these assumptions, the calculated setting value R (ph-ph)min ensures fault detection in Zone Z4. The
upper limit is determined by restrictions in reach balance. The following apply:
R (ph-ph) < 6· X reach
The X reach of zone Z4 is 17.782 Ω (see section 6.6.15.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 Parameter: X range).
The upper limit is thus 106.69 Ω. This extends well into the load range (see Parameter R load sector (L-E)
in section 6.6.15.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method ). Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in zone Z4 to twice the
minimum value. This is a safe compromise.
R (ph-ph) = R (ph-ph)min· 2
R (ph-ph) = 13.16 · 2 = 26.32 Ω
In Zone Z4, set the parameter R (ph-ph) = 26.32 Ω.
Parameter: R (ph-g)
740 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
Set the delay time for zone Z4 according to the grading schedule (see Figure 6-157 and Table 6-3). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.75 s.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 741
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
• Is used as a backup protection for the transformer and the generator in the block units of power stations
• Functions as backup protection in the event of energy recovery to faults in the upstream electrical power
system beyond a transformer
The Impedance protection function is used in protection function groups which provide current and voltage
measurement values.
The Impedance protection function is preconfigured at the factory with the function block (FB) General and
one zone. A maximum of 4 zones can be operated simultaneously in the function. The zones are structured
identically.
The protection function is structured in that way that the settings in the FB General are valid for all zones.
[dw_strimpedanceprot, 3, en_US]
6.7.3 Description
• Impedance is transferred to the side to be measured using the quadrant of the transformer ratio.
• For star-delta transformers, an opposite phase rotation occurs in the positive-sequence and negative-
sequence system, depending on the vector group. This changes the fault situation on the other side. A
2‑phase short circuit on the star side appears as a 3-phase short circuit with different current distribution
on the delta side (see Figure 6-167).
Since star-delta transformers do not permit the zero-sequence system to be transferred, a 1-phase
ground fault on the star side appears as a 2-phase short circuit on the delta side (see Figure 6-168).
• In the case of auto transformers and transformers grounded on both sides in the star-star connection,
measurement through the transformer is possible. Here, distance protection for lines can be used
without any problems.
742 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_ratio-2pol-ifault, 2, en_US]
[dw_ratio-1pol-fault, 2, en_US]
The changed measurand mapping also leads to a different impedance mapping. Figure 6-169 and
Figure 6-170 show, for example, for a 2-phase or 1-phase short circuit on the star side, the resulting phasors
on the delta side. To simplify it, the transformer ratio was assumed to be 1.
[dw_imp-2pol-short-ciruit, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 743
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_imp-1pol-short-ciruit, 2, en_US]
With a 2-phase short circuit, the phase-to-ground impedance of the phase corresponds to the double phase
current of the actual fault impedance via the transformer. The impedance is correctly measured. All other
impedances are measured as considerably larger. Subtracting the currents results in an infinite impedance
measured value for the C-A loop.
A 1-phase ground fault results in the smallest impedance value based on the calculation with phase-to-phase
voltages (in the example, C-A). Because the zero-sequence system cannot be transferred via a star-delta
transformer, an impedance is measured that is too large by the amount of the zero-sequence impedances
(transformer, line). The actual fault location is seen as being farther away.
With a 3-phase short circuit, the impedance measurement for all measuring loops is correct.
The following table summarizes the results of the impedance measurement for a star-delta transformer:
Table 6-5 Fault Mapping and Measuring Errors during the Impedance Measurement of a Star-Delta
Transformer
744 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[lo_dis-impedance-protection, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 745
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[lo_block_imp, 3, en_US]
Loop Selection
The function Impedance protection can be used in electrical power systems and plants with different neutral
points. With the Loop selection parameter, you control which parameters influence the loop release.
In power systems with effective neutral point grounding – solidly or low-impedance grounded neutral point
– all impedance loops (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops) can work parallel to each other. When
all loops are working in parallel, the loop release is controlled by the parameter Min. phase-current
thresh (see following figure).
Figure 6-173 Effective Parameter for Loop Release for All Loops
In power systems with a non-effective neutral point grounding – isolated, grounded, or high-impedance
grounded neutral point – the control for the loop selection is necessary to avoid an overfunction, for example,
a ground fault. The loop selection is controlled by the Current-dependent parameter. The following figure
shows which parameter controls the loop selection.
746 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
In case of a ground fault, the voltage collapsed – ideally to 0 – and the phase-to-ground loop measures
either a small impedance or 0 Ω. The phase-selective overcurrent detection releases the loops (parameter
Overcurrent threshold). The undervoltage seal-in (parameter Undervoltage seal in) keeps the
overcurrent erect. The undervoltage seal-in is necessary for use in power plants when an exciting transformer
is connected to the generator bus. During a near short circuit, the excitation voltage collapses and results
in a decreased synchronous generated voltage. Thereby the fault current sinks below the rated current and
thereby the current threshold value (parameter Overcurrent threshold). The parameter V-seal-in
threshold monitors the positive-sequence voltage. The undervoltage seal-in drops out when the threshold
value V-seal-in threshold is topped or the undervoltage seal-in time (parameter Duration of V-
seal-in time) runs out.
• In the event of 2-phase pickup, an associated phase-to-phase loop with the applicable phase-to-phase
voltage is used for the impedance calculation.
• In the event of a 3-phase pickup, the loop selection is dependent on the ratio of the current amplitudes of
the phases to one another.
The following table shows the measuring-loop selection:
Pickup Measuring Loops
1-phase A Phase-to-ground A-gnd
B B-gnd
C C-gnd
2-phase A, B Phase-to-phase A-B
B, C B-C
C, A C-A
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 747
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
Impedance Measurement
From the sampled values of the phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages, the fundamental phasors
are determined per period using an FIR filter (FIR = Finite Impulse Response). The impedances are calculated
from the fundamental phasors. By using the frequency-tracking sampled values, the impedance is measured
using another frequency range. This is advantageous for island networks or block-unit power plants, for
example, for start-up processes.
There is an impedance measuring element available for each of the 6 possible phase loops A-gnd, B-gnd,
C-gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impedances are calculated using the current
cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the measurands of the current fault condition.
The impedance for phase-to-phase loops is calculated as follows:
[fo_loop_ZLL, 2, en_US]
[fo_loop_ZLE, 2, en_US]
Mode of Operation
If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current thresh. All released impedance loops are
calculated.
To release phase-to-ground loops, it is sufficient if the corresponding phase current exceeds the Min.
phase-current thresh. For phase-to-phase loops, both phase currents and the loop current must exceed
the Min. phase-current thresh.
There is no special ground-fault detection, such as distance protection for lines.
If the released impedance loop(s) lie in one zone, the Impedance protection function generates a pickup
indication with loop information. At the same time, a pickup indication in the picked up zone occurs with
specification of the relevant phase and direction. The direction is subsequently determined for all picked up
impedance loops and the associated time delay started. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals
of the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the function.
Direction Determination
The direction is determined either using a stored prefault voltage or negative-sequence system variables. If
the measured negative-sequence voltage or the negative-sequence current exceed 10 % of the rated values
of the device, the variables of the negative-sequence system are used exclusively. For the direction decision,
the angle between the negative-sequence current I2 and the negative-sequence voltage V2 is evaluated.
Figure 6-175 shows the defined directional areas on impedance level.
748 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
For 3-phase symmetrical short circuits, there is no negative-sequence system. In this case, the memory voltage
is used. If the memory voltage is not available either, for example when switching onto a fault, all zones –
regardless of their parameterized direction – pick up and generate an operate indication after the time delay
has expired.
Optionally, you can link the Impedance protection function with the Instantaneous tripping at switch
onto fault function (see chapter 6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes). This enables the selected Impedance-
protection zones to trip without delay.
[dw_ritgkl, 2, en_US]
Inrush-Current Detection
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the zones against
tripping due to transformer inrush currents.
Impedance Polygon
The quadrilateral operate curve (impedance polygon) in the zone is a rectangle in the R-X plane. The polygon
is defined by the parameters X reach (ph-g), X reach (ph-ph), R reach (ph-g), and R reach
(ph-ph) and the Directional mode. This means that, in special situations, a different setting is possible
for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground loops.
To stabilize the quadrilateral limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies
within a polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions. The following figure shows an example with
2 non-directional zones:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 749
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_klpoly-impedanceprot, 2, en_US]
Sample Configuration
The following figure is an example of how the Impedance protection function is used at a feeder point in a
medium-voltage power system.
750 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_example-protection, 1, en_US]
The medium-voltage power system is fed on the high-voltage side with a YNd5 transformer. In addition, there
is an infeed that enables energy recovery to faults occurring on the high-voltage side.
The protection device installed on the delta side of the transformer functions as distance protection, which is
the backup protection for the medium-voltage power system.
In addition to distance protection, the protection device on the delta side functions as impedance protection,
which looks in the transformer direction. The power system on the high-voltage side is a meshed system and
also contains distance protection devices.
In the following, you can find recommendations for the protection setting values and a view of the setting
problems. Figure 6-178 shows a possible setting approach.
Zone TZ 1 should be coordinated with the protection system and delayed by approx. 100 ms. The delay makes
preferred tripping possible due to the differential protection and a dropout of the zone.
Zone TZ 2 is intended as a directional reserve stage, whose time must, without fail, be coordinated with the
protection system. At the same time, this stage can be used if, when switching the transformer on, it switches
onto a fault.
In exchange, the function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault must be present and set accordingly
(see function description in chapter 6.52 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 751
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_config-staffel, 1, en_US]
Line (transformed to
20 kV):
The sample calculation clearly shows that the line reactance can be disregarded compared to transformer
reactance due to the quadratic transformation.
To avoid overfunction, select the following setting values for the 1st zone (TZ 1)
X1 = 0.9 ⋅ XTr = 0.9 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 0.864 Ω
For the 2nd zone, select the double transformer impedance and set the time delay correspondingly high.
X2 = 2 ⋅ XTr = 2 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 1.92 Ω.
With the selected setting, Zone TZ 1 does not protect the transformer completely, especially if you take into
account the incorrect measurement for a 1-phase short circuit.
If you want to achieve a reliable tripping for all fault situations (see Table 6-5), the setting value must extend
far beyond the transformer. One possible strategy for the time grading is a setting value of approx. 1.5 XTr.
You must guarantee the selectivity using the Time criterion. The following figure shows the time-grading
chart:
752 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
[dw_grading-x1-xtr, 3, en_US]
The zone range in the R direction must take into account the fault resistance on the fault location. The
fault resistance is added to the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault
resistance is, for example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases. For the zone range
in the R direction, you do not have to take the fault resistance on the upper-voltage side and the line resis-
tance into account. These are also divided by the transformer-ratio quadrant and can be mostly disregarded.
However, fault resistances on the upper-voltage side during high-current feed on the upper-voltage side
also impact the reactance and resistance measurement on the undervoltage side. This impact is unavoidable
and can result in a short circuit with fault resistance on the upper-voltage side not being detected by the
undervoltage side until the high-current feed on the upper-voltage side is cleared. Do not set the reserve
resistance any larger than necessary. The setting can be adjusted to the maximum load in the direction of the
line section to be protected, in other words, in the transformer direction. The setting value for the R range
must be lower than the resistance under maximum load conditions (RL max). For a sufficient distance to the
load range, Siemens recommends a value of about 20 % to 50 % RL max. This means an incorrect measurement
is avoided by the apparent impedances (seeFigure 6-169 and Figure 6-170).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 753
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
NOTE
i The parameter (_:2311:102) Loop selection = All loops is visible only if you set the parameter
Min. phase-current thresh.
EXAMPLE:
The rated generator current is calculated as:
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
754 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
X range = 150 %
The primary setting value is calculated as follows:
Xprim = 150 %/100 % ⋅ ZKT = 1.5 ⋅ 0.96 Ω = 1.44 Ω (primary)
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
[fo_Xrange_sec, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 755
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
The rated transformer current is assumed as the rated load current. The current is 1443 A on the 20 kV side.
The smallest impedance measured under maximum load conditions (Zmax) is calculated as follows assuming
10 % undervoltage and 10 % overcurrent:
[fo_Zmax_trafo_RLE, 2, en_US]
For the R reach, 20 % ⋅ Zmax is specified. This means the primary setting value of the R reach (ph-g)
parameter is calculated as follows:
R reach (ph-g) = 0.2 ⋅ 6.55 Ω = 1.31 Ω
This value corresponds to approx. the X value so that you can select, as a practical setting, R range = X range.
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
[fo_r_range_sek, 2, en_US]
756 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-6 apply.
Set the range for phase-to-phase loops just like for phase-to-ground loops. This results in the following setting
values:
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 1.45 Ω (primary)
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 10.9 Ω (secondary)
6.7.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 757
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
758 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.7 Impedance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 759
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
Power-swing blocking
• Blocks the selected zones of the distance protection in case of power swings
• Detects 1-phase, 2-phase, and 3-phase short circuits during a power swing and then cancels the blocking
for the specific phase
• Does not generate tripping of the out-of-step condition; a separate out-of-step protection function is
available for this purpose
The Power-swing blocking function is a supplementary function to the distance protection. It only works if the
distance-protection function is activated. If a power swing is detected, power-swing blocking blocks the pickup
and tripping through the distance protection. Each distance-protection zone can be blocked separately.
The Power-swing blocking function is included in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and current
inputs. The process monitor delivers status information to the function regarding the protected object (open
poles in particular).
[dwpsdstr-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-180 Power-Swing Blocking Works Together with the Distance-Protection Function
Power-Swing Event
After dynamic events such as load jumps, short circuits, automatic reclosing functions, or switching opera-
tions, the generators exposed to the oscillations may have to respond to the new power balance of the
system. In case of power swings, the distance-protection function is fed with high compensating currents and
– especially at the electrical center – low voltages (Figure 6-181). Low voltages combined with high currents
760 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
represent apparently small impedances that can lead to tripping by the distance protection. Power-swing
blocking prevents tripping by the distance protection in case of power swings.
[dwpendel-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Power swings are 3-phase symmetrical events. As a rule, a certain symmetry of the measurands can be
assumed. Power swings may also occur during unsymmetrical events, such as short circuits or during a 1-pole
dead time. For this reason, power-swing detection is structured to use 3 measuring systems. One measuring
system is available for each phase, which warrants phase-selective power-swing detection. If short circuits
occur, the power swing detected in the respective phase will be discarded, which enables the distance-protec-
tion function to initiate selective tripping.
Functionality
In order to detect the power swing, the rate of change will be adjusted to the impedance phasor.
[dwzvekto-220311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-182 Impedance Vectors During a Power Swing and During a Short Circuit
In order to warrant all functions of the power-swing detection are stable and secure, without the risk of
overfunction during a short circuit, the following measurement criteria are used:
• Trajectory monotony:
During a power swing, the measured impedance indicates a directional path of movement. This path
occurs precisely if within the measurement window one of the components ΔR and ΔX at the most
indicates a change of directions. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it causes a directional change in ΔR as
well as in ΔX within the measured value window.
• Trajectory continuity:
The spacing of 2 consecutive impedance values will clearly indicate a change of ΔR or ΔX during a power
swing. If a short circuit occurs, the impedance vector skips to the short-circuit impedance and remains
motionless.
• Trajectory uniformity:
During a power swing the ratio between 2 consecutive changes of ΔR or ΔX do not overshoot a
threshold. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it will cause an erratic movement since the impedance
phasor abruptly skips from load impedance to short-circuit impedance.
The indication of a power swing is triggered when the impedance vector enters the PPOL power swing
measuring range (see the following figure) and the criteria for power-swing detection are met. With the
quadrilateral characteristic, the APOL pickup range is composed of the largest quantitative values set for R and
X of all active zones. The power swing measuring range has a minimum distance ZDiffof 5 Ω (at ΙN = 1 A) or 1
Ω (at ΙN = 5 A) in all directions from the pickup range. The same applies to the MHO characteristic. The power
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 761
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
swing measuring range also has a distance of 5 Ω (at IΙN = 1 A) or 1 Ω (at IΙN = 5 A) from the largest pickup
circuit. The power swing measuring range has no load trapezoid cut-out.
[arbeitsbereich-21062010, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-183 Operating Range for the Power-Swing Detection for Polygonal and MHO Characteristic
Figure 6-184 shows a simplified logic diagram of the power-swing detection function. The measurement
is executed per phase. A power swing signal ((_:55) Block zones) will be generated if the measured
impedance is inside the power swing measuring range (PPOL). If a power-swing detection signal is initiated, it
remains active until a short circuit occurs or the power swing has decayed. The power-swing detection can be
blocked via the binary input >Block function.
762 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
[lopendel-190413-01.tif, 3, en_US]
With the Max. blocking time parameter, you can place a time limit on the blocking effect of the power-
swing blocking. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blocking can be eliminated when using systems
that are slowly drifting apart.
When the impedance enters the power swing measuring range PPOL, the maximum blocking time will be
started. When the impedance exits the power swing measuring range PPOL while the maximum blocking time
is running, the maximum blocking time will be reset.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 763
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
Logic
[lo_psd_log, 3, en_US]
The distance protection delivers information about the loops contained in its zones to the power-swing
blocking. If the power-swing blocking detects power swings in the activated loops, it delivers phase-selective
information about the zones to be blocked to the distance protection. The actual blocking is carried out in the
distance protection.
764 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
6.8.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 765
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
To enable selective and non-delayed fault clearance of all faults, on the entire line length, information
exchange with the remote line end is applied. You can implement teleprotection using binary inputs and
outputs (transmission and reception contacts) or using a digital communication connection.
The Teleprotection schemes is used in the protection function group Line in combination with the function
Distance protection.
The functions shown in the following figure are available:
[dw_fkt-line_DIS_Mitnahme-Freigabe-Blockierverfahren, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-187 shows the function control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the distance protection and generates the associated
transmission signal for transmission to the other line end.
The receive signal from the other line end is optionally coupled via a binary input, via the unblock logic or via
the communication. For protection of the ends of multi-terminal lines, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.
and Rec.unblk.sig are available multiple times, once for each removed line end.
766 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
The distance zone parameterized for the teleprotection scheme provides the pickup information. This pickup
information is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is fulfilled,
the teleprotection scheme creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results from the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.
[lo_struct_teleprot-wth_des-protec, 4, en_US]
In the following, the individual function blocks for the teleprotection scheme are described.
For more information, see 2.3 Function Control.
For the coupling of receive signals from the opposite end, the receive block types Rec. bin.sig.,
Rec.unblk.sig and Rec. PI are available. The teleprotection scheme described below can be operated
with the suitable receive blocks if required.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 767
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is not
possible.
[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via binary signals. If a teleprotection scheme is
configured with a total of 3 ends, for example, 2 function blocks Rec. bin.sig. are required.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. The receipt signals can thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as
individual signals.
For common-phase teleprotection, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective teleprotection
the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-187.
[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
768 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
The teleprotection scheme can optionally be used with the unblock method. The difference to the conven-
tional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.
The unblocking method is preferred under the following conditions:
• If the signal is transmitted via PLC (power-line carrier transmission) through the line that is to be
protected
• If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so great that reception by the
other line end is not ensured.
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during
an external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective teleprotection to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A, >Blocking
phs B, and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency
is received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the
unblock logic. During phase-selective teleprotection, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 receipt signals
>Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B, and >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently, the
blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective teleprotection, the 3 blocking
signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B and >Blocking phs C are used. With this, the signal
>Unblocking general (or the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B, and
>Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the receipt of the trip logic of the teleprotection scheme is
approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be trans-
mitted no longer reaches the other line end. In this state, both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded to
the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is
generated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-187.
[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital). Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Rec. PI is required at a time. The number and
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 769
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
the identity of devices participating in the teleprotection scheme for the protection of the line configuration
are set by using the configuration of the protection interface, see 3.6.5.4 Configuration of the Protection
Interface in DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i When operating the following functions when communicating over a protection interface, you will need a
minimum bandwidth of 512 kbit/s.
6.9.4.1 Description
[dwtpsmit-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-191 Function Block: Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip (85-21 Perm. underr.)
If a fault occurs within the underreaching zone - this is usually zone Z1 for the distance protection - a
transfer-trip signal is sent to the remote end. The receive signal leads to accelerated tripping in the device at
the remote end.
770 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpssem-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Sending takes place upon pickup in the distance zone selected as a send condition. You can use the
(_:5671:101) Send prolongation parameter to compensate the differences in the pickup times at
both line ends.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per communi-
cation direction. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or
phase-jointly as individual signals (general).
If the internal indication Echo confirmation from the trip logic is present, the sending logic also generates
the Send signal. If, with a present receive signal, an Operate with parameterized zone has picked up, the
Echo Confirmation raises. Even if the Send zone is set below the operate zone, a definite tripping is
possible for all line ends.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 771
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpsalm-110611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection scheme with which the distance protection works together.
If a receive signal is present, the zone set through the parameter Operate with will be released for tripping.
The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5671:102) Operate delay
(1-phase); for multi-phase faults, use the parameter (_:5671:103) Operate delay (multi-ph.).
If the permissive underreach transfer trip is used to protect a line configuration with more than 2 ends, the
receive signals from all line ends are linked with OR.
A trip signal results from a simultaneous presence of the distance zone pickup, the release signal, and the
time sequence. The (_:5671:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used by the trip logic to
allow 1-pole tripping in 1-pole/3-pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have
3-pole trip.
For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receive signal once received is retained until the distance zone
pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the corresponding time
delay releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote end is no longer
present.
772 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
The functions are described in more detail in 6.14.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function).
6.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip, General
The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration in the
distance protection function. The selection text for the underreaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1.
6.9.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via an Extended Measuring
Range (Distance Protection with Underreaching and Grading-Time Shortening)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault within the underreaching zone. If
the fault is detected there within the overreaching zone, the receive signal leads to tripping.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 773
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsmeb-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-194 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Extended Measuring Range
You can configure the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via an extended measuring range with the
following settings:
Transmit with
Operate with
6.9.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup (Distance
Protection with Underreaching and Remote Tripping with Release)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. If the
distance-protection function picks up at the remote end, the signal received there leads to tripping.
774 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsmua-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-195 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup
You can configure the permissive underreach transfer trip via pickup with the following settings:
6.9.4.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direct Permissive Underreach Transfer trip
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. The
signal received there leads directly to the tripping.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 775
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsdim-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-196 Function Diagram for the Direct Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
6.9.4.6 Settings
776 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.5.1 Description
[dwtpsver-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a fault occurs within the overreaching zone, for example zone Z1B for the distance protection, a send signal
is sent to the opposite end. In the distance protection device, the received signal leads to accelerated tripping
if the fault is also detected in the forward direction.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 777
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpssmv-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Sending takes place upon pickup in the selected overreaching zone or optionally upon pickup in the forward
direction. The send signal can be extended by a parameterizable time (_:5701:101) Send prolonga-
tion if the protection has already issued a trip command. This allows for the release of the other line end
even if the short circuit there only leads to pickup after the short-circuit current at the opposite end has been
deactivated. With this, pickup differences between the cable ends and signal delays can be considered.
If needed, the transmission signal can be delayed with (_:5701:102) Send delay.
Transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security against false signals caused
by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on parallel lines). No transmission
signal is sent in the event of transient blocking.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive scheme for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transmitted per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-jointly
as individual signals (general).
Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description
778 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[lotpsavv-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection scheme with which the distance protection works together.
If a receive signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5701:141) Operate with will be
released for tripping. The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5701:103)
Operate delay (1-phase). For multi-phase faults, use the parameter (_:5701:104) Operate delay
(multi-ph.).
The parameter (_:5701:11) 1-pole operate allowed can be used by the trip logic to allow 1-pole
tripping in 1-pole/3-pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive scheme for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the
reception signals from all line ends are combined for the tripping with AND.
A trip signal results from simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the release signal and the
time sequence. For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the
distance zone pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the
corresponding time delay releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote
end is no longer present.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
scheme. It ensures additional security from false signals caused by a change of direction after disconnection of
external faults (for example on parallel lines).
Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 779
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
• For the trip of the cable end with a strong infeed, the echo function can be made effective with a weak
infeed.
• In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the teleprotection scheme has a function
for trip with weak infeed.
Related Topics
6.14.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function)
However, the selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration
in the distance protection function. The selection text for the overreaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1B.
[dw_Dis-prot-vergleich-200314-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
780 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.5.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme (Distance Protection
with Overreaching and Release)
A send signal is sent to the remote end in the event of a fault in the overreaching zone. If the fault is also
detected there in the overreaching zone, the received signal leads to tripping.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 781
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpssiv-010311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-201 Function Diagram of the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme
You can use the following settings to configure the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme:
782 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsriv-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:
6.9.5.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional Unblocking Method (Distance Protection with
Overreaching and Unblocking)
The directional unblocking method corresponds with the permissive overreach transfer trip with a preceding
function block Rec.unblk.sig. Thus, compared to the permissive overreach transfer trip, a tripping is also
possible without a release signal from the opposite end. The directional unblocking method cannot be
operated with a communication via a protection interface owing to the way it functions.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 783
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwtpsubl-010311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional unblocking method:
6.9.5.6 Settings
784 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 785
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.6.1 Description
[dwtpsblo-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the protection function recognizes a fault in the reverse direction, the blocking signal is sent to the opposite
end. If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving line end, it generates the trip
signal after a short time delay.
[lotpssbl-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The blocking signal is generated on the activation of the distance protection in the reverse direction or
non-directionally. The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5731:101)
Send prolongation, you can extend the blocking signal. In this way, the opposite end can continue to be
blocked, even if the fault has already been cleared locally.
The blocking signal can also be sent immediately with jump detection (parameter (_:5731:102) Send
with jump). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal,
you can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the
786 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
distance protection detects a fault in the forward direction, the blocking signal is stopped immediately and the
indication Stop is generated.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking method for double faults can be improved
on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direction. Trans-
mission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or phase-jointly as
individual signals.
Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description
[lotpsaub-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection scheme with which the distance protection works together.
If a receive signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:5731:140) Operate with
will be released for tripping. The trip of the blocking method must be delayed due to possible differences in
the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. The time delay is set
with the (_:5731:107) Release delay parameter.
Tripping can also be delayed . For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under Operate delay (1-phase); for
multi-phase faults, use the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.).
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the
internal release signal and the time sequences.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 787
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
No release of the trip occurs for an upcoming reception signal. The trip is blocked so that an activation in the
selected overreaching zone in the forward direction does not quickly shut down the external fault at the
remote end.
If the blocking method for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the reception
signals from all cable ends are combined with OR.
The (_:5731:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-pole/3-
pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
• If the signal is transmitted with PLC39 through the protected line and if the attenuation of the transmis-
sion signal at the fault location is so large that reception from the other line end cannot be guaranteed.
• For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the protection function detects a fault in the backward direction, a blocking signal is generated. If the
other line end does not receive a blocking signal, the protection function trips in the event of a fault in the
overreaching zone. For this, the overreaching zone must be set to approximately 120 % of the line length. In
the case of multi-terminal lines, the overreach zone must extend over the longer line section, regardless of
whether or not an additional infeed is possible via the branching point. Since no release signal is required from
the opposite end, single infeed short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking method.
[dwtpsrib-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
788 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 789
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.6.3 Settings
790 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.7.1 Description
[dwtpsrwv-260613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If a fault occurs within the crossover zone and none of the subordinate protection devices transmits a blocking
signal, this will initiate tripping of reverse interlocking.
[loruever-260613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection scheme with which the distance protection works together.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 791
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
If a receive signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:14311:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under Operate delay (1-phase); for
multi-phase faults, use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the
internal release signal and the time sequences.
If a receiving signal is pending, tripping will be blocked in order to ensure that a pickup in the selected
crossover zone does not disconnect quickly the short circuit on the outbound line.
If the Reverse interlocking function is used with several receiving blocks, the receiving signals from all
receiving blocks will be linked with OR.
The (_:14311:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used by the trip logic to allow 1-pole
tripping in 1-pole/3-pole tripping devices. If the device is capable of only 3-pole tripping, the parameter
1-pole operate allowed does not apply and is not visible.
792 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
[dwrckver-180613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 793
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.7.3 Settings
794 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
6.9.8.1 Description
Transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals caused by a change of direction after discon-
nection of external faults, on parallel lines for example. The transient blocking is used for blocking and
permissive overreach transfer trips, but not for a permissive underreach transfer trip.
[lotpstrb-310511-01.tif, 3, en_US]
If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period Trans. blk. pickup delay. The Transient blocking signal has an
effect on send and trip logic of the permissive overreach transfer trips as well as on the trip logic of the
blocking method. After the elimination of the blocking criterion, the transient blocking will be maintained for
a set time Trans. blk. dropout delay. If a trip command is generated in the underreaching zone during
a transient blocking (signal Release Trip forward (DIS), the transient blocking time is triggered. In this way,
the blocking of the teleprotection in the event of an internal fault is prevented.
The teleprotection schemes for distance protection and ground-fault protection can affect one another. Use
the Trans. block. with parameter to set whether the transient blocking of the teleprotection scheme for
the ground-fault protection is to affect that of the distance protection. The reciprocal influence is advisable
if the teleprotection schemes for distance protection and ground-fault protection work with a common
communication channel.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 795
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
NOTE
i The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on
the parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 20 ms are
recommended.
796 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Universal Teleprotection with Distance Protection
The universal teleprotection with distance protection (85-21 Uni. scheme) include the same functional-
ities as described in 6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection. The difference is that all functionalities,
except the scheme 85-21 Rev. interlock., are compactly grouped together within the function 85-21
Uni. scheme. This can be an advantage if a switchover of the functionalities using settings changes is
desired.
Since there are no functional differences between the teleprotection scheme with distance protection, only
the special features are described in the following.
The function 85-21 Uni. scheme is used in the function group Line in combination with the function Distance
protection.
The functions shown in the following figure are available:
[dw_funct-line_universal, 1, en_US]
In addition to the individual teleprotection with distance protection schemes, the universal teleprotection
schemes contain the function blocks (FBs) General and Group indicat..
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 797
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Universal Teleprotection with Distance Protection
You will find the function 85-21 Uni. scheme in the DIGSI library under FG Line > Teleprotection scheme >
DIS universal scheme.
The following functionalities are preinstantiated when the function 85-21 Uni. scheme is instantiated:
• FB General
• FB Group indicat.
NOTE
i As most function blocks are deactivated following preinstantiation, Siemens recommends checking these
default settings.
NOTE
i In contrast to the individual teleprotection schemes with distance protection, the function blocks Rec.
bin.sig., Rec. PI and Rec.unblk.sig have the parameter Mode and appear for this reason in the
configuration view.
FB General
With the parameter General FB, you can power the function 85-21 Uni. scheme on and off via the Mode
parameter or the Mode (controllable) controllable.
In addition, the general indications of the function 85-21 Uni. scheme are made available.
FB Group indicat.
The FB Group indicat. the information of all permissive underreach transfer trips, permissive schemes and
blocking methods in one central location. If you are using several teleprotection schemes and you can switch
between them using parameter changes, you can simplify the routing of indications in this way.
798 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Universal Teleprotection with Distance Protection
Several receive blocks Rec. bin.sig. as well as the receive block Rec. PI can be present at the same
time.
If the line ends communicate using binary signals, the necessary receive blocks are connected to on via the
Mode parameter. If a teleprotection scheme is configured, for example, with a total of 3 ends, exactly 2
receive blocks must be activated. All additional receive blocks that can be installed, even the Rec. PI receive
block, must be deactivated.
If the line ends are to communicate via a protection interface, you must activate the Rec. PI receive block.
All other receive blocks must be deactivated. A mixture of communication to the line ends using a protection
interface and binary signals is not possible.
For more information on the operation of receive blocks, see 6.9.3 Receive Blocks.
6.10.4 Application
The universal teleprotection with distance protection allows you to create a common configuration for several
use cases. If, for example, you want to use permissive underreach transfer trip across an expanded measuring
range and permissive underreach transfer trip by way of pickup in your plants, you can instantiate the
permissive underreach transfer trip twice in the universal teleprotection scheme and configure it appropriately
for each application. For the specific use in a plant, you simply need to switch the desired scheme to on via
the Mode parameter.
It is equally possible to create a common configuration for the different options of communication with
the other line ends. If you have plants with, for example, both 2 and 3 ends and either binary signals or a
protection interface are used for communication, you can create 2 Rec. bin.sig. receive blocks as well as
one Rec. PI receive block for this purpose, set their parameters appropriately and route the indications. The
receive blocks needed for the specific use are switched to on via the Mode parameter.
For communication using the protection interface, you set the identity and the number of devices partici-
pating in the teleprotection scheme for the protection of the line configuration by using the configuration of
the protection interface. For more information, see 3.6.5.4 Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5
or 3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI 5.
6.10.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 799
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Universal Teleprotection with Distance Protection
800 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Universal Teleprotection with Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 801
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Universal Teleprotection with Distance Protection
802 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.10 Universal Teleprotection with Distance Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 803
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded-neutral systems function
(ANSI 67N):
• Trips 1- or 3-pole
The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded systems function is used
in the Line protection function group. The function is preconfigured at the factory to have 2 stages with
definite-time delay (definite time-overcurrent protection stages). Within the function, maximum 6 definite
time-overcurrent protection stages can be operated as well as 1 simultaneously by each inverse type. A
maximum of 2 functions can be operated within the function group.
The following stage types are available:
• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI)
• Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay with logarithmic inverse characteristics (AMZ-3I0-log)
• Pickup
• Operate
804 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[dwgfpstr-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and delay times of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected from outside
via a binary input signal.
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage types definite-time overcurrent protection
(UMZ), inverse-time overcurrent protection (AMZ) according to IEC and ANSI and inverse-time overcurrent
protection (AMZ) with logarithmic inverse characteristics.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 805
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[lo_ggfp_02, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-214 Stage Control for the Stages Types Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Inverse Time-Over-
current Protection, and Logarithmic Inverse
Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stage is blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage failure,
insofar as the stage works directionally, and the transformer neutral-point current is not connected.
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage types S0 inverse and V0 inverse.
806 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[lo_ggfp_12, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-215 Stage Control for the Stage Types S0 Inverse and V0 Inverse
Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stages is also blocked upon a measuring-voltage failure.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 807
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.4.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[loggfp01-170611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-216 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Measurand
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition
equation
from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
808 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available
to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this ground current (residual
current). The linear range of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.5 A. At higher currents,
the device automatically switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
zero current from the conductor currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending on
the application:
[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or backward
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.11.9.1 Description).
Phase Selection
Depending on the distribution of the currents and voltages, the phase selection detects if a 1-phase (determi-
nation of the affected phase) or multiphase short circuit is present (see chapter 6.11.10 Phase Selection ).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 809
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see also Figure 6-214 and
Figure 6-215)
• During a 1-pole pause by the Automatic reclosing function, insofar as the Op.mode at 1p dead
time parameter is set to blocked.
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see chapter 6.11.13.1 Description )
The blocking cause is indicated.
Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup and pickup type of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the
stage tripping. You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• Parameter Blocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.
• Automatic reclosing
810 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be independent of the current level, select the stage type Definite time-overcurrent
protection.
A multi-stage Definite time-overcurrent protection function is realized by the parallel operation of several
definite time-overcurrent protection stages.
Parameter: Hold mode 1-pole dead time after falling edge 1-pole dead time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 811
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
Parameter Value Description
non-directional If the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in the direction of
the line and busbar), then select this setting.
The stage also works with this setting if no direction measurement is possible,
for example, owing to lower or no polarization voltage.
forward Select these settings if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in
direction of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the level is only to work in the reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).
812 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 813
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
814 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 815
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
816 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 817
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
818 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 819
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection According to IEC and ANSI
6.11.5.1 Description
[loggfp03-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-218 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection
According to IEC and ANSI
Measurands
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition
equation
820 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available
to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
residual current from the phase currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurementparameter is used to select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application:
[loggfpst-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.11.9.1 Description).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 821
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Phase Selection
The phase selection detects whether a 1-pole (determination of the relevant phase) or a multiphase short
circuit is present via the distribution of the currents and voltages (see section 6.11.10 Phase Selection ).
Pickup, Dropout, and Tripping Behavior of the Dependent Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. This time results from the
characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between the following options:
• Dropout according to characteristic curve: The summed time is reduced in relation to the characteristic
curve.
The dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
The execution of the characteristic curve after exceeding 1.1 times the threshold value can be delayed by a
constant time (Additional time delay parameter).
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see also Figure 6-214 and
Figure 6-215)
• During a 1-pole pause by the Automatic reclosing function, insofar as the Op.mode at 1p dead
time parameter is set to blocked.
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see chapter 6.11.13.1 Description and chapter
6.11.6.1 Description)
The blocking cause is indicated.
Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup and pickup type of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the
stage tripping. You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
• Parameter Blocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.
822 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
• Automatic reclosing
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to the IEC or ANSI standard, select this
type of stage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 823
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Parameter: Hold mode for 1-pole dead time after falling edge 1-pole dead time
824 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
this undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can
lead to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise. You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz.
w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10% under normal conditions.
Parameter: Reset
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 825
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.5.3 Settings
826 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 827
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
828 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 829
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.6.1 Description
[loggfp05-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-220 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection with
Logarithmic Inverse Characteristic Curve (AMZ-3I0-Log)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.11.5.1 Description).
830 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.11.5.1 Description.
Operate Curve
Figure 6-221 shows the effect of the characteristic curve parameters qualitatively.
The Threshold parameter setting is the reference value for all current values. At the same time, the
Threshold multiplier parameter maps the beginning of the characteristic curve, that is, the lower
operating range on the current axis in relation to the threshold value. The time value Max. time of the
curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for 3I0 = threshold value). The Time dial
parameter changes the slope of the characteristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve
parameter indicates the lower time limit.
[loggfp04-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage-Type Selection
If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 831
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.6.3 Settings
832 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 833
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
834 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 835
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.7.1 Description
[loggfp10-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-222 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence System Power-Dependent
Time Delay (S0 Inverse)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.11.5.1 Description).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.11.5.1 Description.
836 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Operate Curve
Figure 6-223 shows the operate curve of the stage.
The zero-sequence system power protection operates according to a power-dependent operate curve.
The zero-sequence system power is calculated from the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence system
current. The Sr component in the direction of an adjustable compensation angle φcomp is definitive. This
component is designated as a compensated zero power.
Sr = 3I0 · 3V0 · cos(φ-φcomp) with φ = φV0– φI0
φ comp therefore indicates the direction of maximum sensitivity (cos(φ– φ comp) = 1, if φ = φ comp). The power
calculation automatically contains the direction via its sign information. Reversing the signs also allows the
power for the reverse direction to be determined. Figure 6-229 represents the direction-characteristic curve.
The tripping time results according to the equation:
[fogfp003-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The power-time characteristic curve can be shifted with the reference value Sref (S ref for Sr-charac-
teristic = basic value for the inverse characteristic curve for φ= φcomp) in power direction. The power-time
characteristic curve can be shifted in the time direction by the factor k-fact. for Sr-character..
You can set additional power-dependent delays with the time setting Additional time delay.
[loggfp11-250111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero power according to an inverse characteristic curve, select
this stage type.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 837
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.7.3 Settings
838 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 839
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.8.1 Description
Figure 6-224 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage-Dependent Time Delay
(V0 Inverse)
840 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Measurands
The device measures the residual voltage. The measured voltage is converted to the zero-sequence voltage
V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand from the broken-delta winding, the
zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC:
The zero-sequence current is used as a measurand. The zero-sequence current is calculated its definition
equation from the sum of the 3 phase currents.
Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the zero-sequence current can be measured or
calculated.
If you connect a current input to the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (zero-sequence current) will be directly
available to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device calculates the
zero-sequence current from the phase currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending on
the application:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 841
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.11.9.1 Description).
with
V0 Actually occurring zero-sequence voltage
V0 min Setting value of the parameter Min. zero-seq. volt. V0
The following figure shows the voltage-dependent characteristic curve of the V0-inverse stage:
[dw-GFP-kennl, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-226 Parameter of the Voltage-Dependent Characteristic Curve of the V0-Inverse Stage (without
Additional Times)
842 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The operate time depends on the value of the zero-sequence voltage. In meshed, grounded systems, the
zero-sequence voltage increases towards the location of the ground fault. Due to the inverse characteristic
curve, the operate time decreases with rising zero-sequence voltage.
The V0> threshold value parameter defines the lower voltage limit (dotted line c in Figure 6-226). The
lower voltage limit c cuts off the characteristic curve b.
The Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter shifts the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the direc-
tion of V0.
The Time delay directional parameter shifts the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the direction
of time.
The setting value of the Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter is the asymptote a´ of the characteristic
curve a for t → ∞.
Processing the inverse characteristic curve after exceeding the threshold value V0> threshold value can
be delayed by the time set in the Time delay directional parameter.
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero-sequence voltage according to an inverse characteristic
curve, select this stage type.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 843
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Related Topics
6.11.11.1 Beschreibung
844 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of
this undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can
lead to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise. You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz.
w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10 % under normal conditions.
6.11.8.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 845
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
846 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.9.1 Description
The direction determination works across stages. Various methods are available for determining the direction
and for increasing the accuracy of the determination.
The following diagram shows which variables and settings are used for direction determination.
[logfpri1-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 847
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Depending on the device connection, it is measured or calculated. If a voltage input is connected at the
broken-delta winding Vdadn of a voltage-transformer set, the device will use this voltage with consideration
of the Matching ratio Vph / VN (see chapter 8.3.9.3 Function Description). Otherwise the device
calculates the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages.
If the neutral-point current IY of a grounded transformer (supply transformer) is connected, the reference
voltage VP is the sum of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and a variable proportional to the neutral-point current
IY (see Figure 6-228). This corresponds to 20 V at the rated current. With the setting IY (neutral pt.)
only, VP is only derived from the transformer neutral-point current.
To determine the direction, the device sets the measuring current IN (= -3I0) to the real axis. If the phasor of
the reference voltage VP is within the defined forward range, the device determines the direction as forward.
In other cases, the device determines the direction as backward.
As a prerequisite for direction determination, the adjustable minimum variables for the zero-sequence voltage
or the transformer neutral-point current must be exceeded (parameters Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 and
Min. neutral-point curr. IY).
If the device detects a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit, the direction determination is
prevented with V0. If the transformer neutral-point current is connected to the device, the direction can be
determined via this.
848 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri2-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-228 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence Variables
Determining the direction requires a minimum residual voltage that can be set as Min. zero-seq.
voltage V0. Another prerequisite is that the compensated zero power must have an adjustable minimum
value (parameter Forw. dir. power threshold).
The following figure shows an example of the direction characteristic curve.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 849
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri4-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-229 Direction-Characteristic Curve for Direction Determination with Zero-System Power
850 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[logfpri5-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The V0 voltage at a ground fault with direction = backward is determined with the following equation:
V0F0=backward = I0 · (Z0trf + Z0L)
This equation can be used to determine a I0 threshold with corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0 threshold is
exceeded, the measured V0 voltage at a backward fault must exceed the corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0
threshold is exceeded and the measured V0 voltage is less than the V0 threshold, the direction = forward can
thus be determined.
The method can improve the directional sensitivity in the case of long lines (large Z0L).
Switch on this functionality via the Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min parameter.
If the measured V0 voltage falls below the minimum value Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 and 3I0 exceeds
the current threshold Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens., the decision is for forward.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 851
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
with
[dw_corr_series_comp_direction_with-0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-231 Adjustment of the Series Compensation for Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence
System
The voltage drop on the series capacitor VC0 is subtracted from the measured voltage 3V0meas. The resulting
voltage 3V0Dir is then assigned to the direction-characteristic curve of the ground-fault protection (see
Figure 6-231).
NOTE
i If a teleprotection scheme with ground-fault protection is used, it must be ensured that the direction
measurement at all line ends is carried out using the same procedure. The setting for the Direct.
determination with parameter must be the same at all line ends. If a device is used at a line end
that does not have all the setting options, then the direction measurement must be limited to a single
procedure that is possible at all line ends, for example, only V0 (setting option V0 + IY (neutral
pt.)).
852 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 853
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
854 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
The Forw. dir. power threshold parameter is used to define the value of the compensated zero-
system power, above which the direction is detected as forward. To ensure direction determination even at
low zero-system powers, this value is to be below the reference power S ref for Sr-characteristic
(see chapter 6.11.7.1 Description).
[fofrbest-060110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this equation, V0 is the setting value for the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter. SM is a reserve
(for example, 1.2).
As the ground-fault protection works with the zero-sequence or negative-sequence values, direct determina-
tion of the ground fault is not possible. To be able to implement 1-pole automatic reclosing despite high-resis-
tance ground faults, the ground fault protection has a phase selector. The phase selection detects whether
a 1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred with the distribution of the currents. The phase selection
detects which phase is affected in the case of a 1-phase short circuit.
The phase selection filters the negative-sequence and the zero-sequence out of the phase currents. The
fault type, that is, whether a 1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred, is determined from the phase
displacement between the negative-sequence current and the zero-sequence current. The phase currents,
purged of the load current, are also evaluated from this. This utilizes the fact that, in the case of a 1-phase
short circuit, the healthy conductors can only conduct either no fault currents at all or only in-phase fault
currents.
The phase selection has an action time of approx. 40 ms. If the phase selection is unable to make a decision in
this time, 3-phase is signaled.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 855
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.11.11.1 Beschreibung
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you define whether tripping of the stage should
be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the stage picks
up. The S0 inverse stage and the U0 inverse stagedo not pick up. The start of the time delay and tripping
are blocked. The stage signals this by way of a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
With the Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det. parameter, you define whether the operate indication of the
stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to a detected 2nd harmonic in the ground
current. If the conditions for the 2nd harmonic to ground and the start condition for the protection function
have been satisfied, inrush-current blocking is active. In case of a blocking and if the start conditions have
been satisfied, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The
function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the pickup conditions
are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by the 1st definite-time overcurrent
protection stage) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection. The blocking can only be
adjusted if the Inrush-current detection function is active.
[loggfp13-260111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-232 Part of the Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage
856 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
You can extend the ground-fault protection by means of the integrated signal-transmission logic for direc-
tional comparison protection. You can find more detailed information on the possible transmission methods
and their function in section 6.12.1 Overview of Functions.
6.11.13.1 Description
The parameters Threshold and Operate delay used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings
(DS). Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-233). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 857
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
[lodynpar-260111-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-233 Principle of Dynamic Settings in the Example of the 1st Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If the following functionalities are available in the device, they can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the protection
stage or block it, if necessary. In the latter case, the settings for the threshold value and time delay are of
no relevance. To each of the signals, the overcurrent-protection stage provides a configuration parameter
Affected by function... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay and Threshold). The
configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, that is, whether the dynamic
settings should be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal function x) becomes active
and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly active. This means that
the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes inactive, the standard
settings apply again. Activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
858 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Where several signals are active in parallel, the specified priority applies. This means that a signal with priority
1 has precedence over a signal with priority 2. The settings assigned to signal 1 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
[loeinawe-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 859
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the threshold value and time delay of the protection stage and
its blocking:
[logfpkal-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-235 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the tripping stage. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters
or the parameter Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way the Cold-load pickup signal is generated is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup
Detection (Optional).
[loeinbin-270111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the tripping stage. To do so, you
must activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay
parameters or the parameter Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
860 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.11 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
Further application and setting notes can be found in the Overcurrent protection, phases and function in
chapter 6.19.9.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 861
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
Information is exchanged with the remote station so that the ground-fault protection switches off immedi-
ately and selectively on the entire line for all errors. You can implement the teleprotection through reception
and transmission contacts or through a digital communication connection.
The Teleprotection schemes are used in protection function groups with a voltage-measuring point in combi-
nation with the Ground-fault protection function. The schemes of the function illustrated in the following
figure are available.
[dw_fkt-line_EF_Freigabe-Blockierverfahren, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-238 displays the function control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the ground-fault protection and creates the respective
transmission signal for the transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is coupled either through:
862 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[lo_tefste, 3, en_US]
In the following, the individual function blocks for the teleprotection scheme are described. You can find
detailed information about function control in 2.3 Function Control.
For the coupling of reception signals from opposite ends, the receive-block types Rec. bin.sig.,
Rec.unblk.sig, and Rec. PI are available. The teleprotection schemes described in the following can
be operated with the suitable receive blocks as needed.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is not
possible.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 863
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If the communication occurs through binary signals, this reception logic is used. If a teleprotection scheme is
configured, for example, with 3 ends in total, 2 function blocks Rec. bin.sig. are required.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity for double ground faults can be improved on parallel lines if
3-phase-selective transmission signals can be transferred per communication direction. The receipt signals can
thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as individual signals.
For common-phase teleprotection, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective teleprotection
the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B, and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-238.
[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can use the teleprotection schemes optionally with the unblocking method. The difference to the conven-
tional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.
864 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
• If the signal is transmitted via PLC (power-line carrier transmission) through the line that is to be
protected
• If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so large that the reception from
the other line end is not provided
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during
an external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective teleprotection to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A, >Blocking
phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblocking logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency
is received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the
unblocking logic. During phase-selective teleprotection, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 receive
signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B, and >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently,
the blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective teleprotection, the 3
blocking signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B, and >Blocking phs C are used. With this, the
signal >Unblocking general (or the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B,
and >Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the reception of the trip logic of the teleprotection scheme is
approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be trans-
mitted no longer reaches the other line end. In this state both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded to
the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is
generated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-238.
[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital), this receipt logic is used. Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block is always Rec. PI required. The number and the
identity of the devices that participate in the teleprotection scheme for protection of the line configuration can
be set in the function group Protection communication under System configuration.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 865
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
NOTE
i The teleprotection scheme requires a minimum bandwidth for communication via a protection interface.
If the function Line differential protection is available in the device, the bit rate cannot be lower than 512
kbit/s.
6.12.4.1 Description
[dwtevgve-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If the ground-fault protection recognizes a fault in a forward direction, a send signal will be sent to the
opposite end. If the fault is also recognized in the forward direction, the received signal in the device on the
opposite end will lead to an increased trip.
[loteseve-310511-01.tif, 3, en_US]
With the parameters Send with, you can select which stage of the ground-fault protection affects the send
signal. The send condition is fulfilled if the selected stage - or stages - are picked up in a forward direction.
If the protection has already submitted a trip command, the send signal can be prolongated by a set time
(_:5761:101) Send prolongation. This allows for the release of the other cable end even if the short
866 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
circuit is very quickly switched off. With this, pickup differences between the cable ends and signal delays can
be considered.
If needed, the send signal can be delayed with (_:5761:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). You can find a detailed description in 6.12.6.1 Description. No send signal is sent in the event of
transient blocking.
For applications with 1-pole operate, the selectivity of the permissive mode for double faults can be improved
on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per communication direction. Send and
reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-jointly as individual signals
(general).
[loteausv-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The trip for the
affected stage is attended to by that teleprotection scheme with which the ground-fault protection collabo-
rates.
If a reception signal is present, the stage set through the parameter (_:5761:141) Operate with will be
released for tripping. The trip can be delayed. You can set the time delay under Send delay.
With the parameter (_:5761:11) 1-pole operate allowed, the tripping logic can allow for 1-pole trip
in 1-/3-pole trip devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive mode for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the reception
signals from all line ends are combined for the operate with AND.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 867
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
• Stage pickup
• Release signal
• Expired time
For applications with delayed trip, a non-recurring receipt signal is only kept until the stage pickup returns.
Through this, it is guaranteed that the release signal is also present if the time-out of the corresponding time
delay releases the trip and the send signal of the protection of the opposite end is no longer imminent.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
mode. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a change of
direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). You can find the detailed
description in 6.12.6.1 Description.
• For the trip of the cable end with a strong infeed, the echo function can be made effective with a weak
infeed.
• In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the teleprotection schemes have a
function for trip with weak infeed.
The functions are described in detail in the chapter Echo and Tripping in the event of weak infeed.
6.12.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Trip Logic of the Permissive Mode
The various permissive modes can be implemented by using both parameters Send with and Operate
with (see Figure 6-243 and Figure 6-244) . Additionally, you must observe the selection of the reception
block.
The following methods can be ordered:
Methods Parameter: Send with Parameter: Operate with
85-67N Dir. comp. One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
Ground-fault unblock procedure One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
(Rec.unblk.sig as a reception block)
868 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
With the parameter 1-pole operate allowed, you allow 1-pole tripping of the teleprotection scheme
for 1-phase faults or multi-phase faults and 1-phase reception. In devices with 1-pole tripping, Siemens
recommends the setting yes. In devices with 3-pole trip, this parameter does not apply.
[dwtevgvf-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the permissive schemes:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 869
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
[dwteublv-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the following settings, you can configure the directional-unblocking method:
6.12.4.5 Settings
870 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 871
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
6.12.5.1 Description
[dwtefblo-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the protection function recognizes a ground fault in the backward direction, the blocking signal is sent to
the opposite end (signal Blocking). If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving
line end, it generates the trip signal after a short time delay.
[lotesblk-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The blocking signal is created in the event of pickup of the ground-fault protection in the backward or
non-directional direction. The threshold value for creation of the blocking signal is the percentage of the
threshold value of the level that affects tripping in the blocking procedure. The percentage is set with
the parameter (_:5761:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw. in the teleprotection scheme. For further
information, refer to 6.12.7.1 Description.
872 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5791:101) Send prolonga-
tion, you can extend the blocking signal. Even if the error has already been cleared up locally, the opposite
end can continue to be blocked through this.
The blocking signal can also be sent immediately with jump detection (parameter (_:5791:102) Send
with jump). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal,
you can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the
ground-fault protection detects an error in the forward direction, the blocking signal is immediately stopped
and the indication Stop is created.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking method for double faults can be improved
on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direction. Trans-
mission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or phase-jointly as
individual signals.
[loteaubv-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The trip for the
affected stage is attended to by that teleprotection scheme with which the ground-fault protection collabo-
rates.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5791:140) Operate with will
be released for tripping. The trip of the blocking method must be delayed due to possible differences in the
pickup times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. You can set the time
delay with the parameter (_:5791:107) Release delay.
The tripping can be delayed. You can set the time delay under (_:5761:102) Send delay.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 873
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
• If the signal is transmitted with TFH through the protected line and if the attenuation of the transmission
signal at the fault location is so large that the reception from the other cable end cannot be guaranteed.
• For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in a backward direction, a blocking signal is transmitted. If
the other cable end does not receive a blocking signal, the ground-fault protection trips in a forward direction
in the case of a ground-fault current. Since no release signal is required by the opposite end, single infeed
short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking method.
[dwteblve-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
874 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
With the parameter Send with jump, you can set if the blocking signal is sent without delay with the jump
detection. Siemens recommends using the fast blocking with jump and retaining the setting.
6.12.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 875
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
6.12.6.1 Description
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).
[lotetrbl-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period ((_:5791:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay). After the omission of the
blocking criteria, the transient blocking will be maintained for a set time ((_:5791:106) Trans. blk.
dropout delay).
876 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection can influence each other simultane-
ously. With the parameter Trans. block through, you can set if the transient blocking of the teleprotec-
tion for the distance protection should have an effect on the teleprotection of the ground-fault protection. The
mutual influence is meaningful if the teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection works
with a shared communication channel.
NOTE
i The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to 0. This makes sure that the transient-blocking
time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes in a
delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are
recommended.
6.12.7.1 Description
In order to avoid a faulty echo during permissive schemes, it must be ensured that an external ground fault
with a flowing ground-fault current is detected at both line ends. During the blocking method and for the
transient blocking, a secure blocking signal must be created under these conditions.
If the error is not detected in a ground fault in accordance with Figure 6-252 the protection in B, this would be
interpreted as an error fed-in from A. With permissive schemes, protection B would send an echo signal. For
the blocking procedure and for the transient blocking, the required blocking signal would not be created. The
consequence would be a faulty trip of the ground-fault protection in A.
[dwt3i0v1-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 877
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The teleprotection scheme with ground-fault protection therefore has a sensitive ground-current stage
(_:5791:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw..
[lotsigzu-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With the permissive scheme, the sensitive ground-current stage has an effect on the echo function and the
transient blocking. If the stage for the recognition of a backward fault in B is always more sensitive than
the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees an error from the other line end A in a forward
direction, no fault echo signal can result and the transient blocking will also work correctly.
With the blocking method, the sensitive ground-current stage is the threshold from which the blocking signal
is created if there are reverse errors. For this application, it also applies that the recognition of a reverse error
in B must be more sensitive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees the error from
the other cable end A in a forward direction. Thus, the blocking signal sent from B leads to the required
blocking of the trip ground-current stage on the cable end A.
The setting value for the sensitive ground-current stage is a percent value. For permissive schemes, it auto-
matically relates to the threshold value of the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection, which are
connected with the permissive scheme via the parameter Send with.
During the blocking method, the percentage setting value automatically relates to the stage or stages of the
ground-fault protection, which are connected with the blocking method via the parameter Operate with.
6.12.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Sensitive Stage of the Ground-Fault Protection
878 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
Additionally, the considerations described above apply with regard to the capacitive ground current, which is
not dealt with in Figure 6-254. The conditions are more convenient for a ground-current distribution different
than assumed here, because then one of the 2 ground currents 3I0b or 3I0c must be greater than in the
previous consideration.
[dwt3i0v2-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-254 Possible Inconvenient Current Distribution through a Teed Feeder in the Event of an External
Ground Fault
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 879
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Universal Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
The universal teleprotection schemes with ground-fault protection (85-67N Uni. scheme) include the
same functionalities as described in 6.12 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection. The difference is that
all functionalities are compactly grouped together within the function 85-67N Uni. scheme. This can be an
advantage if a switchover of the functionalities using settings changes is desired.
Since there is no functional difference with respect to the teleprotection with ground-fault protection, only the
special features are described in the following.
The function 85-67N Uni. scheme is used in the function group Line in combination with the function
Ground-fault protection.
The functions shown in the following figure are available:
[dw_funct-line_universal_Erdkurzschluss, 1, en_US]
In addition to the individual teleprotection with ground-fault protection, the universal teleprotection schemes
contain the function blocks (FBs) General and Group indicat..
You will find the function 85-67N Uni. scheme in the DIGSI library under FG Line > Teleprotection scheme >
EF universal scheme.
The following functionalities are preinstantiated when the 85-67N Uni. scheme function is instantiated:
• FB General
• FB Group indicat.
880 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Universal Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
NOTE
i As most function blocks are deactivated following preinstantiation, Siemens recommends checking these
default settings.
NOTE
i In contrast to the individual teleprotection with ground-fault protection, the function blocks Rec.
bin.sig., Rec. PI and Rec.unblk.sig have the parameter Mode and appear for this reason in the
configuration view.
FB General
Using the General FB, you can power the 85-67N Uni. scheme function on and off via the Mode parameter or
the Mode (controllable) controllable.
In addition, the general messages of the 85-67N Uni. scheme function are made available.
FB Group indicat.
The Group indicat. FB groups the information of all permissive schemes and blocking methods in one central
location. If you are using several teleprotection schemes and you can switch between them using parameter
changes, you can simplify the routing of messages in this way.
Several receive blocks Rec. bin.sig. as well as the receive block Rec. PI can be present at the same
time.
If the line ends communicate using binary signals, the necessary receive blocks are connected to on via the
Mode parameter. If a teleprotection scheme is configured, for example, with a total of 3 ends, exactly 2
receive blocks must be activated. All additional receive blocks that can be installed, even the Rec. PI receive
block, must be deactivated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 881
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Universal Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
If the line ends are to communicate via a protection interface, you must activate the Rec. PI receive block.
All other receive blocks must be deactivated. A mixture of communication to the line ends using a protection
interface and binary signals is not possible.
For more information on the operation of reception blocks, see 6.12.3 Receive Blocks.
6.13.4 Application
The universal teleprotection with ground-fault protection allows you to create a common configuration for
several use cases. If, for example, you are using different stage types in ground-fault protection in conjunction
with a teleprotection scheme in your plants, you can instantiate the permissive overreach transfer trip or the
blocking method several times in the universal teleprotection scheme. Configure the schemes in accordance
with each application and link them with the desired stage of the ground-fault protection. For the specific use
in a plant, you simply need to switch the desired scheme to on via the Mode parameter.
It is equally possible to create a common configuration for the different options of communication with
the other line ends. If you have plants with, for example, both 2 and 3 ends and either binary signals or a
protection interface are used for communication, you can create 2 Rec. bin.sig. receive blocks as well as
one Rec. PI receive block for this purpose, set their parameters appropriately and route the messages. The
reception blocks needed for the specific use are switched to on via the Mode parameter.
For communication using the protection interface, you set the identity and the number of devices partici-
pating in the teleprotection scheme for the protection of the line configuration by using the configuration of
the protection interface. For more information, see 3.6.5.4 Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5
or 3.6.6.4 Configuration of the Advanced Protection Communication in DIGSI 5.
6.13.5 Settings
882 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Universal Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 883
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Universal Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
884 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.13 Universal Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 885
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
The Echo and tripping on weak infeed function is used to support the teleprotection schemes for distance
protection and ground-fault protection. Its use is only advisable, therefore, if you are using an appropriate
teleprotection scheme.
In the following situations, a permissive overreach transfer trip (permissive overreach transfer trip scheme,
directional comparison and directional unblock method) does not receive a release signal from the opposite
line end:
• Lines with single-side infeed, from the end of the line without infeed
• Neutral-point grounding at only one line end, from the end of the line without zero-sequence current
The Echo and tripping on weak infeed function comprises the subfunctions shown in the following figure.
The function is used in the function group Line.
[dwwnstru-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 2 subfunctions Echo and Tripping on weak infeed receive control signals from the teleprotection scheme
for distance protection and ground-fault protection in the local device, see the following figure.
886 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
[dwwnfblk-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the absence of pickup at one end of the line, the echo function sends the received signal back to the other
end of the line as an echo, so that the trip command can be released there.
Echo Release
The release signal for the echo function in the teleprotection with distance protection is generated as follows:
[lodisecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-258 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Distance Protection
The release signal for the echo function in the teleprotection scheme with ground-fault protection is gener-
ated as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 887
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
[loeksecf-070311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-259 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Ground-Fault Protection
Echo Logic
There are 2 structurally identical echo logics assigned to the functions Distance protection and Ground-fault
protection. The echo logic is shown in the following figure.
[lodisecl-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The time delay (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay takes effect when the echo release for
distance protection or ground-fault protection is set. This time delay is necessary if the pickup time for the
protection function at the weak line end is higher for a reverse fault or if the protection function picks up later
due to unfavorable short circuit or ground-current distribution. The echo is transmitted at the end of the time
delay. If the circuit breaker at the line end without infeed is 3-pole open, the echo time delay is not necessary.
The echo time delay is bypassed.
You can set the length of the echo pulse with the (_:5821:103) Echo pulse parameter.
The circuit-breaker switch position is signaled centrally by the process monitor.
A new echo cannot be transmitted for at least 50 ms (default setting of the parameter (_:5821:101) Echo
block time after Tx) once the echo pulse has been released, or for the duration of the send signal
888 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
associated with the release method currently in use. This prevents the echo from being repeated immediately
after the line is disconnected.
[lokankoo-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 889
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
NOTE
i If no circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are routed and there is an operating condition without current flow,
the logic of the process monitor cannot detect the circuit-breaker position. In such cases, you can influence
the behavior of the logics in Figure 6-262 and Figure 6-263 with the parameter CB closed on I=0 (see
6.14.5 Application and Setting Notes).
[loasephe-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-262 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Ground Voltages (Grounded Systems)
For systems with isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point, the phase-to-phase voltages are used as the
criteria for undervoltage detection. Phase-selective detection of weak infeed is not possible.
[loasephp-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-263 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Phase Voltages (Isolated or Resonant-Grounded
Systems)
890 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
The TWI function is used to trip the circuit breaker at the end of the line with missing or weak infeed.
[lownfrei-310511-01.tif, 3, en_US]
If a weak infeed is detected and a receive signal from the teleprotection scheme for distance protection or
ground-fault protection is pending at the same time, phase-selective TWI pickup is triggered. On TWI pickup,
the trip logic of the associated method triggers the trip signal.
TWI pickup and thus tripping can be delayed with the parameterizable time (_:5821:102) Echo and
operate delay. TWI pickup is also delayed by the release time (_:5821:103) Echo pulse. Synchroni-
zation between echo and TWI is achieved by both functions using the same time parameters.
The TWI function can be blocked via the phase-selective signals TWI block. This prevents false pickups, for
example, due to switch-off processes on the line in question or on the parallel line. All phases not picked up
for a 3-pole TWI operate are blocked for 250 ms. If another protection function trips, all 3 phases are blocked
for 250 ms. In the event of a cleared reverse pickup of 1 phase of the corresponding function (depending on
the source of Dis or EF), all 3 phases are blocked for 50 ms.
To select the function Echo and tripping on weak infeed, use the function library with DIGSI.
The function is designed for cooperation with permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive overreach
transfer trips. The function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.
The function contains the following parameters:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 891
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
The basic operating mode is set with the Weak infeed action parameter.
Parameter Value Description
only echo The echo function is active. There is no tripping on short circuits with
missing or weak infeed.
off A missing or weak infeed does not induce echo or tripping.
echo and WI operate The echo function and tripping on short circuits with missing or weak infeed
are active.
only WI operate Only tripping on short circuits with missing or weak infeed is active.
• Recommended setting value (_:5821:101) Echo block time after Tx= 0.05 s
To avoid an infinite echo between the ends of the line, a new echo cannot be sent for a period of
(_:5821:101) Echo block time after Tx after an echo signal has been sent. An infinite echo could
otherwise be triggered by interference coupling on the signal path, for example. The echo is also blocked for
this time once distance protection or ground-fault protection has been sent.
892 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.14 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
condition without current flow. In such operating conditions, the logic of the process monitor is unable to
detect the circuit-breaker position.
Parameter Value Description
no When you set the parameter CB closed on I=0 = no, the logics work
to detect the weak infeed into the Figure 6-262 and Figure 6-263, as if the
circuit breaker were open.
In this case, no Weak infeed is detected and tripping at weak infeed is not
possible.
yes When you set the parameter CB closed on I=0 = yes, the logics work
to detect the weak infeed into Figure 6-262 and Figure 6-263 as if the
circuit breaker were closed.
In this case, the Weak infeed is detected and tripping at weak infeed is
possible.
If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are routed, or current flow is detected, the circuit-breaker switch
position is detected based on this information.
You can find more detailed information in 6.14.3 Echo Function in Detection of Weak Infeed, Page 889.
6.14.6 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 893
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification:
• Also switches off the line end with weak infeed with a short circuit on the line
The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification is used in the
function group Line.
The function is preconfigured with an Instantaneous stage and a Delayed stage. The undervoltage and 3I0
detection settings are in the General function block and apply to all stages.
[dw_struck-3I0-erkennung, 1, en_US]
894 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
6.15.3.1 Description
Logic
[lo_unterspann-3I0-erkennung, 2, en_US]
Undervoltage Detection
The faulty phases are selected via undervoltage detection. The threshold value of the undervoltage detection
is dynamic and results from the product of the measured phase-to-phase voltage and the Vph-g< factor.
This accounts for operational deviations from the rated voltage in the undervoltage threshold.
The average value is obtained from the measured phase-to-phase voltages of the last 500 ms. The average
value is held via a voltage memory for an adjustable time (Time constant Tau). Changes in the phase-to-
phase voltage thus have an effect on the undervoltage threshold in a time-delayed manner. When a phase
picks up, the most recently determined voltage threshold of the picked-up phase is held until generation of
the operate indication. The voltage threshold is thus not affected by the error in the case of long time delays.
The undervoltage is determined for all 3 phases.
If the stored phase-to-phase voltage drops below the √3 ⋅ Threshold Vph-gnd< threshold, an undervoltage
detection is no longer possible in the respective phase.
Since positive feedback results from tripping, that is, the measured fault condition cannot be removed by
tripping, the pickup of both stages automatically drops out again after tripping of at least one stage. If the
present voltage exceeds the dropout threshold again, renewed pickup is possible after a maximum of 1 s.
NOTE
i The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification is suited for use
only in grounded systems.
3I0 Detection
The Instantaneous and the Delayed stage both use 3I0 detection. If the zero-sequence current exceeds the
3I0> threshold, the 3I0 detection picks up and generates the indication 3I0> exceeded. If the pickup
drops out, the indication 3I0> exceeded is held for an adjustable time T 3I0> extension.
The Health of the function is set to Warning in the event of a measuring-voltage failure.
If the measured voltage values or the 3I0 measured values are invalid, Health is set to Alarm and the
stage/function is blocked.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 895
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
896 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
6.15.4.1 Description
Logic
[lo_unverz-Stufe-3I0, 1, en_US]
If the input signal >Receive from the remote end is received and an undervoltage is simultaneously
detected, the Instantaneous stage generates an operate indication. The input signal >Receive is held for
an adjustable time (parameter: Receive extension ) so that tripping is also possible in case of a fast
dropout of the signal from the opposite end.
As long as the Distance protection function has picked up in a phase or after a line has been tripped, the
pickup of the Instantaneous stage is blocked. The Instantaneous stage is blocked until the input signal
>Receive drops off again.
If no undervoltage is detected while the input signal >Receive is on, but the 3I0> threshold is
exceeded, an internal fault on the line is indicated. If this state lasts longer than 500 ms, a 3-pole operate
indication is generated.
The Instantaneous stage works only if the binary input signal >Receive OK indicates correct functioning of
the communication channel.
The Instantaneous stage can also be blocked via the phase-segregated signals TWI block. False pickups, for
example, after switching off the local line end are thereby avoided.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 897
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
You use the Operating mode parameter to define whether the Instantaneous stage is enabled or disabled.
898 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
6.15.5.1 Description
Logic
[lo_verz-Stufe-3I0, 1, en_US]
With the Delayed stage you can still trip the local line end even in case of a failure in the communication
channel. The Delayed stage picks up in a phase-segregated way with a detected undervoltage and trips
after a configurable time. Depending on how the stage (1-pole operate allowed or 3-pole operate
allowed) functions, different time delays take effect (Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) or Op. delay
multi-ph. (TT)). If no tripping is indicated even after expiration of the the times TM and TT following the
pickup, the voltage memory is reset and the pickup drops out.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 899
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
In the following cases, the phase selection is blocked via the undervoltage detection:
900 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
You can use the 3-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the Delayed stage is allowed to
execute 3-pole tripping or not.
6.15.6 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 901
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.15 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
902 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 External Trip Initiation
• Enables the integration of any signals from external protection equipment in the indication and tripping
processing, for example transient ground-fault relays or Buchholz protection
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in conjunction with busbar-protection applications
• Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in the case of circuit-breaker failure at the other line end
• Links the teleprotection scheme (permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive overreach transfer
trip) for direct coupling of the trip command with the signal from the other line end
The External trip initiation for phase-selective signals function comes factory-set with 1 tripping stage. A
maximum of 1 stage can be operated in the function. The External trip initiation for phase-selective signals
function can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dw_strext, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 903
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 External Trip Initiation
[lo_ext-trip-phs_select-signal, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-270 Logic Diagram for the External Trip Initiation for Phase-Segregated Signals Stage
Output Signals
The function provides the binary output signals Pickup, Operate delay expired and Operate. The
signals are available phase-selective.
904 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.16 External Trip Initiation
6.16.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 905
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 External Trip Initiation with Current-Flow Criterion 3-Pole
The External trip initiation with current-flow criterion function enables the use of a current-flow criterion.
Otherwise, the function operates as the External trip initiation (see 6.16.1 Overview of Functions).
The External trip initiation with current-flow criterion function contains 2 fixed steps. You can instantiate
the External trip initiation with current-flow criterion function in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dw_strext_CfC-051021, 1, en_US]
906 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 External Trip Initiation with Current-Flow Criterion 3-Pole
Stage Logic
[lo_ext-trip-initiation_CfC, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-272 Logic Diagram of the Stage External Trip Initiation with Threshold Value I>
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 907
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 External Trip Initiation with Current-Flow Criterion 3-Pole
6.17.5 Settings
908 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.17 External Trip Initiation with Current-Flow Criterion 3-Pole
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 909
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
• Is only permissible for overhead lines, because only the possibility of self-activated extinguishing of an
arc short-circuit exists here
• The automatic reclosing can be controlled via an external automatic reclosing function via binary input
signals.
The automatic reclosing function (AREC) takes over automatic reclosing after a switch off via a short-circuit
protection. The following figure shows an example for the normal procedure with a two-time automatic
reclosing where the 2nd automatic reclosing attempt is successful.
[dw_2awewz, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-273 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing with Action Time (2nd AREC Successful)
The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows up to 8 reclosing attempts. Each of the 8 disruption cycles
can work with different parameters.
The following figure shows an example for normal procedure with a two-time automatic reclosing after
disconnection via the internal overload protection. The 2nd automatic reclosing attempt is successful.
Figure 6-274 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing after Disconnection via Overload Protection
The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows up to 8 reclosing attempts here as well. In contrast to
disconnection through the short-circuit protection, each of the 8 disruption cycles can work with its own
parameters that are the same for all cycles.
910 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
The Automatic reclosing function is used in function groups for circuit breakers. In a function group for circuit
breakers, one of the 3 types of functions illustrated in the following figures can be used. The Automatic
reclosing function has a central function control.
[dw_fkt_awe_SAD, 1, en_US]
[dw_zyk_awe, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 911
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dw_aweasp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-277 Structure/Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
The automatic reclosing function with secondary arc detection (SAD40) is an adaptive time-independent
automatic reclosing based on secondary arc detection.
The requirement for the use of SAD is that voltage transformers on the line side are connected to the
Circuit-breaker function group. The function is available only if a Line function group is present and the
circuit breaker can switch in 1-pole.
The SAD stage for arc detection is pre-instantiated and cannot be deleted. Additionally, a maximum of 7 cycles
of the classic automatic reclosing can be instantiated. If the secondary arc does not extinguish, an additional
automatic reclosing cycle must be instantiated to allow a 3-pole automatic reclosing.
[dw_str_awe_SAD, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-278 Structure/Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function with Secondary Arc Detection (SAD)
[dw_extawe, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-279 Structure/Embedding of the Operating Function With External Automatic Reclosing Function
912 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
Function Control
The Automatic reclosing function contains a central function control, see the following figure. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the chapter Function/Stage Control.
[lo_arc_fkt, 2, en_US]
The automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be influenced by the protection functions in the following way:
• The AREC is started through pickup indications and operate indications by the selected protection func-
tions or protection stages. The start is independent of the set operating mode for the AREC.
• Individual protection functions or protection stages can be configured so that their operate indication
blocks the AREC. If such a blocking exists, the AREC cannot be started. If the AREC is already started, the
blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC.
The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions. The
following influence possibilities exist:
• The AREC provides signals that can be used by protection functions for the blocking or release of special
stages or zones. An example is the release of overreaching zones with distance protection.
• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the automatic reclosing function provides a signal, based on which
the protection functions can turn off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
• For the application with 1-pole tripping and stage or zone release through the automatic reclosing
function, this function provides a signal that uses the protection functions that lets the stage and zone
release act only if a 1-pole faults occurs.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 913
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[loawesig-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-281 Signals between Protection Functions and Automatic Reclosing Functions
The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions
can be set separately for each protection function, see Figure 6-281. The configuration occurs in a matrix view
in DIGSI, see Figure 6-282.
If a protection function or the stage of a protection function is connected with the AREC through the matrix,
this means that the respective pickup and operate indications are forwarded to the AREC.
The links can be created separately
914 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-282 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI 5
Table 6-7 Operating modes of the cylindrical automatic reclosing function in accordance with tripping
behaviors
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 915
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
• During a 3-pole trip indication, the automatic reclosing cycle(s) start(s), for which 3-pole dead times are
set.
• During a 1-pole trip indication, the automatic reclosing cycle(s) start(s), for which 1-pole dead times are
set.
The following example in Figure 6-283 shows a 1-pole tripping that comes after expiration of the action time
of cycle 1, but still before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Cycle 2 is set to make a
1-pole tripping possible. Cycle 2 will now become active with the settings for 1-pole tripping.
Within the following reclaim time, there will be another pickup and a 3-pole tripping. Since cycle 2 is already
complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The second trip command comes during the
current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 becomes active with the settings for 3-phase trippings.
[dwawebx1-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Through the action time, there is a direct influence on the dead time behavior of the automatic reclosing
function. With faults with short operate times, other dead times can be realized than for removed faults with
longer tripping time. With faults with short operate time, an automatic reclosing is executed, with removed
faults this does not occur with longer operate time. The operating mode with op., with act. time
allows for different automatic reclosing cycles depending on 1- or 3-pole tripping and the trip time of the
protection function(s).
916 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
With this operating mode, the automatic reclosing must be started with the operate indications from the
protection functions. Additionally, the pickup sample from the conductor pickups and the general pickup are
considered:
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
• With 3-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 3-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup.
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and raising trip command, the automatic reclosing cycle
to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the expiring
automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle 1, but still
before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Since it is a 2-phase pickup, cycle 2 is active
with the dead-time setting for 2-phase faults.
After reclosing, there will be another, this time 3-phase, pickup and tripping within the following reclaim time.
Since cycle 2 is already complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The trip command
comes during the current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is active, with the dead time setting for 3-phase
faults.
[dw_arcbm2, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 917
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dwawebs3-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
• With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
• With 3-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 3-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup. If more
than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is
identical with the cycle number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
[dw_arcbs4, 1, en_US]
918 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
If the automatic reclosing function is restarted during the current reclaim time, there will be either a dynamic
blocking or other reclosing cycles will be executed. If other reclosing cycles are possible, there will be a dead
time start and the described process starts again.
After the end of a dynamic blocking, the automatic reclosing function switches back to idle state or it goes
into the state Static Blocking if the blocking condition is permanently present. In the following sections, the
individual function blocks are described in detail.
[lo_zyk_awe, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 919
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_bta_aus, 2, en_US]
920 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
• On Start with 3-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 3 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing outgoing pickup indication.
• On Start with 2-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 2 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication and at no time 3 phases.
• On Start with 1-phase pickup, it is recognized if only 1 phase was picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication.
For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications.
During operating modes with pickup, the pickup indications affect the selection of the dead times. During all
operating modes, the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision
during the reclaim time.
The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3-pole tripping.
Therefore, the outputs of the input logic always signal 3-pole operate indications.
[lo_btaanr, 1, en_US]
6.18.4.5 Start
In the Start function block, the automatic reclosing function is switched from the idle state AREC ready to the
state Dead time, see Figure 6-290. The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 921
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
• Clearing operate indications if none of the signal inputs for operate indications are active
• The circuit breaker signalizes the readiness for automatic reclosing typically through a binary input.
If the circuit breaker is not ready, the automatic reclosing function can be statically blocked. In this
situation, the automatic closing function is not in idle state automatic closing function ready. The
control of the circuit-breaker readiness is optional and can be turned off through settings, see also
chapter 6.18.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.18.4.17 Blockings.
• The circuit breaker must be 3-pole closed before the trip command. This condition is not considered if the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected to the protection device.
You can delay the transition to the dead-time state through the binary input >Dead Time Start Delay. As
long the corresponding binary signal is present, the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will not
be started. The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be set,
parameter Max. dead-time delay. Upon expiration of this time stage, that is, if the binary signal is
present longer than permitted, the automatic reclosing function will be blocked until the end of the binary
signal, additionally extended by another 0.5 s. See also chapter 6.18.4.17 Blockings.
[lo_gistar, 1, en_US]
922 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.18.4.6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1: with Tripping/with Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-291, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Accordingly, the automatic reclosing does not occur if Dead time aft.
1-pole trip is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective automatic reclosing
cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the associated
automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection
functions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only
after 1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults
that lead to 1-pole tripping.
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 923
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_auswir, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-291 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/With Action Time
6.18.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-292, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary
input. In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the
associated automatic reclosing cycle.
924 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming
general pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are
released through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no longer
active.
[lo_anrwir, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-292 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Pickup/With Action Time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 925
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.18.4.8 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-293, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing after 1-pole tripping if Dead
time aft. 1-pole trip is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective
automatic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can
block the associated automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection
functions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only
after 1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults
that lead to 1-pole tripping.
926 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_auowrk, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-293 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: With Tripping/Without Action Time
6.18.4.9 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4: with Pickup/without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-294, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary
input. In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the
associated automatic reclosing cycle.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 927
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_anowrk, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-294 Cycle Control with Operating Mode: with Pickup/without Action Time
928 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_1awezk, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-295 Stage Release for Protection Functions in the 1st Automatic Reclosing Cycle
The tripping stage release for higher automatic reclosing cycles is set to the beginning of the reclaim time for
rising edge close commands. Simultaneously, the cycle number is increased. The reset condition is identical to
the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. If the reduced dead time (RDT) mode is selected and no
additional reduced dead time occurs, the release of the 2nd cycle will be maintained, since it can be assumed
that the opposite end is open.
[lo_2awezk, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-296 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting with the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle
• Dead time after 1-pole tripping (only available for applications with 1-pole tripping)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 929
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
3-Pole Coupling of the Circuit-Breaker with 1-Pole Tripping and Implausible Circuit-Breaker Condition
With applications with 1-pole tripping, during the dead time there is a plausibility check between the assigned
trip command and the current flow in the open conductor. If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected pole-selectively, the plausibility check also occurs with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. More
information can be found in the chapter 6.18.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition.
The plausibility check determines whether the circuit-breaker poles that have not been switched off after a
1-pole trip command remain closed.
For an implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole coupling of the trip command for the circuit breaker is
executed, provided the 3-pole coupling of the trip command is permitted through the parameter (parameter
3-pole operate by 79). After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole automatic reclosing
cycles may follow.
930 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_pauaul, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-297 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Tripping
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 931
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_pauare, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-298 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: with
Pickup
932 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dw_bspffe, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-299 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Example for an Evolving Fault
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 933
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
For tripping through evolving faults, the entire dead time consists of the part of the dead time expired until
disconnecting the evolving fault for the 1-pole interruption plus the dead time for the fault together, see
Figure 6-300.
The dead time for evolving faults is started with the return of the operate indication or with the opening of all
3 circuit-breaker poles, provided the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected.
3-Pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker for Automatic Reclosing Function Blocking through Evolving Faults in a 1-Pole
Dead Time
If due to an evolving fault there is a blocking of the automatic reclosing function in the 1-pole dead time
without a protection function submitting a 3-pole trip command, for example, during an evolving-fault
detection with pickup, the automatic reclosing function can create a 3-pole trip command. Thus, the circuit
breaker will have 3-pole tripping in which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur.
[lo_fofeer, 1, en_US]
934 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
• through a synchrocheck if the circuit breaker was opened during the 3-pole dead time
• Through the readiness of the circuit breaker signaled through the binary input
• Through a binary input for delaying the close command (>Delay close cmd.)
The Close cmd. indication is a requirement for the assignment of the actual close command to the
circuit breaker.
The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time. If a dead-time prolonga-
tion is set, the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation. With the release of the closing
indication, the automatic reclosing function will switch to the reclaim time state.
[lo_einsha, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-301 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Closing Indication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 935
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_ls_voei, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-302 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Query of the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before
Closing
Synchrocheck
For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a synchrocheck should be executed and
which functionality should be used here, see Figure 6-303. You may only use the internal synchrocheck if the
device is connected to a voltage transformer.
Alternatively, you can also connect an external device with synchrocheck through a binary input.
The measuring request for the synchrocheck is placed if the optional test of the circuit-breaker readiness was
positive. The measuring request for the synchrocheck exists until the synchrocheck assigns the allowance for
the closure. If the allowance is not given within the set maximum dead time extension, the closure will be
cancelled through the blocking of the automatic reclosing function. The minimum duration of the measuring
request is 50 ms.
[lo_syncro, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-303 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Inquiry of the Synchronism
936 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
Close Command
As soon as the test of the circuit-breaker readiness and the synchrocheck deliver a positive result, the closing
indication will be created. It will be assigned for 100 ms. The actual close command is not created by the
automatic reclosing function, but rather from the circuit-breaker function block outside of the automatic
reclosing function. Here the set maximum duration of the close command is also considered.
In addition to the closing indication, additional indications will be created that describe the type of closure.
These include:
• Close command after 1-pole tripping in the 1st cycle (Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc)
• Close command after 3-pole tripping in the first cycle (Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc)
• Close command after 1-pole or 3-pole tripping starting with the second cycle (CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc)
• If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle, and
thus the entire automatic reclosing, was successful.
• If during the reclaim time another tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was
not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these cycles will be used to
continue the process. If, in contrast, the currently executed cycle was the last permissible cycle, the
automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful.
In both cases, the automatic reclosing function switches back to the idle state automatic reclosing function
ready.
• With operating modes with action time, the action times of all higher cycles are started with the
beginning of the new general pickup if these are not blocked. The cycle with the lowest cycle number is
selected, whose action time is not yet expired with the incoming operate indication. If no further cycles
are possible or if the action times of all possible cycles are expired before the operate indication, there
will be no further reclosing.
• With the operating modes without action time, the cycle following the current cycle will always be
selected in the set cycle. If this is blocked, the cycle following this one will be selected, etc. If no higher
cycles exist or if they are all blocked, there will be no further automatic reclosing.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 937
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_sperre, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-304 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Reclaim Time
938 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_lsbere, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-305 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Circuit-Breaker Readiness
The automatic reclosing function uses the information from the circuit breaker for the following purposes (see
Figure 6-306):
• After a 1-pole trip, a check is done during the dead time to determine whether the circuit-breaker poles
that were not switched off remain closed. The circuit-breaker position recognition is delivered from the
central circuit-breaker position recognition of the Circuit-breaker function group.
For implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole coupling of the trip command for the circuit breaker is
executed provided the settings allows this. After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole
automatic reclosing cycles may follow, see also chapter 6.18.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with
Tripping.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 939
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_lsuebe, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-306 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for Circuit-Breaker Condition and Supervision
6.18.4.17 Blockings
The Automatic reclosing function differentiates between 2 types of blockings, see Figure 6-307:
• Static blocking
• Dynamic blocking
Static Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if the function is switched on, but is not ready for
reclosing and also cannot be started as long as this blocking is present. The static blocking is signaled with the
indication Inactive.
The following conditions lead to static blocking:
Condition Indication
Manual closing of the circuit breaker, recognition through binary Inactive
input or internal device control.
The blocking is temporary, the duration can be set with the
parameter Block. time aft. man.close.
Circuit breaker not available for AREC, recognition through Inactive
binary input. This cause can be switched on or off via the param-
eter CB ready check bef.close.
940 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
Condition Indication
Circuit breaker not closed on 3-poles, recognition through binary Inactive
input.
This criteria is used if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected.
No reclosing cycle possible Inactive
Recognition due to the following causes:
Dynamic Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is blocked dynamically if a blocking condition occurs while an Automatic
reclosing function is running. The dynamic blocking is signalized with the indication Not ready.
After the occurrence of a dynamic blocking, it is checked in intervals of 0.5 s to see if the blocking can
be removed. If the blocking condition remains or if a different blocking condition occurs in the meantime,
the blocking will remain. If, in contrast, the cause of the blocking disappears, the dynamic blocking will be
removed if no general pickup or no tripping configured for the Automatic reclosing function start is available.
A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause.
The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking:
Condition Indication
If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released: Not ready
Block. by no cycle
• With operating modes with tripping:
If a 1-pole or 3-pole operate indication occurs at the auto-
matic reclosing function starting process, however, the
Automatic reclosing function does not start in accordance
with the parameterization for this type of tripping, the
respective dead time will be set to invalid.
• With operating modes with pickup:
If a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup indication occurs at
the automatic reclosing function starting process, but the
Automatic reclosing function may not be started in accord-
ance with the parameterization for this type of pickup.
If a protection function causes the Automatic reclosing function Not ready
to be blocked in accordance with the configuration Block. by protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 941
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
Condition Indication
If the maximum set waiting time for the delay of the start of Not ready
the dead time through the binary input >Dead time start Blk.by max. d.t. delay
delay expires without the binary input becoming inactive
during this period of time
If the synchrocheck is set and the synchronism conditions after Not ready
the expiration of the maximum dead-time extension are not Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
fulfilled before the assignment of the close command
If the query of the circuit-breaker readiness is switched on Not ready
directly before the close command through the parameter and Blk.by CB ready sup.
the maximum dead-time extension expires Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
If the closing indication is delayed through the binary input Not ready
>Delay close cmd. for so long until the maximum dead Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
time extension is exceeded before the assignment of the close
command
If an evolving fault occurs and the parameter Response to Not ready
evolv. faults is set to blocks 79 Blk. by evolving fault
If the starting-signal supervision time for the operate indication Not ready
starting from the AREC or the starting binary input expires. Blk.by strtsig.superv.
In this case, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed.
If after the start of the AREC a dead time is already running and a Not ready
blocking binary input is active, with the following binary inputs: Block. by binary input
>Blk. 1-pole AR, >Blk. 3-pole AR, >Blk. with 1-ph
pickup, >Blk. with 2-ph pickup, >Blk. with 3-ph pickup
If the maximum number of Automatic reclosing attempts is Not ready
reached and there is a trip command within the reclaim time Block. by max. cycles
With operating modes with action time: Not ready
If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles Blk.by action time exp
expire without a trip command
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by dead-line check
If during the dead time the required voltage criteria is not
fulfilled
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by loss of voltage
If during a running automatic reclosing cycle a failure of the
measuring voltage is determined.
After the completion of the automatic reclosing cycle, the
dynamic blocking becomes static blocking if there is a continued
failure of the measuring voltage.
942 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_blo_awe, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-307 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing: Blocking Logic as an Example for a 1-Pole Cycle (Static and
Dynamic Blocking)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 943
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
By displaying the message 79 permits 1-pole trip (see Figure 6-307 in Section 6.18.4.17 Blockings)
the automatic reclosing function signals the 1-pole tripping option of the circuit breaker within the associated
function group of the circuit breaker.
Subject to the following conditions, the message 79 permits 1-pole trip will neither be generated nor
reset:
• during the current 1-pole automatic reclosing function cycle if a blocking of the automatic reclosing
function occurs prior to the reclosing
• If an automatic reclosing function start is signaled with 2-pole tripping, for example, through external
binary inputs
• During operating modes with tripping, if there is a 1-pole trip indication and the automatic reclosing
function does not allow for 1-pole cycles in accordance with their parameterization.
• If during a 1-pole automatic reclosing function cycle the monitoring of the circuit-breaker pole recognizes
an implausible condition.
The automatic reclosing function may generate a 3-pole trip command (3-pole intertrip), if a blocking of the
automatic reclosing function occurs based on the above-mentioned causes, e.g., during the detection of an
evolving fault with pickup and blocking of evolving faults. Thus, the circuit breaker will have 3-pole tripping in
which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur, see also Chapter 6.18.4.11 Dead Time for
Operating Modes with Tripping.
• Each measured voltage is above the set threshold values Volt. thres.f. live line/bus
The phase-to-phase voltages are divided by √3 prior to comparison with the threshold value. Thus, the
phase-to-ground voltage UN√3 applies as the reference size for the parameterization.
• Exceeding the threshold is fulfilled for the set duration Voltage supervision time.
944 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
For the release of the close command with DLC, the following conditions apply:
• All measured voltages for the set duration Voltage supervision time are below the set threshold
Volt. thres.f. live line/bus.
• The automatic reclosing function is in the Closure state, the dead time has expired
• All measured voltages were not simultaneously below the set threshold values Voltage supervision
time for the set durationVolt.thres. f. dead line/bus during the dead time.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 945
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_vrkarc, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-308 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Functions of Reduced Dead Time and Dead-Line Check
6.18.4.20 Settings
946 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 947
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
948 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 949
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.18.5.1 Description
Description
It is also possible to set the dead times only at one line end and to configure the adaptive dead time at the
other end or ends. The requirements for this is that the voltage transformer aligned on the line side or a
possibility to transfer a close command to a remote line end exists.
Figure 6-309 shows an example with a voltage measurement. It is assumed that device I works with defined
dead times, while the adaptive dead time is configured in device II. It is important that the line is at least fed
from busbar A, so from the side with the defined dead times.
With the adaptive dead time, the automatic reclosing function at the line end II decides independently if and
when a reclosing is reasonable and permissible and when it is not. The criteria is the voltage of the line at
the end II, which is switched through after reclosing from end I. The reclosing at end II occurs, as soon as it
exists, so that the line from end I is set back under voltage. Basically, all phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
voltages are monitored.
With an implied short-circuit, the lines at the positions I, II, and III in the example are switched off. Position I is
switched on again after the dead time set there. At position III the reduced dead time (RDT) can be executed
with the appropriate configuration (see chapter 6.18.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time
(RDT) ) if an infeed is also available on busbar B.
If the short circuit has been cleared after successful reclosing, the line A-B from the busbar A will be set under
voltage through the position I. Device II recognizes this voltage and switches on to warrant adequate voltage
measurement time after a short delay The system incident is thus successfully cleared.
If the short circuit is not cleared after closure at position I, I will be switched to the fault again. At line end II,
now no healthy voltage will appear. The device here recognizes this and does not close again.
With multiple reclosing, the process may repeat if the reclosing is unsuccessful until one of the reclosings is
successful or a final disconnection occurs.
[dw_arcasp, 1, en_US]
As the example shows, the adaptive dead time brings along the following advantages:
• The circuit breaker at position II does not switch off again with a remaining fault and is protected through
this.
• With non-selective tripping by overreach at position III, no further disruption cycles may occur here
because the short-circuit path via busbar B and the position II remains disrupted even with multiple
reclosing.
• At position I, with multiple reclosing and even with a final tripping, an overlapping is allowed, because
the line at position II remains open and thus, no actual overreaching can occur at position I.
950 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
The adaptive dead time also contains the reduced dead time (RDT), because the criteria are the same. A
special setting of the reduced dead time (RDT) is unnecessary if the automatic reclosing function is used with
adaptive dead time (ADT).
6.18.5.2 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 951
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
952 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.18.6.1 Description
The function Automatic reclosing function with secondary arc detection (SAD41)
• Recloses after a shortened dead time in the case of 1-phase, temporary faults.
If the secondary arc extinguishes before the end of the dead time and no metallic fault occurs, the
automatic reclosing function activates sooner.
• Processes different algorithms to detect secondary arcs in parallel and weights them.
– After a 1-pole tripping, the close command can only be issued once the minimum dead time (see
the following figure) has expired.
– When the arc is extinguished, the close command is issued only after 100 ms to prevent reignition
of the arc.
– If the secondary arc is still burning after the expiry of the maximum dead time, a 3-pole tripping
occurs. This is either finally or - if instantiated - another automatic reclosing cycle is started.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 953
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_sad, 1, en_US]
When the circuit breaker is open in a 1-pole way and the automatic reclosing function is ready, the dead times
start (parameter: Min.dead time a. 1p.trip and Max.dead time a. 1p.trip) and the SAD cycle
runs. If the maximum dead time has expired and the voltage of the faulty loop is less than 2 % Vrated, the
indication (_:22621:306) No close: metallic flt. – no close command due to a metallic fault – is
issued for a duration of 50 ms and the SAD cycle is ended. If a secondary arc is detected within the maximum
dead time, the indication (_:22621:304) Sec. arc detected is issued. If the arc does not extinguish
during the maximum dead time, the indication (_:22621:305) No close: SA not off is issued for
50 ms and the SAD cycle is ended.
After a 1-pole tripping, a reclosing action can only be carried out once the minimum dead time (see the
following figure) has elapsed.
954 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dw_SAD-times_1-legend, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-311 Example 1: No Secondary Arc; Close Command after Expiry of the Minimum Dead Time
If a secondary arc is detected, an additional supervision time of 100 ms takes effect after the arc is extin-
guished. The close command is issued only then. This prevents reclosing in case of a possible reignition of the
arc. If no secondary arc is detected, this time is not relevant. If no metallic fault has been detected, the circuit
breaker is reclosed after the minimum dead time has expired. The following figures show examples of when
the close command is issued – depending on the burning duration of the arc.
[dw_SAD-times_2-legend, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-312 Example 2: Secondary Arc Burns Very Briefly (120 ms); Close Command after Expiry of the
Minimum Dead Time
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 955
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[dw_SAD-times_3-legend, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-313 Example 3: Secondary Arc Burns for 320 ms; Close Command after 420 ms (320 ms + 100 ms)
6.18.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Automatic Reclosing Function with Arc Detection
956 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
For detailed information on the function, refer to the chapters 6.18.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.18.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 957
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.18.6.3 Parameter
958 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.18.6.4 Information
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 959
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
960 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
6.18.7.1 Description
The operation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the function
mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function. In this function mode, the SIPROTEC protec-
tion functions create the trip command and the external reclosing device creates the close command.
The following figure shows the interaction of an external reclosing device with the functions of the SIPROTEC
5 device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 961
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_aweext, 1, en_US]
There are no setting parameters for operation with external automatic reclosing functions. The function
provides exclusively the following described binary inputs. The external reclosing device can thus have an
influence on the effects of the internal protection functions.
The following connection possibilities exist:
• From the external reclosing function, the signal >Release stages can be coupled so that the protec-
tion functions use special stages or zones for release. An example is the release of an overreaching zone
with a distance protection or the non-delayed tripping of an overcurrent protection stage in the 1st
reclosing cycle.
• For applications with 1-pole tripping, the external reclosing can provide the signal >1-pole trip
permitted, based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
• For applications with reclosing functions only with 1-pole faults and stage or zone releases through the
reclosing function can the signal >1-pole AR only be connected. The protection functions use this
information to allow the stage or zone release only affect 1-pole faults.
962 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
The internal automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be started via the pickup indications of the phases A, B, C
or via the trip command of an external protection device. The start depends on the operating mode set for the
AREC, refer to Parameter: 79 operating mode, Page 967.
For further information, refer to 6.18.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection
Functions .
Start of the Internal AREC via the Trip Command of an External Protection Device
If the internal AREC of the SIPROTEC 5 device is permitted to start via the trip command of an external
protection device, Siemens recommends the following procedure for 1-pole cycles:
Route the following output signals of the external protection device to the binary inputs of the SIPROTEC 5
device:
The general pickup is decisive for starting the action times. The general pickup is also necessary for the
internal AREC to detect evolving faults via pickup. In other cases, the signal >Gen. pickup for start is
not needed.
The trip commands decide whether the dead time is activated for 1-pole or 3-pole automatic reclosing cycles
or whether reclosing is blocked in case of a 3-pole tripping. This depends on the parameterization of the dead
times.
If 1-pole cycles are desired, Figure 6-315 shows an example for the interconnection between the internal
AREC of the SIPROTEC 5 device and an external protection device.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 963
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
To achieve 3-pole coupling of the external protection and to release its accelerated stages before reclosing,
you can route the following signals of the internal AREC to the binary outputs of the SIPROTEC 5 device:
If the external protection device allows it, you can also report the 1-pole and 3-pole tripping to the internal
AREC function instead of the 3 phase-selective trip commands. For this purpose, route the following signals to
the binary inputs of the SIPROTEC 5 device:
NOTE
i You must not route the phase selective signals, e.g. >Trip pole A for start, and the grouped
signals, e.g. >Trip 3-pole for start, simultaneously. Decide on one variant.
964 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_connect-example_with_ext-prot_1-3pole_reclose_AR, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-315 Connection Example, phase selective signals with External Protection Device for 1-/3-Pole
AREC; Parameter (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time
For 3-pole automatic reclosing cycles, it is sufficient to route the trip command (_:6601:519) >Trip
3-pole for start to a binary input of the SIPROTEC 5 device. You can release overreach stages of
the external protection via the signal (_:6571:302) Stage release prot.. Figure 6-316 shows an
example.
[lo_connect-example_with_ext-prot_3pole_reclose_AR, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-316 Connection Example with External Protection Device for 3-Pole AREC; Parameter
(_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time
Start of the Internal AREC via the Pickup Indications of an External Protection Device
Starting the internal AREC function via pickup indications is explicitly only possible with 3-pole tripping.
In SIPROTEC 5 devices capable of 1-/3-pole tripping, the parameter (_:2311:113) 1-pole operate
allowed must be set to no, refer to 5.5.3 Application and Setting Notes.
If the internal automatic reclosing function is started by the pickup and you want to distinguish the AREC
response, you must route the phase-selective pickup signals from the external protection to the binary inputs
of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The general trip command via the signal (_:6601:514) >General trip for start is sufficient for
tripping. Figure 6-317 shows connection examples.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 965
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[lo_connect-example_with_ext-prot_1pole-2pole-3pole_reclose_AR, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-317 Connection Example with External Protection Device for Fault-Type Dependent Dead Time –
Dead-Time Control by Pickup Signals of the Protection Device; Parameter 79 operating
mode = w.pickup, w. action time
For the automatic reclosing function, there are 3 functions available in the function library. In each function
group Circuit breaker, a function from the automatic reclosing function can be used.
Configure one of the following function specifications:
966 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-318 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI
General Settings
If you use the Cyclic automatic reclosing function, the Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead
time, or the Automatic reclosing function with secondary arc detection (SAD), set the following settings
under General.
There are no settings for the function Operation with external automatic reclosing function. The control
occurs exclusively through binary inputs and binary outputs.
• Default setting (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time
You can use the parameter 79 operating mode to determine which start criteria the automatic reclosing
function works with.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 967
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
968 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 969
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
NOTE
i With the use of an internal or external circuit-breaker failure protection at the same line branch, observe
the following:
• The start supervision time should be the same as the circuit-breaker failure protection time delay. With
this, you can make sure that in the case of a circuit-breaker failure followed by the tripping of the
busbar, no automatic reclosing will be executed.
(Note: An exception to this recommendation is described below.)
• During a 1-pole trip command repeat caused by the circuit-breaker failure protection, the start super-
vision time must be longer than the delay time for the 1-pole trip command repeat + the Minimum
operate time set in the circuit-breaker protection function. With this, it can be ensured that the trip
command is not connected before the 1-pole trip command repeat through the circuit-breaker failure
protection from the coupling of the trip command of the 3-pole automatic reclosing function.
• The start supervision time must be longer than the time delay for the tripping of the busbars if a
1-pole trip command for the line branch should not be coupled by the automatic reclosing function
or the circuit-breaker failure protection 3-pole before the circuit-breaker failure protection can trip the
busbars. With this case, the automatic reclosing function must be blocked with the trip command for
the busbars. This helps to avoid an automatic reclosing function being executed after the tripping of
the busbars for the line branch. The blocking of the automatic reclosing function can occur with a CFC
link to the binary input >Block function.
970 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
For detailed information about the functionality, refer to the chapters 6.18.4.11 Dead Time for
Operating Modes with Tripping, 6.18.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition and
6.18.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.
For applications with 1-/3-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the setting with trip if the system is
adequately interconnected.
If multiple individual lines in a row form a total transmission path, the setting with pickup may be better
suitable. With this setting, you can prevent 2 lines following each other from switching to 1-pole in different
conductors during evolving faults. The consequence of this fault would be the remainder of a single conductor
in the dead time for the overall transmission path. This is particularly important if power plants are coupled
through the overall transmission path.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 971
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
With the parameter Response to evolv. faults, you can determine how the automatic reclosing
function reacts to recognized faults.
For detailed information about the automatic reclosing function for faults, refer to chapter 6.18.4.13 Evolving-
Fault Detection During the Dead Time.
Parameter Value Description
blocks 79 The automatic reclosing function is immediately blocked until the discon-
nection of the fault.
For blockings through faults during the 1-pole dead times, you can force
a 3-pole coupling of the trip command through the automatic reclosing
function if you set the parameter 3-pole operate by 79 to yes.
strt. evol.flt.dead After the 3-pole trip command to clear up the fault, the automatic reclosing
time function starts a new 3-pole automatic reclosing function cycle with the set
Dead time aft. evolv. fault.
• Delay through binary input in order, for example, to give the leading automatic reclosing function priority
in a system with 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
Remember that longer dead times after 3-pole disconnection are only permissible if no stability problems
occur or if a synchronous test occurs before the reclosing.
For detailed information about the functionality, refer to chapter 6.18.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command .
972 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
For detailed information about the functionality, refer to the following parameters and to the chapters
6.18.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) and 6.18.5.1 Description.
For detailed information about the functionality, refer to chapter 6.18.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and
Reduced Dead Time (RDT) .
NOTE
i Use RDT or DLC only if the voltages of the line can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker. This
is only possible if the voltage transformer is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 973
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
The transmission delay prevents the device operating in the adaptive dead time mode on the opposite side
from closing unnecessarily if the local reclosing function remains unsuccessful. On the other hand, it must be
remembered that the line is not available for transporting energy as long as the opposite end is also closed.
Thus, the Send delay f. remot. close must be added to the dead time in order to determine the
system stability.
For detailed information about this functionality, refer to chapter 6.18.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command .
6.18.10 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing
Function
For the function of the cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be
deleted. You can add and delete more cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
Parameter: Dead time aft. 3-pole trip, Dead time aft. 1-pole trip
This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with tripping.
974 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
NOTE
i If you would like to permit the automatic reclosing function only after a 1-pole tripping of the circuit
breaker, set the dead time after the 3-pole trip (parameter dead time after 3-pole OFF) to ∞. If the
automatic reclosing function should only occur after a 3-pole trip, set the dead time after the 1-pole trip
(parameter Dead time aft. 1-pole trip) to ∞. Therefore, all protection functions will be tripped as
3-pole after each type of fault.
After a 3-pole trip of the circuit breaker, the system stability is priority. Since the switched off line cannot
develop synchronizing forces, only a short dead time is permitted in most cases. The usual duration is 0.3 s to
0.6 s. A longer period can be tolerated if a synchrocheck is carried out prior to reclosing. Even in radial systems
longer 3-pole dead times are possible. The dead time after a 1-pole trip of the circuit breaker must be long
enough to ensure the short circuit arc has extinguished and the ambient air is deionized. It is only then that
the automatic reclosing function can be successful. Due to the charge reversal of the conducted capacity, this
time is longer, depending on the length of the line. Standard durations are between 0.9 s and 1.5 s.
Parameter: Dead time aft.1ph. pickup, Dead time aft.2ph. pickup, Dead time aft.3ph. pickup
This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with pickup.
• The parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup applies to dead times after 1-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A, B, C, or A-Gnd, B-Gnd, C-Gnd
• The parameter Dead time aft.2ph. pickup applies to dead times after 2-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A-B, B-C, C-A, or A-B-gnd, B-C-gnd, C-A-gnd
• The parameter Dead time aft.3ph. pickup applies to dead times after 3-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A-B-C or A-B-C-Gnd
NOTE
i If you would like to avoid automatic reclosing during individual short-circuit types, please set the respective
dead times to oo (invalid).
Example:
After 1-phase short-circuits, the automatic reclosing function should occur after 1.2 sec. The automatic
reclosing function should not occur for 2-phase and 3-phase short circuits.
For this application, the parameters should be set as follows:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 975
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
With the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault, you can determine after which dead time the
automatic reclosing function should be executed, if based on an evolving fault during the current dead time, a
3-pole trip has occurred. For this 3-pole dead time, stability concerns for the system are also important. Often,
this dead time as well as the parameter (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip can be set.
Detailed information about the function during evolving faults during dead time are described in Chapter
6.18.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.
Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.18.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.18.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command .
976 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.18 Automatic Reclosing Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 977
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
The Overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Pickup
• Operate
978 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dw_ocp_ap1, 4, en_US]
[dw_ocp_bp_1, 3, en_US]
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 979
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.19.3.1 Description
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter
• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.
Logic
[lo_tolp_filter_stage, 1, en_US]
The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards, the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the values of the respective parameters
h(0), h(1), h(2), h(3), and h(4).
NOTE
i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.
The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes. Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.
980 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Overcurrent
protection, phases – advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the functional measured values are shown as ---.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 981
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Rated Frequency Filter Coefficients for Only Compensating the Device Amplitude Attenu-
ation
50 Hz h(0) = -0.002
h(1) = -0.012
h(2) = 0.045
h(3) = -0.110
h(4) = 1.151
60 Hz h(0) = -0.005
h(1) = -0.020
h(2) = 0.058
h(3) = -0.128
h(4) = 1.170
6.19.3.3 Settings
982 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.19.4.1 Description
[lo_ocp_3b1, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-322 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Basic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 983
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lo_ocp_umz_ad, 2, en_US]
984 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lo_ocp_3p1, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-324 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Phases) – Advanced
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 985
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
[dw_sgaocp, 1, en_US]
The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the current interface of thePhase function group. In the function group Line, the function Overcurrent
protection, phases is used.
986 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[sc_cmpo_int, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-326 Connection of the Measuring Point Current 1-Phase with the Neutral Point Input of the Line
Function Group
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and 6.19.9.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in 6.19.8.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 987
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Automatic reclosing
988 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
With the parameter Operate delay mode, you specify whether the operate delay continues to run or is
frozen during the dropout delay.
This setting is only valid if the parameter Dropout delay is not 0.
Parameter Value Description
Running dur. DO-delay During the dropout delay, the operate delay continues to run.
Frozen dur. DO-delay During the dropout delay, the operate delay is frozen. If the current exceeds
the threshold value again, the operate delay continues to run.
• Default setting (_:661:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s (for the 1st stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded
since overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Therefore, set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to
approx. 20 % above the maximum load that is expected.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Safety factor = 1.1
[fo_ocp_ph1, 2, en_US]
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection
function fails.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 989
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the begin-
ning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_ocp_002, 1, en_US]
[fo_ocp_003, 1, en_US]
The 3-phase short-circuit current at the end of the line is Isc end:
[fo_ocp_ph4, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[fo_ocp_004, 2, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to be
protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source
impedance and line impedance have different angles, you have to use complex numbers to calculate the
Threshold .
Parameter: I0 elimination
• The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group.
990 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.19.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 991
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
992 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 993
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
994 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.19.5.1 Description
The Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive pickup is essentially the same as the Stage
with definite-time characteristic curve.
The chapter describes only the extensions of the Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive
pickup.
You can find the description for the Stage with definite-time characteristic curve beginning with chapter
6.19.4.1 Description .
The Stage with definite-time characteristic curve and adaptive pickup has the following extensions:
• You can additionally limit the setting range for the Threshold parameter by user-specific minimum/
maximum values.
In that way, you can adapt the setting range for the Threshold parameter in a better way to the specific
application cases.
You can additionally define a minimum and maximum value for the setting range of the Threshold param-
eter and store it in various settings groups, for example. If you switch the settings groups, you can quickly and
flexibly adapt the setting range for the Threshold parameter to different application cases.
You can find more detailed information regarding settings group switching in chapter 3.12.1 Settings-Group
Switching.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 995
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
i You can find the description of the additional parameters of the stage in chapter 6.19.4.1 Description .
6.19.5.3 Settings
996 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 997
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
998 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 999
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.19.6.1 Description
[lo_ocp3b2, 3, en_US]
1000 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lo_ocp_amz_ad, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1001
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lo_ocp_3p2, 4, en_US]
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one 3-phase current measuring point is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
1002 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according
to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
[dw_ocp_3_mi, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1003
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dw_sgaocp, 1, en_US]
The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1-phase current measuring point that is connected
to the current interface of the Phase function group. In the function group Phase, the function Overcurrent
protection, phases is used.
[sc_cmpo_int, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-332 Connection of the Measuring Point Current 1-Phase with the Neutral Point Input of the Line
Function Group
1004 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
IC-elim. = IC - 1/3 IY
The phase current Iphx-elim. is necessary for the following protection process.
If the Method of measurement parameter is set to fundamental comp., the I0 elimination is operating.
The currents Iphx-elim. are available as functional values.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (only available in the Advanced function type, see
Influence of other functions via dynamic settings and 6.19.9.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in 6.19.8.1 Description .
• Automatic reclosing
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1005
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
1006 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
[fo_ocp_005, 2, en_US]
Parameter: I0 elimination
• The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1007
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
For special applications it is desirable if the current threshold is briefly exceeded, that this will not lead to the
pickup of the stage and starts fault logging or recording. If this stage is used as a thermal overload function,
that is considered a special application.
When using the Pickup delay parameter, a time interval is defined during which a pickup is not trigger if
the current threshold is exceeded.
For all short-circuit protection applications, this value is 0.00 s and is considered as a default.
Parameter: Reset
6.19.6.3 Settings
1008 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1009
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1010 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1011
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.19.7.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.19.6.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).
[dw_ocp_ken_02, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-333 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
1012 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.
• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.
NOTE
Parameter: Reset
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1013
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
6.19.7.3 Settings
1014 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1015
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1016 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1017
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.19.8.1 Description
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the blocking. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection
(see chapter 12.58 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
[lo_ocp3pha, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-334 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage
1018 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.19.9.1 Description
The parameters Threshold and Operate delay used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-335). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is
only available in function type Advanced.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1019
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lo_ocp_3dpa, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-335 Principle of the Dynamic Settings Exemplified by 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings of the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is
provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings
(Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be
active or not, this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for
example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these settings become dynamic, that is,
instantly active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal
becomes inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
1020 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
[lo_ocp3_awe, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1021
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the
protection stage and its blocking.
• AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of
AREC off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in 6.18.1 Overview of Functions.
[lo_ocp3kal, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-337 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the
influence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions.
[lo_ocp3bin, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you
must activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or
assign settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
1022 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing
describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent stage (1st stage) results from the time-grading schedule. Additionally, it is to
be used as fast stage before an automatic reclosing. Because a fast disconnection of the short-circuit current
takes priority over the selectivity prior to reclosing, the tripping delay can be set to 0 or a very small value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set
to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1023
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
• Pickup
• Operate
1024 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[dw_ocp_ga1, 5, en_US]
[dw_ocp_gb1, 4, en_US]
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
6.20.3.1 Description
Measured-Value Selection
The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1025
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lo_meas_value_02, 1, en_US]
Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase
+ IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option
that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Depending on the CT secondary rated current, the CT connection type, and the selected setting, the secondary
threshold setting range varies according to the following table.
Connec- Measured CT Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting
tion Value Terminal Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.:
Type Type ph = 1 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 1 A, IN = 5 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 5 A)
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
3ph + IN
urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
ured tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.002 A to 8.000 A
urement
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
3 * Protec- 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.010 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A 0.050 A to 175.00 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
3ph + IN-separate
1026 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.20.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1027
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.20.4.1 Description
[lo_ocp_gb1, 4, en_US]
1028 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lo_ocp_gr1, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1029
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
the main protection as short-circuit protection. With the appropriate parameterization (Emergency mode =
caused by binary input), the emergency mode can also be activated from an external source.
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see Influence of other functions via dynamic
settings and 6.20.8.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in 6.20.7.1 Description.
• Automatic reclosing
1030 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1031
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Default setting (_:751:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite-time overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 Ω/km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the
beginning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_ocp_002, 1, en_US]
[fo_ocp_003, 1, en_US]
The 1-pole short-circuit current at the end of the line is IscG end:
[fo_ocp_005, 1, en_US]
1032 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[fo_ocp_gr4, 3, en_US]
In case of short-circuit currents exceeding 1246 A (primary) or 10.39 A (secondary) there is a short-circuit on
the line to be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance, line impedance and zero-sequence impedance have very different angles, you have use complex
numbers to calculate the Threshold.
6.20.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1033
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
1034 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1035
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
1036 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1037
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
1038 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1039
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.20.5.1 Description
[lo_ocp_gr2, 6, en_US]
1040 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lo_ocp_gn2, 5, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1041
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
the main protection as short-circuit protection. With the appropriate parameterization (Emergency mode =
caused by binary input), the emergency mode can also be activated from an external source.
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI (Basic and
Advanced Stage)
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according
to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
[dw_ocp_gr3_mi, 1, en_US]
1042 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see Influence of other functions via dynamic
settings and 6.20.8.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
(Basic and Advanced Stage)
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in 6.20.7.1 Description.
• Automatic reclosing
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1043
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
1044 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
6.20.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1045
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
1046 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1047
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.20.6.1 Description
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent protection – advanced stage (see
chapter 6.20.5.1 Description ). The only differences are as follows:
1048 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
• The pickup and dropout behaviors of this stage are determined by the standard parameter Threshold
and, if necessary, by an additional parameter Threshold (absolute).
[dw_ocp_ken_02, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-347 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i The currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not extend
the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest character-
istic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve point do
not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest
characteristic-curve point.
If you want to change the pickup threshold of the stage without changing all points of the characteristic curve,
you can use the additional Threshold (absolute) parameter.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1049
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
You can set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be greater than 1.1 times the Threshold value.
Then the stage behaviors are as follows:
• The stage picks up when the measured current value exceeds the Threshold (absolute) value.
• The stage starts dropout when the measured current value falls short of the Threshold (absolute)
value by 0.95 times.
• For measured current values lower than the Threshold (absolute) value, no pickup takes place and
consequently the characteristic curve is not processed.
If you set the Threshold (absolute) parameter to be less than 1.1 times the Threshold value, the
pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold (absolute) parameter.
NOTE
Parameter: Reset
1050 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
NOTE
6.20.6.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1051
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
1052 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1053
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.20.7.1 Description
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when the detected 2nd harmonic component of the ground current exceeds a
threshold value. In case of a blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time
delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication.
If the blocking drops out and the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the
stage operates.
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection. Only if the central function Inrush-
current detection (see section 12.58 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
1054 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lo_ocp_grd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-348 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1055
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
6.20.8.1 Description
The Threshold and Operate delay settings used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically. Depending
on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is only available in function
type Advanced.
1056 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
[lo_ocp_gnd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-349 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings for the Threshold and the Operate
delay are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is provided with a
configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay
and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this
means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal
function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly
active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes
inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1057
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals are
not visible and are without effect.
[lo_ocp_grnd, 1, en_US]
1058 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage and its blocking.
• AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of
AREC off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate
delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in chapter 6.18.1 Overview of Functions.
[lo_ocp_kal_gnd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-351 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage for a cold-load pickup. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detec-
tion (Optional).
[lo_ocp_kal_gnd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-352 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage for a cold-load pickup. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1059
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in chapter 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detec-
tion (Optional).
[lo_ocp_bin_gnd, 1, en_US]
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the stage. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent-protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic
reclosing describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. It is to be used as fast
stage before an automatic reclosing. Because fast disconnection of the short-circuit current takes priority over
the selectivity prior to reclosing, the Operate delay parameter can be set to 0 or to a very low value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
1060 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.20 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set
to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage trips
instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time delay of
600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1061
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
• Ensures selective fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
• Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring
topologies
• Trips 1- or 3-pole
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurements.
The Directional overcurrent protection, phases function comes factory-set with 2 Definite time-overcur-
rent protection stages and with 1 Inverse time-overcurrent protection stage. In this function, the following
stages can be operated simultaneously:
• Pickup
• Operate
1062 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwdocp01-190912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If the device-internal functions listed in the following are present in the device, these functions can influence
the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
6.21.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1063
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lo_docp_02, 3, en_US]
Emergency Mode
You can use the Emergency mode parameter to define whether the stage operates as emergency overcur-
rent protection or as backup overcurrent protection. With the setting Emergency mode = caused by
main prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. With the
setting Emergency mode = caused by binary input, the emergency mode can also be activated from
an external source.
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel.
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see Section 8.3.2.1 Over-
view of Functions)
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
1064 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1065
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.21.4.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lodocp01-141013, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-356 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction.
Direction determination itself works across stages (see chapter 6.21.7.1 Description ).
1066 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Method of measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
Dropout delay
If the value falls below the dropout threshold, the pickup dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained
for the specified time. The tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires while the pickup is still
maintained, the stage operates.
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.21.3.1 Description)
• Via the dynamic settings functionality (see section Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings ,
Page 1068 and chapter 6.19.9.1 Description )
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.19.8.1 Description .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1067
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Automatic reclosing
1068 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:8311:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable (one
grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection function
fails.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in the chapters 6.21.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.21.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1069
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
For high-precision measurements, the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter can be reduced, for
example to 0.98. If you expect heavily fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you can increase the
setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
6.21.4.3 Settings
1070 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1071
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1072 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1073
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1074 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1075
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1076 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.21.5.1 Description
[lodocp03-120612-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-357 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.21.7.1 Description ).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1077
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve).
The dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
[DwDocpMin_040715-01, 1, en_US]
1078 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.21.3.1 Description)
• Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic
Settings , Page 1079 and chapter 6.19.9.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.19.8.1 Description .
• Automatic reclosing
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1079
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1080 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
Parameter: Reset
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1081
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.21.5.3 Settings
1082 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1083
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1084 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.21.6.1 Description
This stage is structured in the same way as the level with a directional, inverse-time characteristic curve. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1085
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the
characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve).
The dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
[dw_ocp_ken_02, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-359 Pickup and Dropout Behavior when Using a Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE
i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.
1086 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
NOTE
Parameter: Reset
NOTE
6.21.6.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1087
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1088 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1089
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.21.7.1 Description
General
Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the
direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements
involved perform direction determination independently. If one of the determined directions matches the set
direction, the stage picks up (see descriptions of the stage logic).
The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current and a reference
voltage.
1090 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dw_docp_02, 1, en_US]
The following table shows how measurands are assigned for direction-determination purposes in the event of
different types of fault.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1091
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Voltage Memory
Saved voltages are used if, when a 3-pole close-up fault occurs, the measuring voltages are not sufficient
for reliable direction determination. Insofar as and as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available
after the storage time (2 s) has elapsed, the detected direction is retained. If the memory does not contain
any voltages (when closing onto a short circuit, for example), the behavior of the stage is defined using the
Non-directional pickup parameter.
Direction Determination
As mentioned in the General section, the direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between
short-circuit current and reference voltage. To take different system conditions and applications into account,
the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit
current. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible. Figure 6-361 illustrates
the relationship based on a 1-phase ground fault in phase A. The short-circuit current IscA lags the short-circuit
voltage by the short-circuit angle φSC. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for measuring element A,
is rotated positively (counterclockwise) by the setting value of the Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter. In the scenario illustrated here, the rotation is +45o.
[dwdocp03-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse range; see Figure 6-362. The forward range
is calculated as ±88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. If the short-circuit current vector is located
in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on the
backward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
1092 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dwdocp04-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1093
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The influence of other functions via dynamic settings is described in the chapters 6.19.9.1 Description and
6.19.9.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) (Application and Setting Notes).
6.21.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends
1094 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dw_docp_05, 1, en_US]
[dw_docp_06, 1, en_US]
The direction determination of directional overcurrent protection can be used to implement directional
comparison protection for cable runs with infeed at both ends. Directional comparison protection is used
for the selective isolation of a faulted line section (for example, subsections of closed rings). Sections are
isolated in fast time, that is, they do not suffer the disadvantage of long grading times.
This technique requires that directional information can be exchanged between the individual protection
stations. You can implement this information exchange using a communication channel (protection interface
or IEC 61850 GOOSE) or with pilot wires for signal transmission via an auxiliary voltage loop.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1095
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Protection Principle
The protection principle is shown in Figure 6-365. 2 devices (one at the start of the line and the other at the
end of the line) work together in each line section. The information fault in forward direction is transferred
between them. A directional definite time-overcurrent protection level is in operation in both devices in the
forward direction (1st level). However, this level is not enabled in the idle state. The level is only released
when the information fault in forward direction is received from the opposite end. If the enabled level also
defines the fault in the forward direction, the fault must be on this line section and the level trips immediately.
As this protection principle works with an enable procedure (and not with a blocking procedure), there is no
need to delay the level.
A second directional definite time-overcurrent protection stage with standard time grading works in parallel
with the first stage as a selective backup stage. This ensures full selectivity of protection in the following
situations:
• Infeed at one end or weak infeed at one end: In this case, no release signal is generated.
• Failure of the communication route: In this case, the release signal is not transmitted.
To provide selective protection in fast time for busbars between the line sections also, you can combine this
protection principle with the principle of reverse interlocking. This principle is not discussed in further detail in
this document.
[dw_docp_07, 2, en_US]
If you are using a communication channel, the protocol-transmission methods detect if the channel is inter-
rupted. If you are using pilot wires, we recommend operation based on a closed-circuit connection. The device
uses a function chart to check and indicate if the binary input is dead for an unexpectedly long period. In
contrast with the blocking procedure, overfunction is not possible if communication is lost. Therefore, a loss of
communication is not critical where this procedure is concerned, although it must be detected and indicated.
Directional comparison protection can also be implemented as a blocking procedure. This procedure works
under all system switching states, i.e. also with infeed at one end (or weak infeed). However, to use it
you must delay the stage (typically by 100 ms) so that the blocking signal is received in time under all
circumstances. It is also essential that you monitor the communication channel to avoid overfunction in the
event of failure followed by a system incident.
• The Directional comparison and Release via input signal parameters of the first stage
must be set to yes. This is so that the first stage is only released if the >Release delay & op. input
signal is active. Furthermore, the direction is indicated if a threshold value is exceeded.
1096 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.21 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• The first stage can be set without a time delay. The second stage has to be graded
• The information forward from the Direction signal in the first stage must be transmitted to the
opposite end. The routing is determined by the type of transmission
• A function chart has to be implemented at the receive end to link the received (forward information)
and release signals, dependent upon the type of transmission.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1097
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
• Can be applied when the zero-sequence current or negative-sequence current should not influence the
tripping, for example, on the tertiary delta winding of an auto transformer
You can find a typical application scenario in the chapter 6.22.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
The Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current measurement.
The function comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time positive-sequence overcurrent protection stages.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
• Pickup
• Operate
[dw_PSP_structure, 1, en_US]
If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.
1098 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
6.22.3.1 Description
Logic
[lo_PSP_definite, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-367 Logic Diagram of the Stage Definite-Time Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
Method of Measurement
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the posi-
tive‑sequence current is calculated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1099
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
Application Example
The Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function is applied to the tertiary delta winding of the auto
transformer as shown in the following figure.
Short circuits on the delta winding must be detected. The stage should be as sensitive as possible but must
not pick up in case of faults in the circuits connected to the low-voltage side of the auxiliary transformer. A
single Positive-sequence overcurrent protection stage without time delay is applied and is connected with
the CTs marked in the following figure. When the stage operates, both the high-voltage and low-voltage sides
of the auto transformer will trip.
[dw_PSP_application_example, 1, en_US]
During ground faults on the high-voltage side (220 kV) or low-voltage side (110 kV) of the auto transformer,
large currents circulate in the delta winding. This circulating current is a pure zero-sequence current. The
protection function applied to the delta winding must not respond to this zero-sequence current. For this
purpose, the Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function is applied.
In this application example, there is no circuit breaker on the delta winding, and the load on the delta winding
is directly connected via the 500-kVA auxiliary transformer.
The application data in this application example is as follows:
Application Data Value
Rated apparent power of the auto transformer 300 MVA
Rated apparent power of the auxiliary transformer (Srated, aux) 500 kVA
Short-circuit voltage of the auxiliary transformer (uk-aux) 12 %
Rated apparent power of the delta winding 30 MVA
Rated voltage of the delta winding (Vrated, delta) 22 kV
Connected load on the delta winding 500 kVA
Current transformer ratio in the delta winding (RatioI) 800 A/1 A
Generally, for the delta winding, the short-circuit current is substantially larger than the rated current, and
the expected maximum load current is substantially smaller than the rated current. Therefore, you only
need to consider the short-circuit current when determining the pickup threshold of the Positive-sequence
overcurrent protection function.
As there is no circuit breaker between the delta winding and the connected auxiliary transformer, the
pickup threshold of the Positive-sequence overcurrent protection function is graded against the maximum
short-circuit current due to a short circuit on the low-voltage (400 V) side of the auxiliary transformer. The
1100 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
maximum fault current for a fault on the low-voltage side of the auxiliary transformer must therefore be
determined to establish the pickup threshold.
To determine the pickup threshold (setting of the Threshold parameter) of the stage, the following calcula-
tions must be carried out:
• Maximum short-circuit current (ISC, max) on the high-voltage side of the auxiliary transformer due to a
short circuit on the low-voltage (400 V) side
[fo_max_fault_current, 1, en_US]
[fo_prim_threshold, 1, en_US]
• Secondary-current pickup threshold (I1stage1, sec), which is the setting of the Threshold parameter
[fo_sec_threshold, 1, en_US]
• Default setting (_:20581:6) Operate delay = 0.50 s (for the 1st stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
As time coordination with other protection functions is not required, you can set the Operate delay
parameter to a rather small value of 0.03 s.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1101
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
6.22.3.3 Settings
1102 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1103
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
6.22.4.1 Description
Logic
[lo_PSP_inverse, 2, en_US]
Method of Measurement
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the posi-
tive‑sequence current is calculated.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according
1104 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1105
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you stabilize the stage against tripping due to
transformer-inrush currents. If transformers are parts of the protection zones, set this parameter to yes.
6.22.4.3 Settings
1106 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.22 Positive-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1107
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
• Instantaneous tripping when switching onto an existing fault, for example, if a grounding switch is
closed.
• Instantaneous breaking of extremely high currents above the highest overcurrent protection stage.
• Trips 1- or 3-pole.
• Stage with release method via protection interface (only applicable if the device is equipped with a
protection interface)
The function with the stage for the standard release procedure is factory-set.
[dw_ihc_str, 1, en_US]
1108 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Logic
[lo_hlore1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-371 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Standard Release Method
Activation
Using the (_:3961:101) Activation parameter, you set the conditions under which the stage is released.
• on CB closure
With this procedure, the stage is released only if the circuit breaker is about to be closed (the CB is open) or
if the circuit breaker is being closed or the binary input signal>release is active. The way the Rel. by CB
switch on signal is generated is described in chapter 5.1.4.7 Closure Detection.
• always active
The stage is always released and is thus independent of closing of the circuit breaker switch and from the
binary input signal >release.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1109
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
The stage is released only if the binary input signal >release is active.
Parameter: Activation
Parameter: Threshold
The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers. For this reason, set the
Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage. Thus, use this stage only if
current grading over the protected object is possible, that is, for transformers, shunt reactors or long lines with
low source impedance. In other cases, deactivate the stage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation example for current grading of a 110 kV overhead line measuring 150 mm2
s (length) = 100 km;
R1/s = 0.21 Ω/km;
X1/s = 0.43 Ω/km
Since the stage is non-directional, the calculation must consider the maximum short-circuit power at the start
of the line or at the opposite end:
Ssc" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, because the function can respond to the 1st peak value)
Current transformer: 600 A/5 A
The line impedance ZL and the minimum source impedance ZS are calculated on this basis:
[fo_glchzv, 1, en_US]
1110 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
The maximum 3-phase short-circuit current I"sc flowing through is (at a source voltage of 1.1 VN):
[fo_glchik, 1, en_US]
[fo_glnste, 1, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 1,496 A (primary) or 12.5 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to
be protected. It can be disconnected immediately.
NOTE
i The calculation was performed with absolute values, which is accurate enough for overhead lines. A
complex calculation is required only if the source impedance and the line impedance have extremely
different angles.
This stage can be applied only if the device is equipped with a protection interface.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1111
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Logic
[lo_hinre1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-372 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Release Procedure via Protection
Interface
Release
If one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the stage is released (the internal Release signal is present) (for
further information, see chapter 5.1.4 Process Monitor (FG Line)):
• No voltage has yet been applied to the protected object, which means that the remote circuit breakers
are open, or
NOTE
i To enable internal release of the stage, the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed
of the circuit-breaker position (the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices; the
respective binary input signals must be routed).
1112 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
Parameter: Threshold
Select the value high enough for the protection not to pick up on the RMS value of the inrush current that
occurs when the local circuit breaker is closed. You do not have to consider short-circuit currents flowing
through, because the stage is released only if the circuit breakers are opened at all remote ends of the
protected object or the release was caused by the binary input >release.
6.23.7 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1113
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.23 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
1114 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.24.1 Description
The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and operate
indications of the following functions:
• Pickup
• Operate
The pickup and operate indications are output, where present, with direction information.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1115
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.24 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
[lo_oc_grin, 4, en_US]
1116 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
• Detects and monitors the current measured in a transformer neutral point grounding
• Detects and monitors the circulating current between the neutral points of 2 capacitor banks
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function is used in protection function groups with 1-phase current
measurement. 2 function types are available:
• 1 Fast stage
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase – basic, the following stages can operate simultane-
ously:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1117
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[dw_ocp_1pa, 4, en_US]
[dw_ocp_1pb, 3, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the stages against
issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush-currents.
1118 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.25.3.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lo_inv_ocp, 3, en_US]
Method of measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1119
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
• Default setting (_:12661:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
6.25.3.3 Settings
1120 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1121
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.25.4.1 Description
[lo_def_ocp, 3, en_US]
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according
to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
1122 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1123
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
6.25.4.3 Settings
1124 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1125
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.25.5.1 Description
Figure 6-378 Logic Diagram of the Logarithmic Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the Inverse-time overcurrent protection stage
(see chapter 6.25.4.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For further functionality, refer to chapter
6.25.4.1 Description .
1126 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Operate Curve
If the function picks up, the logarithmic inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. A time value Top is
calculated for every input value exceeding 95 % of the pickup value. An integrator accumulates the value
1/Top. If the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the stage operates.
The curve used to calculate the time value Top is shown in the following figure. The Threshold multi-
plier parameter defines the beginning of the characteristic curve. The Max. time of the curve
determines the initial value of the characteristic curve. The Time dial parameter changes the slope of the
characteristic curve. At high currents, the Min. time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time
limit.
Where
Tmax Maximum time of the curve (parameter Max. time of the curve)
Td Time dial (parameter Time dial)
Top Operate time
I 1-phase current
Ithresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
Imul Threshold multiplier (parameter Threshold multiplier)
If the calculated time is less than Tmin (parameter Min. time of the curve), Tmin is used.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1127
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Parameter: Threshold
EXAMPLE
1128 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
With the parameter Additional time delay, you set an additional current-independent time delay. This
additional delay is intended for special applications.
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 s so that it has no effect.
6.25.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1129
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.25.6.1 Description
The User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage is only available in the advanced func-
tion type.
This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only
difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.
[dw_ocp_ken_02, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-380 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
1130 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
NOTE
i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do
not extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.
NOTE
Parameter: Reset
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1131
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
NOTE
6.25.6.3 Settings
6.25.7.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
The fast stage is only available in function type Advanced.
1132 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[lo_ocp_1phs, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1133
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.25.7.3 Settings
6.25.8.1 Description
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The Blk. w. 2nd harm. 1ph det. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when the detected 2nd harmonic component of the 1-phase current exceeds a
threshold value. In case of a blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time
delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication.
If the blocking drops out and the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the
stage operates.
The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite-time overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection. Only if the central function Inrush-
current detection (see section 12.58 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the blocking be set.
1134 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[lo_blk_by_inrush_ocp_1phase, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-382 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite-Time Overcurrent Protection Stage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1135
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.25.9.1 Description
With the high-impedance method, all current transformers operate in parallel at the limits of the protection
range on a common, relatively high-impedance resistor R, the voltage of which is measured.
The current transformers must be of the same type of construction and have at least one core of their own for
the High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection. Furthermore, they must have the same transfer ratio
and approximately the same knee-point voltage.
The high-impedance principle is especially suited for ground-fault detection in grounded networks at trans-
formers, generators, motors, and shunt reactors.
The left part of Figure 6-383 shows an application example for a grounded transformer winding or a grounded
motor/generator. The example at the right shows an ungrounded transformer winding or an ungrounded
motor/generator. In this example, it is assumed that the network is grounded at a different point.
[dw_himpef, 2, en_US]
1136 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
briefly saturated, it becomes a low-impedance during the time of the saturation and forms a low-impedance
shunt to the high-impedance resistor R. The high resistance of the resistor thus has a stabilizing effect
(so-called resistor stabilization).
[dw_prhimp, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-384 Principle of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impedance Principle
With a ground-fault in the protection range (on the right in Figure 6-384), a neutral-point current IY flows in
any case. The magnitude of the residual current in the phase currents depends on the grounding conditions in
the rest of the network. A secondary current corresponding to the entire short-circuit current attempts to flow
via the resistor R. But since this resistor is high-impedance, a high voltage arises there which causes the satura-
tion of the current transformers. The effective voltage at the resistor therefore corresponds approximately to
the knee-point voltage of the current transformers.
The resistor R is thus dimensioned in such a way that even the smallest ground-fault current to be detected
leads to a secondary voltage that corresponds to half of the knee-point voltage of the current transformers
(see chapter 2.5.4).
Further information can be found at Sensitivity view for high-impedance ground-fault differential protection
in chapter 6.25.9.2 Application and Setting Notes .
[dw_anedif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-385 Connection Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impe-
dance Principle
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1137
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
As a protection against overvoltages, it is important that you connect the device directly at the grounded side
of the current transformer. The high voltage at the resistor is thus kept away from the device.
In a similar manner, the high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection for generators, motors, and shunt
reactors is used. With auto transformers, you must connect the upper-voltage side and low-voltage side
current transformers and neutral-point transformer in parallel.
The method can be realized for each protected object. As busbar protection, the device, for example, is
connected via the resistor to the parallel connection of the transformers of all feeders.
[fo_ukniep, 1, en_US]
Rated current, rated power, and overcurrent factor are found on the name plate of the transformer.
EXAMPLE
Current transformer with the following data on the name plate: 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA
You can read the following transformer data with this data:
Irated = 5 A (out of 800/5)
n = 10 (out of 5P10)
Prated = 30 VA
The internal resistance is frequently to be found in the test report of the transformer. If it is not known, it can
be approximately determined by a direct current measurement at the secondary winding.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of the knee-point voltage
Current transformer 800/5; 5P10; 30 VA with Ri = 0.3 Ω
[fo_ukp5aw, 1, en_US]
1138 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[fo_ukp1aw, 1, en_US]
Besides the current-transformer data, the resistance of the longest connection line between transformer and
device must be known.
[dw_vebhdi, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-386 Simplified Connection Diagram of a Layout for High-Impedance Restricted Ground-Fault
Protection
[fo_istabl, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
For the 5 A transformer as above with VKP = 75 V and Ri = 0.3 Ω
Longest connection line = 22 m with 4 mm2 cross-section; that corresponds to Ra = 0.1 Ω
[fo_isl5aw, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1139
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
[fo_isl1aw, 1, en_US]
[fo_berecr, 1, en_US]
EXAMPLE
For the 5 A transformer as above
Desired pickup value Ipick = 0.1 A (corresponds to 16 A primary)
[fo_ber5aw, 1, en_US]
[fo_ber1aw, 1, en_US]
The series resistor R must be designed for a minimum continuous load Pcontinuous.
[fo_pdau5a, 1, en_US]
[fo_pdau1a, 1, en_US]
Further, the series resistor R must be designed for a fault current lasting approximately 0.5 s. This time is
usually sufficient for fault clearing through backup protection.
1140 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
The thermal stress of the series resistor depends on the voltage VRMS,stab that is present during an internal fault.
It is calculated according to the following equations:
[fo_usta5a, 1, en_US]
[fo_usta1a, 1, en_US]
IK,max,int corresponds to the maximum fault current here in the case of an internal fault.
5-A current transformer 800/5 with 40 kA primary corresponds to IK,max,int = 250 A secondary.
1-A current transformer 800/1 with 40 kA primary corresponds to IK,max,int = 50 A secondary.
This results in a temporary load for the series resistor over 0.5 s of:
[fo_p05s5a, 1, en_US]
[fo_p05s1a, 1, en_US]
Observe that with the selection of a higher pickup value Ipick, the resistor value must be lowered and therefore
the dissipation rises sharply.
The varistor (see following figure) must be sized such that it remains high impedance up to the knee-point
voltage, for example:
[dw_anedif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-387 Connection Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection According to the High-Impe-
dance Principle
Even with unfavorable wiring, the maximum occurring voltage peaks do not exceed 2 kV for safety reasons.
When for performance reasons, several varistors must be connected in parallel, give preference to types with
flat characteristic curves, in order to avoid an unbalanced load. Siemens therefore recommends the following
types by METROSIL:
600A/S1/S256 (k = 450, β = 0.25)
600A/S1/S1088 (k = 900, β = 0.25)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1141
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
In the example, set the pickup value of the first Definite-time overcurrent protection stage (setting
Threshold) to 0.1 A for 5-A transformers or 0.05 A for 1-A transformers. No further protection stages are
needed. Delete these or switch them off. Set the Operate delay setting to 0 s.
If several current transformers are connected in series, for example, with use as busbar protection with several
feeders, the magnetization currents of the transformers switched in parallel can no longer be neglected.
In this case, add up the magnetization currents at half of the knee-point voltage (corresponds to the set
Threshold). These magnetization currents reduce the current through the resistor R. Thus, the actual pickup
value is correspondingly higher.
6.25.10.1 Description
Tank leakage protection records short-circuits to ground – including high-impedance ones – between a phase
and the tank of a transformer. The tank is thus insulated, or at least grounded with high impedance. The tank
must be connected with a line to ground. The current that flows through this line is fed to the protection
device. If a short-circuit to ground occurs in a tank, a fault current (tank current) flows to substation ground
via the ground connection.
The function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase detects the tank current. If the tank current exceeds the set
Threshold, the function Overcurrent protection, 1-phase generates an operate indication. Depending on
the set Operate delay, the transformer is tripped immediately or time-delayed on all sides.
For tank protection, a sensitive, 1-phase current measuring input is used.
[dw_prkess, 2, en_US]
1142 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
• Can be used for special network conditions where the overcurrent pickup level should be decreased
depending on the fault voltage
• Can be used for generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals and the
overcurrent pickup should be kept depending on the fault voltages
The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurement.
The function Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection comes with the following factory-set stages:
[dw_stuvol_release, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1143
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.26.3.1 Description
[lo_ocp_volt-dependent, 3, en_US]
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
1144 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[dw_volpic, 1, en_US]
With:
V = Measured phase-to-phase voltage
Vrated = Rated voltage (parameter Rated voltage in the function block General of the protec-
tion function group)
PU sett. = Pickup threshold setting (parameter address: _11491:3)
PU(V) = Applied pickup threshold according to the voltage influence
The minimum current pickup threshold value is 0.03 * Irated. This value cannot be decreased any further even
not by voltage-dependent pickup threshold factor.
Decreasing the pickup threshold is carried out phase-selectively. The following table shows the assignment of
voltages to current-carrying phases.
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1145
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according
to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.19.8.1 Description .
1146 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1147
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been
prepared for the electrical power system.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the
parameter Time dial at 1 (default setting).
6.26.3.3 Settings
1148 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.26.4.1 Description
[lo_ocp_volt-release, 3, en_US]
This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse-time overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage (see
6.26.3.1 Description). The only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the operate
curve.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1149
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Measuring-Element Release
When the controlling voltage drops below the setting Undervoltage threshold, the respective measuring
element is released.
The release of the measuring elements is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to current-
carrying phases is shown in Figure 6-391.
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
1150 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.26.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1151
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1152 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.26.5.1 Description
[lo_seal-in, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-393 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-in
Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1153
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit.
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-seal-
in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block VT miniature CB, which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be used to control the measuring-voltage failure
detection. The Undervoltage seal-in remains unaffected if the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure is switched off.
Parameter: Threshold
1154 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[fo_ocp_uvsi_threshold, 1, en_US]
[fo_ocp_uvsi_seal-in, 1, en_US]
6.26.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1155
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
1156 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.26.6.1 Description
[lo_seal-in_rel, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-394 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Undervoltage
Seal-in, Part 1
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1157
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
[lo_seal-in_rel2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-395 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released Undervoltage
Seal-in, Part 2
Voltage Release
In addition to the current criterion with undervoltage seal-in, a voltage-released logic must be present
to issue the indication Pickup. The voltage-released logic monitors the negative-sequence voltage and
phase-to-phase voltages respectively for detecting unsymmetrical faults and symmetrical faults. With the
voltage-released logic, the setting value of the parameter Threshold can be reduced in a certain range and
the reliability and sensibility of this function can be improved correspondingly.
Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit.
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-seal-
in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block VT miniature CB, which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be used to control the measuring-voltage failure
detection. The Undervoltage seal-in remains unaffected if the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure is switched off.
1158 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
Parameter: Threshold
[fo_ocp_uvsi_threshold, 1, en_US]
[fo_ocp_uvsi_seal-in, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1159
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
6.26.6.3 Settings
1160 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.26 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1161
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
2 functions are available for ground-fault detection: a directional one and a non-directional one.
The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 67Ns) serves:
• For directional detection of fast extinguishing transient ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded
systems
• Pickup
• Operate indication
1162 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dw_str_GFP, 6, en_US]
• Pickup
• Operate indication
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1163
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dw_SGFP_u4, 5, en_US]
1164 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.3.1 Description
Logic
[lo_gfp_ger, 8, en_US]
Figure 6-398 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Directional Function
[lo_gfp_non, 6, en_US]
Figure 6-399 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Non-Directional Function
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1165
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dw_ph_I_N_U0, 1, en_US]
Network Topology
The parameter Network topology parameter is only used in the Directional transient ground-fault stage.
With this parameter, the algorithm of the directional transient ground-fault stage adopts its processing of an
operational 3I0.
Fault-Extinction Detection
The extinction of the fault is characterized by the fact that the zero-sequence voltage subsides. Depending
on the system conditions and fault characteristics, this process can last several 100 ms. If a continuously
falling zero-sequence voltage is detected during the set time Decay time V0, then the fault is considered
extinguished. The signal Flt. extinction det. is issued.
Thus, the possibility exists, for example, to block the stage 3I0> with cos φ or sin φ measurement directly
after the fault extinction, in order to avoid an overfunction during the subsiding process with a very sensitive
setting of the stage.
Angle-Error Compensation
The high reactive power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air-gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core balance
current transformer. Using the characteristic shown in the following figure, the device approaches the angle
error of the core balance current transformer with sufficient precision.
1166 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dw_erdwdl, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-401 Correction of the Transmission Characteristic Curve of a Core Balance Current Transformer
NOTE
i The Ground fault indication in the general stage must be routed into the ground-fault log. If not, you
can meet a flood of ground-fault logs when an intermittent ground fault occurs.
Ground-Fault Log
Ground faults can be recorded in a designated buffer, the ground-fault log. As long as the Operate &
flt.rec. blocked parameter is set to yes, all indications routed into the ground-fault log are written in
the ground-fault log.
The criterion for opening the ground-fault log is the raising of any indication which is routed to the ground-
fault log, for example, the indication Ground fault . The criterion for closing is the clearing of all routed
indications.
Related Topics
You can find general notes on the ground-fault login chapter Indications under 3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1167
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
If the ground current is measured via a sensitive input and the measured value exceeds the measuring range
of 1.6 ⋅ Irated, the function switches from the measured IN value to the calculated 3I0 value and the 3I0 values
are displayed.
Group-Indication Blocking
Figure 6-402 Logic Diagram of the Group-Indication Blocking of the Directional and Non-Directional Func-
tions
By setting the Block. group indications parameter to yes, the following indications are blocked:
• The group indications of the function and the corresponding group indications of the function group
• The trip command from the function Sensitive ground-fault detection to the FB Circuit breaker
Fault recording and logging are not affected by the setting.
1168 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• The group indications of the function and the corresponding group indications of the function group are
blocked.
Consequently, the group-indications of the function group are then related to short-circuit protection
functions and can be forwarded to a station controller in the meaning of short-circuit protection.
• The trip command from the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function to the FB
Circuit breaker is blocked.
Fault recording and logging are not affected by the setting.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1169
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.3.3 Settings
1170 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.4.1 Description
Logic
[lo_gfp_3i0_stufe, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1171
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[lo_gfp_3i0f, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-404 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with Cos φ or Sin φ Measurement
1172 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
Depending on the setting of the Connection type parameter of the measuring point I-3ph as well as
the current terminal block used, the following different linearity and settings ranges result in addition to the
common application:
Connection Type of the Current Threshold 3I0/IN Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
Measuring Point I-3ph Settings Range (Secon-
dary) 42
3-phase Calculated 3I043 4 × protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 × protection, 1 × sensi- 0.030 A to 35.000 A
tive
4 × measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase + IN Measured IN44 4 × protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN-separate 4 × measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep Measured IN and calculated 3 × protection, 1 × sensi- 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3I0 when IN > 1.6 A tive
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep Measured IN 4 × protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep 4 × measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3 × protection, 1 × sensi- 0.001 A to 1.600 A
tive
With the use of the function within a 1-phase function group and therefore at a 1-phase measuring point
I-1ph, the following different linearity and settings ranges result:
Measuring Point Current Threshold Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
I-1ph Settings Range (Secon-
dary) 45
Measured Sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to harmonics, especially
the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (residual) current.
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The
direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir.
determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result form the direction deter-
mination is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its threshold value.
42 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. For a secondary rated current of 5 A, the values must be multiplied by 5.
43 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
44 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.
45 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. For a secondary rated current of 5 A, the values must be multiplied by 5.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1173
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for
the cos-φ direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight lines from 0
(parameter φ correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an
arc-suppression-coil-ground system where the variable 3I0 ⋅ cos φ is decisive for the direction determination.
[dw_cosphi, 3, en_US]
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is basically the reference value for the real axis. The axis of symmetry of the
direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0reactive axis for this example. For the direction determina-
tion, basically the portion of the current vertical to the set direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry)
is decisive (3I0 dir.). In this example, this is the active portion 3l0active of the current 3l0. The current 3l0dir.
(here = 3I0active) is calculated and compared with the setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. If
the current 3I0 dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the current 3I0 dir. exceeds
the negative setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in the figure. With this, the direction determination is secured in case
of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45°.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a rotation of +45°.
1174 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dw_phicor, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-406 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with Cos φ Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to sin φ and the φ correction parameter to 0,
the symmetry axis of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0active axis and the V0 axis.
Since the portion of the current vertical to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive
(3l0dir.), here, the current 3l0reactive is included in the direction determination. If the current 3l0dir. (here =
3I0reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., the direction is forward.
If the current 3l0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the
direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1175
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dw_sin_phi, 4, en_US]
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
1176 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the
Blk. after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault
extinction.
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1177
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
During intermittent ground faults, stages designed for detecting permanent ground faults (based on contin-
uous RMS measurement) tend to generate a flood of signals and probably even temporary wrong directional
information. This can be avoided by blocking these stages in case of an intermittent ground fault.
If intermittent ground faults in your network are probable, Siemens recommends enabling the blocking.
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., 3I0> threshold
value
1178 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1179
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.4.3 Settings
1180 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.5.1 Description
Overview
Ground faults occurring in arc-suppression-coil-ground systems often extinguish a short time after the igni-
tion, mostly within a few milliseconds. Such transient occurrences are called transient ground faults. In order
to detect the ground-fault direction, based on these transient occurrences, a special method of measurement
is required that can also capture high frequencies. Conventional methods based on phasor calculations are not
suitable. Even for ground faults lasting for a short time, usually, a high-frequency charging process occurs in
healthy phases. The transient charging process is evaluated by an energy-integrating method to determine the
ground-fault direction. This method ensures high sensitivity and positive stability against parasitic signals in
the zero-sequence system.
Since permanent ground faults also start with the transient charging process in healthy phases, those errors
will be detected as well.
This stage is most suitable for the use in closed loops or meshed systems. Operational, circulating zero-
sequence currents are eliminated and therefore, cannot affect the directional result.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1181
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Stage-Control Logic
[lo_stu_wis, 3, en_US]
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c. b., which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or not.
1182 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• Zero-sequence current via Holmgreen connection or via core balance current transformer
The voltage measured on the broken-delta winding will be converted to the zero-sequence voltage V0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) that are sampled at a high frequency (8 kHz)
serve to determine the point in time of the ground fault occurrence T0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) and the ground current 3i0(t), which are sampled
at a high frequency (8 kHz), are the basis for direction determination.
The fundamental-component values of the zero-sequence voltage V0 serve to release the directional result
and the pickup as well as a criterion for the stabilization against switching operations.
The positive-sequence system (if it exists as a measured value) serves as an additional criterion for the
stabilization against switching operations.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1183
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 will be used for the pickup and the
optional trip logic.
Operational, meaning circulating zero-sequence currents, can occur in closed loops or meshed systems.
This type of zero-sequence current is also present in case of a failure and can falsify the directional result.
Therefore, an operational zero-sequence current is eliminated.
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the V0> threshold
value within 100 ms after detecting the ground-fault ignition.
• The true RMS value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold for pickup.
In this way, high-impedance ground faults are also reported in which the zero-sequence system values rise
only slowly, and, for this reason, the occurrence of the ground fault is detected noticeably earlier than the
exceedance of the parameterized threshold value.
The direction result will be reported to the function via the (_:2311:302) Ground fault of the function
block General information. This indication is reported irrespective of the parameterized direction of the
function.
If the determined direction corresponds with the parameterized direction (parameter Directional mode), a
pickup occurs.
• The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage V0 drops below the V0 reset threshold. This
reset threshold is a small device-internal V0 threshold. It is also depending on an operational V0 and is
thus a dynamic threshold. The threshold value is 2.0 V secondary without dynamic influence.
1184 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 is usually only marginal influenced
by switching operations and is thus a good criterion for distinguishing the ground fault from a switching
operation. The condition that the fundamental-component value must exceed the V0> threshold
value for reporting the direction result effectively suppresses the influence of switching operations.
For rare cases in which high zero-sequence voltages occur over longer time ranges after switching off the
feeder or line, a criterion based on the positive-sequence current is also effective. This criterion compares
the positive-sequence current before and after the transient event and thus detects a disconnection. In
case of disconnection, the direction result is not reported.
Through stabilization mechanisms, the direction result is reported 100 ms after the ground-fault ignition.
Thus a pickup occurs with a 100-ms delay.
If the stage is used in a 1-phase function group, the additional criterion via the positive-sequence current
is not effective.
• The function detects transient ground faults using the zero-sequence voltage. In systems with opera-
tional zero-sequence voltages, if the measuring voltage is switched on, the function can internally be
started. If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage does not exceed the threshold
of the Maximum operational V0 parameter in a time slot of 100 ms after the function start, the
function is reset internally. For an unexpected case where the function is started due to a switching
transient event, a further reset criterion exists to ensure that the function does not permanently remain
in the start condition. After the time of 100 ms, if the fundamental-component value is continuously less
than the Maximum operational V0 threshold for 10 s, the function is reset as well.
Trip Logic
[lo_auswis, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1185
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
In many applications, the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction. In this case, the
trip logic is not required and remains disabled. However, this stage can also be used to trip a permanent
ground fault. For this, you enable the optional trip logic with the Operate functionality parameter. If
the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 exceed the set threshold values, the
tripping delay (Operate delay parameter) starts with the pickup. If the parameter Operate & flt.rec.
blocked is set to no, the stage operates when the tripping delay expires.
An intermittent ground fault has the characteristics of periodical extinction and reignition within one half
period up to several periods. You can find more information in chapter 6.29.1 Overview of Functions. Due
to the tripping delay and the too short fault durations (contact to ground), reliable tripping is not possible.
To ensure reliable tripping under such conditions, the parameter Dropout delay can be used. When the
fault extinguishes, the fundamental-component value of V0 and the true RMS value of 3I0 drop below the
threshold values. A dropout can be delayed for a time specified with the Dropout delay parameter. The
tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires within the dropout delay, the stage operates.
You can set the Dropout delay according to the application. The default setting is 0 s. The setting of
the dropout delay does not affect the direction determination. When the fault reignites, a new direction
determination takes place if the function has dropped out before. If the determined direction is opposite to
the parameterized direction or is unknown, the tripping delay is reset immediately.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
1186 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1187
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
1188 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1189
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.6.1 Description
Logic
[lo_gfp_pvi, 3, en_US]
1190 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Figure 6-412 Logic Diagram of the Directional 3I0 Stage with φ (V0,3I0) Measurement
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1191
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point and on the current terminal blocks used, different
linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in chapter Measured Value 3I0, Method of
Measurement , Page 1172.
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The
direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir.
determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands.
The direction is determined via the determination of the phase angle between the angle-error compensated
ground current 3I0com. and the rotated zero-sequence voltage V0, indicated in the following as reference
voltage Vref,rot. To take different system conditions and applications into account, the reference voltage can
be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt. parameter). This moves the
vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector ground current -3I0com. Consequently, the result of
direction determination is as reliable as possible.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. The value
± Δφ is set with the Forward section +/- parameter. The remaining area besides the forward area is the
reverse area. Between the forward and reverse area, a hysteresis is defined, refer to Figure 6-413.
1192 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dw_dirrot, 1, en_US]
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or not.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1193
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
1194 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• Arc-suppression-coil-ground system: 0°
NOTE
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1195
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.6.3 Settings
1196 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.7.1 Description
Logic
[lo_stage_control_Y0G0B0, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1197
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[lo_Y0_G0_B0, 6, en_US]
1198 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 1172.
Y0, G0, B0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 = G0 + jB0. You can
choose to use G0 or B0 to determine the direction.
Direction Determination
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The
direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir.
determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result from the direction deter-
mination is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its release threshold
value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
G0 direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight line from 0 (Parameter φ
correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-suppres-
sion-coil-ground system where the value G0 is decisive for the direction determination.
[dw_Y0_dire, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is generally the reference value for the real axis and is identical to the G0
axis. The axis of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the B0 (reactive) axis for
this example. For the direction determination, the component of the admittance perpendicular to the set
direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive G0dir (=Y0dir). In this example, this is the
active component G0active of the admittance Y0. The conductance G0dir. (here = G0active) is calculated and
compared with the setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the
positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the negative setting value,
the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1199
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
With the α1 reduction dir. area and α2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in Figure 6-417. With this, the direction determination is secured in
case of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle (φ correction parameter) in a range of ±45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45° turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a turn of +45° (see following
figure).
[dw_Y0_meas, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-417 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with G0 Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to B0 and the φ correction parameter to 0, the axis
of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the G0 and V0 axes. Since the component of
the admittance Y0 perpendicular to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (B0dir.
(=Y0dir.)), here, the susceptance B0 (reactive) is used in the direction determination. If the susceptance B0dir.
(B0reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold, the direction is forward. If
the susceptance B0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between,
the direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.
1200 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
[dw_si_co_Y0, 1, en_US]
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1201
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the
Blk. after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault
extinction.
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
1202 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, φ correction, Polarized G0/B0 threshold, 3I0> release
thresh. value
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1203
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current (watt-metric residual current) of
the protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.1
If a parallel resistor Rp is used on the arc-suppression coil, the threshold value G0 must
also be smaller than:
where:
ks: Safety margin ≥ 1.5
IRp: Secondary rated current of the parallel resistor
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter can be set to half of the expected
measuring current and here, the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 · sin φ is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
1204 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
where:
I0min: Ground current in the healthy case
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current of the protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage ≈ 0.02
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter must be set to a value below the
minimum expected ground-fault current.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1205
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.7.3 Settings
1206 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.8.1 Description
The Directional stage with phasor measurement of a harmonic is based on a continuous measuring
direction-determination method. The stage determines the direction via the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasors
of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and current 3I0.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1207
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
Figure 6-419 Logic Diagram of the Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic
1208 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Figure 6-420 Logic Diagram of the Start Conditions and of the Direction Determination
• The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 keeps exceeding the threshold V0>
threshold value during the period of the timer Dir. determination delay.
• The absolute value of the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. exceeds the threshold Min. 3I0>
harmonic when the timer Dir. determination delay expires.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1209
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
To carry out the direction determination, the following condition must also be met in addition to the
preceding 2 conditions:
The zero-sequence harmonic voltage V0harm. must exceed the threshold which is 0.02 % of the secondary
rated voltage of the voltage transformer. If this condition is not met, the direction result is unknown.
The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal.
The stage pickup depends on the direction result and on the Directional mode parameter:
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as forward or reverse, the stage picks up when the
direction result equals the parameterized direction, and the Pickup is signaled with the determined
direction.
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as non-directional, the stage picks up regardless of the
direction result, and the Pickup is signaled with the unknown information.
Direction Determination
With the Harmonic selection parameter, you can select the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic phasor for direction
determination. The direction is determined via the calculation of the phase angle between the following
values:
• Rotated zero-sequence harmonic voltage V0harm., indicated in the following as reference voltage Vref,rot
The reference voltage is rotated by the angle +90° in relation to V0. This provides the maximum security for
the direction determination assuming that 3I0harm. is a reactive current.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
reverse area. For details, refer to Figure 6-421.
The areas in the following figure are as follows:
• The forward area results as range ± Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. You can set the
value ± Δφ with the Forward section +/- parameter. If the vector of the secondary ground current
-3I0harm. lies within this area, the direction result is forward.
• The mirror area of the forward area is the reverse area. If the vector of the secondary ground current
-3I0harm. lies within this area, the direction result is reverse.
1210 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Stabilization Counter
To determine a reliable direction result, the function uses a stabilization counter. For indicating a direction
result, the determined direction must be stable for 4 successive measuring cycles. The cycle time is 10 ms.
Direction-Result Extension
With the timer Dir.-result extension, you can extend the last determined direction result if the
conditions for a further direction determination are no longer met. The last direction result is held until
the conditions for a further direction determination are met again (timer is reset) or until the timer expires.
The behavior of the direction-result extension varies according to the setting of the Directional mode
parameter:
• V0 harm.
• 3I0 harm.
• Phi(I,V) harm.
These measured values are displayed as --- if 3I0harm. or V0harm. is smaller than 0.005 % of the rated
secondary current or voltage.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the Measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion blocks the stage or not.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1211
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
1212 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
With the Min. 3I0> harmonic parameter, you define the threshold value of the zero-sequence harmonic
current 3I0harm. for detecting the ground fault and for starting direction determination. For more informa-
tion, see also Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup, Page 1209.
This parameter needs to be set according to the experience from the specific network. This requires the anal-
ysis of permanent ground faults from the network. If such information is unavailable, Siemens recommends a
rather low setting in the area of 5 mA to 10 mA secondary.
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as forward or reverse, the stage picks up when the
direction result equals the parameterized direction, and the Pickup is signaled with the determined
direction.
• If the Directional mode parameter is set as non-directional, the stage picks up regardless of the
direction result, and the Pickup is signaled with the unknown information.
NOTE
i When both the Operate delay and the Dir.-result extension are applied, the Operate delay
should usually be set to a considerably greater value than the Dir.-result extension. If the Operate
delay is less than the Dir.-result extension, the function will operate for each fault regardless of
the fault duration, as long as the fault direction equals the set direction.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1213
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
6.27.8.3 Settings
1214 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1215
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.9.1 Description
Logic
Figure 6-422 Logic Diagram of the Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
1216 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
to the device as a measurand, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB, and VC using the defining equation.
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application:
• Measurement of the fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window:
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
12.27.7 Non-Directional V0 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter, you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• From inside on pickup of the measuring-voltage failure detection function. The Blk. by meas.-
volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or
does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by
meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or not.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1217
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Threshold
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. Siemens recommends setting the value between
20 V and 40 V. A higher sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
• Siemens recommends setting a more sensitive (smaller) value in grounded systems. This value must be
higher than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
1218 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1219
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.9.3 Settings
6.27.10.1 Description
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional 3I0 stage also works on
demand.
1220 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1221
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Method of Measurement
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
The Blk. w. 2nd harm. gnd. det. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when the detected 2nd harmonic component of the ground current exceeds a
threshold value. In case of a blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time
delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication.
If the blocking drops out and the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the
stage operates.
1222 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1223
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.10.3 Settings
6.27.11.1 Description
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the Non-directional Y0 stage also works on
demand.
1224 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
[lo_gfp_sy_0, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1225
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Y0
The fundamental-component values of V0 and 3I0 are used to calculate the admittance Y0 through the
formula Y0 = 3I0/V0. This stage uses Y0 as a condition to recognize the ground fault.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
1226 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
[fo_se_g_f_Y0, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1227
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
3I0min Secondary ground current in the healthy case (resulting from transformer error),
5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0> Secondary pickup threshold of the residual voltage
6.27.11.3 Settings
1228 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.12.1 Description
The Non-directional 3I0 harmonic stage detects ground faults via the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic component
of the zero-sequence current 3I0.
Logic
[lo_3I0_harmonic, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1229
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The function uses the 3rd, 5th, or 7th harmonic component of the ground current 3I0 for detecting the
ground fault. The specific harmonic component to be used is determined by the Harmonic selection
setting.
Stabilization, Pickup
To avoid a wrong pickup in case of transient current peaks, the function uses the Stabilization counter
parameter. If the magnitude of the zero-sequence harmonic current 3I0harm. exceeds the 3I0 harm.
threshold, the stabilization counter starts. If the 3I0harm. current keeps exceeding the 3I0 harm.
threshold for a specified number of measuring cycles, the stage picks up. You can define the specified
number via the Stabilization counter parameter.
Pickup Extension
Considering the discontinuity of the 3I0harm. current, the Pickup signal does not drop out immediately after
the 3I0harm. current falls below the 3I0 harm. threshold.
When the 3I0harm. current falls below the 3I0 harm. threshold, the timer Pickup extension time
starts to hold the Pickup signal until the timer expires. The timer resets after the 3I0harm. current exceeds
the 3I0 harm. threshold again during the extension time.
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of the function group where the Sensitive
ground-fault detection function is used. If the 3I0harm. current is smaller than 0.005 % of the rated secon-
dary current, the functional measured value is displayed as ---.
1230 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.12.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1231
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.13.1 Description
Overview
The Pulse-pattern detection stage detects a faulty feeder during a permanent ground fault in overcompen-
sated systems. This method is not reliably applicable to undercompensated systems.
The following figure shows a simplified network that applies the pulse-pattern detection method.
The pulse pattern in the ground current 3I0 is generated by switching on and off a capacitor in parallel to the
arc-suppression coil:
• When the capacitor is switched on, an additional capacitive ground current is generated and the 3I0
compensation changes.
• When the capacitor is switched off, the additional capacitive ground current is vanished and the 3I0
compensation returns to the normal state.
1232 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• For low-impedance ground faults, the 3I0 pulse pattern exists only in the faulty feeder.
• For high-impedance ground faults, the pulse pattern is also present in the healthy feeders with lower
amplitude but in phase opposition to the faulty feeder.
Applying a different switch-on/switch-off duration allows distinguishing between faulty and healthy
feeders in case of high-impedance ground faults.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1233
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• When the clocking pulse is on, the capacitor is switched on, the zero-sequence current 3I0 in the faulty
feeder is reduced, and the corresponding current pulse pattern is off.
• When the clocking pulse is off, the capacitor is switched off, 3I0 in the faulty feeder is increased, and the
current pulse pattern is on.
Clocking Pulse Capacitor 3I0 in the Faulty Feeder Current Pulse Pattern of the Faulty Feeder
On On Reduced Off
Off Off Increased On
1234 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Logic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1235
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very
large linearity and settings range.
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used,
different linearity and setting ranges result. You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0,
Method of Measurement , Page 1172.
• If VN or V0 is available, the voltage is the only criterion for starting the pulse-detection logic. When the
fundamental-component value of V0 exceeds the V0> threshold value, the pulse-detection logic is
started.
• If VN or V0 is not available, the current is the only criterion for starting the pulse-detection logic. When
the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence current 3I0 exceeds the 3I0> threshold
value, the pulse-detection logic is started.
If the measured current pulse-off duration equals to the value of the Pulse-on duration parameter and
the measured current pulse-on duration equals to the value of the Pulse-off duration parameter, a valid
pulse is detected.
After the first valid pulse is detected, the pulse counter is started to count the number of pulses continuously
until the stage resets.
Pickup, Operate
After the first valid pulse is detected, the stage picks up.
If the number of detected pulses within the pulse monitoring time reaches the setting of the No. of
pulses for operate parameter, the stage operates. The pulse monitoring time is calculated via the
following formula:
Pulse monitoring time = Value Monitoring time(in pulses) ⋅ (Value Pulse-on duration + Value
Pulse-off duration)
For example, the value of the No. of pulses for operate parameter is 3, and the value of the
Monitoring time(in pulses) is 5. Then the pickup and operate time diagram is as follows:
1236 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
• After the 3rd valid pulse is detected, the stage does not operate because the time between the 1st and
the 3rd valid pulses is greater than the pulse monitoring time which is 5 clocking pulses.
• After the 4th valid pulse is detected, the stage operates because the time between the 2nd and the 4th
valid pulses is within the pulse monitoring time which is 5 clocking pulses.
Dropout Delay
Switching on the capacitor usually causes 3I0 to decrease in the faulty feeder. This must not cause the stage to
drop out. For that reason, a dropout delay is active for the sum of the Pulse-on duration and Pulse-off
duration values.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1237
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
The recommended setting for this parameter is the maximum tolerance of the clocking device plus 40 ms
(tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5 device). For the tolerance of the clocking device, you have to consider the
tolerances of the pulse-on and pulse-off durations individually and select the larger tolerance of both.
EXAMPLE
Clocking device:
Tolerance to be set:
[dw_tolerance, 1, en_US]
If you have no information about the tolerance of the clocking device, you can carry out a test recording
while the clocking device is in operation. From the test recording, you can read the inaccuracy of the pulse-on/
pulse-off durations. Add a safety margin of 20 ms on the read inaccuracy and consider this as the maximum
tolerance of the clocking device. For the setting, add another 40 ms for the tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5
device.
1238 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
With the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter, you define the minimum percentage value of the ground-
current delta between the capacitor switched-on and capacitor switched-off states to detect the pulse pattern.
That is, to detect the pulse pattern, the following condition must be met:
To prevent minor current fluctuations from leading to a maloperation of the function, the setting of the 3I0
delta pulse off-on parameter cannot be less than 2 %.
The setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter can be calculated with the following formula:
[fo_3I0_delta_pulse_off-on, 1, en_US]
Where
Kf Safety factor
Siemens recommends applying the factor 0.6 to also detect high-impedance ground faults.
Cs Capacitance of the switched capacitor
ω Angular frequency, which equals to 2πf, where f is the power frequency
L Inductance of the arc-suppression coil
C0Σ Zero-sequence capacitance of the whole network
C0i Zero-sequence capacitance of the protected feeder
EXAMPLE
Kf 0.6
Cs 1.1 ⋅ 10-6 F
ω 314 rad/s
L 0.577 H
C0Σ 5.4297 ⋅ 10-6 F
C0i 1.5502 ⋅ 10-6 F
Then the setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off-on parameter is calculated as follows:
If the network information for the setting calculation is not available, Siemens recommends using the default
setting of 10 %.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1239
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
Pulse monitoring time = Value Monitoring time(in pulses) ⋅ (Value Pulse-on duration + Value
Pulse-off duration)
6.27.13.3 Settings
1240 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
6.27.14.1 Description
Most functions designed for the detection of permanent ground faults may show a disadvantageous behavior
in case of intermittent ground faults. An example of these functions is the 3I0> stage with cos φ or sin
φ measurement. In case of an intermittent ground fault, these functions may cause a flood of information
due to continuously exceeding and dropping below thresholds. Also short-term wrong directional results are
possible due to the nature of the intermittent signals. To avoid this disadvantage, these functions should be
blocked in case of intermittent grounds faults.
The Intermittent ground-fault blocking stage detects and classifies a ground fault as intermittent and sends
a blocking signal to the following stages:
Logic
[lo_sensGFP_IGFB, 2, en_US]
(1) This signal is sent to the protection stages described in the preceding sections.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1241
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
You can find more information about possible connection types and measuring angles in chapter Measured
Value 3I0, Method of Measurement , Page 1172.
Reset Time for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if the ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike within a large time, an intermittent ground fault can be considered as definitely disappeared.
The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset time. If a ground fault occurs, the Timer
T-reset with the setting Reset time is launched. Each new ground-current pulse restarts the Reset time
with its initial value. If the Timer T-reset expires, that is, if no new ground fault was detected during that
period, all memories and the stage logics are reset.
The Timer T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed
yet as an intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is
considered as a new ground-fault event.
• A new pulse is detected. That is, with each new pulse, the timer starts again with its initial value.
The Timer T-reset can be reset via the binary input signal >Reset blocking.
Parameter: Threshold
1242 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.27 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
If the 3I0> threshold value of the protection stage is set to a higher value than the setting range for the
parameter Threshold, set the maximum setting value for the parameter Threshold.
6.27.14.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1243
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
A typical characteristic of intermittent ground faults is that they often extinguish automatically and strike
again after some time. The fault duration can last between a few milliseconds and many seconds. Thus, such
faults are not detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are
extremely short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path can pick up. Thus, selective tripping is not
ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function, such faults are too short to initiate switching off
the faulted cable. The short-circuit protection can clear such ground faults selectively only if the ground faults
have become permanent.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of damaging the equipment thermally. This is why
SIPROTEC 5 devices feature a protection function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and
accumulates their duration. If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time, the limit of the
thermal rating has been reached. If intermittent ground faults are distributed over a long period or if the
ground fault disappears and does not restrike after some time, the equipment under load is expected to cool
down. Tripping is not necessary in this case.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function is used to protect against intermittent
ground faults which occur, for example, in cables due to poor insulation or water ingress in cable joints.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function can be used in protection function
groups with current measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and a
maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously. The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the
following figure.
[dw_int_GFP, 1, en_US]
1244 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Logic
[lo_Intnon, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1245
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Method of Measurement
The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonics
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
46 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is
5 A.
47 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
48 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.
1246 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
[dw_int_FaD, 2, en_US]
Number of Pickups
The stage counts the number of Pickup signals during the intermittent ground fault. With the operate of the
stage this number is logged via the information No. of pickups.
Accumulation of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Current and Issuing the Operate Signal
An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected equipment. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-fault current are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal stress,
the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with a sum of times. If the integration value reaches
the predefined Sum of extended PU times, the limit of the thermal load is reached. The stage issues the
signal Sum limit reached and operates when the signal Pickup is active.
Reset Timer for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, an operation is not
necessary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset timer. If a ground fault occurs,
the Timer T-reset with its setting Reset time is launched simultaneously with Integrator T-sum. Unlike
the integrator, each new ground fault restarts the reset timer with its initial value. If Timer T-reset expires,
that is, no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset.
Timer T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as
intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered
as a new fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1247
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state.
• Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.
Start & Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
1248 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Table 6-15 Information Target with Different Processing of Signal Status Changes
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1249
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of messages, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and fault log.
Parameter: Threshold
1250 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
EXAMPLE
[TiExaInt, 1, en_US]
6.28.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1251
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.28 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
1252 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
• Detects the intermittent ground faults in grounded, compensated, or isolated cable systems selectively
• Intermittent ground faults show very short high ground-current pulses (up to several hundred amperes)
with a duration of less than 1 ms.
• Intermittent ground faults are self-extinguishing and reignite within one half period up to several
periods, depending on the power-system conditions and the fault type.
• Intermittent ground faults can persist over longer periods (several seconds to minutes) and develop to
static ground faults.
The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection can be used in protection function groups
with current and voltage measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and a
maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously.
[dw_structure_dirI_GFP, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1253
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Overview
[lo_overview, 2, en_US]
• From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.
1254 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
[lo_int_dir1, 3, en_US]
49 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5
A.
50 If the connection type is without IN, such as 3-phase, the current threshold value is a calculated 3I0 value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1255
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Operating Mode
2 different functional operating modes are available: Counter and Integrator and counter. You can
select the different operating modes using the parameter Operating mode.
49 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5
A.
51 If the connection type is with IN, such as 3-phase + IN, the current threshold value is a measured IN value.
1256 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
[lo_int_dir2, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-438 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Counter
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1257
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Integrator and Counter Mode
[lo_int_dir3, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-439 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Integrator and Counter
1258 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Operate
The conditions for issuing the signal Operate depend on the operating mode.
Operating Mode Conditions for Issuing the Operate Signal
Counter • The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The timer Minimum operate delay expired. The timer is started
with the first pickup and is reset when the function resets.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
Integrator and counter • The 3I0 current integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times, which is signaled via the Sum limit
reached indication.
• The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
• The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
When an opposite current pulse against the setting Directional mode is detected, the Integrator T-sum
and the Counter are reset.
Reset Time for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a long interval between independent ground faults or if the ground fault extinguishes and does
not restrike again within a long time, the function must not operate. The interval between ground faults is
monitored with the reset time. If a ground fault occurs, the Timer T-reset with the setting Reset time
and the Integrator T-sum are launched simultaneously. Unlike the integrator, each new ground-current pulse
restarts the reset time with its initial value. If the Timer T-reset expires, that is, no new ground fault was
detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset. The Timer T-reset thus determines
the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermittent ground fault in
connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered as a new ground-fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset:
• The Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
• The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault
protection stage issued.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1259
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Start and Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of indications, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and to the fault log.
Parameter: Threshold
1260 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
With the parameter Pickup mode, you define under which conditions pickup is detected and fault logging
and recording start:
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with 3I0>, the signal Pickup is released without consid-
ering the ground fault direction. The signal Pickup is issued once the IN/3I0 exceeds the threshold
value.
• When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with direction, the signal Pickup is issued when
at least one pulse direction is the same as the direction specified by the set value of parameter Direc-
tional mode.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1261
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
1262 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
6.29.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1263
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.29 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
1264 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
• Detects 1-phase or 2-phase short circuits in the electrical power system with clearly increased sensitivity
compared to the classical overcurrent protection
The Negative-sequence protection function is used in protection function groups with current measure-
ment.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite-time negative-sequence protection
stages.
In the function Negative-sequence protection, the following stages can be operated simultaneously:
[dw_nsp_str, 3, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against
operate due to transformer-inrush currents.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1265
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
6.30.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of the general functionality which applies across all configured
stages. It contains:
• Current-release criterion
[lo_general_functionality_01, 1, en_US]
Reference Value
With the parameter Reference value, the negative-sequence current I2 is normalized to the rated object
current Irated, obj or to the positive-sequence current I1. When I2 is normalized to I1, the sensitivity of the
function for low short-circuit currents is increased.
Release Current
The threshold value of the Release current serves to release the negative-sequence protection.
1266 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1267
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
Logic of a Stage
[lo_giknsp, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-442 Logic Diagram of the Stage Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Characteristic
Curve
Method of Measurement
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
1268 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
Parameter: Threshold
6.30.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1269
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
1270 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
6.30.5.1 Description
Logic of a Stage
[lo_nsp_inverse, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-443 Logic Diagram of the Negative-Sequence Protection with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Method of Measurement
The fundamental phasors are calculated from the 3-phase phase currents. Based on this, the negative-
sequence system and the positive-sequence system are calculated. Following this, the negative-sequence
current is normalized to the reference current. The selection of the reference current is made in the FB
General.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1271
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
Pickup and Dropout Behaviors of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve is
processed. An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 ⋅ 1.1 ⋅ threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according
to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking
and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are
blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the
pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates.
Parameter: Threshold
Parameter: Reset
1272 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.30 Negative-Sequence Protection
6.30.5.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1273
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
The function Directional negative-sequence protection with current-independent time delay (ANSI 46)
serves as the backup short-circuit protection for unbalanced faults.
With the negative-sequence system, various supervision and protection tasks can be realized, for example:
• Recording of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the system with a higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent
protection. The pickup value can be set under the rated object current.
• Recording of phase conductor interruptions in the primary system and in the current-transformer secon-
dary circuits
• Protection of electrical machines following unbalanced loads that are caused by unbalanced voltages or
conductor interruptions (for example, through a defective fuse)
The Directional negative-sequence protection with definite time delay function can be used in protection
function groups with 3-phase current and voltage measurement.
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
in the function.
[dw_nsp_dir, 1, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.
Stage Control
The following figure shows a stage control. It is available separately for each stage.
1274 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
[lo_stensp, 2, en_US]
In addition to the generally valid stage control, the stage is blocked in the event of a measuring-voltage
failure, provided the stage is working directionally.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1275
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
[lo_nsp_dir, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-446 Logic Diagram of the Function Directional Negative-Sequence System Protection with Current-
Independent Time Delay
Measurand
The negative-sequence current I2 is used as a measurand. From the 3-phase currents, the fundamental
phasors are determined via a 1-cycle filter and, corresponding with the definition equation of the symmetrical
components, the negative-sequence system is calculated from this.
1276 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
Functioning
The stage picks up if the negative-sequence system current exceeds the set threshold value and the parame-
terized direction agrees with the measured direction. The pickup drops out if the negative-sequence system
current falls below 95 % of the set threshold.
[dw_stabil, 1, en_US]
Direction Determination
The direction determination takes place with the negative-sequence system measurements I2 and V2.
The forward and reverse region is defined through the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward
β (see next figure). The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis. The angles are
positively defined in a mathematical sense (counter-clockwise). The region between the limit angle α and the
limit angle β - counted from the former in a positive direction - is the forward region. The remaining region is
the reverse region.
For determining of the direction, the function places the measuring current I2 on the real axis. If the phasor
of the negative-sequence system voltage V2 is located within the defined forward region, the function
determines the direction as forward. In the other case, the function determines the direction as reverse.
The requirement for determining the direction is that the adjustable minimum variables have been exceeded
for the negative-sequence system current and negative-sequence system voltage (parameters Min. neg.-
seq. current I2 and Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1277
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
[dw_phasor, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-448 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence System Values
If the device determines a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit (through the binary input
voltage transformer circuit-breaker dropout or through measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion), direction determination will be disabled and every directionally set stage will be blocked. Non-direction-
ally set stages become active again if there are faults in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit.
[lo_richtu, 1, en_US]
Directional Mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.
1278 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
NOTE
i The Op.mode at 1p dead time parameter is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In
devices with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
• Blocking by
This setting is used to select the zone or stage at which blocking is to occur in the event of pickup.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1279
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
1280 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
NOTE
i The Op.mode at 1p dead time parameter is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In
devices with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
NOTE
i The Hold mode 1p dead time parameter is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1281
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
Parameter: Threshold
6.31.6 Settings
1282 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.31 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1283
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undercurrent Protection
• Detects the going current in a feeder after the opening of the infeed circuit breaker
The Undercurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with current measurement.
The Undercurrent protection function comes with 1 protection stage preconfigured at the factory. A
maximum of 2 protection stages can be operated simultaneously in this function. The protection stages are
structured identically.
[lo_stuundcu, 2, en_US]
1284 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undercurrent Protection
[lo_UCP-3pol, 4, en_US]
Method of Measurement
You use the parameter Method of measurement to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1285
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undercurrent Protection
Measurement Repetition
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the parameter Measurement repetition to a value other
than 0. Then, if the input current keeps below the Threshold for a specified number (Measurement
repetition value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time
is 5 ms (Method of measurement = fundamental comp.) or 10 ms (Method of measurement = RMS
value).
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued
immediately after the input current falls below the parameter Threshold.
Pickup Mode
The parameter Pickup mode defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).
• The binary inputs are connected to the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. The circuit-breaker switch
position is detected as closed via the related binary inputs of the indication Position. This is also true
under the condition that no phase current is flowing.
• The current-flow criterion indicates that the circuit breaker is closed. This is also true under the condition
that the auxiliary contacts indicate the circuit breaker as open.
Parameter: Activation
1286 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undercurrent Protection
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1287
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.32 Undercurrent Protection
For example, if you set this parameter to 2, the pickup signal is issued when the current keeps being below
the Threshold for 2 additional measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 5 ms (Method of
measurement = fundamental comp.) or 10 ms (Method of measurement = RMS value).
6.32.5 Settings
1288 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over-
voltage
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time over-
voltage protection stages. In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
[dw_3-phase_ovp, 5, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1289
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.33.3.1 Description
[lo_3phas_i, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-453 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1290 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Method of Measurement
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value.
Pickup Stabilization
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps exceeding the Threshold for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
tion counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued
immediately after the input voltage exceeds the Threshold.
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the overvoltage condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the overvoltage
condition (1 out of 3).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1291
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
Parameter: Threshold
1292 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
EXAMPLE
Example for 2-stage overvoltage protection
The example describes the possible settings for a 2-stage overvoltage protection function. We will look at the
settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
• 1. Stage:
To detect stationary overvoltages, set the threshold value of the first overvoltage-protection element at
least 10 % above the max. stationary phase-to-phase voltage anticipated during normal operation. When
setting the parameter Measured value to phase-to-phase voltage and a secondary rated voltage of
100 V, the secondary setting value of the first overvoltage-protection element is calculated as follows:
• 2. Stage:
The second overvoltage-protection stage is intended for high overvoltages with short duration. A high
pickup value is selected here, for example, 1.5 times the rated voltage. A time delay setting of 0.1 s to
0.2 s is sufficient then.
6.33.3.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1293
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1294 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1295
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.33.4.1 Description
[lo_3ph_inv, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-454 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1296 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Method of Measurement
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value .
Pickup Stabilization
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps exceeding the pickup value for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
tion counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued
immediately after the input voltage exceeds the pickup value.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the overvoltage condition ( 3 out of 3 ) or if only 1 measuring element detects the
overvoltage condition ( 1 out of 3 ).
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Where
Top Operate delay
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay )
After pickup, the time value Tinv is calculated for every input voltage that exceeds the threshold. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time delay expires.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1297
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[dw_ovp_inv, 2, en_US]
Where
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial )
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold )
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k )
α Curve constant α (parameter Charact. constant α )
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c )
When V/Vthresh is equal to or greater than 20, the inverse-time delay does not decrease any further.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 × pickup factor × threshold value), the pickup
signal is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time .
Instantaneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the
desired delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.
1298 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1299
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
For example, if you set this parameter to 1, the pickup signal is issued when the voltage keeps exceeding the
pickup value for 2 successive measuring cycles. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10 ms.
1300 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.33.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1301
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
• Supervise the voltage range if the positive-sequence voltage is the decisive quantity
Unbalanced overvoltages, for example, caused by ground faults and unbalanced faults, are not detected due
to the evaluation of the positive-sequence voltage.
The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A
maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an
identical structure.
[dw_ovp_u1s, 1, en_US]
1302 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_govpu1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-457 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1303
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.
6.34.5 Settings
1304 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.34 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1305
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function (ANSI 47) monitors the electrical
power system for voltage unbalance.
Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
• The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases, for
example.
• Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example, at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.
• Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example, due to a tripped 1-phase fuse.
• In the DIGSI 5 library, 2 variants of this function are available for the protection devices of the 87 series:
with and without blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups
with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 stages. A
maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The stages have an identical structure.
[dw_u2_ovps, 2, en_US]
1306 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ovp_v2_1-3pol, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-459 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
(1) This only applies to the function variant with blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the negative-sequence voltage. The negative-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defined equation.
• During a 1-pole dead time associated with the device's internal AR function. This only applies to the
function variant with blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
The occurring negative-sequence system variable is determined only by the unbalanced power flow.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1307
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
• From an internal source on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see
8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that
the measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
Parameter: Threshold
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
52 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
1308 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
6.35.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1309
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
1310 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
The Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding function (ANSI 59) detects
stationary overvoltages at the opposite line end.
On long, unloaded or weakly loaded transmission lines stationary overvoltages are caused by the capacitance
per unit length (Ferranti effect). The overvoltage is present at the opposite line end in this case, but it can only
be eliminated by switching off the local line end.
The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage and compounding function is used in protec-
tion function groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding comes with 2
factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The
tripping stages have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured so that the line data parameters can act on all stages (see Figure 6-460).
[dwovpuko-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1311
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ovp_v1_compounding, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-461 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and
Compounding
Method of Measurement
The compounding calculates the positive-sequence system of the voltage at the opposite line end. For this,
the function uses the line data (X per length unit, C1 per length unit, Line angle, Line
length).
NOTE
i Compounding is not suitable for lines with series capacitors or common-mode reactor.
The voltage Vend at the remote line end is calculated from the voltage measured at the local line end and from
the flowing current based on the equivalent circuit diagram for the line (see Figure 6-462):
1312 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
[fofuende-170309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
with
VEnd Calculated voltage at the opposite line end
Vmeas Measured voltage at the local line end
Imeas Measured current at the local line end
CB Effective capacitance of the line
RL Ohmic operating resistance of the line
LL Working inductance of the line
[dwerskom-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1313
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.
6.36.5 Settings
1314 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.36 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1315
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function (ANSI 59):
• In the DIGSI 5 library, 2 variants of this function are available for the protection devices of the 87 series:
with and without blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function is used in protection
function groups with voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function comes factory-set with
1 stage. A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function.
The stages have an identical structure.
[dw_u0_ovps, 2, en_US]
1316 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ovp_v0_1-3pol, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-464 Logic Diagram of the Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
(1) This only applies to the function variant with blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1317
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application.
• fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
Technical Data).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the threshold value with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the threshold value.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• During 1-pole dead time of the device-internal automatic reclosing function (AR). This only applies to the
function variant with blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
• From inside on pick up of the measuring-voltage failure detection function (see 8.3.2.1 Overview of
Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage
failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
1318 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Parameter: Threshold
• Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. It should range between 20 V and 40 V. A higher
sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
• You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher than
the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
Example
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
• If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
• The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
53 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1319
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
• Recommended setting value (_:361:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V54
Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty
ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40.000 V.
• Recommended setting value (_:361:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75.000 V55
Set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
54 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
55 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
1320 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
The set value must lie above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set
to 75 V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. =
75.000 V.
6.37.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1321
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.37 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
1322 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59) detects any 1-phase overvoltages and is
intended for special applications.
The Overvoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of
3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical
structure.
[dw_ovp_uxs, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1323
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_ovp_Vx_any-volt, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-466 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the param-
eter Measured value is not visible.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
1324 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1325
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can use either the following methods instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version:
• Select the value V0 calculated for the Measured value parameter in the function Overvoltage
protection with any voltage.
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:
For more information about the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, refer to 6.1.6 Application and
Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).
1326 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
6.38.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1327
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.38 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
1328 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) against damages caused by under-
voltage
• In the DIGSI 5 library, 2 variants of this function are available for the protection devices of the 87 series:
with and without blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage is used in protection function groups with
voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage comes factory-set with 2 Definite-time under-
voltage protection stages.
In the function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage, the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
[dw_stru_3p, 5, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1329
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.39.3.1 Description
[lo_uvp_3phs_stage-control, 4, en_US]
1330 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[lo_uvp_3ph_1-3pol, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-469 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
(1) This only applies to the function variant with blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
Method of Measurement
With the Method of measurement parameter, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application.
Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1331
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Pickup Stabilization
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than 0.
Then, if the input voltage keeps being below the Threshold for a specified number (1 + Stabilization
counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle time is 10
ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued after
the input voltage falls below the threshold value.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before
the current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is
achieved by delaying the pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-469 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see 8.3.2.1 Overview of
Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage
failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
1332 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Parameter: Threshold
EXAMPLE:
[fo_schw_lw, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1333
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1334 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The recommended setting value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision
measurements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced (to 1.02, for example).
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1335
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.39.3.3 Settings
1336 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1337
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
6.39.4.1 Description
1338 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[lo_UVP3ph_In, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-471 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Method of Measurement
With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the RMS value.
Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1339
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Pickup Stabilization
To enable the pickup stabilization, you set the Stabilization counter parameter to a value other than
zero. Then, if the input voltage keeps being below the pickup value for a specified number (1 + Stabiliza-
tion counter value) of successive measuring cycles, the stage picks up. For 50 Hz, the measuring cycle
time is 10 ms.
If you set this parameter to 0 (default value), the stabilization is not applied. The pickup signal is issued after
the input voltage falls below the pickup value.
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/TInv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The stage operates after the additional time delay.
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:
[fo_uvp_3ph_inverse, 2, en_US]
Where
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
VThresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
α Curve constant α (Parameter Charact. constant α)
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)
1340 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
[dw_uvp_3ph_inverse, 1, en_US]
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before
the current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is
achieved by delaying the pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage exceeds the dropout value (1.05 x pickup factor x threshold value), the pickup signal
is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time.
Instantaneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the
desired delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the stage picks up again within this
period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage-protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-471 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1341
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see 8.3.2.1 Overview of
Functions) . The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage
failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
1342 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The stage picks up when the measured voltage value falls below the pickup value Threshold × Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as
phase-to-ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long operate delay time after
pickup, Siemens recommends using the default value of Pickup factor.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1343
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
1344 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the junction side, the voltage does not exist.
6.39.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1345
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.39 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
1346 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• Protects equipment (for example, plant components and machines) from damages caused by under-
voltage
• In the DIGSI 5 library, 2 variants of this function are available for the protection devices of the 87 series:
with and without blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
2-phase short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced voltage collapse. In comparison to three 1-phase
measuring systems, such events have no noticeable impact on the positive-sequence voltage. This makes this
function particularly suitable for the assessment of stability problems.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function
groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function comes factory-set with 2 tripping
stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages
have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-473). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can
only set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dw_stuvu1, 3, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1347
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
[lo_uvp_V1_1-3pol, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-474 Logic Diagram of the Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
(1) This only applies to the function variant with blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
1348 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Method of Measurement
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the measured
phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for
undervoltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the
current-flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup
delay parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker
opens. This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded in at least one phase. A current below the
minimum current blocks the tripping stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled via the binary input signal Threshold I>. The function
reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-474 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched off, the device picks up immediately if a missing
measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The parameter setting can be
changed even when the device has picked up.
• During a 1-pole dead time associated with the device's internal AR function. This only applies to the
function variant with blocking with 1-pole open circuit breaker.
The reduced positive-sequence variable, which occurs when the voltage transformer is located on the
output side, is only conditional upon the unbalanced power flow. A fault in the electrical power system
has no effect on this reduced positive-sequence variable.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
• From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see 8.3.2.1 Overview of
Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not block
the tripping stage when the measuring-voltage failure detection picks up.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
Parameter: Threshold
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1349
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application. For the default setting, the lower limit
of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80 % of the rated voltage of the protected object.
EXAMPLE:
Rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the Vrated,obj. = 120 kV
line):
Voltage transformer:
With regard to the setting, please note that according to the definition, with symmetrical voltages the value of
the zero-sequence voltage must correspond to Vrated/√3.
[foswprim-280211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
[foswseku-280211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
1350 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions).
• If they are located on the supply side, the voltage still exists.
• If they are located on the output side, the voltage does not exist.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1351
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
6.40.5 Settings
1352 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.40 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1353
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 27) detects any 1-phase undervoltage and is
intended for special applications.
The Undervoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are
based on voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage comes factory-set with 2 stages. A maximum of
3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical
structure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec-
tion stages (see Figure 6-475).
[dw_stuvux, 1, en_US]
1354 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Logic of a Stage
[lo_uvp_Vx_any-volt, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-476 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the
parameter Measured value is not visible.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1355
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up when the current-flow criterion has been set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-476 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:101) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
1356 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i From V7.30 on, the value VN measured is no longer provided. If you have selected this value in earlier
versions, you can select the value V0 calculated instead after upgrading the configuration to V7.30 or a
later version.
If the function Undervoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the
parameter Measured value is not visible.
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
i If the function is used in a Voltage-current 1-phase function group connected to the 1-phase voltage
measuring point with the voltage type VN broken-delta, you set the threshold value based on the
equivalent zero-sequence voltage.
Calculate the equivalent zero-sequence voltage V0 equiv. sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the
following formula:
For more information about the parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, refer to 6.1.6 Application and
Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3‑Phase (V-3ph).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1357
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The recommended set value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement
precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced to 1.02, for example.
NOTE
i Because of the flexible setting options of the voltage measurand, the function itself does not determine
the current associated with the voltage. A suitable current-flow monitoring function must be created by
the user with the Continuous Function Chart (CFC), and connected to the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion.
6.41.5 Settings
1358 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1359
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.41 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
1360 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection
In a power system, in addition to short circuits, there are other situations which also cause voltage changes.
For example, too high loads can reduce the voltage level at the end of the line, or too high power production
can cause a voltage-level increase.
The function Rate-of-voltage-change protection can be used to:
• Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power
• Detect a rather fast voltage change related to a fault in the power system
The function Rate-of-voltage-change protection can be used in protection function groups with 3‑phase
voltage measurement.
2 stage types are available:
• dV/dt rising
• dV/dt falling
The function Rate-of-voltage-change protection comes factory-set with 1 dV/dt rising stage and 1 dV/dt
falling stage. A maximum of 5 dV/dt rising stages and 5 dV/dt falling stages can be operated simultaneously
within the function. Both stage types are similar in structure.
The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indication output logic generates the following group indications of the protection function by the
logical OR of the stage-selective indications:
• Pickup
• Operate
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1361
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection
6.42.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure shows the dV/dt calculation logic. It applies to all configured stages.
[lo_dvdt_general, 1, en_US]
dV/dt Calculation
The measured phase-to-phase voltages are used for calculating the rate of voltage change.
The measuring-window interval is used for calculating the dV/dt mean value for further processing. A larger
measuring window increases the accuracy of the dV/dt mean value while simultaneously increasing the pickup
time.
The ratio between the voltage difference and the time difference reflects the voltage change which can be
positive or negative.
Value Description
dV/s Calculated mean voltage change per second
1362 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection
6.42.4.1 Description
[lo_dvdt_stage, 1, en_US]
(1) For the stage type dV/dt rising, the value dV/dt rising (AB) is used.
Voltage Change
The stage dV/dt falling is used to detect a system-voltage decrease and the stage dV/dt rising is used to
detect a system-voltage increase.
You set the threshold value dV/second as the absolute voltage change per second. You define the
voltage‑change direction via the stage type.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1363
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements detect the
voltage‑change condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the voltage‑change condition
(1 out of 3).
Dropout Delay
If the dV/dt value falls below the dropout threshold, the dropout of the stage can be delayed. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The operate delay continues to run. If the operate delay expires while the
pickup is still maintained, the stage operates.
• From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or not.
Parameter: dV/second
1364 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection
With the Pickup mode parameter, you define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring
elements detect the voltage falling/rising condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element detects the
voltage falling/rising condition (1 out of 3).
Parameter Value Description
1 out of 3 Select the setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
This setting reflects how the function operated in previous generations
(SIPROTEC 4).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (for example in the case of wind farms).
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
6.42.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1365
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection
1366 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.42 Rate-of-Voltage-Change Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1367
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
• Prevents a voltage collapse in power system by disconnecting the power-generation facility from the
main power systems
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1
Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.
[dw_qvprot, 1, en_US]
1368 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
6.43.3.1 Description
[lo_qvprst, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-481 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protec-
tion
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1369
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.
Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.
Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
• The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the
parameterized threshold value).
Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.
• Measuring-voltage failure
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshold-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter
6.19.8.1 Description .
• The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
• The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
1370 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:
[fo_qvprot, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1371
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
The time of the Operate delay grid CB should always be set longer than the time of the Oper. delay
generator CB.
Parameter: Q sign
6.43.3.3 Settings
1372 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1373
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
6.43.4.1 Description
[lo_qvclst, 4, en_US]
Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.
1374 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
• The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.
Parameter: Configuration
• Overfrequency protection
• Underfrequency protection
• Overvoltage protection
• Undervoltage protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1375
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.43 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
You use these 2 parameters to define the admitted frequency deviation from the rated frequency. f differ-
ence positive defines the upper frequency range limit. f difference negative defines the lower
frequency range limit.
Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.
6.43.4.3 Settings
1376 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
• Monitors the voltage-transformer circuits by comparing the voltages from 2 voltage transformers
If failures in the voltage circuits are detected, voltage-related protection functions can be blocked.
• Requires the connection of 2 voltage measuring points to the voltage interface of the function group
You can take one of the voltages as the reference voltage and then the other becomes the main voltage.
The reference voltage is used for comparison.
NOTE
i The voltage selection for the protection function in the FGs works independent of the status of the
Voltage-comparison supervision function.
The Voltage-comparison supervision function can be used in the following function groups:
• Generator stator
• Generator side
• Transformer side
[dw_structure_VBP, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1377
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
6.44.3.1 Description
Function Application
The following figure shows an application example.
[sc_VBStoFG, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-485 Connecting the Measuring Points to the Generator Stator Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• Either the Voltage-comparison supervision function or the Voltage measuring-point selection func-
tion must be instantiated. They must not be instantiated at the same time.
About the Voltage measuring-point selection function, you can find more information in chapter
6.66 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
1378 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
Voltage Selection
2 voltage measuring points are connected to a voltage interface of a function group. In the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function, you can set one of the voltages as the reference voltage via the parameter
Reference voltage, and the other voltage becomes the main voltage.
• The main voltage is used for all voltage-related functions in the FGs that contain the Voltage-compar-
ison supervision function.
If the main voltage transformer is disconnected, the Voltage-comparison supervision function issues
the blocking signal Meas.-volt failure. The signal is transmitted to all voltage-related protection
functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison supervision.
The voltage inputs in the preceding figure are calculated with the following equations:
ΔV1 = |v(n)ref.| - |v(n)main|
ΔV2 = |v(n)main| - |v(n)ref.|
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1379
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
Voltages Description
v(n)ref. Sampled value of the reference voltage
v(n)main Sampled value of the main voltage
Vref. Fundamental value of the reference voltage
Vmain Fundamental value of the main voltage
V1ref. Positive-sequence value of the reference voltage
V1main Positive-sequence value of the main voltage
Pickup
If the voltage difference between each 2 of 3 continuous sampling points is over 8 % Vrated of the plant, the
supervision stage picks up.
Voltage Supervision
For the Voltage-comparison supervision function, the following 2 connection types are allowed:
• Phase-to-ground
The phase-to-ground voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.
• Phase-to-phase
The phase-to-phase voltages are used for the voltage-difference comparison.
NOTE
i The 2 ph-to-ph volt. + VN and 2 ph-to-ph voltages connection types are not allowed.
Voltage-Failure Indication
For different connection types, the indications are different.
• Phase-to-ground
You can get the voltage-failure information from the output signals Main-voltage failure and
Ref.-voltage failure.
• Phase-to-phase
– If one phase is influenced, the phase information is indicated.
– If more than one phase is influenced, the phase-to-phase information is indicated.
Take the main voltage transformer for example. You can determine the faulty phase with the
following table.
1380 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
Release Voltage
If the main positive-sequence voltage or the reference positive-sequence voltage is between 50 % Vrated and
130 % Vrated, the function is released.
Selection Invalid
An invalid measuring-point selection results in the following:
NOTE
i You must assign a voltage measuring point to the parameter Reference voltage. The assignment influ-
ences the voltage-related protection functions which are used in the same FGs as the Voltage-comparison
supervision function. These voltage-related protection functions use the unassigned voltage measuring
point, which is defined as the main voltage in the Voltage-comparison supervision function. You can find
more information in section Voltage Selection, Page 1379.
EXAMPLE
Meas.point V-3ph 1 and Meas.point V-3ph 2 are connected to the Voltage-comparison supervision func-
tion. Then you have 2 more setting options, as shown in the following figure. You must select one of these
setting options for the parameter Reference voltage.
[sc_VBS_ref_voltage, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Mode
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1381
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.44 Voltage-Comparison Supervision
6.44.3.3 Settings
1382 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
The Fault locator function is used to determine the distance to the fault location.
Quick determination of fault location and the associated rapid troubleshooting increase the availability of the
line for the power transmission in the electrical power system. Fault-location determination is based on the
determination of the reactance of the short-circuited measuring loops.
The function Fault locator can be used in protection function groups with 3-phase current and voltage
measurement, for example, in the Line function group and the Voltage/current 3-phase function group.
[dw_stbafo, 1, en_US]
The fault location is calculated based on the line parameter. The fault-location determination is always carried
out with going pickup of the short-circuit protection. There is an option to limit the fault-location
determination to cases with tripping (setting value for parameter Start = with operate).
The fault locator can be started as follows:
• Via the phase-segregated binary inputs >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B,
>Fault detected phs C, and >Fault detected gnd.
• Via the differential protection
• Via the non-phase segregated binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd.
If multiple protection functions are operating in parallel, the fault locator is only started by the protection-
function pickup with the highest priority. The functions are listed in decreasing priority.
The Fault locator function only works with the following current and voltage-transformer connection types
(see parameter value).
Parameter Parameter Value
CT connection • 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
• 2ph, 2p. CT + 2 IN-sep
VT connection • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1383
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
NOTE
i The Fault locator function does not work with all possible current and voltage transformer connection
types. An error message is displayed in DIGSI 5 if the Fault locator function cannot work with the set
connection types. In this case check the current and voltage transformer connection type. You will find the
CT connection or VT connection parameters in DIGSI 5 under Power system → Meas.point I-3ph or
Power system → Meas.point V-3ph.
Starting Conditions
Each protection function that can start the fault locator also provides the fault locator with information on
the pickup and tripping times. If multiple protection functions pick up at the same time, the fault locator is
started only by the function with the highest priority. The pickup pattern for the other protection functions is
discarded.
The fault locator uses the pickup and tripping information for the protection function being started to form its
own measurand memory for the following calculations. Depending on the pickup duration of the protection
function, the measurand memory is positioned such that it contains prefault processes, short-circuit processes,
and switch-off processes. If the pickup lasts for a longer time, only the short-circuit processes and switch-off
processes are recorded by the measurand memory. The fault-location determination always starts only after
the dropout of the pickup.
Fault-location determination is also possible via the starting condition with going pickup, if the protec-
tion device only picks up and does not trigger. Fault-location determination is then performed via the starting
condition with operate only if the protection device has reported the tripping and the pickup has dropped
out.
Alternatively, the fault locator can be started via one or more binary inputs. If the phase-segregated indica-
tions >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B, >Fault detected phs C, and >Fault
detected gnd. are routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing, the fault locator interprets the binary inputs
as a phase-segregated external protection function and treats them with the highest priority.
NOTE
i The phase-segregated start of the fault locator is only possible if you have routed all 4 indications in the
DIGSI 5 information routing.
When routing the binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd., the binary input is interpreted as a non-
segregated external protection function and is treated with the lowest priority. The fault locator starts when
the binary input drops out.
When the parameter with operate is set and the fault locator is started via the binary input, the fault-loca-
tion determination is started only when a device-internal protection function generates an operate indication,
or when the binary input >Fault locator start is activated in addition to the above mentioned binary
inputs.
[sc_rout_BE, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-488 Routing Matrix for the Triggering of the Fault Locator via Binary Input
1384 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
[dw_sigra_flo, 1, en_US]
The impedances of the short-circuit loops are calculated of the measurement-window data. If there are
multiple short-circuited loops, a selection process is used to select a loop and the results are then issued.
If it is not possible to determine a sufficient data window with usable measured values or a plausible short-
circuited loop, the indication FLO invalid signals the invalid measuring result.
• The fault distance d of the line proportional to the reactance in kilometers or miles, converted on the
basis of the parameterized reactance per unit length of the line
• The fault distance d as a percentage of the line length, calculated on the basis of the parameterized
reactance per unit length and the parameterized line length
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1385
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
NOTE
i The indication of distance in kilometers, miles, or percent is applicable only for homogeneous line sections.
If the line comprises parts which exhibit different reactances per unit of length (for example, overhead-
line-cable sections), you can then analyze the reactance determined from the fault location for separate
calculation of the fault distance. Alternatively, you can use the Fault locator plus function, with which the
non-homogeneous lines can be parameterized in line sections.
[dw_llschleife_flo, 1, en_US]
The loop equation for the calculation of the short-circuit impedance of the phase-to-phase loop B-C is:
[fo_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]
With:
VB, VC Short-circuit voltage phasor for phases B and C
IB, IC Short-circuit current phasor phases B and C
m Proportionate distance to the fault
mZL = m ⋅ (RL + jXL) Line impedance up to fault location
[fo_R_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]
[fo_X_L2-L3_schl, 1, en_US]
1386 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
In case of a phase-to-ground short circuit, for example, A-gnd, for the calculation of a phase-to-ground loop,
it must be considered that the impedance of the ground-return path does not match the impedance of the
phases.
[dw_leschleife_flo, 1, en_US]
In case of A-gnd short circuit, the phase-to-ground voltage VA, the phase current IA and the ground current Ignd
are measured.
[fo_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
[fo_R_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
and
[fo_X_L1-E_schl, 1, en_US]
With:
VA Short-circuit voltage phasor
IA Short-circuit current phasor phase A
Ignd Ground-fault current phasor
IR = IA - kr⋅Ignd Auxiliary quantity
Ix = IA - kx⋅Ignd Auxiliary quantity
The factors kr = Rgnd/Rph and kx = Xgnd/Xph depend only on the line constants and not on the distance to the
fault.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1387
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
measurement protocol using the reactance method. The load compensation impacts both the 1-pole short
circuit and the 2-pole short circuit. You can activate and deactivate the load compensation via the Load
compensation parameter. If the distance protection operates with the reactance method, Siemens recom-
mends switching on the load compensation for the fault locator too.
The following figure serves as an example of the description of the impedance calculation:
[dw_ueb_impedanzber, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-492 Fault Currents and Voltages of a Line Fed on Both Sides (1-Pole Display)
A Measuring point
VA, VB Voltage source
IA, IB Partial fault currents
IF Total fault current
VA Fault voltage at measuring point A
RF Common fault resistance
Z L, (1-m) ZL Fault impedances
ZA, ZB Source impedances
m Proportionate distance to the fault
[dw_leschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]
The loop equation is extended with the equivalent current I Subst. on both sides and converted according to the
impedance.
1388 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
[fo_x_impber, 1, en_US]
With:
A Measuring point
VA, Fault voltage at measuring point A (phase-to-ground voltage)
IA, IGnd Partial fault currents
IF Total fault current
RF Common fault resistance
ZL, ZB Line impedance
m Proportionate distance to the fault
ISubst. Equivalent current
k0 Ground-fault factor
δComp Compensation angle
You can select the equivalent current ISubst. such that the impact of the fault current IB is compensated at the
fault resistance RF. This prevents the measuring error in the reactance.
The resulting measuring error in RF can be compensated only partially.
RF is calculated as follows:
[fo_rf_impber, 3, en_US]
The protection device cannot measure the fault current IF directly. Therefore, either 3I0 or 3I2 is used as an
equivalent for IF. In order to achieve the best result, the procedure uses the larger one of the 2 equivalent
currents. If the angles of the source impedances and the line impedance are not equal, you can compensate
the inhomogeneity using the compensation angles.
The compensation angles δ comp depend on the network conditions and can be calculated for the zero and
negative-sequence system using the following formulas:
[fo_kompwi_nullsys_impber, 1, en_US]
[fo_kompwi_gegensys_impber, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1389
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
With:
ZA,0, ZB,0 Source impedances in zero-sequence system
ZL,0 Line impedance in zero-sequence system
m Proportionate distance to the fault
δcomp,0 Compensation angle in zero-sequence system
ZA,2, ZB,2 Source impedances in negative-sequence system
ZL,2 Line impedance in negative-sequence system
δcomp,2 Compensation angle in negative-sequence system
[dw_llschleife_rmd, 3, en_US]
The loop equation for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop is:
Whereby the following applies for the B-C loop: Isubst = (a - a2)⋅I2 and a = e j120°.
The rotation of the negative-sequence system, which is dependent on the fault loop, performs the fault-
locator algorithm internally.
RF is calculated as follows:
1390 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
Compensation is not possible for faults located externally, including those on the parallel line, and does not
improve the measured values.
You can activate and deactivate the parallel-line compensation with the Parallel-line compensat.
parameter. Furthermore, the parallel-line compensation is only released, if the ratio between the calculated
ground current Ignd of the particular line and the ground current of the parallel line IgndP is above the parame-
terized threshold Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
[dw_parkomp_L3-E, 1, en_US]
[fo_parkomp1, 1, en_US]
[fo_parkomp2, 1, en_US]
IgndP is the ground current of the parallel line. The ratios kmR = R0M/3Rph and kmx = X0M/3Xph are line constants
that result from the geometry of the double line and the suitability of the grounding.
[fo_parkomp1_rmd, 1, en_US]
[fo_parkomp2_rmd, 1, en_US]
The factor k0M = Z0M/(3Zph) is a line constant that results from the geometry of the double line and the
suitability of the grounding.
With:
Z0M Coupling impedance in zero-sequence system
R0M Coupling resistance in zero-sequence system
X0M Coupling reactance in zero-sequence system
k0M Coupling factor in zero-sequence system
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1391
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
The function requires the following key line data to calculate fault distance:
• Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
Parameter: Start
As an alternative, the fault locator can be started using external binary input.
[scParkomp, 1, en_US]
If you wish to apply the parallel-line compensation for double lines, set the Parallel-line compensat.
parameter to yes.
Parameter Value Description
no The parallel-line compensation does not become effective with this setting.
yes The parallel-line compensation becomes effective with this setting.
The following conditions have to be fulfilled so that the parallel-line compensation functions:
• Connect the ground current of the parallel line in the correct polarity to an additional current input.
• Set the input used for the parallel current in the correct ratio to the phase currents for the power-system
data.
The parallel-line compensation is carried out only if the ground current of the line to be protected
(Ignd) is greater than the ground current of the parallel line (IgndP) evaluated with the parameter
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
Siemens recommends keeping the default setting Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)= 85 % . In highly
unbalanced system conditions and if the coupling factor is very small (XM/XL less than 0.4), a smaller
value may be advisable.
• Set the coupling impedances to the parallel system for the line data.
1392 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
NOTE
i If you use the Fault locator function in the Line function group, the function operates with the line
parameters of the function group.
If you use the Fault locator function in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group, you must enter the
following line parameters in the Voltage/current 3-phase function group.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1393
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
[fo_lwinkl, 1, en_US]
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE
[fo_tan_phi, 1, en_US]
[fo_arctan_phi, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Kr and Kx
1394 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
where:
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line
X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
EXAMPLE
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
[fo_kr, 1, en_US]
[fo_kx, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual
compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are only visible if you have set the parameter
Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device. The Set. format residu. comp. parameter
can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Parameter → Device settings.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex grounding-resistance factor.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex grounding-resistance factor is defined by the
value and the angle. You can calculate the complex grounding-resistance factor from the line data as follows:
[fo_K01, 1, en_US]
where:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1395
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence system
and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differences can
occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE
[fo_1_k0, 1, en_US]
[fo_2_k0, 1, en_US]
[fo_3_k0, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary Part tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
[fo_phi_K0, 1, en_US]
1396 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
6.45.5 Settings
Settings for the Instantiation of the Fault Locator in the Line Function Group
Settings for the Instantiation of the Fault Locator in the VI 3-Ph Function Group
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1397
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.45 Fault Locator
1398 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
• Also reliably detects the fault location with 2-sided infeed, faults with ground involvement and with fault
resistances
The Fault locator plus function can be used in protection function groups with 3-phase current and voltage
measurement, for example, in the Line function group and the Voltage/current 3-phase function group.
The fault location is calculated based on the line parameters. Fault-location determination is always carried
out with going pickup of the short-circuit protection. There is an option to limit fault-location determina-
tion to cases with tripping (setting the value for the parameter Start = with operate).
For inhomogeneous lines, such as overhead line/cable sections, you can set parameters for separate line
sections with dedicated line data. You can instantiate a maximum of 9 line sections.
For 2-sided fault-location determination, the measured values of both line ends must to be available at each
line end. For this purpose, a SIPROTEC 5 device must be installed with a protection interface at each end of
the area to be protected. The devices exchange their measurands via protection interface. The measurands
are encrypted in digital telegrams and transmitted via protection communication. The current and voltage
transformers selectively delimit the protection range.
2-sided fault-location determination is not possible with the function Fault locator plus under the following
conditions, for example:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1399
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
NOTE
i If 2-sided fault-location determination is not possible, the function Fault locator plus alternatively works
with the 1-sided method for fault-location determination.
[dw_example_WS, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-498 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each With Protection Communication
• Via the phase-segregated binary inputs >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B,
>Fault detected phs C, and >Fault detected gnd.
• Via differential protection
NOTE
i The function Fault locator plus does not work with all possible current and voltage transformer connection
types.
An error message is displayed in DIGSI 5 if the function cannot work with the set connection type. In this
case, check the current and voltage transformer connection type.
You can find the CT connection or VT connection settings in DIGSI 5 under Power system →
Meas.point I-3ph or System data → Meas.point V-3ph.
The Fault locator plus function only works with the following current and voltage transformer connection
types (see parameter value).
Parameter Parameter Value
CT connection • 3-phase + IN-separate
• 3-phase + IN
• 3-phase
VT connection • 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
• 3 ph-to-gnd voltages
1400 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
Starting Conditions
Each protection function that can start the fault locator also provides Fault locator plus with information on
the pickup and tripping times. If multiple protection functions pick up at the same time, Fault locator plus is
started only by the function with the highest priority.
The fault locator uses the pickup and tripping information for the protection function being started to form its
own measurand memory for the following calculations. Depending on the pickup duration of the protection
function, the measurand memory is positioned such that it contains prefault processes, short-circuit processes,
and switch-off processes. If the pickup lasts for a longer time, only the short-circuit processes and switch-off
processes are recorded by the measurand memory. The fault-location determination always starts only after
the dropout of the pickup.
Fault-location determination is also possible via the starting condition with going pickup, if the protec-
tion device only picks up and does not trigger. Fault-location determination is then performed via the starting
condition with operate only if the protection device has reported the tripping and the pickup has dropped
out.
Alternatively, the Fault locator can be started via one or more binary inputs. If the phase-segregated indica-
tions >Fault detected phs A, >Fault detected phs B, >Fault detected phs C, and >Fault
detected gnd. are routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing, the Fault locator interprets the binary inputs
as a phase-segregated external protection function and treats them with the highest priority.
NOTE
i The phase-segregated start of the fault locator will only be possible if you have routed all 4 indications in
the DIGSI 5 information routing.
When routing the binary input >Flt. det. w/o phs.&gnd., the binary input is interpreted as a non-
segregated external protection function and is treated with the lowest priority. The fault locator starts when
the binary input drops out.
When the parameter with operate is set and the Fault locator is started via the binary input, the fault-loca-
tion determination is started only when a device-internal protection function generates an operate indication,
or when the binary >Fault locator start input is activated in addition to the above mentioned binary
inputs.
[scRang_FOplus, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-499 Routing Matrix for the Triggering of the Fault Locator via Binary Input
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1401
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
NOTE
i If you have an inhomogeneous line with several line sections, you must enter the line sections in the device
at the opposite end back-to-front. The function checks the correct parameter configuration and issues the
inconsistency indication (_:2311:310) Line sect. setting err. in the case of a fault.
EXAMPLE:
The line between line ends A and B consists of the line sections Cable A – overhead line – Cable B. Consider
the following with the parameter configuration of the function:
• Instantiate each of 3 line ends in the device at line end A and at line end B and enter the line data for
each section.
• Ensure that you enter the data for the line sections in device B back-to-front to device A.
with
1402 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
Wave impedance
d Distance
V, I Measured values on the line ends
Figure 6-501 Voltage Curve, Calculated from Both Sides of the Line
with:
1 Voltage curve calculated with the measured values at line end A
2 Voltage curve calculated with the measured values at line end B
dFL Fault location
The algorithm of the 2-sided fault-location determination offers the following advantages compared to the
1-sided method:
• Correct fault-location determination is also possible with power flow, 2-sided infeed and high fault
resistances.
• The algorithm is independent from the zero-sequence system and therefore also from its influencing
variables, such as inductive couplings of parallel lines.
• An imprecise setting of the residual impedance compensation factors has no influence on the precision of
the fault location.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1403
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
• The number of the line section, in which the fault was localized
NOTE
i If 2-sided fault-location determination is not possible by the Fault locator plus function, the function
works automatically with the algorithm for the 1-sided fault-location determination.
You can find the description for the 1-sided fault locator in 6.45.1 Overview of Functions.
The following line data are relevant for the 2-sided fault-location determination:
• Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
• Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
The following parameters are only relevant for the 1-sided fault-location determination:
• Parallel-line compensat.
• Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)
• Load compensation
• The residual compensation factors in the setting format Kr and Kx or K0 and Angle (K0).
NOTE
i Parallel-line compensation and load compensation are only possible with homogeneous lines.
If you define more than one line section and set the parameter Parallel-line compensat. or Load
compensation = yes, DIGSI reports an inconsistency.
Parameter: Start
1404 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
As an alternative, the fault locator can be started using an external binary input.
[scParkomp, 1, en_US]
The following conditions have to be fulfilled so that the parallel-line compensation functions:
• Connect the ground current of the parallel line in the correct polarity to an additional current input.
• Set the input used for the parallel current in the correct ratio to the phase currents for the power-system
data.
Parallel-line compensation is only carried out if the ground current of the line to be protected
(Ignd) is greater than the ground current of the parallel line (IgndP) evaluated with the parameter
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
Siemens recommends keeping the default setting Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) = 85 %. In highly
unbalanced system conditions and if the coupling factor is very small (XM/XL less than 0.4), a smaller
value may be advisable.
• Set the coupling impedances to the parallel system correctly for the line data.
Parameter: Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1405
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
[dwparkomrw-161013, 1, en_US]
Parallel-line compensation is only carried out if the ground current of the line to be protected
(Ignd) is greater than the ground current of the parallel line (IgndP) evaluated with the parameter
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
Siemens recommends keeping the default setting Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)= 85 % . In highly unbal-
anced system conditions and if the coupling factor is very small (XM/XL less than 0.4), a smaller value may be
advisable.
• Substitute for IF
• Comp. angle zero seq.
• Comp. angle neg. seq.
If distance protection operates with the reactance method, Siemens recom-
mends switching on load compensation.
1406 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
The parameters Comp. angle zero seq. and Comp. angle neg. seq. are only visible and relevant if
you operate using load compensation.
If, based on network model tests or calculations, an angle difference between the measured 3I0 or 3I2 and
IF was determined, this can be compensated for with the parameter Comp. angle zero seq. or the
parameter Comp. angle neg. seq..
A setting of the compensation angle deviating from 0 is only relevant for non-homogeneous systems.
When using the Comp. angle zero seq. parameter, the angle difference between the 3I0 calculated by
the device and the fault current IF is being compensated.
When using the Comp. angle neg. seq. parameter, the angle difference between the 3I2 calculated by
the device and the fault current IF is being compensated.
NOTE
i For non-homogeneous lines, for example, cable/overhead line routes, you can define several line sections
and set the line parameters separately for each line section.
You can find further information on the line parameters in 6.45.4 Application and Setting Notes.
[fo_lwinkl, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1407
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE
[fo_tan_phi, 1, en_US]
[fo_arctan_phi, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Kr and Kx
where:
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line
X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
EXAMPLE
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
1408 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
[fo_kr, 1, en_US]
[fo_kx, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the
residual compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are only visible if you have set
the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device. You can find the parameter Set.
format residu. comp. in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings → Device
settings.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex grounding-resistance factor.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex grounding-resistance factor is defined by the
absolute value and the angle. You can calculate the complex grounding-resistance factor from the line data as
follows:
[fo_K01, 1, en_US]
where:
Z0 (Complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (Complex) positive-sequence impedance
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-inde-
pendent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence system
and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differences can
occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE
[fo_1_k0, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1409
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
[fo_2_k0, 1, en_US]
[fo_3_k0, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary Part tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
+ + + I 0° to 90° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90° to 0° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90° to -180° arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) –180°
- + - II +90° to +180° –arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180°
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
[fo_phi_K0, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The parameter Blocking of the auto. recl. is only visible, if you have instantiated the function
block Blk by FtLc. # in the Automatic reclosing function.
You can find the function block Blk by FtLc. # in the DIGSI 5 library in the FG Circuit breaker → Automatic
reclosing function → Bocking by fault locator.
Parameter Value Description
no The Fault locator plus function has no impact on the Automatic reclosing
function.
yes The Fault locator plus function blocks the Automatic reclosing function.
The blocking only functions if the function block (FB) Blk by FtLc. # is
instantiated in the Automatic reclosing function. The parameter (_:102)
Min. dead time of blocking is in the FB. Set the parameter Min.
dead time of blocking to the smallest dead time of all instantiated
AREC cycles.
1410 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
6.46.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1411
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.46 Fault Locator Plus
1412 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Overfrequency Protection
The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can
be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dw_stofqp, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1413
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Overfrequency Protection
Logic of a Stage
[lo_stofqp, 2, en_US]
Frequency-Measurement Method
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
1414 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Overfrequency Protection
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
NOTE
Frequency-Measurement Method
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Frequency-Measurement Description
Method
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
Parameter: Threshold
With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup threshold of the overfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 50.20 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1415
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Overfrequency Protection
With the parameter Operate delay, you set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example, switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.
In the angle-difference method, the setting value relates to the positive-sequence system.
NOTE
i If in DIGSI you switch over the settings view of the parameters to Percent, the phase-to-phase value of
the rated voltage is the reference value for the Minimum voltage in both methods of measurement.
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
1416 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Overfrequency Protection
6.47.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1417
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Overfrequency Protection
1418 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Underfrequency Protection
• Disconnect generating units when the power system frequency is critical (for example, f < 0.95 frated)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed.
Underfrequency is caused by an increase of the consumers' active power demand or by a decrease of the
power generated. These conditions occur in the case of power system disconnection, generator failure, or
disturbances of the power and frequency controller.
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The Underfrequency protection function comes with 3 factory-set stages. A maximum of 5 tripping stages
can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dw_stufqp, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1419
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Underfrequency Protection
Logic of a Stage
[lo_stuf_qp, 3, en_US]
Frequency-Measurement Method
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
1420 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Underfrequency Protection
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
NOTE
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
Frequency-Measurement Method
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the security of protection.
Method of Measurement Description
Angle-difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
Parameter: Threshold
With the parameter Threshold, you define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 49.8 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1421
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Underfrequency Protection
Calculate the secondary or primary setting value with the phase-to-ground voltage, that is, Vrated/√3.
For Vrated = 100 V secondary, the setting value of the Minimum voltage is calculated as follows:
In the angle-difference method, the setting value relates to the positive-sequence system.
NOTE
i If in DIGSI you switch over the settings view of the parameters to Percent, the phase-to-phase value of
the rated voltage is the reference value for the Minimum voltage in both methods of measurement.
Frequency Activity
49.80 Hz Alarm and activation of reserves following an established plan
49.00 Hz Undelayed disconnection of 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.70 Hz Undelayed disconnection of another 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.40 Hz 3rd load-shedding stage. Another 15 % to 20 % of the power system load is
disconnected.
47.50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system
For this application, 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used. 2 of these stages are used for load
shedding. The following table shows a setting suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1< Warning 49.80 Hz 59.80 Hz 10.00 s
f2< 1st load shedding 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 0.00 s
f3< 2nd load shedding 48.70 Hz 58.70 Hz 0.00 s
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
1422 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Underfrequency Protection
6.48.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1423
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.48 Underfrequency Protection
1424 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
• Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power
• Network decoupling
• Load shedding
The function Rate of frequency change protection can be used in protection function groups containing a
3‑phase voltage measurement.
2 function block types are available:
• df/dt rising
• df/dt falling
The function Rate of frequency change protection is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 df/dt rising
stage and 1 df/dt falling stage. A maximum of 5 df/dt rising stages and 5 df/dt falling stages can operate
simultaneously within the function. Both of the function block types are similar in structure.
Undervoltage check and df/dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level. All
stages use these general functionalities.
6.49.3.1 Description
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of undervoltage check and df/dt calculation. It applies to all types of
stages.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1425
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
[lo_dfdtgf, 2, en_US]
Measurand
This function uses the frequency calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
For more information, refer to chapter 6.47.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
The frequency difference is calculated over a settable time interval (default setting: 5 periods).
The ratio between the frequency difference and the time difference reflects the frequency change which can
be positive or negative.
A stabilization counter works to avoid overfunction. This counter is increased if the set threshold value is
exceeded. If the value drops below the threshold value, the counter is reset immediately. The counter is set to
8 internally and is activated at each half system cycle.
Undervoltage Blocking
If the measuring voltage drops below the Minimum voltage, the Rate of frequency change protection is
blocked because precise frequency values cannot be calculated anymore.
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change
1426 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
The default setting is a reasonable compromise between measuring accuracy and pickup time. For a non-
sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the parameter Measuring window to a smaller value.
6.49.4.1 Description
[lo_dfdt_st, 2, en_US]
(1) For the stage type df/dt rising, the value df/dt rising is used.
Frequency Rising/Falling
The stage df/dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df/dt rising is used to detect
frequency rising.
You set the threshold value as an absolute value. You define the frequency-change direction via the selected
stage type.
• Via the undervoltage blocking when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1427
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
Parameter: Threshold
Where:
frated Rated frequency
ΔP Active power change
ΔP = PConsumption - PGeneration
Srated Rated apparent power of the machines
H Inertia constant
EXAMPLE
frated = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: ΔP/Srated = 0.12
Case 2: ΔP/Srated = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = -1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = -4 Hz/s
1428 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
NOTE
i In case of power-system incidents, especially in case of transmission incidents and influence of voltage-
stabilizing measures via power-electronic components (reactive-power compensation through SVC), the
magnitude and the phase angle of the voltage can change. Sensitive settings can lead to overfunction.
Therefore, it is reasonable to block the Rate of Frequency Change Protection if other protection func-
tions, for example, residual voltage or negative-sequence voltage, pick up. To do this, use the blocking
input >Block stage and connect it via CFC.
6.49.4.3 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1429
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.49 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
1430 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
• Switches off the medium-voltage busbar or feeders that consume active power to stabilize the frequency
• Maintains operations for the medium-voltage busbar or feeders that generate active power
The Underfrequency load shedding function can be used in the Voltage/Current 3-phase function group
and in the Line function group.
The Underfrequency load shedding function comes factory-set with 8 stages. A maximum of 12 stages can
be operated simultaneously within the function. These stages are identical in structure.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1431
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
6.50.3.1 Description
Logic
1432 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
Measurands
The general functionality requires the following input measurands:
• Positive-sequence voltage V1
• Positive-sequence current I1
• Frequency
S1 and P1 are both calculated from V1 and I1. The frequency is calculated from V1.
The frequency and the frequency change rate df/dt are calculated via the angle difference algorithm. For more
information, see 6.47.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage.
Undervoltage Blocking
The frequency of the Underfrequency load shedding function is calculated from the positive-sequence
voltage V1. In order to obtain a reliable and accurate frequency calculation result, the magnitude of V1 is
monitored. If the magnitude of V1 is smaller than the Minimum voltage, all the protection stages are
blocked and the V1< block indication is issued.
Power Criterion
If a feeder delivers active power towards the busbar, or if the medium-voltage busbar delivers active power to
the high-voltage busbar, it is meaningless to switch off this feeder or the medium-voltage busbar during the
load-shedding process. The power criterion determines the power-flow direction and includes this information
as a blocking criterion into the load-shedding decision of all protection stages.
The parameter Positive power direction defines the positive active-power flow direction of the func-
tion in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality. For more information, see
6.50.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
In the following figures, if the power flow is located in the release area which is marked in gray, the protection
stages are released. In the remaining area, the protection stages are blocked.
The release area is configured via the following parameters:
• The parameter Phi (power criterion) defines the area which limits the range of the power angle.
• The parameter Min. current (power crit.) defines the minimum positive-sequence current that
must be present to calculate the active power in a reliable way. In the following figures, the minimum
current is indicated as the circle whose center is the origin of the coordinates.
The power criterion is checked only when the following 2 conditions are fulfilled:
• The positive-sequence current I1 exceeds the threshold Min. current (power crit.), that is, I1 is
out of the circle in the following figures.
• The undervoltage blocking is not fulfilled, that is, the magnitude of V1 is not smaller than the Minimum
voltage.
The dashed lines in the figures show the dropout characteristics. The dropout differential of the power angle is
1°.
The symbol φ in the following figures represents the setting value of the parameter Phi (power crite-
rion).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1433
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
[dw_load_shedding_power_crit<0, 1, en_US]
The power criterion contains the check of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion.
You can determine whether to check the power criterion or not by setting the Power criterion parameter.
The power criterion is carried out only when the Power criterion parameter is set to yes.
The working method of the current criterion and of the power-angle criterion differ at Phi (power crite-
rion) ≤ 0 and Phi (power criterion) > 0.
1434 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
• When the positive-sequence current I1 falls below the Min. current (power crit.), the current
criterion is not fulfilled and the I1< blocking indication is issued. Therefore, all the protection stages
are blocked and the power-angle criterion is not considered.
• When I1 exceeds the Min. current (power crit.) and the power angle is out of the release area,
the Power crit. blocking indication is issued and all the protection stages are blocked.
For Phi (power criterion) > 0, the power criterion is checked as follows:
• When I1 falls below the Min. current (power crit.), all the protection stages are released and
the power-angle criterion is not considered.
• When I1 exceeds the Min. current (power crit.) and the power angle is out of the release area,
the Power crit. blocking indication is issued and all the protection stages are blocked.
df/dt Blocking
If the change rate of df/dt is too high, the Underfrequency load shedding function may not be applicable
anymore.
The df/dt blocking comprises the df/dt-rising blocking and the df/dt-falling blocking.
The df/dt-rising criterion and the df/dt-falling criterion can be individually switched on or off. These 2 df/dt
criteria are operative only when the magnitude of the positive-sequence voltage V1 is greater than the
Minimum voltage:
• The df/dt-rising blocking takes place when the df/dt-rising value exceeds the setting value of the param-
eter df/dt-rising blk. threshold. It is signaled via the indication df/dt-rising blocking.
• The df/dt-falling blocking takes place when the df/dt-falling value exceeds the setting value of the
parameter df/dt-falling blk. threshold. It is signaled via the indication df/dt-falling
blocking.
Frequency-Tracking Criterion
The frequency-tracking criterion is only checked when no undervoltage blocking is given.
The frequency of the Underfrequency load shedding function is calculated via the angle difference algo-
rithm, which requires the sampling-frequency tracking to be active (see 3.3.2 Sampling-Frequency Tracking).
If the sampling-frequency tracking is inactive, all the protection stages are blocked and the signal Invalid
freq. blocking is issued.
Value Description
df/dt Calculated rate of frequency change
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1435
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
With the Positive power direction parameter, you define the positive active-power flow direction of
the function in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality.
The following figure shows 2 application scenarios of protection devices with the Underfrequency load
shedding function.
The standard forward direction of the protection functionality is from the busbar to the protected object which
is the transformer for device 1 or the feeder for device 2. The standard forward direction of the protection
functionality is configured via the (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter of the
measuring point I-3ph (see chapter 6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3‑Phase
(I-3ph)). For the load-shedding function, the positive active-power flow direction can differ from the standard
forward direction of the protection functionality, such as for device 1. To adapt the function to this condition,
the Positive power direction parameter is used. With the Positive power direction parameter,
you can set the positive active-power flow direction either to the same as or to the inverse of the standard
forward direction.
• For device 1, set the Positive power direction parameter to inv. to CT neu.pnt sett..
Then, the positive active-power flow direction of the power criterion is opposite to the standard forward
direction of the protection functionality. Consequently, the Underfrequency load shedding function
sheds the medium-voltage busbar when the positive power-flow direction is from the high-voltage
busbar to the medium-voltage busbar.
• For device 2, set the Positive power direction parameter to acc. to CT neu.pnt sett..
Then, the positive active-power flow direction of the power criterion is the same as the standard forward
direction of the protection functionality. Consequently, the Underfrequency load shedding function
sheds the feeder when the positive power-flow direction is from the medium-voltage busbar to the
feeder.
1436 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
Parameter: Power criterion, Phi (power criterion), Min. current (power crit.)
• With the Power criterion parameter, you configure whether to apply the power criterion or not.
If a feeder can deliver active power towards the busbar, or if the medium-voltage busbar can deliver
active power to the high-voltage busbar, Siemens recommends using the power criterion to exclude
the feeder or the medium-voltage busbar from being shed under this condition. If a feeder or the
medium-voltage busbar is always consuming active power, the power criterion is not required.
• With the Phi (power criterion) parameter, you decide whether the protection stage is blocked
or released in the case of low active-power flow. If the active-power flow is low, the determined active
power-flow direction is not always reliable.
For Phi (power criterion) ≤ 0, the protection stage is released for a clear forward active power-
flow direction. If the active power-flow direction is not reliable, the protection stages are blocked. For
Phi (power criterion) > 0, the behavior is the contrary.
The Phi (power criterion) parameter can be set depending on your philosophy.
• With the Min. current (power crit.) parameter, you set the minimum positive-sequence current
threshold to achieve a reliable active-power criterion result. The Min. current (power crit.)
parameter is set as a per-unit value related to the rated current of the connected current measuring
point. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1437
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
The default setting is a reasonable value. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
6.50.4.1 Description
1438 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
• The preceding 2 conditions are fulfilled during the configured number of frequency measurement cycles
(cycle time = 10 ms). You can set the number with the parameter f< stabilization counter.
If the Pickup signal is maintained during the Operate delay time, an Operate indication is issued.
• The SPS signal >Exclusive activation which is offered in the protection stage.
• The SPC signal Exclusive activation which is offered in the protection stage.
This SPC signal allows the exclusive stage activation from a station controller.
• The SPS signal >Activate all stages which is offered in the function block General.
The protection stage which receives the newest SPS signal >Exclusive activation or SPC signal Exclu-
sive activation remains active and all other stages are deactivated. If 2 or more protection stages
simultaneously receive the SPS signals >Exclusive activation and/or the SPC signals Exclusive
activation, only the protection stage with the largest stage number is activated.
If the SPS signal >Activate all stages is activated, the exclusive stage activation is reset, that is, all
protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on become active again.
After a normal device restart (reset), the statuses of the protection stages which were influenced by the SPS
signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal Exclusive activation are still maintained.
After an initial startup, the exclusive stage activation is reset.
EXAMPLE
Configured protection stages: Protection stages 1 to 8
Protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on: Protection stages 1 to 8
• Case 1:
Scenario: In the protection stage 1, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated.
Result: The protection stage 1 remains active and stages 2 to 8 are deactivated.
• Case 2:
Scenario: In the protection stage 2, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated.
Result: The protection stage 2 is activated, the stage 1 is deactivated, and stages 3 to 8 remain deacti-
vated.
• Case 3:
Scenario: The SPS signal >Activate all stages is activated.
Result: The protection stages 1 to 8 are activated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1439
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
• Case 4:
Scenario: In the protection stages 2 to 4, the SPS signal >Exclusive activation or the SPC signal
Exclusive activation is activated simultaneously.
Result: The protection stage 4 is activated and the other stages are deactivated.
• Case 5:
Scenario: A normal device restart (reset) occurs.
Result: After the device restart, the protection stage 4 remains activated and the other stages remain
deactivated.
• Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
Parameter: Threshold
With the Threshold parameter, you define the underfrequency pickup value of the stage. The specific value
depends on the application and the total number of the stages applied in parallel.
1440 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
With the f< stabilization counter parameter, you set the number of measurement cycles in which the
measured frequency value must be lower than the frequency threshold to meet the pickup condition. With
this setting, you can optimize the pickup-condition reliability versus the pickup time.
The measuring cycle time is 10 ms. With the default setting of 6, the pickup time is the sum of the inherent
frequency measuring time (approx. 10 ms to 30 ms) plus the 6 times measuring repetition of 60 ms, which is
70 ms to 90 ms in total.
In order to avoid a wrong pickup in case of a phase jump, Siemens recommends setting the value of the f<
stabilization counter parameter not below 5.
6.50.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1441
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.50 Underfrequency Load Shedding
1442 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Phase-Sequence Switchover
The Phase-sequence reversal function enables correct execution of the protection of the device and supervi-
sion functions, independently of the phase sequence of the phases in a system or system section.
The phase sequence is set via parameters. You can select between the phase sequences ABC or ACB.
Binary inputs also provide the option of switching over the phase sequence with respect to the parameter
setting. For example, in pumped-storage hydropower plants with motor or motor/generator operation you
temporarily change the direction of rotation by changing over the phase sequence.
The phase sequence has an effect on calculation of the positive-sequence system and negative-sequence
system values and on calculation of phase-to-phase values. A phase-rotation reversal therefore has an effect
on all protection and supervision functions that use these values.
You can change the phase sequence in 2 ways via binary inputs.
The Phase-sequence switchover function is integrated in the Power-system data. You will find the signals in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings. There you will find the parameter for setting
the phase sequence and the binary inputs via which you can influence a change in the phase sequence.
[dw_ph_rein, 1, en_US]
General
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter. You will find the
signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device → Settings → Power-system data → General.
There are 3 methods to change the phase sequence for different operational requirements.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1443
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Phase-Sequence Switchover
• With the binary signal >Phs-rotation reversal, you change over the phase sequence of all meas-
uring points.
• With the binary signal >Invert Phases, you change over the phase sequence per measuring point.
The Inverted phases parameter available for each measuring point is used to set which phases at the
measuring point must be swapped. The parameter can be found at each 3‑phase measuring point.
The 2 binary-signal mechanisms are explained separately below.
[dw_ph_rdrf, 1, en_US]
The phase sequence of a system or a system section is defined when parameterizing via the Phase
sequence parameter. The setting parameter acts on all measuring points.
The operationally induced switchover between the phase sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is
initiated via the binary input >Phs-rotation reversal. This switches over the phase sequence simultane-
ously at all 3-phase measuring points.
The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover.
The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence. If the phase sequence is set via the
Phase sequence parameter to ABC, activation of the binary input will result in a switchover to the phase
sequence ACB.
NOTE
i The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence
is only permissible when the machine is at standstill. If the current and voltage values of all 3-phase
measuring points are below 5 % of the rated variables, this is recognized as machine standstill.
A renewed machine standstill must be detected for a resetting of the phase sequence to the set preferred
position.
1444 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Phase-Sequence Switchover
[dw_phrpsys1, 2, en_US]
[dw_phrapp, 2, en_US]
The example shows 2 differential protection devices (IED1 and IED2) and an impedance protection (IED3) with
the connected measuring points.
The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential protection of IED1, as the protected object is not
affected by the switchover option of the phase sequence.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the differential protection of IED2, as the protected object extends
beyond the switchover option.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the impedance protection (IED3). Depending on the switch position,
the voltage measured values 1 and the current measured values 3 have a different phase sequence.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1445
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Phase-Sequence Switchover
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter for generator
operation. The Inverted phases parameter is used to set which phase is swapped for the relevant meas-
uring point. The swap is communicated to the measuring point via the binary input signal >Invert Phases.
The changed phase sequence is then included for calculation of the measurands at the measuring point.
In accordance with Figure 6-520 the phase sequence is set to ABC. A is swapped with C in motor operation.
The Inverted phases parameter must be set to AC for the measuring points of current measured values
2 and current measured values 3. As a result, the phase assignment for the differential protection IED2 and
the impedance protection IED3 is correct. The positive-sequence and negative-sequence current is calculated
correctly.
The following logic diagram shows the principle for determining the present phase assignment and measured
variables with the example of currents.
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are pending
at the selected measuring points. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change
in the phase sequence is only implemented if the measurands at the measuring points that are to be switched
are under 5 % of the rated variables. If the currents of the measuring points of current measured values 2 and
current measured values 3 of the example fall below 5 % of their rated variables, the switchover is released
and the set phases are switched with active binary input.
[lo_phrgph, 1, en_US]
1446 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Phase-Sequence Switchover
NOTE
i If you change the setting value of the parameter Inverted phases, consider the following:
The device can take the new setting value only if the binary input signal >Invert Phases is not active.
6.51.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1447
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.51 Phase-Sequence Switchover
1448 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
The Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function serves for immediate tripping when switching onto
a fault.
The function does not have its own measurement and must be linked to another protection function with the
pickup (measurement).
The function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault can be used in all protection function groups.
The function is preconfigured with 1 stage. A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
within the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dw_strsto, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1449
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
[lo_gisotf, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-523 Logic Diagram of the Stage Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
NOTE
i If a protection stage picks up and tripping is blocked by the Inrush-current detection function, the
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function does not pick up. In this case there is no fault
recording either.
Despite this, if a fault recording is necessary, you can activate it with the parameter (_:114) Start
flt.rec of the Inrush-current detection function (refer to 6.59.1 Inrush-Current Detection).
Parameter: Configuration
1450 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.52 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
The Configuration parameter is used to define the pickup of a protection function or protection stage that
the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function uses to respond.
Normally, the pickups of protection functions and stages with high fault current are selected:
• Distance protection
6.52.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1451
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables) against
thermal overloads
• Monitor the thermal state of motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables
The Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function is used in protection function groups with
current measurement.
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 Thermal overload protection, 3-phase –
advanced stage.
The non-preconfigured function block Filter can optionally be applied to gain the RMS value used by the
Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced stage.
[dw_TOLP_with_filter_stage, 2, en_US]
6.53.3.1 Description
The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means:
• To gain harmonics in a defined way. Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more
than lower harmonics. This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters. In addition, the amplitude attenu-
ation of higher frequencies due to the anti-aliasing filter of the device is automatically compensated by
the filter
• To only compensate the amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies by the device (due to the anti-
aliasing filter)
The filter gain (amplitude response) is realized by a 9-order FIR filter.
1452 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Logic
[lo_tolp_filter_stage, 1, en_US]
The FIR filter gains the 8-kHz sampled values according to the set filter coefficients. Afterwards the RMS value
is calculated. The symmetrical 9-order filter coefficients are set via the respective parameters h(0), h(1),
h(2), h(3) and h(4).
NOTE
i A FIR-filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool. With this PC tool, the coefficients h(0),
h(1), h(2), h(3), h(4) of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors (amplitude
response). The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area. For more information about the
tool, refer to the tool help function.
The gained RMS value is delivered to the protection stages only when the function block Filter is instantiated
and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes . Otherwise, the normal RMS value is used.
You can find the parameter Rated current in the FB General of function groups where the Thermal
overload protection, 3-phase - advanced function is used.
If the parameter Enable filter is set to no, the function values are shown as ---.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1453
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
With the parameter Enable filter, you set whether the Filter is enabled.
Parameter Value Description
yes If gained RMS values should be used in one of the protection stages, set
parameter Enable filter = yes.
no If no gained RMS values are needed, set the parameter Enable filter =
no.
6.53.3.3 Settings
1454 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
6.53.4.1 Description
Logic
[lo_tolp_with_filter_stage, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-526 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced Stage
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1455
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
[lo_stage_control_TOLP, 2, en_US]
RMS-Value Selection
The protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement:
NOTE
i When the function block Filter is applied, only one current measuring point I-3ph is allowed to be
connected to the 3-phase current interface of the function group.
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the phase currents based on a thermal single-
body model according to the thermal differential equation with
[fo_diffgl-170914, 2, en_US]
[fo_normie_01, 3, en_US]
1456 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
At the same time, Irated, obj is the rated current of the assigned protected object side:
• In the case of transformers, the rated current of the winding to be protected, which the device calculates
from the set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• The uncontrolled winding forms the basis in the case of transformers with voltage control
• In the case of generators, motors and reactors, the rated current, which the device calculates from the
set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
• In the case of lines, nodes and busbars, the rated current of the protected object is set directly
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial
adjustable overtemperature threshold Θwarn ( Threshold thermal warn. ), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and
corresponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-528 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
[dw_temp_ve, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-528 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents ( K-factor = 1.1)
The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase. The current overtemperature can be obtained
from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the
thermal threshold has been reached. The maximum overtemperature of the phases is regarded as the tripping
temperature. This means that the highest of the 3 phase currents is always assumed.
The analysis of the RMS values of the currents over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
If the flowing current falls below an adjustable minimum current Imin cooling , the Cooling time
constant is activated.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1457
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you can get the operate curve as following:
[fo_auslos, 1, en_US]
t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object
Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration. The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40°C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit increases.
The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter Temperature rise at Irated ).
The measured ambient temperature is measured by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) or by an IO111 module and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Tempera-
ture module IO111 of the function group Analog unit. When using the Temperature sensor parameter,
the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is faulty, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the
RTD unit, the health state of the Thermal overload protection, 3-phase – advanced function changes to
Warning. In this case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under
the Default temperature parameter, depending on which value is the highest.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits, motor startup currents). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal
replica must be influenced for overcurrents (exceeding l threshold). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping tempera-
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing
rated current.
1458 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate , the
trip command is canceled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see Technical Data).
Emergency Start
Depending on the operating conditions, tripping can be blocked or closure enabled despite the permissible
thermal limits being exceeded. Upon activation of the binary input signal >Emergency start , tripping
is blocked and closure enabled. This does not affect the state of the thermal memory. After the input >Emer-
gency start disappears, the blocking remains in effect for the set Emerg. start T overtravel .
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load.
The signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and canceled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1459
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for the K-factor.
[fo_warnsc, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is already 91 % filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95 %.
Parameter: K-factor
1460 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
[fo_tolp_kf, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!
In the case of cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, insulation material,
design type, and the manner in which the cables have been laid. In the case of overhead lines, an overload of
10 % is permissible.
EXAMPLE
For the Permissible Continuous Current
Cross-linked polyethylene cables (N2XS2Y): 10 kV 150 mm2 (Cu)
Current-carrying capacity (underground laying): Imax, perm = 406 A
Selected K factor of 1.1
This yields a rated current of Irated, obj = 369 A
[fo_perm_1.0-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]
If the short-term current-rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s, use the short-time
current instead of the 1-s current. Multiply the result by the specified application time.
For a given short-term current-carrying capacity of 0.5 s, use the following formula:
[fo_perm_0.5-s-continuous-current, 1, en_US]
[fo_konsta, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1461
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected threshold current of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120 °C (80 K + 40 °C) can be derived when using a temperature sensor for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 145 °C (105 K + 40 °C) derives.
From these values, the K factor can be derived:
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If you select a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
1462 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
NOTE
i For electrical machines, the limits can vary depending on the type of coolant.
Consult the machine manufacturer to agree on a setting value for the overtemperature.
• The temperature measurement is faulty and the last measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1463
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
6.53.4.3 Settings
1464 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.53 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase - Advanced
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1465
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function (ANSI 49) is used to:
• Protect the equipment (reactors or resistors in the neutral point of a transformer) from thermal overload
The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function is used in 1-phase protection function groups with
current measurement.
The Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function is steplessly preconfigured.
[dw_tolp1p, 2, en_US]
1466 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
Logic
[lo_tolp_1p, 3, en_US]
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the current flowing in the protected object (for
example, reactor or resistance in the transformer neutral point) on the basis of a thermal single-body model
according to the thermal differential equation with
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1467
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
[fo_diffgl, 2, en_US]
[fo_normie, 2, en_US]
At the same time, Irated,obj is the rated current of the protected object.
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature Θend. The time constant τth determines the rise. After reaching an initial
adjustable overtemperature threshold Θwarn (Threshold thermal warn.), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit ΘOff (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and
corresponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-531 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
1468 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
[dw_temp_ve, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-531 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents (K-factor = 1.1)
The current overtemperature can be obtained from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent.
An indication of 100 % means that the thermal tripping threshold has been reached.
The analysis of the RMS value of the current over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
Operate Curve
If the ambient temperature is not measured and set to 40°C, you get the following operate curve:
[fo_auslos, 1, en_US]
t Operate time
τth Time constant
I Measured load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011 or IEC 60255-149 (K factor)
Irated,obj Rated current of the protected object
Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40 °C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit
increases. The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1469
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter Temperature rise at Irated).
The measured ambient temperature is measured by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) or by an IO111 module and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether., RTD unit serial, or Tempera-
ture module IO111 of the function group Analog unit. When using the Temperature sensor parameter,
the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is disrupted, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the
RTD unit, the health state of the Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function changes to Warning. In this
case, the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under the Default
temperature parameter, whichever value is the highest.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal replica must be influenced
for overcurrents (exceeding llimit). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
• Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping tempera-
ture) is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection
avoided. At a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing rated
current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate, the
trip command is cancelled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see technical data).
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and cancelled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.
1470 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
• Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.1 A for lrated = 1 A
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for K-factor.
[fo_warnsc, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is 91 % filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95 %.
Parameter: K-factor
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1471
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
[fo_tolp_kf, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or
from the specifications of the manufacturer!
Siemens recommends using the default value as it is a typical value for many applications.
EXAMPLE
[fo_time_constance, 1, en_US]
1472 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
[dw_time-dependent, 1, en_US]
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected current threshold of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
NOTE
i For an application as a 1-phase overload protection, the ambient temperature measured via the tempera-
ture sensor is not taken into account. Therefore, the setting has no influence. You can keep the default
setting. If you take into account the temperature, note the following descriptions.
Set the overtemperature as the value that is the result if the equipment is continuously operated with the
rated current and at an ambient temperature of 40 °C. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object.
You can find the temperature value in the Technical data of the equipment or you can measure the value. If
you use a temperature sensor when measuring at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or
the coolant temperature from the measured value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually, you
will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute temperature
is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40 °C.
The overtemperature (ϑmax) at maximum permissible current and the Temperature rise at Irated
(ϑrated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1473
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120 °C (80 K + 40 °C) can be derived when using a measuring element for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 145 °C (105 K + 40 °C) derives.
From these values, the magnitude of the K factor can also be derived.
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If selecting a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
• Recommended setting value (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting
The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
The default setting has been selected compatible with SIPROTEC 4 devices. If you wish to take further
temperature rise into consideration, the current limiting procedure is recommended.
Parameter Value Description
current limiting The input current is limited to the value set in the Imax thermal parameter.
If the measured current exceeds the set current value, the limited current value
is supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current threshold is approx. 2 to
2.5 Irated, obj.
freeze therm. rep. If the input current exceeds the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal replica
will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This parameter value is
provided to enable compatibility with older products!
1474 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
Under the following conditions, the Default temperature will be set as ambient temperature:
• The temperature measurement is interrupted and the measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
6.54.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1475
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.54 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase
1476 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
• Motors
• Generators
• Transformers
In rotating machines, it also checks bearing temperatures for a limit violation.
The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD =
Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
The Temperature supervision function receives its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether. or
RTD unit serial functions from the Analog units function group.
The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups. A maximum of 48 temper-
ature supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function.
Each temperature supervision location has 2 threshold stages.
[dw_str_tmp, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1477
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
Logic
[lo_temp_supervision, 3, en_US]
The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature value
in °C or °F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog units
function group. The Sensor number parameter is used to select the temperature sensor.
2 threshold value decisions can be performed for each measuring point. If the measured temperature value is
greater than or equal to the set threshold values, the stages generate a pickup indication independent of one
another and, after a set tripping time delay, an operate indication.
The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing.
NOTE
i The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.
1478 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
If you use an external RTD unit, connect the RTD unit via an interface (Ethernet or serial) to the SIPROTEC 5
device. Observe the setting notes for configuration of the interfaces in chapter Analog Transformer Function
Group Type under 5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit.
Temperature Unit
Temperature Unit To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from °C to °F, adapt
the DIGSI user default settings accordingly (see 5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1479
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
6.55.5 Settings
1480 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1481
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
1482 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1483
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
1484 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1485
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.55 Temperature Supervision
1486 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
Starting with version V7.50, the previous function CB failure has been replaced with the new circuit-breaker
failure protection with an adaptive algorithm Adaptive CB failure protection. In this way, you achieve a
faster, more reliable detection of the opening of the circuit breaker in the event of complex signal histories.
The 2 functions are identical, with the exception of a slightly increased processor load, in terms of setting
options, logic and indications. Siemens recommends using the adaptive circuit-breaker failure protection and
avoiding mixing the protection types in one device. You can find additional information on the processor load
in DIGSI for each device under Device information in the Resource consumption tab.
The adaptive algorithm enables a faster, more reliable detection of the opening of the circuit breaker in the
event of complex signal histories.
The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
[dw_strbfp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-535 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by the device-internal protection function or by an external protection. Along with the
start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the
circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During
the time delay, the system continuously checks whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the
function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1487
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lo_svs_bfp, 3, en_US]
The function is started via the device-internal protection functions and/or externally (via a binary input or
interface, for example, GOOSE). The start can be done 1-pole or 3-pole. Figure 6-536 and Figure 6-537 show
the functionality.
Internal Start
By default, each device-internal protection stage that has to control the local circuit breaker starts the
circuit-breaker failure protection. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In case of
phase-selective tripping, the start will also be phase-selective. In addition, circuit-breaker failure protection
is started with 3-pole tripping of automatic reclosing (AREC). In the default setting, the starting signal
Internal start (see Figure 6-536) is held when the pickup signal is cleared or the protection function has
tripped. The Circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this case only drop out if the circuit breaker is
detected to be open. This is detected using the current flow or circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If
necessary, the Circuit-breaker failure protection function can also drop out when the pickup signal is cleared
or the protection function trips (internal starting signal is not held).
Using routing, you can specify whether individual protection stages or protection functions are to be used as
the starting source or whether starting happens only externally.
The internal starting sources are routed in the protection function groups via the Circuit-breaker interaction
entry (for this see 2.1 Embedding of Functions in the Device, Projektnavigation in DIGSI 5 (Ausschnitt)).
1488 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lo_intsta, 3, en_US]
External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a
1-channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a
routing is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
[lo_anwext2, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-537 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
In 1-channel mode, start for 1-pole tripping is initiated only with the binary input signals >Start pole A,
>Start pole B, or >Start pole C. In the case of 3-pole tripping, start is initiated only with the input
>Start 3-pole (see Figure 6-538).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1489
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
In 2-channel mode, to initiate the start, the binary input signal >Release 1-pole must also be activated, in
case of the 1-pole start, and >Release 3-pole in case of the 3-pole start. In the default setting, the internal
starting signals External start phsx and External start 3-pole drop out immediately when the
binary input signals are cleared (see Figure 6-538). If necessary, the internal starting signal can be held. In this
case, the start remains active when the binary input signals are cleared.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
If either of the signals >Start or >Release is active for more than the set monitoring time of the appro-
priate signal without the function picking up, a fault in the binary input circuit is assumed. The corresponding
signal is blocked to exclude an external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is output, and the
Health signal changes to the state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input signal drops out.
Supervision is disabled in the following cases:
• On pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (only in the case of an external start). This
prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the Circuit-breaker
failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, supervision is
enabled again.
• As long as the function or the device is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the
supervision blocking the function.
If the >Start signal is active and no release signal is present after elapse of a settable monitoring time for the
starting signal, the pickup is blocked and an indication to this effect is output. The Health signal changes to
the state Warning. The blocking is reset with the dropout of the starting signal.
The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms (SW filter, see
Figure 6-538).
1490 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lo_ex_lsvs, 4, en_US]
Figure 6-538 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1491
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lo_veranw, 2, en_US]
Current-Flow Criterion
The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker switch position. A circuit-
breaker pole is supposed to be closed, and the current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the phase
currents exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibility current exceeds the
associated threshold value. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to compare with the
threshold value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to compare with
the sensitive threshold value). The additional evaluation of the plausibility current increases the safety of a
criterion.
If you use the transformer connection type 3-phase, 2prim.trans., the ground current is neither measured
nor calculated. The plausibility check via the ground current is therefore not possible. The setting Direct
release via the ground current does not lead to a pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection.
In the case of ground faults, the sensitive threshold value can be dynamically applied to the phase currents as
well. The current-flow criterion is in this case fulfilled when the currents exceed the sensitive threshold value.
The phase-current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Threshold sensitive is used for
the switchover.
If you set the parameter 3I0 criterion to Direct release, you block the plausibility check of the
zero-sequence current. In this way a pickup can only be achieved by way of this current. The Threshold 3I0
dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, you also switch off the plausibility check of
the negative-sequence current. The Threshold I2 dir. release parameter is used to set the threshold
value to be exceeded.
If you set the parameter I2 criterion to Direct release, plausibility is checked via the phase currents
with 1/3 * Threshold I2 dir. release. This is to prevent a false pickup of the current-flow criterion in
the open pole after a 1-pole OFF.
The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value.
1492 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lo_currentk, 4, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1493
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
• In this function, circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not used for determining the CB position.
• The position is determined (pole-selective) via the double-point indications Position phsx (from the
Circuit breaker function block).
• The double-point indication 3-pole position (from theCircuit breaker function block) is used to
determine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed.
If the double-point indications are not routed, an error message is issued. The Health signal changes to the
state Warning. You must do the routing with the closed contact or the closed and open contact. If this is not
the case, an error message is output, and the Health signal changes to the Warning state.
A detected static disturbed position (not an intermediate position) has the effect that the circuit-breaker
auxiliary-contact criterion is not used (the signals Aux.co.crit. CB Clsd phsx are inactive).
[lo_hikols, 1, en_US]
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker or the individual circuit-breaker pole is closed.
The current-flow criterion and the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-
flow criterion because it is the most reliable criterion for determining whether the CB or CB pole is closed. This
means that the CB or CB pole is considered to be closed if it is closed according to the current-flow criterion
but, at the same time, open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the start time, the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary-contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion.
When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow criterion.
If the circuit breaker or a circuit-breaker pole is detected as closed and a start occurs in this pole, the function
picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the time delay is running, the system checks
continuously whether the circuit breaker or a CB pole has opened. In the default setting, the opening of
the circuit breaker is checked on the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow
criterion because it is preferred. If until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold
values has been detected, the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion becomes effective.
1494 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria detect in parallel the CB or CB
pole to be open (dropout with auxiliary-contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-536 and Figure 6-538). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the current or the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If dropout is also to
occur with a cleared starting signal (that is, with a cleared pickup signal or operate of the protection function),
holding of the start signal must be disabled.
[lo_pickup, 3, en_US]
Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of
the settable delay T1. You can set various T1 times for a 1-pole and multipole start. In case of a 1-pole start,
tripping can be repeated in a 1-pole or 3-pole way depending on the setting. If the local CB was not yet
tripped, for example, in the event of an external start of the circuit-breaker failure protection, the trip logic of
the circuit breaker itself is activated when the time delay T1 elapses.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1. You can set various T2 times for a 1-pole and multipole start.
If the assigned 1-pole period is initially started by a 1-pole start and a multiphase short circuit and multiphase
start occur subsequently, the corresponding multiphase period is also started so that the both periods run in
parallel. Tripping is determined by the period that expires first.
When there is a 1-pole start with 3-pole trip repeat, the 3-pole T2 time is started.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed, and the backup
tripping signal Trip T2 is generated. This tripping is always 3-pole. If the device is equipped with a protec-
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1495
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
tion interface, a transfer-trip signal can be sent to the opposite end if necessary (see chapter 3.6 Protection
Communication).
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
With the CB failure pole indication, you can determine the phase currents that are above the set
threshold value at the tripping time T2.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named superordinate parameter that is set in the Device settings.
1496 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
[lo_bbp-verzau-1ph, 7, en_US]
With the Immediate dropout parameter, you determine whether the circuit-breaker switch position is
checked continuously or before expiration of the T1 and T2 time delays. If the circuit-breaker switch position
is checked once the time delays have expired, the function picks up using Start. The 1-pole and 3-pole delay
timers are stabilized to switch the start conditions (1-pole or 3-pole).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1497
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Figure 6-544 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function. In the case
of an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the
CBFP device.
[lo_schema, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-544 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Pole-Selective Start, Pole-Selective Tripping
Repetition, and 3-Pole Tripping (T2)
1498 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1499
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
NOTE
i Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start!
• Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc, min).
If – depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions – ground faults lead to relatively low
fault currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold sensitive must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 Isc, min). There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.
1500 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
NOTE
i The setting value Direct release can cause inadvertent tripping of the circuit-breaker failure protection
when 1-pole tripping of the circuit breaker is set.
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To ensure Circuit-breaker failure protection for smaller ground faults
even with this setting, you can select 3I0 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold 3I0 dir.
release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.
Parameter: I2 criterion
If you have set the Threshold phase current to be larger than the maximum load current, overfunction
because of a false start is impossible. To have Circuit-breaker failure protection function for smaller unbal-
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1501
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
anced faults even with this setting, you can select I2 criterion to be Direct release and Threshold
3I0 dir. release to be appropriately smaller than Threshold phase current.
EXAMPLES
• Tripping of the high and low voltage side CB on the transformer: If only one of the 2 CBs trips, there is no
more current flow.
• Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on a current measurement in
combination with voltage or frequency protection functions
Parameter: Dropout
Parameter: Retrip
1502 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
• If the minimum fault-clearing time has top priority, Siemens recommends setting the time to 0. This
setting causes initiation of the retrip immediately upon the start. The drawback is that a defect of the 1st
trip circuit is not detected.
• With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the evaluation of the fault record.
• With a long time delay, which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T1 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1503
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
EXAMPLE
NOTE
i If the Automatic reclosing function has been instantiated, note the setting notes for the Parameter: Start
signal supervis.time, Page 969.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T2 Time that Reliably Ensures the Dropout of the CBFP with the CB Open:
If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Various times can be set for a 1-pole and 3-pole (multipole) start. In the presence of 1-phase short circuits
– that do not jeopardize network stability – it can make sense to allow more time to the local CB (such as
twice the clearance time: 2 x 130 ms = 260 ms), expecting that the CB will open yet. This way, tripping of the
surrounding CBs can be avoided.
1504 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
! CAUTION
Too short setting times for the minimum tripping duration
If you set a time that is too short for tripping, there is a risk (dropout of the function without the
current-flow criterion) that the device contacts will interrupt the control loop. If this happens, the
device contacts will burn out.
² Set a minimum time period that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches the
end position Open after a control operation.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1505
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
6.56.5 Settings
1506 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1507
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.56 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
Table 6-19 Starting with V8.40, the Merging Units have the Following Enhancement that is Especially
Intended for Use with the Distributed Busbar Protection and Evaluated there:
1508 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
• Monitors the circuit breaker against restriking, for example, caused by an overvoltage over the circuit-
breaker poles after switching off a capacitor bank
The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function is used in the Circuit-breaker function group. A maximum
of 2 functions can operate simultaneously within the function group.
[lo_strrestrike, 2, en_US]
The function logic is grouped into the parts shown in Figure 6-546. In the following chapter, these logic parts
are described in detail.
[lo_respro, 2, en_US]
Plausibility Release
The function Circuit-breaker restrike protection issues a trip command to a superordinated circuit breaker,
usually the infeed circuit breaker of a busbar. Overfunction of this protection can cause extreme problems for
the whole application.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1509
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
The logic of plausibility release strongly reduces the risk of a false start of the function by adding an extra
release criteria for a function start.
Each criterion can be switched on or off individually.
The plausibility-release logic checks the following conditions:
• When the parameter Plausibility via 50BF fct. is set to yes, the pickup signal of the Circuit-
breaker failure protection is monitored. The plausibility release is given if the Circuit-breaker failure
protection has picked up.
• When the parameter Plaus. via open/trip cmd is set to yes, the trip/open command is moni-
tored. The plausibility release is given if the trip/open command has been generated.
• When the parameter Plaus. via binary input is set to yes, the >release signal is monitored.
The plausibility release is given if the >release signal has been received.
If one of the conditions is fulfilled, the plausibility release is given for 5 s. The 5-s timer ensures that the
release criterion and start condition relate to the same circuit-breaker opening/tripping process.
If all the 3 plausibility settings are set to no, the start/stop-monitoring logic considers the release as fulfilled.
For safety reasons, the input signal >release has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
Start/Stop Monitoring
Via the start/stop monitoring logic, the monitoring duration of the current signal regarding restriking is
determined.
The monitoring is started if one of the following conditions is met:
• The circuit-breaker position is detected as open via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts during the time
set with the parameter Position recognition delay.
The Position recognition delay time is used for safety means to ensure that the circuit breaker is
definitely open when the monitoring starts. This parameter allows to adapt this start criterion to all kinds
of auxiliary-contact configurations.
For safety reasons, the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
In addition to the active start criterion, the plausibility release (refer to the Plausibility Release, Page 1509)
must be present to start the monitoring duration.
With the fulfilled start condition, the Monitoring duration timer is started. This timer defines how long
the current signal is monitored regarding restriking. If the time expires, the monitoring is terminated.
The monitoring is also terminated immediately if one of the following conditions is met:
• On one hand, current peaks are damped but still detected reliably by the fundamental-component value.
• On the other hand, a DC (Direct Current) component is suppressed. A DC component can occur after
switching off the circuit breaker.
Thus, the fundamental-component value is a good choice for a reliable restrike detection.
If any phase current exceeds the set current threshold value, the function picks up. The coming pickup
indicates the first restrike current pulse. With the pickup, the operate delay timers are started, see also the
following description Delay/Tripping, Page 1511.
If restriking occurs, the current signal drops below the current threshold if the time between restrike pulses
is long enough. In this case, the operate delay must not be reset. During the dropout delay, the pickup is
1510 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
extended to ensure that the operate delay timers are not reset. However, if the dropout delay time expires (no
new current peak occurred), the function drops out and the operate delay timers are reset.
Delay/Tripping
In the first step, tripping of the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of
the settable delay T1. The retrip on the local circuit breaker is as a safety mechanism as well. In the event of a
wrong start and pickup, only the local circuit breaker is opened instead of the superordinated circuit breaker.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can start in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of time
T1.
If time delay T2 expires, circuit-breaker restriking takes place and the backup-tripping signal Trip T2 is
generated.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed and the backup-trip-
ping signal Trip T2 is generated immediately (without delay). For safety reasons, a default software filter
time of 20 ms is preset (configurable in DIGSI) for the binary input signal >CB defect.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for the trip command of the func-
tion. In contrast to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the
setting is independent of the identically named comprehensive parameter that is set in the Device settings.
[lo_del_trip, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-547 Logic Diagram for Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1511
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
NOTE
i When using release criteria, it must be ensured that the criteria are given under all the conditions where
the Circuit-breaker restrike protection shall be started. If you choose no release criteria, the release is
permanently given.
NOTE
i Opening the circuit breaker manually without using the device will not release the start of the Circuit-
breaker restrike protection.
NOTE
i Opening the circuit breaker by control or manually will not trigger the Circuit-breaker failure protection.
Consequently the Circuit-breaker restrike protection cannot be released either.
Parameter: Threshold
1512 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
With a threshold below the operating current, a falsely-given start directly cause tripping. For minimizing
this risk, Siemens recommends applying a release criterion additionally. Refer to Parameter: Switch On or Off
Additional Plausibility Release Criteria , Page 1511.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1513
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
• When using the retrip functionality, this delay time must ensure a safe function dropout after giving the
retrip on the local circuit breaker.
Siemens recommends applying a delay time of 150 ms which is the default setting.
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow
criterion) that the device contacts interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device contacts
burn out.
² Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open) after a control operation.
6.57.5 Settings
1514 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.57 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1515
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
• Detects an out-of-step condition (asynchronous operation) between machines connected and the power
system and between power systems
• Suitable for integration into more complex automatic operations for power system monitoring and
disconnection
• Serves as a basic function for the protection of larger power plant units
• Used in the protection of power systems for selective disconnection in case of power swings
The Out-of-step protection function is preconfigured with one zone by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4
zones can be operated simultaneously in the function (see Figure 6-548). All zones are configured identically.
The Out-of-step protection function is contained in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and
current inputs. The process monitor provides the function with status information regarding the protected
object (open poles on the line in particular). The protected object can be a line or a power plant unit
(generator with generator transformer).
[dwoosstr-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1516 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwmodlpe-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Measuring point m divides the total impedance into 2 impedances m· Ztotal and (1-m)· Ztotal. The following
details apply to the impedance at a measuring point m:
[foimpdnz-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fostroms-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fospanng-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In combination with
[foumesor-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fozmesrt-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Angle δ is the angle between the generator voltage and the power system voltage. In normal operation,
this angle depends on the load profile and is relatively constant. In contrast, in the event of an out-of-step
condition, the angle changes continuously and passes through all values between 0° and 360°. Figure 6-550
shows the impedance process at the measuring point m according to the equation mentioned above. The
point of origin corresponds to the point where the protection device is built in (measuring point of the
voltage-transformer substitute). Assuming a constant ratio between VNet/VG and a variable angle δ, the locus
diagram is a set of circles. The center and the radius are specified through the ratio VNet/VG. All centers of
the circles are located on one axis specified by the direction of Ztotal. The maximum and minimum impedance
values are the result for the 2 extreme values δ = 0° and δ = 180°. If the measuring point coincides directly
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1517
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
with the electrical center of the system, the measured voltage and thus the operating impedance result in 0 at
an angle δ = 180°.
[dwzverla-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
• If an unbalanced fault occurs during swinging, the zone (zones) is/are frozen.
• If an open circuit-breaker pole is detected, the loop resistance of a healthy loop is calculated temporarily.
Out-of-step detection works when the positive-sequence current flow is high enough. If the flow falls below
the adjustable positive-sequence current threshold I1<threshold blocks zone, the zone (zones) is/are
frozen.
1518 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[lo0imped-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-551 Impedance Measurement and Monitoring of the Positive and Negative Sequenced of the
Currents
NOTE
i If the impedance phasor enters through the straight lines, which can be set using the parameters Zone
limit X top or Zone limit X bottom, the power swing direction is not determined. Since the
direction determination is coordinated with the setting parameter Count at, the above limitation applies
only to the setting entry, entry left and entry right.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1519
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[lo_ost_zon, 2, en_US]
1520 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwzonein-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Power-Swing Counter
Passing though the impedance zone is the criterion for incrementing the power swing counter. Use the setting
parameter (Count at) to define when the counter is incremented. Depending on the application, there are
different selection options available for this parameter. For machine protection applications, you only see 3
selection options without direction dependency.
entry The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone.
entry left The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the left.
entry right The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the right.
axis The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone.
axis from left The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
axis from right left.
The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
right.
exit The counter is incremented upon exit of the zone.
exit left The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the left.
exit right The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the right.
In all cases, the impedance phasor must first have crossed the entry line and the
middle ordinate.
Figure 6-554 shows how counting is done for the different trajectories of the impedance phasor. 2 zones are
shown as an example. Each zone has a counter of its own.
4 cases are shown:
Case A: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1.
Case B: The counter for zone 1 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the
settings (entry, entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case C: The counter for zone 2 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 2. The counter
for zone 1 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case D: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1. The counter
for zone 2 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry left, axis, axis from left, exit, exit right).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1521
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwerhzae-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-554 Incrementing the Power Swing Counter for Different Impedance Phasor Trajectories
The protection setting is exemplified by a power-system configuration. If a power swing occurs in the power
system, the out-of-step protection must separate the power system into islands. Each system island must be
able to establish a stable operating state. Although a certain amount of load shedding must be taken into
account, the aim is to minimize power loss. Figure 6-555 shows the power-system configuration used in the
example.
[dwbspnet-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1522 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
If an asynchronous swing condition occurs, the out-of-step protection function separates the 2 systems A and
C from each other. To allow the subnetwork with power reserve to remain connected to the busbar (and
the local load), either the lines A1 and A2 or the lines C1 and C2 must be disconnected from the busbar,
depending on the direction of the impedance curve. This ensures that the infeeding side remains connected
with the busbar and the local load.
NOTE
i Note that the infeed conditions are not fixed to the sources and that the parallel line is not always
available. Therefore, the electrical center of the power system is not located at a fixed point.
For setting the zone limit, you have to calculate the electrical center active and open using the maximum
and minimum infeed and with parallel line. The source impedances of the infeeds and lines in Figure 6-556
are specified for the purposes of the example. All impedance values are secondary values and are related to a
secondary rated current of 1 A. Power system simulation tests are recommended in practice to determine the
zone limits.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1523
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvorimp-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
To determine the source impedances as seen from relay A, Figure 6-556 is simplified as follows for the state =
line A2 open (zone 2 active):
1524 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvrimp2-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-557 Calculation of Source Impedances with Open Line A2 (Zone 2 Active)
The impedances of lines C1 and C2 and of infeed C are combined in Figure 6-557. Only one of the 2 lines is
used for calculation in the case of a weak infeed (10 Ω); both are used in parallel for a strong infeed (5 Ω).
Since the values for zone 2 are calculated with line A2 open here, simply add the impedance in the direction
of power system A for strong infeed to the line impedance of 10 Ω and 25 Ω for weak infeed. The results for
zone 2 are entered in Table 6-20.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1525
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwvorim1-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-558 Calculation of Source Impedances with Closed Line A2 (Zone 1 Active)
When line A2 is in operation, the current is split between lines A1 and A2. The impedance seen from Relay A
is therefore doubled at the infeeds. Figure 6-558 shows the relevant values for strong and weak infeed. The
impedances for zone 1 are entered in Table 6-20. Zone 1 is effective when line A2 is active.
Table 6-20 Extreme Conditions: Extreme Conditions: Impedance, Seen from Relay A
The condition in which both sides provide a weak or strong source is not relevant for the determination of the
outermost ends of the electrical center.
If one end shows a maximum source impedance and the other a minimum one, you obtain the outermost end
of the electrical center. Use the following equation for calculation (shown for relay A):
[foeztrum-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
1526 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
The results must be calculated separately for zone 2 and zone 1 according to the open or closed switch
positions of infeed B. Table 6-21 shows the electrical center, as seen from relay A.
If the 2 sources have different voltage levels, the power-swing impedance differs from the electrical center.
This fact must be considered when determining the outermost ends of the electrical center:
[fodvitio-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Ztotal / Ωsecondary Activated Zone Line A2 Electrical Deviation with Outer End of
in Relay A Center (Seen a Voltage Level the Electrical
from Relay A) / Difference of 10 Center / Ωsecon-
Ωsecondary % / Ωsecondary
dary
Figure 6-559 shows the outer ends of the electrical center for relay A, zone 2 (line A2 is open), including the
possible power-swing impedance locations.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1527
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwimpelo-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-559 Swing Impedance Locations and Outer Ends of the Electrical Center for Relay A (Line A2 is
Open)
To ensure that the power swing zone in Figure 6-559 covers the power swing trajectories, the upper and
lower zone limits X are calculated as shown in the following formula. The calculated values reliably cover the
determined outermost electrical centers in Table 6-22. The safety clearance is half the distance between the
determined centers. Depending on the application, another formula can be used to satisfy the requirements
placed on the geometry of the zone:
[foznengr-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Table 6-23 shows the zone limit X setting for relay A based on this formula.
Activated Zone Line A2 Most Extreme Most Extreme Upper Zone Lower Zone
in Relay A Electrical Electrical Limit X Limit X
Center, 1st Center, 3rd
Quadrant Quadrant
Zone 1 Active 47 Ω -16 Ω 78.5 Ω -47.5 Ω
Zone 2 Open 26.25 Ω -5.75 Ω 42.25 Ω -21.75 Ω
To determine the Zone limit R, the out-of-step tripping mode must be considered:
1528 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
• If an out-of-step tripping on entry occurs, the R setting must equal the smallest value which occurs when
the power swing reaches the transient stability limit angle.
• The R setting is less critical if the out-of-step condition trips when the axis of symmetry is exceeded. It can
be set to the 0.9-fold minimum stable load impedance or to the 0.25-fold distance between the values of
Zone limit X. Note that the circuit breaker is exposed to a very strong recovery voltage after switching.
• If an out-of-step tripping on exit occurs, the R setting depends on how long the trip command is to be
present after the axis of symmetry has been exceeded (180°-condition). The calculation of the R setting
can be based on the currently set swing locus angle.
In the example, tripping is to occur when the zone is entered. Therefore, you have to calculate the R setting
using the transient stability limit angle δ. Based on the maximum transmission angle under stable operating
conditions, the transient stability limit angle is calculated as follows:
Transient stability angle = 180 - maximum transmission angle.
A maximum transmission angle of 60° can be assumed in most cases. The result is a transient stability limit δ
of 120°.
To ensure that the R setting is not too high, it must be determined on the basis of the minimum source
impedances. The minimum source impedances (with closed/open line A2) or relay A are shown in Table 6-24.
[dwreinst-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-560 Calculation of the R Setting with Minimum Source Impedances (Line A2 Active, Zone 1)
[forfmel1-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1529
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwenergc-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-561 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System C to Power
System A
1530 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
[dwenerga-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-562 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System A to Power
System C
In Figure 6-562, the energy flows in the opposite direction. Out-of-step tripping must take place at lines C1
and C2. In this case, power system A remains connected to the local load of the busbar.
6.58.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1531
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
1532 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.58 Out-of-Step Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1533
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that protect the transformer (protected object) or for
protection functions that are affected in undesirable ways when transformers are switched on
• Overcurrent protection with a pickup value below the maximum inrush current
[dw_irsh01, 1, en_US]
1534 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
[lo_inru_02, 3, en_US]
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC and the quotient I2nd harm / I1st harm is
formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a phase-selective signal is issued.
If 75 % of the set threshold value is exceeded, this leads to a pickup reset (dropout ratio = 0.75).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1535
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
[lo_inrush_10, 1, en_US]
[dw_inrush_03, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method.
From the present fundamental-component current (1st harmonic), the threshold value for identification of the
flat areas is derived via an internal factor.
1536 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
[lo_inrush_05, 1, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1537
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
[lo_inrush_12, 2, en_US]
1538 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
NOTE
i Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting values.
Parameter: Cross-blocking
6.59.1.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1539
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
• Detects the content of 2nd harmonics in the neutral-point phase current IN or in the calculated zero-
sequence current 3I0.
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that use the neutral-point phase current IN or the
calculated zero-sequence current 3I0 as a measured value
1540 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
Logic
[lo_2harm_detec_gnd, 2, en_US]
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) is determined for the neutral-point phase current IN or the calculated zero-sequence current 3I0
and the quotient I2nd harm/I1st harm is formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a
blocking signal is issued.
NOTE
i During a transformer saturation, the high content of the 2nd harmonic in the ground current must not lead
to a pickup of the function.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1541
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
NOTE
i If the ground current is measured in case of a sensitive transformer and the measured value exceeds the
saturation threshold of 1.6 ⋅ IN, the function switches to the calculated 3I0 value.
[lo_harmon-analyse, 1, en_US]
6.59.2.5 Settings
1542 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
• Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that use this 1-phase current as a measured value
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1543
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
Logic
[lo_2harm_detec_1ph, 2, en_US]
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) is determined for the 1-phase current and the quotient I2nd harm/I1st harm is formed from this. If this
quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a blocking signal is issued.
NOTE
i During a transformer saturation, the high content of the 2nd harmonic in the 1-phase current must not
lead to a pickup of the function.
1544 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.59 Inrush-Current and 2nd Harmonic Detection
[lo_harmon-analyse_1ph, 1, en_US]
6.59.3.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1545
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function (ANSI 32) is used to:
• Detect whether the active or reactive power rises above or drops below a set threshold
• Detect both active and reactive power feedback in the power systems or on electric machines
• Detect machines (motors, generators) running without load and output an indication to shut them down.
• Be integrated into any automation solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits (further
logical processing in CFC)
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function can be integrated in function groups, which provide measured
voltages and currents of the 3-phases for calculation of the power.
The 3-phase power protection (P,Q) function comes with one factory-set stage each for the active and the
reactive power. The following stages are preconfigured:
• Power P>
• Power Q>
• Power P<
• Power Q<
A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the
function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
1546 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Logic of a Stage
Figure 6-575 Logic Diagram of the Active Power Stage (Stage Type: Power P<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power P>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power P<).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1547
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the
definition of the signs.
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
P> or Power P<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
1548 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Logic of a Stage
Figure 6-577 Logic Diagram of the Reactive Power Stage (Stage Type: Power Q<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is processed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power Q>) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power Q<).
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the
definition of the signs.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1549
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
Q> or Power Q<) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
The setting of the function will be explained using an active/reactive power range as an example. If the appa-
rent power phasor is within the power range (in Figure 6-579 tripping zone defined by characteristics), an
alarm indication is generated. For this purpose, you have to make an AND operation of the stage indications
of the active and reactive power stage in CFC. The function used is 3-phase power measurement. Figure 6-579
shows the threshold values and the location of the characteristics in the PQ diagram.
1550 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Stage Type
In the following example, a drop of the active power below a threshold is to be monitored. In the 3-phase
circuit breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power P<.
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
• The threshold of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups.
• Switching from a positive threshold to a negative threshold or vice versa is not allowed. As a result,
DIGSI reports an inconsistency.
• If you want to change the sign of the threshold of a stage in an additional settings group, instantiate
a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings group, disable
the stage there.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1551
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
Stage Type
In the example, the reactive power is to be monitored if it falls below the threshold. In the 3-phase circuit
breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power Q<.
Parameter: Threshold
NOTE
• The threshold value of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups.
• Switching from a positive threshold value to a negative threshold value or vice versa is not allowed. As
a result, DIGSI reports an inconsistency.
• If you want to change the sign of the threshold value of a stage in an additional settings group,
instantiate a new stage and enable it. If the new stage should not be effective in another settings
group, disable the stage there.
1552 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
6.60.8 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1553
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
1554 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.60 Power Protection (P,Q), 3-Phase
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1555
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.61 Current-Jump Detection
• Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system period to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence current is an additional function used for
indication purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore
neither opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.
The Current-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on current measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dw_struki, 1, en_US]
Current-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the current. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
Using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from 3 line currents or the residual current.
Current-jump detection is phase-selective for the line current A, B and C.
The difference from the previous sampled value of the first system cycle is calculated for each sampled value.
The rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δi(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔI by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔI is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If you have
selected the phase currents for measurement, the output indication data type used includes the separate
phase information. If you have selected the residual current for measurement, the output indication data type
used includes the NI information. If the current-jump detection responds (ΔILimit), the general information is
generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value (ΔILimit) in accordance with the logic in
Figure 6-581. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
The output indication Pulse is formed with the configurable timer (_:102) Minimum pulse length. As
a consequence, this output indication has a consistent minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse
extension, you can prolong the pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has
been activated, the indication Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of
the binary input is detected.
1556 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.61 Current-Jump Detection
Logic
[lo_jump_ii, 2, en_US]
Parameter: Threshold
• Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 0.10 A for Irated = 1A or 0.50 A for Irated = 5 A
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1557
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.61 Current-Jump Detection
With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump.
6.61.5 Settings
1558 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.62 Voltage-Jump Detection
• Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system cycle to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage is an additional function used for
indication purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore
neither opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.
The Voltage-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on voltage measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dw_struku, 1, en_US]
Voltage-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the voltage. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
By using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-
phase voltages or the zero-sequence voltage. Voltage-jump detection is phase-selective.
The difference from the previous sampled value of a system cycle is calculated for each sampled value. The
rectified average is then determined for a ½ system cycle from this differential signal Δv(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔV by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand ΔV is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If the meas-
ured value is set to phase-to-phase, the sudden change in voltage is signaled selectively for the individual
measuring elements that have picked up (Jump VAB, Jump VBC or Jump VCA). If you have selected the
phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltages for measurement, the output indication data type used includes
the separate phase information. If you have selected the zero-sequence voltage for measurement, the output
indication data type used includes the N information. If the voltage-jump detection responds (ΔVLimit), the
general information is generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value ΔULimit in accordance with the information in
Figure 6-583. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
A timing element is added to the indication Jump. The element generates a pulse from this. The length
of this pulse can be set using the parameter (_:102) Minimum pulse length. This gives the output
indication Pulse a reliable minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse extension, you can
prolong the pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has been activated, the
indication Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of the binary input
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1559
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.62 Voltage-Jump Detection
is detected. If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the pulse duration is signaled selectively for the
individual measuring elements that have picked up (Pulse VAB, Pulse VBC or Pulse VCA).
Logic
[lo_jump_uu, 3, en_US]
1560 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.62 Voltage-Jump Detection
Parameter: Threshold
6.62.5 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1561
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.62 Voltage-Jump Detection
1562 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.63 Vector-Jump Protection
• Is used for network decoupling of the power generating unit in case of a load loss
The Vector-jump protection function can be used in the following function groups:
• Voltage-current 3-phase
• Voltage 3-phase
The Vector-jump protection function comes factory-set with a Δφ stage.
The following stages can operate simultaneously within the function:
• 1 Δφ stage
[dw_VJP_structure, 1, en_US]
6.63.3.1 Description
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1563
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.63 Vector-Jump Protection
The following figure shows the situations after the load is switched off:
Vector Description
Vp Vector of the generator internal voltage (rotor voltage)
V Vector of the generator terminal voltage
ΔV Vector of the voltage differential
V' Vector of the terminal voltage after the load shedding
ΔV' Vector of the voltage differential after the load shedding
1564 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.63 Vector-Jump Protection
• High measuring accuracy by using frequency-tracked measured values and evaluation of the positive-
sequence phasor
• Blocking the function when the primary voltage is switched on or off as switching can lead to a phase-
angle jump
Logic
[lo_VJP_general, 1, en_US]
[lo_VJP_general_2, 2, en_US]
Phase-Angle Calculation
The phase-angle differential is calculated at different time intervals (t-T, t-2T, t-3T) from the vector of the
positive-sequence voltage via a delta-interval measurement. With the current measured power frequency, the
measuring errors of the angle measurement caused by frequency deviations are compensated.
Range
If the measured frequency or voltage is below the set threshold, the Vector-jump protection is blocked.
The voltage and frequency bands have the following limits:
Measurand
The general functionality calculates the phase-angle displacement Δφ and sends it to the Δφ stage. Δφ is used
for comparison with the parameter Threshold Δφ. Δφ is displayed in the functional measured value and can
be routed in a fault record and displayed in the fault log.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1565
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.63 Vector-Jump Protection
The functional measured values of Δφ in HMI are displayed differently in the following situations:
• If the Vector-jump protection function is inactive, the function value of Δφ is displayed as “---”
• If the Vector-jump protection function is active and has not picked up, the functional measured value of
Δφ is displayed as 0.0°
• If the Vector-jump protection function is active and has picked up, the functional measured value of Δφ
is displayed as a calculated value (for example, 12.0°) and remains unchanged until the next pickup of
the Vector-jump protection function.
Parameter: T Block
6.63.3.3 Settings
1566 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.63 Vector-Jump Protection
6.63.4 Δφ Stage
6.63.4.1 Description
Logic
[lo_delta_phi_stage, 2, en_US]
In the logic diagram, the I1 < Release stage is instantiated. You can find more information in chapter
6.63.5.1 Description.
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the AND operation has no influence. The Operate indication is
issued under the following conditions:
Measurand
The Δφ stage gets the measured value Δφ from the general functionality.
Pickup
The Δφ stage compares the value of the vector jump Δφ with the Threshold Δφ.
If the value of the Threshold Δφ is exceeded, the pickup delay starts.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1567
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.63 Vector-Jump Protection
The vector jump Δφ is stored in an RS flip-flop. Trippings can be delayed by the associated time delay.
Parameter: Threshold Δφ
Parameter: T Reset
• The reset time must expire before the circuit breaker is reclosed
1568 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.63 Vector-Jump Protection
6.63.4.3 Settings
6.63.5.1 Description
Logic
[lo_undercurrent_release_stage, 1, en_US]
The I1 < Release stage is an optional stage and is used to reduce the risk of overfunction.
The indication Undercurrent release is an additional safety criterion to avoid an unexpected trip. It
indicates a load loss of the connected line to the system and the phase-angle criterion is released. If any load
in the network is switched on or off, an unexpected trip can occur.
If the I1 < Release stage is not instantiated, the Δφ stage works without current-flow criterion. You can find
more information in chapter 6.63.4.1 Description.
If the positive-sequence current falls below the parameter I< Threshold, the message Undercurrent
release is issued and is forwarded to the Δφ stage.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1569
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.63 Vector-Jump Protection
6.63.5.3 Settings
1570 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.64 Pole Discrepancy Protection
Due to the high probability of 1-phase short circuits in power systems, 1-pole tripping and automatic reclosing
is used mainly in transmission to ensure the reliable and stable operation of the system. However, this brings
about new problems, that is, open-phase operation adds certain risks to the power system.
Therefore, a function that can reflect open-phase operation conditions of CBs must be installed to open those
CBs in abnormal status. Siemens develops the function block Pole discrepancy protection for this purpose.
The function block Pole discrepancy protection has the task to detect discrepancies in the position of the 3
circuit-breaker poles. Under steady-state operating conditions, either all 3 poles of the circuit breaker must be
closed, or all 3 poles must be open. Discrepancy is permitted only for a short time interval during a 1-pole
automatic reclose cycle.
In DIGSI 5, you can find the function block Pole discrepancy protection under the directory Global DIGSI 5
libraries > FG Circuit breaker.
You can instantiate 1 function block Pole discrepancy protection in the function group Circuit breaker 1
pole.
[dw_structure_PD, 1, en_US]
6.64.3 Description
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1571
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.64 Pole Discrepancy Protection
Logic
[lo_PD, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-591 Logic Diagram of the Function Block Pole Discrepancy Protection
1572 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.64 Pole Discrepancy Protection
Current-Flow Criterion
For each phase, the internal signal PhaseX with current comes from the function block Circuit-breaker
position recognition. When the phase current exceeds the parameter Current thresh. CB open, the
value of the corresponding signal PhaseX with current is true.
Pickup
Whenever a pole discrepancy is detected, the function block Pole discrepancy protection issues the signal
Pickup.
Tripping
If you want the function block Pole discrepancy protection to trip the circuit breaker, set the parameter
Alarm only to no. Then, when a 1-pole-open discrepancy or a 2-pole-open discrepancy is detected, the
function block Pole discrepancy protection issues the signal Operate.
The signal Operate can block the function Automatic reclosing.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1573
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.64 Pole Discrepancy Protection
6.64.5 Settings
1574 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
• Detects arcs in air-insulated switchgear parts without delay and in a fail-safe way
The Arc protection function can be added to function groups that provide current measured values.
The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks.
• General
• 3 stages
[dw_structure_arcprot, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1575
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
[lo_fb0_arcprot, 3, en_US]
1576 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
[lo_stage_arcprotection, 2, en_US]
The Arc protection function uses a locally connected optical arc sensor or an external trip initiation by other
devices in order to detect arcs.
NOTE
i Install the arc sensors inside the switchgear in such a way that they are not hidden behind other system
components!
Shadowing of the arc sensors must be avoided!
NOTE
i Once an optical sensor has detected an arc, you must replace the affected optical sensor!
Within the Arc protection function, you can use a fast current-flow criterion as an additional release criterion.
The parameters for the current-flow criterion can be found in the General block. For each stage, you can
select individually whether the current-flow criterion must be evaluated as well.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1577
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
NOTE
i If using the current-flow criterion in addition to the light, prevent a potential overfunction caused by the
suddenly occurring light signal.
If you use the current-flow criterion, arcs are typically detected in 4 ms!
Self Monitoring
The Arc protection function uses a self-monitoring circuit. This circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the
fiber-optic cables. The arc-protection module uses the fiber-optic cable to send a cyclic test signal (light) to the
arc sensors. If the channel is operating properly, the test signal is sent back to the arc protection module. If
the test signal is not returned to the arc protection module, the indication channel # Sensor failure is
generated.
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault, the indication Health is set to Alarm and the stage/function is
blocked.
Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters. The setting values apply
to all stages.
1578 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
NOTE
i If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase, 2 primary CT for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the parameter Threshold 3I0> has no effect.
If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase + IN for the 3-phase current measuring point,
the function works with the measured current IN.
If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the function works with the calculated current 3I0.
Parameter: Sensor
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1579
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
Parameter: Channel
6.65.6 Settings
1580 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1581
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
1582 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
6.65.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light Only
6.65.8.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = light only.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
The following figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical point sensors:
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1583
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-light-only, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-595 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Light only)
• The circuit breaker of the infeed must be switched off. This ensures that the arcs in the busbar compart-
ments of the infeed and the feeders or in the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders are off.
Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartments (BB compartment) of the infeed and feeders.
Install additional optical point sensors in the circuit-breaker compartment (CB compartment) of the
feeders. Connect all optical point sensors to the protection device of the infeed.
• The optical point sensors in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders detect arcs in this compart-
ment. Install one optical point sensor in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders and connect
it to the protection device of the feeder. This allows for the selective clearing of arcs inside the cable-
connection compartment.
Due to the pressure waves that occur during the formation of an arc, partitions can deform and cause
undesirable light influences in adjacent compartments. This can result in a non-selective tripping.
• If there is an arc in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must switch off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates in Operating mode = light only, the effects of external light
can result in non-selective tripping.
NOTE
i It must be considered that the number of arc protection modules connected to the device depends on the
hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular devices, a
maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
1584 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
General Notes
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection
device in feeder 1. Arcs in the cable-connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit
breaker in feeder 1.
• Connect one optical point sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection
device in feeder 2. Arcs in the cable-connection are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 2.
• Connect optical point sensors from all busbar compartments and all circuit-breaker compartments of
feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in these compartments are detected and
cleared by the device in the infeed.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1585
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = light only.
6.65.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode:
Light and Current
6.65.9.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2
feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example:
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
[dw_light-and-current, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-596 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• The current-flow criterion offers additional security to prevent unwanted tripping caused by sudden light
influences.
Depending on the arc location in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, it is not always
possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder,
the current will therefore be evaluated in the infeed.
• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders as well as the busbar compartment of the infeed. Connect
the optical point sensors to the protection device in the infeed.
1586 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
• The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker
compartment, and the cable-connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2. Furthermore, the protection
device clears arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed.
• If the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the cable-
connection compartment of the feeders, or in the busbar compartment of the infeed detect an arc, the
protection device in the infeed evaluates the current as well.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device must trip.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion prevents unwanted tripping caused by external light influences.
NOTE
i This application example requires the connection of several optical point sensors to a single protection
device. It must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that are connected to the device
depends on the hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If you use non-modular devices,
a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
General Notes
• Connect the optical point sensors from the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and
the cable-connection compartment of feeders 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in
the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment and the cable-connection compartment of
feeders 1 and 2 are detected and cleared by the device in the infeed.
• Connect an optical point sensor from the busbar compartment in the infeed to the protection device in
the infeed. Arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in
the infeed.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1587
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
6.65.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip
Initiation
6.65.10.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and
2 feeders. The stages of the Arc protection function are triggered by External trip initiation.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Connecting the optical point sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
• Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
1588 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-extern-input, 3, en_US]
• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeder and the infeed. Connect the optical point sensors to the
respective protection device in the feeder and infeed.
• If the optical point sensors detect an arc in the busbar compartment or the circuit-breaker compartment
of the feeders, the Light detected indication is sent via binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface,
or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed. Then, the protection device in the infeed
evaluates the current as well. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds Threshold I> and/or
Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed switches off the malfunction.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.65.10.2 Application and Setting Notes
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders can also be switched off selectively by the
protection device of the affected feeder. To do this, the Current detected pickup indication from the
infeed unit must be sent to the appropriate protection device in the feeder.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device trips.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates via the External trip initiation, only 3 optical point
sensors are required per feeder protection device in order to detect the arcs (only one arc-protection
module).
The number of GOOSE messages is not limited. Therefore, the number of feeders is not limited, and the
protection of complex systems is feasible.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1589
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
General Notes:
• Install the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment, the circuit-breaker compartment, and the
cable-connection compartment of the feeders and the infeed to the respective protection devices.
• Arcs in the busbar compartment and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders must be switched
off by the protection device in the infeed. To do this, the protection devices in the feeder device must
send the indication Light detected to the infeed device. Use the binary inputs/outputs, a protection
interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0> threshold values, the protection device in the infeed switches
off faults on the busbar and the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders.
Connect the signals over 4 stages, using the external trip initiation or a CFC chart.
• Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders are switched off locally. The protection device
in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold values Threshold
I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the Current detected indication is sent to the protection devices in
the feeders. If, at the same time, an optical sensor in a cable-connection compartment detects light, the
protection device trips in the corresponding feeder.
1590 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1591
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
6.65.11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode:
Light and Current
6.65.11.1 Description
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with 1 infeed and
2 feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
The following items are considered in the example below:
• Setting notes about the selected parameters in the stages of the function
1592 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
Figure 6-598 Layout and Connection of the Optical Line Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)
• The current-flow criterion offers additional protection to prevent unwanted tripping caused by the
sudden effects of light.
• Figure 6-598 shows how the optical line sensors should be routed. Start in the infeed busbar compart-
ment and route the optical line sensor along the busbar and back again to the protection device in the
infeed. Connect the optical line sensor to the protection device in the infeed.
• Depending on the routing options in the control cabinet, you can also route the optical line sensor
through the circuit-breaker and cable-connection compartments of the feeders.
If this is not possible, you can detect arcs in these compartments using point sensors. For more detailed
information, see chapters 6.65.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light Only and 6.65.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating
Mode: Light and Current.
• If an arc occurs in the circuit-breaker compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the
infeed, the superordinate protection device will shut off.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = current and light, the addi-
tional current-flow criterion will prevent unwanted tripping caused by external light effects.
NOTE
i Note that the number of arc protection modules that are connected to the device depend on the hardware
configuration of the equipment.
When using modular equipment, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If using non-modular
equipment, a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
Depending on the use case, you can combine point and line sensors.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1593
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.65 Arc Protection
• Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) → Busbar compartment supervision (infeed,
feeder 1, feeder 2)
You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0>
in chapter 6.65.4 Application and Setting Notes – General Settings.
1594 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.66 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
• Provide the ability to switchover the voltage measuring points to be applied, if various voltage measuring
points are connected to the voltage interface of the function group
• Select the correct voltage based on the switch position of the plant
If more than one voltage measuring points are connected to the same voltage interface of the function group,
use the Voltage measuring-point selection function block in the function group to select the correct voltage
based on the switch position of the plant.
The Voltage measuring-point selection is a common functionality for the function groups of the protected
objects.
The Voltage measuring-point selection function block realizes the selection of 1-phase voltage measuring
points or of 3-phase voltage measuring points by a logic block chart. The logic block chart controls the input
>MP-ID selection depending on the switch positions of disconnectors.
Example
Figure 6-599 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank
in a double busbar application.
[dw_busbar_double, 2, en_US]
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1595
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.66 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
[sc_connection, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-600 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Capacitor Bank Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
• The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
• The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
• If more than 1 measuring point is connected to one voltage interface, a function block must be added to
enable the selection of the voltage measuring points.
CFC Control
The voltage measuring point is selected by logic block chart on basis of the measuring point IDs. If more
than one measuring point is connected to the interface of the function group, instantiate the function block
Voltage measuring-point selection from the library in the corresponding function group.
In order to ensure the correct measuring-point connection for the function group, a logic block chart has to
define the actual valid IDs for the input >MP-ID selection of the function block.
The following logic block chart implementation is based on the example given in Figure 6-599.
If the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is closed and no matter what the position the Disconnector 2 (QB2) is, the value 2
is the output of CFC block mux_d_1 and transferred to the input >MP-ID selection. Then, the Meas.point
V-3ph with ID 2 is selected as the reference voltage. Similarly, the Meas.point V-3ph with ID 3 is selected
as the reference voltage if the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is not closed (open or in intermediate position) while
Disconnector 2 (QB2) is closed.
[sc_lo-cfcVP, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-601 Logic Block Chart: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
However, the disconnectors might be both open or in a transient state. In this case, the input IN3 of the block
bool_int_1 becomes true, the value 0 is used as the ID for voltage selection input ( >MP-ID selection). If
ID 0 is selected, then all voltage values of the respective function-group interface are set to 0 V immediately.
An alarm indication Selection invalid is issued and the indication Health is issued as OK. In case you
want to supply the function group with voltage values under the condition that both disconnectors are open
or in transient state from one or the other busbar, you can alter the CFC chart respectively.
1596 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Protection and Automation Functions
6.66 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
NOTE
i An invalid measuring-point selection (ID < 0 or an ID of a unconnected measuring point) for input >MP-ID
selection results in the following:
• The voltage measured values are displayed as failure.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1597
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
1598 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
7 Control Functions
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1599
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
7.1 Introduction
7.1.1 Overview
The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making
the SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.
The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a transformer tap changer, for
example, contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for
example, DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback or BSC = Binary-Controlled Step
Position Indication / transformer tap command with feedback).
1600 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
[sc_control, 1, en_US]
The trip, opening, and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off,
on, intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC, for example, in order to
build interlocking conditions.
Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1601
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
[dw_steuer, 2, en_US]
The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring
(SBO w. enh. security). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices.
1602 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
You can find the following switching devices in the DIGSI 5 library in the function groups Circuit breaker and
Switching devices (see following figures).
[sc_cb_ausw, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Menu
[scswausw, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Selecting the Remaining Switching Devices Using the DIGSI Switching-Devices Menu
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1603
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dw_breake, 1, en_US]
The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via informa-
tion routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.
The Circuit-breaker switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 3 different variants:
1604 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
NOTE
i When setting the parameters of a device, you will find 2 circuit-breaker types in the DIGSI 5 library:
- 3-pole circuit breaker or 1-pole circuit breaker, depending on the device type selected (3-pole or 1-pole
tripping)
- Circuit breaker [status only]
For the setting values of the parameter, refer to 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Table 7-2 Setting Options of the Controllable Cmd. with feedback in the Function Block Control of
the Circuit Breaker.
57 First click Position and then click the Details key in the Properties window (below).
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1605
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Table 7-3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)
Table 7-4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings Having Effects on the Circuit Breaker
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the function blocks Circuit breaker and Control are
described in the next section (refer to 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker).
Interlocking
The function block Interlocking generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, refer to the general chapter
7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
1606 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Circuit Breaker
The Circuit-breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task of
the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.
[dw_func_ls, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks
Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect of Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready has the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to cleared. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an Off-On-Off cycle.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1607
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of the
Circuit-breaker function block is set to Warning.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed
(see also chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection).
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation58), the switching device is reserved prior to the
actual switching operation, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These 2 options can be selected individually in
the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security59 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
58 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).
59 This default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.
1608 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.
[dw_steue1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block
In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In
addition, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1609
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dw_3-pole_ls, 1, en_US]
1610 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
1-Pole Triggering
[dw_1-pole, 1, en_US]
[sc_rang1p_cb1p, 1, en_US]
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another. The
letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, TL (latched tripping) can be selected.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1611
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
1.5-Pole Triggering
[dw_5-pole, 1, en_US]
[sc_rang_1p_cb15p, 1, en_US]
1612 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
2-Pole Triggering
[dw_2-pole-open, 1, en_US]
[sc_rang_1p_cb13p, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i The wiring of the Circuit-breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs 1 time per
device.
The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1613
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
The protection functions can switch off 1-pole. The close command is always 3-pole. Optionally only the open
poles are closed.
[dw_1polls, 1, en_US]
For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
[dw_1panls, 1, en_US]
1614 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[sc_rang_1p_cb13pz, 1, en_US]
In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed individually for
the 3 phases (Trip only pole A to Trip only pole C). The protection trip command is routed for the
3 phases (Trip/open cmd. 3-pole). The control always switches off the 3 poles of the switch. In addition,
the 3 U (Unlatched) routings of the trip command and open command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also
used by protection functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1615
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US]
1616 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
[sc_rang_1p_cb_Hk, 1, en_US]
You can find the meaning of abbreviations in Table 7-8 and Table 7-9.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either a close or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
7.2.2.4 Settings
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1617
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
Manual close
_:6541:101 Manual 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
close:Action time
_:6541:102 Manual close:CB 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
open dropout delay
Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control • status only SBO w. enh.
model security
• direct w. normal secur.
• SBO w. normal secur.
• direct w. enh. security
• SBO w. enh. security
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
out
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
monitoring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check • no yes
switching authority
• yes
• advanced
_:4201:105 Control:Check if • no yes
pos. is reached
• yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check • no yes
double activat. blk.
• yes
_:4201:107 Control:Check blk. • no yes
by protection
• yes
Switching authority
_:4201:151 Control:Swi.dev. • 0 false
related sw.auth.
• 1
_:4201:152 Control:Specific sw. • 0 true
authorities
• 1
1618 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 1619
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-L, Edition 04.2023
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices